JP7467122B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Gaming machines, such as pinball machines, are configured to hold a lottery for a jackpot when a ball enters the starting hole, and also to play a pattern change display game, during which various preview effects reflecting the lottery results are displayed to allow the player to enjoy the game. In this type of gaming machine, when a jackpot is won, after the jackpot game ends, it is known that some machines transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2010-239986 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the time-saving mode would not start unless a jackpot was hit, limiting the freedom of playability and presentation, making the game less interesting.

The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game by introducing a new type of winning that allows the player to transition to a time-saving mode without going through a jackpot.

The above object of the present invention can be achieved by the following means.
(1) a symbol display means configured to be capable of displaying symbols in a stopped manner in accordance with a game result;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance;
A special electric device configured to open and close the big prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling a winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
A first specific state to which the player can transition via the hit state;
A second specific state to which the vehicle can transition without passing through the hit state,
When the winning state is controlled, the symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a first specific display mode,
When controlled to the second specific state, the symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a second specific display mode different from the first specific display mode,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice,
When the second specific state occurs , the read-ahead notice may be restricted so as not to be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can make the game more entertaining.

1 is an external view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; A diagram showing the game board and effect buttons. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control device. An explanatory diagram for explaining winning types and game state transitions. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a screen display of a liquid crystal display device. This is an explanatory diagram explaining the preview performance. This is a game flow that explains the game content (normal, time-saving, and special mode) related to the support-equipped type. A figure showing an example of the special mode presentation according to the number of consecutive wins. A figure showing an example of the time-saving mode presentation according to the remaining number of time-saving options. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control side. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing on the main control side. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol management process in FIG. 9 . A flowchart showing the starting port check processing of Special Chart 1 in Figure 10. 11 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing in FIG. 10 . 13 is a flowchart showing the random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric features in FIG. 12 . 13 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 12 . 13 is a flowchart showing the support time reduction flag management process in FIG. 12 . 11 is a flowchart showing the processing during the special pattern change in FIG. 10 . 11 is a flowchart showing the first half of the special symbol confirmation time process in FIG. 10 . 11 is a flowchart showing the latter half of the special symbol confirmation time process in FIG. 10 . 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process according to a modified example of FIG. 10 (first embodiment). This is a flowchart showing the random number determination process (determination process form 1) for determining the operation of special electric features in Figure 18. This is a flowchart showing the random number determination process (determination process form 2) for determining the operation of special electric features in Figure 18. 20 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 18 . 11 is a flowchart showing the special electric accessory management process in FIG. 10 . 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the performance control side. 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing on the performance control side. 17 is a flowchart showing a pending addition command receiving process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16 . 17 is a flowchart showing a decorative pattern designation command receiving process in the command analysis process in FIG. 16 . A figure showing a winning random number determination table (first embodiment). A figure showing a winning random number determination table (a modified example of the first embodiment). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol table selection table. A figure showing a jackpot pattern table. A figure showing a support time-saving pattern table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a losing symbol table. This is a diagram showing a normal win/support time-saving winning variation pattern allocation table. A figure showing a normal miss fluctuation pattern allocation table. This is a diagram showing a distribution table of winning fluctuation patterns during special bonuses and support time-saving bonuses. A figure showing a table of distribution of miss fluctuation patterns during a special bonus. This figure shows a modified example (modification example A) of the distribution pattern variation table for winning during the special bonus period and the support time-saving bonus period in Figure 34. A figure showing a modified example (modified example A) of the allocation table for miss fluctuation patterns during the special probability period in Figure 35. This figure shows a modified example (modified example B) of the distribution table for the winning variation pattern during the special bonus period and the support time-saving winning period in Figure 34. A figure showing a modified example (modified example B) of the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table during the special probability period in Figure 35. This is a diagram showing a time-saving win/support time-saving win variation pattern allocation table. A figure showing a table of allocation of miss fluctuation patterns during time-saving. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a game state transition table. A figure showing a variation pattern allocation designation number table for the support-equipped type. 11 is a timing chart showing decorative pattern presentation. This is a timing chart focusing on the stopping operation pattern of the decorative symbols. This figure explains the time-saving notification display when the support time-saving option is selected. A figure showing example 1 of the time-saving entry notification display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second example of the time-saving entry notification effect. This is the first half of the game flow that explains the game content (normal, time-saving, and special mode) for the ceiling function-equipped type. This is the latter half of the game flow that explains the game content (omen, ceiling, heaven mode) related to the ceiling function equipped type. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pre-reading notice for the ceiling function installed type. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start processing for a type (Tenki A) that does not have ceiling activation support at the start of the game. 13 is a flowchart showing the ceiling function management process for the same model (Tenki A). A flowchart showing the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game for the same type (Tenki A). A flowchart showing the game state transition preparation processing for the same type (Tenki A). This is a flowchart showing the first half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki A). This is a flowchart showing the latter half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki A). This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start processing for the type (Tenki B) that does not have ceiling activation support at the end of the game. A flowchart showing the first half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki B). This is a flowchart showing the latter half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki B). 13 is a flowchart showing the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game for the same type (Tenki B). This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start processing for the type equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game (Tenki C1). This is a flowchart showing the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game for the same type (Tenki C1). A flowchart showing the game state transition preparation processing for the same type (Tenki C1). 13 is a flowchart showing the support time reduction flag management process for the same model (Tenki C1). This is a flowchart showing the first half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki C1). This is a flowchart showing the latter half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki C1). This is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing for a modified version of the type (Tenki C1) equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start processing for the type equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game (Tenki D1). A flowchart showing the game state transition preparation processing for the same type (Tenki D1). A flowchart showing the support time reduction flag management process for the same model (Tenki D1). This is a flowchart showing the first half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki D1). This is a flowchart showing the latter half of the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for the same model (Tenki D1). This is a flowchart showing the ceiling activation management process at the end of the game for the same type (Tenki D1). This is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing for a modified version of the type (Tenki D1) equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game. A figure showing a ceiling game state transition table. This is a diagram showing a winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern allocation table (for general and premonition) for the type equipped with a ceiling function. This is a diagram showing a winning/support time-saving winning fluctuation pattern allocation table (for ceiling and heaven) for the type equipped with a ceiling function. A figure showing a miss fluctuation pattern allocation table (for general use) for the ceiling function equipped type. This figure shows a miss fluctuation pattern allocation table (for premonition, ceiling, heaven (heaven time reduction)) for the type equipped with a ceiling function. A figure showing a fluctuation pattern allocation designation number table for the ceiling function equipped type. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance example related to a ceiling non-priority activation support type. A figure showing an example of a presentation example related to a type equipped with ceiling priority activation support. This figure shows an example of the presentation in Figures 77 and 78. This figure shows an example of the presentation in Figures 77 and 78. A diagram showing the types of rendering scenarios in Figure 77. A diagram showing the types of rendering scenarios in Figure 78. A diagram showing other rendering scenario types in Figure 78. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of a privilege granting form. This figure shows a case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the start of the game). This figure shows a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the start of the game). This figure shows a case in which the ceiling function is activated during the support time-saving state (the case in which the ceiling is activated at the start of the game). This figure shows a case where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game). This figure shows a case where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game). A figure showing a case in which the ceiling function is activated during the support time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game). This figure shows a case in which the ceiling function is activated without going through the ceiling mode during normal state (when there is remaining reserve). This figure shows a case in which the ceiling function is activated without going through the ceiling mode during normal state (a case in which there are no remaining holds). FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 91 . 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an output form of an outer end signal. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an output form of an outer end signal. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an output form of an outer end signal. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the activation modes of the jackpot time-saving state, support time-saving state, and ceiling time-saving state. A flowchart showing the jackpot start processing for an embodiment (fourth embodiment) in which the interval time during jackpot play can be extended and controlled. 99 is a flowchart showing the interval time setting process in FIG. 98. A flowchart showing the special call command transmission processing in Figure 98. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a special symbol confirmation time according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for determining whether or not a special electric device is to continue operating according to the embodiment. A figure showing a special call start time offset table, a special call start time table, a special call end time offset table, and a special call end time table in the same embodiment. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing specific examples 1 to 3 of the embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing specific examples 4 and 5 of the same embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing specific examples 6 and 7 of the same embodiment. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the details of specific examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 104. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining details of specific examples 4 and 5 of FIG. 105. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining details of specific examples 6 and 7 of FIG. 106.

[First embodiment]
A preferred embodiment of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Note that in the embodiment described below, a pinball gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[First embodiment]
<1. Overview of configuration: Figures 1 and 2>
An outline of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the exterior of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and Figure 2 is a view showing the front side of a gaming board.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereafter abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") shown in Figure 1 has a picture-frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, a gaming board 3 (see Figure 2) mounted in a gaming board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back of the front frame 2, and a gaming area 3a formed on the surface of this gaming board 3 facing the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided in front of this gaming area 3a. Various control boards (see Figure 3) for controlling gaming operations are also provided on the back side of the gaming board 3.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. By inserting a key into this key cylinder and operating it to one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2, and by operating it to the other side, the front frame 2 is unlocked to the outer frame 4, allowing the door to be opened to the front.

A front operation panel 7 is located below the glass door 6 and is pivoted to the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed freely. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, which is formed with an upper tray 9 that stores the dispensed game balls.

The upper tray unit 8 is also provided with a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1, a ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of game balls from the game ball lending device (not shown) on the island equipment side, and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of any valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device.

In addition to the push button type performance button 13 (first operation means), the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a cross-shaped directional key 75 (second operation means) that is composed of a button 75a pointing to the up direction, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d, and can be operated to input in the up, down, left and right directions. The performance button 13 and the directional key 75 function as operation means that can be operated by the player, and the reception of operation input is enabled during a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period) in a specific preview performance (for example, the "player participation type performance" described below), and when a predetermined operation (for example, a single press, a long press, a continuous tap, etc.) is performed during this valid period, it is possible to bring about a change in the performance before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means are also used when the player sets his/her preferred game settings on the "game setting screen (menu screen: for example, see Figures 46 to 48)" related to the customer waiting waiting period (the "customer waiting before performance (demo start waiting display)" or "customer waiting performance (demo display)" described below). In this game setting, for example, the player can set the game environment, such as adjusting the volume and light intensity, to his/her liking within a predetermined range (for example, see FIG. 46). Note that the effect button 13 is provided with a button LED 13b inside, and the difference in the light emission state of this LED can notify the operation acceptance valid period (lighting up or flashing in a predetermined color) and the operation acceptance invalid period (for example, when the light is off).

A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. The firing device 32 in this embodiment has a firing capacity of about 100 shots per minute.

In addition, speakers 46 that use sound to create a sound effect (sound effects) are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the launch operation handle 15. In addition, multiple decorative lamps 45 (LEDs for effects) that use light to create a light effect are provided in appropriate locations on the gaming machine, such as the decorative member around the front frame of the glass door 6 and inside the center ornament 48 (see Figure 2).

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding a launched game ball is attached in an annular shape as a board surface partition member to the game board 3, and the substantially circular area surrounded by this ball guide rail 5 is the game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in the approximate center of this game area 3a. Under the control of the performance control unit 24 described later, this liquid crystal display 36 displays various effects using images in a specified display area (pattern change display area), including the change display operation (changing display and stop display) of multiple types of decorative patterns (for example, three decorative patterns, a left pattern, a center pattern, and a right pattern (see FIG. 5A for example)) that are independently made up of numbers, characters, symbols, etc.

In addition, a center ornament body 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 at a distance. The center ornament body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and integrally comprises a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an armor frame part 48b that forms the outer periphery of the center ornament body 48 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. It protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls and acts as a flow path distribution means that allows the flow path of the game ball to be distributed to the left and right depending on the strength or stroke length of the game ball's launch. In this embodiment, a free movement area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball shot into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launch device 32 is distributed to the left and right at the upper side of the armor frame part 48b and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament body 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

The non-play area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a display area for various functions, and is provided with a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device: second special symbol display means) that are arranged horizontally in correspondence with the upper starting hole 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower starting hole 35 (for the second special symbol). The special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are designed to execute a 'special symbol variable display game' by displaying the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the 'special symbol' represented by the 7-segment. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays the decorative symbol by image in a variable manner in time with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and executes a 'decorative symbol variable display game' together with various preview effects (effect images). Details about the special symbol change display game and the decorative symbol change display game will be explained at a later date.

The various function display section also includes a composite display device (LED display for composite reserved display) 38c consisting of a 7-segment display (with dots) next to the special symbol displays 38a and 38b. It is called a composite display device because it is a reserved/time-saving/high-probability composite display device (hereinafter referred to simply as a "composite display device") with multiple display functions, such as displaying the number of activated reserved balls for special symbol 1, displaying the number of activated reserved balls for special symbol 2, displaying the number of activated reserved balls for normal symbols, notifying the state where right-hand hits are favorable, and notifying the state when the variable time-saving function is in operation (time-saving) and when in a high-probability state (high probability).

The various function display section also includes a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) that is configured with multiple (two in this embodiment) LEDs next to the composite display device 38c. In the normal symbol display device 39a according to this embodiment, the normal symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbols represented by the two LEDs. For example, as the variable display operation, the normal symbols displayed by the LEDs are alternately lit and extinguished in a seesaw manner, and when one side stops in a lit state, the result of the normal symbol variable display game is determined.

A right-hand hit display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-hand hit display device 39b indicates, by a combination of the on/off states of the LEDs, whether a "right hit", which aims to make the game ball pass (flow down) through the right flow path 3c, is advantageous, or whether a "left hit", which aims to make the game ball pass (flow down) through the left flow path 3b, is advantageous. For example, if the LED is lit, it indicates that a right hit is advantageous, and if it is off, it indicates that a left hit is advantageous.

In addition, a round number display device 39c is provided adjacent to the right-hand hit display device 39b, and is made up of two LEDs (round display LEDs). This round number display device 39c indicates the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to a jackpot by combining the on/off states of multiple LEDs.

Below the center decorative body 48, there are provided upper and lower normal variable winning devices 41 equipped with an upper starting hole 34 (first special symbol starting hole: first starting means) and a lower starting hole 35 (second special symbol starting hole: second starting means), and inside each of them are formed detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper starting hole sensor 34a, lower starting hole sensor 35a: see Figure 3) that detect the passage of the game ball.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1" and sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), and is configured as a "winning device with fixed winning rate" that does not have a "starting port opening and closing means" that makes it possible to open or enlarge the starting port. In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball fall direction changing member (for example, game nail (not shown), windmill 44, center ornament 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the upper starting port 34 is configured to be easily configured to enter (win) for game balls that have flowed down the left flow path 3b, but is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter for game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c.

The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable type winning device" that can vary the winning rate of the game balls in the starting hole by the starting hole opening and closing means. In this embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as the starting hole opening and closing means, and the lower starting hole 35, which is the second special pattern starting hole, can be opened or enlarged by opening and closing the movable wing pieces 47.

The lower starting opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation of the second special pattern (hereinafter, the second special pattern is referred to as "special pattern 2" and sometimes abbreviated as "special pattern 2") in the special pattern display device 38b (second special pattern display device), and the winning area of this lower starting opening 35 is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that makes winning easier and a closed state (difficult winning state) that makes winning more difficult than the open state or makes winning impossible, depending on the operating state (operation or non-operation) of the movable wing piece 47. In this embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is not operated, it holds a closed state (unable to win) that makes it impossible to win at the lower starting opening 35.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable prize-winning device 41, there are five general prize winning ports 43, four on the left side (43a-43d) and one on the right side (43e), and inside each port is a general prize winning port sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general prize winning ports 43a-43e) that detects the passage of the game ball.

In addition, diagonally above the right of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle part of the right flow-down path 3c, there is provided a normal pattern start port 37 (third start means) consisting of a passing gate through which game balls can pass. This normal pattern start port 37 is a winning port related to the variable display operation of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device 39a, and inside it is formed a normal pattern start port sensor 37a (see Figure 3) that detects the game balls passing through. In this embodiment, the normal pattern start port 37 is formed only on the right flow-down path 3c side and not on the left flow-down path 3b side, but it is not limited to this and may be formed on both flow-down paths.

Along the path from the normal symbol start opening 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning device 52 (special electric device) is provided that is configured to open or expand the large winning opening 50 by a retractable opening door 52b, and inside it is a large winning opening sensor 52a (see Figure 3) that detects game balls that enter the large winning opening 50.

The periphery of the large prize opening 50 is a bulge (decorative member) 55 that bulges out from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper edge 55a of this bulge 55 forms the downstream guide of the right flow path 3c. When the large prize opening 50 is closed by the opening door 52b (large prize opening closed state), a surface that is continuous with the upper edge 55a of this bulge 55 is formed, forming part of the downstream guide (upper edge 55a) of the right flow path 3c. In addition, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper edge 55a of the bulge 55, or more precisely, in the game area above the large prize opening 50, a flow path correction plate 51d is protruded almost parallel to the flow direction of the game balls, and acts to move the flowing game balls toward the large prize opening 50.

The process of the ball entering the large prize opening 50 is as follows. The ball that passes through the free movement area between the top surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 flows down along the top surface (upper edge) 55a of the bulge 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the ball. The ball then contacts the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the game board 3, which corrects the flow direction of the ball to the direction of the large prize opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the large prize opening 50 is covered by the recessed opening door 52b (large prize opening closed state), the ball rolls over it and is further guided by the gauge configuration (arrangement of game nails) (not shown) in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable prize opening device 41 (lower starting opening 35). At this time, if the lower starting opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can enter the lower starting opening 35, but if the opening door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the big winning opening 50 is open (big winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50.

In this embodiment, when the player aims the launch position toward the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c), the game ball is difficult to guide to the upper starting port 34, or is not guided at all. Therefore, if the "big winning port closed state" is in effect, it is difficult or impossible for the ball to win at each starting port 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is activated.

If we classify the winning means as to which of the left and right flow paths the game balls flowing down can win, that is, whether the game balls flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win, the winning means that belong to the left flow path 3b include the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35, and the general winning openings 43a-43d on the left side, while the winning means that belong to the right flow path 3c include the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35, the normal pattern start opening 37, the big winning opening 50, and the general winning opening 43e on the right side. Note that the lower start opening 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c when the movable wing piece 47 is in an open state (start opening open state), and winning is possible from either the left or right flow path. However, the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting opening 35 is activated when the game ball passes through (wins) the normal pattern starting opening 37 located on the right side of the play area 3a, so it can essentially be said to be a winning means that belongs only to the right flow path 3c. Also, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

(Configuration favoring right-handed players under certain conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a "right hit" is performed aiming to make the gaming ball pass through the right flow path 3c, the gaming ball is likely to enter the normal pattern start hole 37, but is difficult or not guided to the upper start hole 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning hole closed state", it is difficult or impossible to enter each start hole 34, 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is operated. However, when the "electric support state (electric support state)" described later occurs, this movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening and closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal gaming state). Therefore, under this electric support state, it is advantageous to "right hit" that aims the gaming ball to pass through the right flow path 3c, rather than "left hit" that aims the gaming ball to pass through the left flow path 3b. On the other hand, in the "no electric support state (non-electric support state)" described later, the opposite is true: "left hit" aiming the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b is considered advantageous, rather than "right hit" aiming the game ball to pass through the right flow path 3c. That is, depending on the game state, the game progress is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c the game ball is made to flow down. As will be described in detail later, the game state with the electric support state (also called the "easy winning state") includes a "time-saving state" and a "probability state", and the game state with the no electric support state includes a "normal state" and a "potential state".

Each winning port, such as the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, the normal pattern start port 37, the big winning port 50, or the general winning ports 43a to 43e, functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and detection switches (winning detection switches) such as the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, the normal pattern start port sensor 37a, the big winning port sensor 52a, or the general winning port sensor 43h function as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. Note that the number, shape, and formation position of each of the winning means described above can be changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay. In addition, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and/or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win or cannot win, or can win, can also be changed as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

When a game ball wins at each winning hole, the number of prize balls per winning ball that is promised for each winning hole is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, 3 balls are paid out from the upper starting hole 34, 1 ball from the lower starting hole 35, 0 balls (no prize balls) from the normal pattern starting hole 37, 15 balls from the large winning hole 50, and 3 balls from the general winning holes 43a-e. Game balls that do not win at each of the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3a through the outlet 49. Here, "winning" refers to the winning hole taking in the game ball, or, in the case of a winning hole that does not have a structure that takes in the game ball but is a passing-type gate (for example, the normal pattern starting hole 37), the game ball passing through the gate. In fact, when a game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, it is treated as if a "winning" has occurred at that winning hole. The winning ball is also called the "winning ball."

<Movable parts>
In addition, multiple movable body parts are arranged in the game area 3a at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game balls. In this embodiment, the first movable body part 80 is arranged in the upper right side of the center decoration body 48, and the second movable body part 90 is arranged diagonally below it to the right. The first movable body part 80 has a clock face part 81 consisting of a number display part divided into 12 number sectors with the numbers "I" to "XII" attached, and a clock hand 82 consisting of an hour hand and a minute hand formed to be rotatable on the clock face part 81, and as a whole forms a "hanging clock part". In this sense, the first movable body part 80 is also called a "clock-type part". The clock face part 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the hour hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED, and each number sector can be independently illuminated in a different color.

The second movable body accessory 90 is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90, with a flower-shaped part 91 (first movable body 91) having a corolla consisting of multiple petals around the center of the flower, and a calyx around the outer periphery of the corolla to form a double perianth, attached to the tip of an arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging. The multiple petals of the flower-shaped part 91 can rotate around the center of the flower. This flower-shaped accessory 90 is usually stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in Figure 2) set on the edge of the LCD screen or to the side outside the LCD screen, and when a specified operating condition is met, the arm 92 tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped part 91 covers the LCD screen (shown by a dashed line in Figure 2). When the flower-shaped part 91 moves to the performance position shown by the dashed line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped part 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the semi-transparent flower center and petal parts are illuminated from behind by a lamp or full-color LED, giving them a beautiful light color. When the flower-shaped part 90 finishes its operation, it returns to the original position shown by the solid line from the performance position shown by the dashed line. The flower-shaped part 91 can rotate the petals in multiple types of operation patterns, such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation, and the arm 92 can perform multiple types of operation patterns, such as a fully open tilting operation in which the arm tilts to the dashed line portion, a semi-tilting operation in which the arm tilts to a predetermined tilting angle, a vibration operation in which the arm vibrates, and an inching operation. The clock-shaped part 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped part 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice performances depending on their operating modes, and are also used when executing (appearing) the setting suggestion performance described below.

<2. Control device: Figure 3>
Next, a control device for controlling the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a control block diagram showing an overview of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment is mainly composed of a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as the "main control unit 20") which generally controls the control of the overall gaming operation (gaming operation control), a presentation control board (presentation control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation control unit 24") which receives presentation control commands from the main control unit 20 and generally controls the execution (appearance) control of the presentation by the presentation means, a payout control board (payout control means) 29 which controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) which generates and supplies the necessary power (including backup power) from an external power supply to each board of the gaming machine. A liquid crystal display device 36 is connected to the presentation control unit 24 as an image display device. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG. 3.

(2-1. Main Control Unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), as well as a ROM 202 (main control ROM) that stores a control program describing game operation control procedures as well as various data necessary for game operation control, and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and buffer memory, and as a whole constitutes a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system).

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 also includes an interrupt controller circuit that provides the Z80 system with periodic interrupts, a constant-period pulse output creation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function, an interrupt enable/disable function such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal to the CPU, a reset circuit that detects power-on and power-off and power abnormalities and outputs a system reset signal to reset the CPU, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, an IAT circuit that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range, and a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers) within a certain range in a hardware manner. At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 are capable of starting backup processing prior to power cutoff by receiving a voltage drop signal (power abnormality signal) from a power board (not shown) and resuming the game operation before the power cutoff after the power is restored (backup function). This gaming machine 1 is capable of retaining the contents of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers, and a sampling circuit that samples random numbers from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends instructions to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the number indicated by the random number generation circuit as a random number value for internal lottery (random number for determining a jackpot (size of random number: 65536)), and uses this random number value for the jackpot lottery. Note that the random number for internal lottery is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number value to prevent cheating such as aiming for a jackpot.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to an upper start opening sensor 34a that detects winning at the upper start opening 34, a lower start opening sensor 35a that detects winning at the lower start opening 35, a normal pattern start opening sensor 37a that detects the passage of the game ball into the normal pattern start opening 37, a large prize opening sensor 52a that detects winning at the large prize opening 50, and a general prize opening sensor 43h that detects winning at the general prize opening 43.The main control unit 20 receives detection signals from these sensors and determines which prize opening the game ball has won (entered).

The main control unit 20 is also connected to an "OUT monitoring switch 49a" that detects game balls (so-called "out balls") discharged from the gaming machine through the outlet 49 and each winning port, and is capable of receiving the detection signal. The main control unit 20 is equipped with an out ball counting means that counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out balls is one of the "game performance information" that is defined by a specific value. For example, if "the cumulative number of out balls today is 30,000," it is possible to obtain operation information that the gaming machine 1 was in operation for 300 minutes today ("cumulative number of out balls (balls) / firing performance (100 balls per minute) = operation time"). The number of out balls is also used to calculate a base value (one of the game performance information) described below.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a fraud detection sensor (e.g., a vibration sensor, a radio wave sensor, a magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity on the gaming machine 1, and the main control unit 20 is capable of monitoring fraudulent activity on the gaming machine based on the detection signal from the fraud detection sensor.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a normal electric role solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting opening 35, and a large prize opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the large prize opening 50, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for driving and controlling these.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of special symbols 1 and 2. The main control unit 20 is also connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of normal symbols.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a composite display unit 38c, a right-hand hit display unit 39b, and a round number display unit 39c, and the main control unit 20 is capable of controlling the display of various information displayed on these units.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a frame external terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 can transmit predetermined game information (outer end signal) to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC" installed outside the gaming machine via the frame external terminal board 21. The predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start/end information, winning information, special symbol fluctuation start/stop information, prize ball number information, and various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door opening, setting change, etc. occurrence information). The above-mentioned "data counter DT" is a game information notification device that can notify specific information about the gaming machine, such as the number of jackpots, the number of times the symbol fluctuation display game has been executed (number of symbol fluctuations), and the number of games executed between jackpots, based on the game information included in the outer end signal, and is usually installed on the top of the gaming machine. The hall computer HC is also known as a "hall computer" and is a management computer dedicated to the hall that monitors and collects the progress of gaming on the gaming machines based on the gaming information contained in the outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the gaming machines installed in the pachinko hall. The data counter DT and hall computer HC are both well-known devices that have been known for a long time.

The main control unit 20 is also capable of outputting a type test signal that identifies the gaming operation in real time from the frame external terminal board 21 in response to type tests (tests related to the certification of gaming machines based on regulations related to the certification and type inspection of gaming machines) conducted by the Security Electronics and Telecommunications Technology Association (STA). Note that when a gaming machine that meets the type test is installed in a pachinko parlor, no changes to the compliant control program are permitted. For this reason, the type test signal continues to be output repeatedly even after the machine is installed in the pachinko parlor.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (internal memory) of the RAM 203, a setting key switch 94 that can be switched between a setting change permission state (ON) that allows the setting value to be changed and a setting change prohibition state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and turning it ON/OFF, a setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value (details will be described later) in the setting change permission state, and a setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95, and the main control unit 20 is capable of receiving detection signals from these switches. The RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push button switches that can be operated by the operator. These switches 94, 95, 96, and 98 are formed in appropriate locations inside the gaming machine that are not visible to the player in order to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting values, and cannot be turned ON/OFF from outside the gaming machine unless the front frame 2 is opened.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a setting display 97 (setting display means) that displays information about the setting values, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of this display. The setting display 97 in this embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display, and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. Note that the setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, and can be provided in an appropriate location inside the gaming machine, such as the payout control board 28, launch control board 29, relay board (a relay board that relays connections between various display devices and switches and the control board: not shown), or performance control unit (performance control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc.

(Regarding setting values)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player, such as the payout rate (also known as the payout rate or payout rate), in stages. The above-mentioned "setting value" is a value that indicates this stage. This setting value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is set appropriately by the hall staff based solely on the business strategy of the pachinko hall (game facility).

The "setting value" is, for example, a value that specifies the probability of winning (the probability of winning) a jackpot (a type of winning that will activate a condition device described later) in stages. The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning (the probability of winning) a jackpot, which is set to be advantageous to the player. At least two stages of such setting values (at least a first setting value and a second setting value) can be set. In this embodiment, six setting values from setting 1 to 6 are set. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/200, setting 2 is 1/196, setting 3 is 1/192, setting 4 is 1/188, setting 5 is 1/184, setting 6 is 1/180, etc. In other words, the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win a jackpot (the higher the machine payout), which is advantageous to the player. In this way, the "setting value" is a value that specifies the events that affect the machine payout in stages, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a special event such as a jackpot occurring. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot at low probability and/or the probability of winning a jackpot at low probability can be configured to vary depending on the setting value. When the probability of winning a jackpot is high (when the special symbol probability function described later is activated), the probability can increase to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the increase rate may be the same for each setting value or may be different. In this embodiment, the increase rate is the same for each setting value. In the above example, if the probability of winning a jackpot at low probability is 1/200 to 1/180 for settings 1 to 6 and the increase rate is 4 times, the probability of winning a jackpot at high probability is 1/50 to 1/45 for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, when multiple types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or more types of jackpots can be changed according to the setting value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots, jackpots 1 to 4, the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4 may be configured to be higher as the setting value becomes relatively higher, or only the winning probability of some jackpots, jackpots 1 to 3, may be configured to be higher (in this case, the winning probability of jackpot 4 is common to all setting values), or only the winning probability of a specific jackpot (for example, only jackpot 1) may be configured to be higher (in this case, the winning probability of jackpots 2 to 4 is common to all setting values). In addition, the winning probability of the combined winning probability of jackpots 1 to 4 may be configured to be higher as the setting value becomes relatively higher. In addition, the winning probability of the small winning type and/or the support time reduction type that do not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the setting value, as in the case of the jackpot described above, or may be the same winning probability for all settings. Details of the jackpot, small winning, and support time reduction will be described later.

(Regarding changing settings)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is permitted, and if the power is turned on by any other switch operation, the setting change is prohibited. In this setting change permitted state, when the setting change switch 95 is turned ON, the current display value of the setting display 97 is switched cyclically in the range of settings 1 to 6, such as "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". When the desired setting value is displayed, the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), and the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in a predetermined area (setting value storage area) of the RAM 203. When the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF from the current ON state, the setting change permitted state is ended, and thereafter, the game will start under the confirmed setting value. The main control unit 20 has a setting function (setting means) that can set a setting value related to the winning probability by a jackpot lottery (random number lottery). The present invention can also be applied to a "game machine without a setting function" that does not have a setting function. Also, the setting value may not be switchable between multiple levels, but may be a "game machine with a one-step setting function" that has only one setting value. The "game machine with a one-step setting function" refers to a type in which the setting value can be set, but the setting value is only one, and is mainly used to facilitate design by providing design compatibility and versatility between "game machines with a setting function" and "game machines without a setting function" when designing a new model. This game machine with a one-step setting function is essentially the same as a "game machine without a setting function" in that there is only one setting value. In the case of a one-step setting game machine, even if the setting change switch 95 is operated, the display value of the setting indicator 97 only displays a certain setting value, for example, "1 → 1 → 1 → 1 → ...", and the setting operation itself of the setting value is possible.

The main control unit 20 can also send various game processing information, such as information about the special symbol change display game and error information, to the performance control unit 24 using performance control commands depending on the processing state. However, in order to prevent cheating from outside, the main control unit 20 is configured for one-way communication, where it can only send signals to the performance control unit 24 and cannot receive signals from the performance control unit 24.

(About Performance Indicator 99)
A performance indicator 99 (information display means) that notifies information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to game results for a predetermined period (specific game period) is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for controlling the display of the performance indicator 99. The performance indicator 99 of this embodiment is made up of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and more specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) in which the display unit and the circuit unit are unitized are arranged horizontally, and these are mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying four-digit numbers. Each 7-segment LED also has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above-mentioned "performance information" is information that is mainly used by pachinko parlors and relevant authorities for confirmation and investigation, for example, information for investigating whether there is any abnormality in the ball-dispensing performance due to illegal adjustment of game nails or cheating, and whether the original ball-dispensing performance (designed ball-dispensing performance) of the gaming machine is being properly demonstrated, in other words, "information about game performance (game performance information)". Therefore, unlike the preview performance and setting suggestion performance described later, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed in a place visible to the player, but is mounted in a place inside the gaming machine that is easy to see, such as on the control board or on the board case that protects it.

In this embodiment, the total number of payouts (number of payouts under normal conditions) during the normal state (when the probability of winning the lottery is low (normal probability) and when there is no electric support, as described below) and the cumulative number of out balls during the normal state (number of out balls under normal conditions) are measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts under normal conditions by the number of out balls under normal conditions and multiplying this value by 100 (the base value calculated by number of payouts under normal conditions ÷ number of out balls under normal conditions × 100: base value under normal conditions) is adopted as the above-mentioned "performance information" and displayed in a predetermined manner by the performance display 99. The base value is rounded off to the nearest whole number and displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls), the measurement is stopped once, and the base value at the time of the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and measurement of a new base value is started again. In this embodiment, the "prescribed number (60,000 balls)" that triggers the end of measurement does not refer to the number of balls out during normal play, but to the cumulative number of balls out (number of balls out in all states) measured during all game states (including winning play), and this "number of balls out in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program and its work area related to the display control and base value of the performance indicator 99 are set in an area (outside area memory) different from the area (inside area memory) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress. Furthermore, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and there is no particular restriction as long as it is useful game performance information.

The main control unit 20 is also connected to a payout control board (payout control unit) 29, which is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32, and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls.

The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive payout control commands from the main control unit 20, control the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, and send information (status signals) related to the payout operation status to the main control unit 20. When it is necessary to pay out balls, the main control unit 20 can send a control command related to the payout (a "payout control command" that specifies the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, and the payout control board 29 can send the above-mentioned status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a full detection sensor 60 that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether the upper tray 9 is full or not), and a door open sensor 61 (ON when open/OFF when closed) that detects the open/closed state of the front frame 2 and/or front operation panel 7, and the payout control board 29 is capable of receiving detection signals from these sensors.

The payout control board 29 is also capable of receiving detection signals from a supply shortage detection sensor 19a that detects a shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b that detects the game balls (prize balls) that are paid out, both of which are provided in the game ball payout device 19. The payout control board 29 is also capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the payout motor 19c (a motor that drives a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls) of the game ball payout device 19.

Based on the detection signals from various sensors such as the full detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball count sensor 19b, the payout control board 29 is configured to be able to transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20, such as a "ball jam signal" indicating a full state, a "door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2/front operation panel 7 is open, a "supply shortage signal" indicating a shortage of game balls, a "counting error signal" indicating an abnormality in the payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout), and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 monitors whether the front frame 2/front operation panel 7 is open (door open error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (prize ball error), and whether the upper tray 9 is full (ball jam error).

The payout control board 29 is also connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28, which is capable of transmitting a launch control signal ES (launch permission signal ES) to the launch control board 28. Based on the launch permission signal ES being output from the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28 controls the power supply to the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32, and realizes the launch operation of the game ball by operating the launch operation handle 15. Specifically, the launch operation of the game ball is permitted under the conditions that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29, the touch sensor (not shown) provided in the launch operation handle 15 detects that the player is touching the handle (detection of a touch state), and the launch stop switch (not shown) provided in the launch operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, if the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. In addition, the strength of the launch of the game ball can be changed according to the amount of operation of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production Control Unit 24)
The performance control unit 24 is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (performance control CPU), a ROM 242 (performance control ROM) storing performance data required for performance control processing, and a RAM 243 (performance control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory, and is also provided with an audio control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit (16-bit counter, 8-bit counter) for generating a certain range of hard random numbers, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc., to control the overall performance operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps time, and serves as a clock means that provides real-time time information such as the current time ("what time it is now") and/or calendar information related to the date (month, date, day of the week). Like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and a software random number generation means (for example, a random number generation means for lottery for performance).

The main role of this performance control unit 24 is to receive performance control commands from the main control unit 20, select and decide the performance based on the performance control commands, control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, control the sound of the speaker 46, control the light emission of various performance LEDs (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other performance LEDs), and control the operation of various movable parts (clock-shaped part 80, flower-shaped part 90).

The performance control unit 24 also includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is mainly composed of a VDP that controls the overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (performance image data) used by the VDP for image development processing, a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data required for the VDP to perform display control, a liquid crystal control ROM that stores a program describing the display control operation procedures of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data required for that display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and buffer memory.

The performance control unit 24 also includes a light display control unit for the light display device 45a, which includes various performance LEDs such as decorative lamps 45 and button LEDs 13b, an audio control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generating device 46a, which includes a speaker 46, and a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body role motors 80c, 91c, and 92c that operate the movable body role motors (clock-shaped role 80, flower-shaped portion 91, and arm 92) to execute image display performances, light performances, sound performances, or movable body performances.

The performance control unit 24 is also connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable role, and the performance control unit 24 controls the operation mode of the movable role while monitoring the current operating position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a. The performance control unit 24 also monitors malfunctions in the operation of the movable role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and performs a specified error notification process if a malfunction occurs.

The performance control unit 24 is also connected to a performance button switch 13a, which detects the operation of the performance button 13, and directional key switches 75a' to 75d', which detect the operation of the directional keys 75 (75a to 75d), and is capable of receiving operation detection signals from these performance buttons 13 and directional keys 75.

When the performance control unit 24 receives a performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, it randomly or uniquely selects one of several types of performance patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command, and controls various performance means at the required timing to produce the desired performance. This realizes the display of a performance image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display performance), the playback of sound from the speaker 46 (sound performance), and the lighting and blinking of the decorative lamp 45 and other performance LEDs (light performance), and a "performance scenario" in the broad sense is realized by the time-series deployment of various performance patterns (such as the variable display operation of decorative patterns and advance notice performances). In addition, the performance control unit 24 is configured to be able to identify what kind of operation was performed on the performance button 13 and/or the directional key 75 (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated tapping, the order in which the directional key 75 is pressed up, down, left, right, etc.) based on the operation detection signal from the performance button switch 13a and the directional key switches 75a' to 75d' during a specified operation acceptance valid period (operation identification means), and is configured to be able to execute and control a performance according to the operation mode.

The performance control command defines its function by a two-byte structure consisting of a one-byte mode (MODE) and a one-byte event (EVENT), and to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, bit 7 of MODE is ON and bit 7 of EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and event (EVENT). In other words, when there is a command to transmit, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the performance control unit 24, and transmits the first strobe signal after a predetermined time has elapsed since this setting. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the transmission of this strobe signal, it sets and outputs event (EVENT) information, and transmits the second strobe signal after a predetermined time has elapsed since this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to an active state by CPU 201 for a specified period of time to ensure that CPU 241 (performance control CPU) can receive commands.

The performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) also generates an interrupt based on the input of a strobe signal to execute a control program for command reception interrupt processing, and the performance control command is acquired during this interrupt processing. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 interrupts interrupt processing based on another interrupt (timer interrupt processing executed periodically) even if that processing is in progress, and performs command reception interrupt processing as a priority even if another interrupt occurs at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 using the above-mentioned control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Game with changing symbols)
(3-1-1. Special symbol change display game, decorative symbol change display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a "jackpot lottery" is performed by random number lottery in the main control unit 20 based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, based on the game ball entering (winning) the upper starting hole 34 or the lower starting hole 35. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time has passed, derives and displays the result on the special symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variable display game.

Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on winning at the upper starting hole 34 and the jackpot lottery based on winning at the lower starting hole 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting hole 34 is derived on the special pattern display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting hole 35 is derived on the special pattern display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special pattern display device 38a side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper starting hole 34, the special pattern 1 is displayed in a variable manner to start a first special pattern variable display game, while on the special pattern display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower starting hole 35, the special pattern 2 is displayed in a variable manner to start a second special pattern variable display game. Then, when the special pattern variable display game is started on special pattern display device 38a or special pattern display device 38b, after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the special pattern being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined jackpot pattern form if the jackpot lottery result is a "jackpot," in a predetermined small jackpot pattern form if the jackpot lottery result is a "small jackpot," in a predetermined support time-saving pattern form if the jackpot lottery result is a "support time-saving," and in a predetermined miss pattern form otherwise, thereby deriving the game result (jackpot lottery result).

For ease of explanation, the first special pattern change display game on the special pattern display device 38a may be referred to as "special pattern change display game 1," and the second special pattern change display game on the special pattern display device 38b may be referred to as "special pattern change display game 2." Furthermore, unless otherwise necessary, "special pattern 1" and "special pattern 2" may be referred to simply as "special patterns" (sometimes abbreviated to "special patterns"), and "special pattern change display game 1" and "special pattern change display game 2" may be referred to as "special pattern change display games" without distinction.

When the special symbol change display game is started, the decorative symbol change display game is started by changing and displaying decorative symbols (game symbols for dramatic effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, and various effects are developed in conjunction with this. When the special symbol change display game ends, the decorative symbol change display game also ends, and a predetermined special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the special symbol display device, and a decorative symbol reflecting the result of the jackpot lottery is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In other words, the result of the special symbol change display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol change display game for dramatic effect, which includes the change display operation of the decorative symbols.

Therefore, for example, if the result of the special symbol change display game (the result of the jackpot lottery) is a "jackpot," the decorative symbol change display game will develop an effect that reflects that result. Then, when the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device in a display mode that indicates a jackpot (for example, the 7-segment display shows "7"), the decorative symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in each of the "left," "middle," and "right" display areas in a display mode that reflects the "jackpot" (winning symbols: for example, three decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode of "7," "7," "7" in each of the "left," "middle," and "right" display areas).

When this "jackpot" occurs, specifically, the special pattern change display game ends, followed by the decorative pattern change display game, and as a result, the "jackpot" pattern is derived and displayed, and then the large prize opening solenoid 52c (see Figure 3) of the special variable prize winning device 52 is activated and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the large prize opening 50 and creating a special game state (jackpot game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this jackpot game, the winning area is opened or expanded until the opening time of the large prize opening by the opening door 52b has elapsed for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or the number of winning balls entering the large prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for the opening or expanded prize opening by one operation of the device: for example, 10 balls), and when either of these conditions is met, the large prize opening is closed (the round play end condition (closing condition) is met). This "round game" is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, up to 10 rounds).

When the jackpot game starts, an opening performance (performance during start INT) is performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, round play is performed multiple times up to a predetermined number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, an ending performance (performance during end INT) is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and the series of jackpot games ends. When the current round game ends, the next round game starts after a predetermined interval time (inter-round INT). In addition, during the round game, a "inter-round performance" appears, and between round games (during the inter-round INT), an "inter-round INT performance" appears. In other words, the jackpot game is broadly divided into an opening period (start INT period), a round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and an ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative pattern change display game described above, first, the main control unit 20 performs a 'win/lose lottery' to determine whether the result is a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss" based on the game ball entering (winning) the upper start hole 34 or the lower start hole 35, specifically, on the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start hole sensor 34a or the lower start hole sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special pattern) is met, and if it is a "big win", the type of the big win, or if it is a "small win", the type of the small win, A jackpot lottery is performed, which includes a 'pattern lottery (winning type lottery)' that selects the type of the miss if the winning number is a "miss" (if there is only one type of jackpot, small win, or miss, there is no need to perform a pattern lottery, so the lottery can be omitted), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special pattern and the special pattern (special stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined (Note that in this embodiment, the "support time reduction" described later is also subject to the win/loss lottery and pattern lottery. This "support time reduction" will be explained later). Then, as a performance control command that specifies the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" that includes at least information on the variation pattern of the special pattern (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special pattern, etc.) is transmitted to the performance control unit 24. As a result, basic information required for the decorative pattern variation display game is sent to the performance control unit 24. In this embodiment, in order to provide a wide variety of effects, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information about special stop symbols (symbol lottery result information) is also sent to the effect control unit 24.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern information can include, in addition to the jackpot lottery result, information specifying the execution of a specific advance notice performance (for example, the reach performance or pseudo consecutive performance (including the number of pseudo consecutive performances) described below). In detail, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is roughly divided into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "miss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a miss, depending on the jackpot lottery result, and these fluctuation patterns include, for example, a "reach fluctuation pattern" that specifies the execution of a reach performance (including the specification of the type of reach), a "normal fluctuation pattern" that does not specify the execution of a reach performance, a "reach fluctuation pattern with pseudo consecutive performance" that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance and a reach performance, and a "normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo consecutive performance" that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance but does not specify the execution of a reach performance. In addition, for the reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo consecutive performance fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time longer than that of the normal fluctuation pattern is basically set in order to secure the performance time of the advance notice performance. Hereinafter, the reach fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "reach fluctuation" and the normal fluctuation pattern may be abbreviated as "normal fluctuation."

Based on the information included in the presentation control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, the presentation control unit 24 determines the presentation content (presentation scenario) to be developed in a chronological order during the decorative pattern variation display game, and the decorative pattern (decorative stop pattern) to be finally displayed, and controls the preview presentation during the decorative pattern variation display game and the decorative pattern variation display presentation according to a time schedule based on the special pattern variation pattern. As a result, the decorative pattern is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronization with the display of the special pattern by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special pattern variation display game and the period during the decorative pattern variation display game are substantially the same time width. The presentation control unit 24 also controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generating device 46a in accordance with the presentation scenario, and develops various presentations in the decorative pattern variation display game. This allows the reproduction of images on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image presentation), the reproduction of sound effects (sound presentation), and the lighting and blinking of presentation LEDs such as the decorative lamps 45 (light presentation).

In this way, the special symbol change display game and the decorative symbol change display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol change display game are reflected in the decorative symbol change display game, so these two symbol change display games can be considered as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, unless otherwise necessary, the above two symbol change display games may be simply referred to as "symbol change display games" or simply "games." In addition, for convenience of explanation, the number of times a symbol change display game (particularly, the special symbol change display game) is played may be referred to as "number of games played," "number of symbol changes," "number of changes," or "* rotations (where "*" is a natural number: for example, 1 rotation, 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.)."

(3-1-2. Normal pattern change display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, a "support winning lottery" is performed by random number lottery in the main control unit 20 based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting hole 37. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is displayed variably on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the result is displayed as a combination of the lit and unlit LEDs. For example, if the result of the normal symbol variable display game is a "support winning", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is displayed in a specific lit state (for example, both of the two LEDs 39 are lit).

When this "auxiliary hit" occurs, the normal electric role solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, which causes the movable wing 47 to open in an inverted "V" shape, opening or widening the lower starting hole 35, making it easier for game balls to flow in (starting hole open state), creating an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "normal electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In this normal electric open game, the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is activated (opening operation), and the winning area is controlled to an open state in which it is opened or widened until the opening time (starting hole open state time) of the lower starting hole 35 has elapsed the maximum opening time (for example, a maximum of 6 seconds) or the number of winning balls in the lower starting hole 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10 balls). When either of these conditions is met, the opening operation of the movable wing 47 ends and the lower starting hole 35 is closed. Note that the lower starting hole 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Activated ball)
In this embodiment, when a winning occurs in each start port 34, 35 or normal pattern start port 37 during the pattern change display game, normal pattern change display game, big win game, small win game, or normal power open game, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal pattern start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition is established, this is reserved and stored as data related to the right to start the variable display game, up to a predetermined upper limit, the maximum reserved memory number, except for data related to the variable display. The reserved data that is not used for the pattern change display operation or the game balls related to the reserved data are also called "operation reserved balls". In order to make the number of the operation reserved balls clear to the player, a dedicated reserved indicator (not shown) provided at an appropriate position on the gaming machine 1, or a reserved indicator provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is turned on and displayed.

In this embodiment, up to four activation reserved balls for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are reserved in the corresponding memory area of RAM 203, and are reserved as the number of times the special symbol or normal symbol changes. There is no particular limit to the maximum number of activation reserved balls (maximum reserved memory number) for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol. In addition, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number for each symbol may be different, and the number can be determined appropriately depending on the gameplay. For ease of explanation, in this specification, the activation reserved balls for special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are also referred to as "special symbol 1 activation reserved ball," "special symbol 2 activation reserved ball," and "normal symbol activation reserved ball," respectively.

(3-2. Game Status)
Next, the game states will be described. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the special game state of the jackpot, a plurality of game states can be generated. To facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, the functions (means) related to the generation of the various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a "probability change function (probability change function)" whose functional part is the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). There are two types of probability change function: a probability change function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol probability change function") and a probability change function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol probability change function").

The special symbol probability change function changes the probability of winning a jackpot from a predetermined low probability (normal probability) to a high probability, generating a "high probability state (high jackpot probability state)" that is more favorable than the normal state. In a gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is active, the probability of winning a jackpot becomes high, making it easier for a jackpot to occur. As already explained, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot during low and high probability periods differs depending on the setting value (see Figure 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the probability of winning the auxiliary hit from a predetermined low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, from 1/256 to 255/256), creating a "auxiliary hit probability change state" that is more favorable than the normal state. In a game state where this normal symbol probability change function is in operation (auxiliary hit probability change state), the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, making auxiliary hits more likely to occur, and normal power open play occurs frequently, resulting in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment also has a "variable time shortening function (time shortening function)" whose functional section is the main control section 20. There are two types of time shortening function: a time shortening function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol time shortening function") and a time shortening function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol time shortening function").

The special symbol time-saving function is a function that generates a "special symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol change display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops being displayed). In a game state where this special symbol time-saving function is active (special symbol time-saving state), the average change time of the special symbol in one special symbol change display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for a no-reach miss change is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), resulting in a state where the number of jackpot draws per unit time is increased compared to the normal state.

The normal pattern time-saving function is a function that generates a "normal pattern time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern change display game (the average time from when the normal pattern starts changing to when it stops being displayed). In a game state (normal pattern time-saving state) in which the normal pattern time-saving function is operating, the average change time of the normal pattern in one normal pattern change display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds), resulting in an increased number of lottery draws state in which the number of lottery draws per auxiliary per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment also has an "open extension function" whose function is the main control unit 20. This open extension function is a function that generates an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (open time of the movable wing 47) of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. In the open extension state, the open operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of opening and closing times is extended from, for example, one time (when the open extension function is not in operation) to two times (when the open extension function is in operation), resulting in an operation rate improvement state in which the operation rate of the movable wing 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning at the lower starting port 35 increases, so that the frequency of the start condition of the special pattern variable display game that derives the lottery result of the jackpot is higher than in the normal state, and the game state is more advantageous for the player than in the state in which the open extension function is not activated (not activated). In this regard, the extended open state is also called the "electric chute support state (electric support state)."

By activating one or more of the above functions, it is possible to bring about a change in the internal game state (internal game state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for the sake of convenience, a game state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time-saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time-saving function, and the opening extension function are activated will be referred to as a "probability change state", a game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed from these functions will be referred to as a "time-saving state", a game state in which at least the special symbol probability change function is activated and the opening extension function is not activated (in this embodiment, a game state in which only the special symbol probability change function is activated) will be referred to as a "latent probability state", and a state in which all functions are not activated (non-activated) will be referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, if we look at the probability of winning a jackpot in these game states, when the game state is the "time-saving state" or "normal state", the probability of winning a jackpot is a "low probability state (normal probability)", and when the game state is the "latent state" or "probable state", the probability of winning a jackpot is a "high probability state". During a jackpot related to the operation of the condition device, a winning game occurs in which the jackpot opening is opened and closed, but all of the above functions are inactive, and the game is basically in the same game state as the above normal state, and the variable display of the special symbols is suspended.

(High base play state)
In this embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbols, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time-saving function, and the open extension function, are activated by the same opportunity. However, when the above-mentioned normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time-saving function, and the open extension function are individually considered, when at least one of these functions is activated, the activation rate of the above-mentioned movable wing piece 47 is increased, and the frequency of winning in the lower starting hole 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), so that the game state becomes a "high base game state (starting hole ball entry favorable state)" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game that derives the lottery result of the jackpot or the ball output rate (base) is higher than the normal state. In addition, the "high base gaming state" referred to here refers to a gaming state when a function related to a normal pattern (at least one of the functions of the normal pattern probability change function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the opening extension function) is activated, and is different from a gaming state when a function related to a special pattern, i.e., at least one of the special pattern probability change function and the special pattern time-saving function, is activated.

On the other hand, if you look at the functions related to the special symbols (special symbol probability change function and special symbol time-saving function) individually, when the special symbol probability change function is activated, it becomes a "high probability state" in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal state, and when the special symbol time-saving function is activated, it becomes a "special symbol time-saving state" in which the average execution time of the special symbol change display game (average change time of the special symbol) is shorter than in the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high base game state" in which the frequency of the conditions for starting the special symbol change display game being met is higher than in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high base game state", an electric chute support state with at least an extended opening function is treated as a "high base game state". In this electric chute support state, the operation rate (opening time and number of openings) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 improves, the winning rate at the lower starting hole 35 increases, and the winning frequency per unit time increases, so it is a game state that is advantageous for the player compared to when the electric chute support state is not in place (low base game state). When focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chute support state, if the game state is a "normal state" or a "latent state", it is called "no electric chute support state", and if the game state is a "time-saving state" or a "probable state", it is called "electric chute support state". In this specification, "no electric chute support state" is referred to as a "no electric support state" or a "non-electric support state", and "electric chute support state" is referred to as an "electric support state" or an "electric support state".

(3-2-1. Internal Game Status (Game Status Judgment Number YJ): FIG. 43)
The operation status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and release extension function) that determine the game state is managed by the main control unit 20 side according to the ON/OFF state of the flag corresponding to each function, that is, whether it is activated (5AH) or not (00H). The game state focusing on the operation status of each function is also called the "internal game state". The internal game state of the current internal game state is managed by using an identifier called "game state judgment number YJ". For example, when the game state judgment number YJ is "00H", it specifies "normal state (normal)", when it is "01H", it specifies "probability change state (probability change)", when it is "02H", it specifies "time-saving state (time-saving)", and when it is "03H", it specifies "latent state (latent)".

(3-2-2. Variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode): FIG. 43)
In this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal game state, one internal game state can be further classified and managed. Details will be described later, but for example, the probability variable state includes multiple types of probability variable states such as "probability variable modes 1 to 3", and the time-saving state includes multiple types of time-saving states such as "time-saving modes 1 to 3", and these are managed as different game states using an identifier called "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode". The substance of this "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode" is an identifier (data specifying a variation pattern selection mode) used when selecting a "variation pattern allocation table (see Figures 32 to 42)" corresponding to the current game state. For example, when dividing the special probability state (game state determination number YJ=01H) into "special probability mode 1 to 3," if the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode corresponding to the special probability state (YJ=01H) is set to "01H (special probability mode 1),""02H (special probability mode 2)," and "03H (special probability mode 3)," it becomes possible to select a different fluctuation pattern allocation table for each of the special probability modes 1 to 3.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern allocation table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or more types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbol) are determined in association with at least the current game state (variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode) and the big win lottery result (see S413 in FIG. 12, FIG. 32 to FIG. 42, etc. described later). For example, when the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is "01H", the variation pattern allocation table for the probability variable mode 1 is specified, when it is "02H", the variation pattern allocation table for the probability variable mode 2 is specified, and when it is "03H", the variation pattern allocation table for the probability variable mode 3 is specified. In other words, even if the internal game state is the same "probability variable state", a variation pattern related to a different variation pattern allocation table is selected according to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode being "01H" to "03H".

Therefore, when focusing on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and open extension function) related to determining the probability of winning the jackpot and the presence or absence of electric support, i.e., the "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)," for example, even if it is the same "probability change state," it is possible to select a change pattern for the special symbol change pattern that corresponds to the different game states of "probability change modes 1 to 3" (change pattern allocation designation number Tcode)).

As a result of this, multiple types of "presentation modes" related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode are provided, and the presentation control unit 24 can produce (execute) presentations under each presentation mode. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.

In this way, by managing the "internal game state" that focuses on the functions related to determining the probability of winning the jackpot and the presence or absence of electric support as different from the "game state (variation pattern selection mode)" that focuses on determining the variation pattern of the special symbols (determination of the presentation), it is possible to select a variation pattern of the special symbols that corresponds to a different variation pattern selection mode (for example, variable probability mode 1 to 3) even in the same internal game state (for example, variable probability state). As a result, even in the same internal game state, it is possible to bring about dynamic changes to the duration of the pattern variation display game (variation time of the special symbols) and the presentation related to this.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the types of the "internal game state" include normal state, high probability state, time-saving state, etc. (see the "YJ" column in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the game state related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, that is, the types of game states (game modes) related to the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number Tcode (fluctuation pattern selection mode), include "normal mode", "high probability mode 1", "high probability mode 2", "high probability mode 3", "time-saving mode 1", "time-saving mode 2", "time-saving mode 3", etc., which are more than the types of internal game states (see the "Tcode" column in FIG. 43).

In this specification, unless otherwise necessary, at least the game state related to the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is referred to as a "game mode" (see the "game mode type" column in Figure 43). As shown in Figure 43, this game mode can also be treated as a game state related to the "variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode and game state determination number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, as the "game state viewed as the entire gaming machine". For convenience of explanation, the internal game state and the game mode may not be distinguished and may simply be referred to as a "game state". Furthermore, the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode may be referred to as a "variation pattern selection mode" or simply as "Tcode".

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, a "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to a "normal state" or a "time-saving state" when focusing on the internal game state, and corresponds to a "normal mode" or a "time-saving mode" when focusing on the game mode. A "game state with a high probability state" corresponds to a "probability change state" or a "latent probability state" when focusing on the internal game state, and corresponds to a "probability change mode" or a "latent probability mode" when focusing on the game mode. A "game state with electric support (electric support state)" corresponds to a time-saving state or a probability change state, and corresponds to a "time-saving mode" or a "probability change mode" when focusing on the game mode. A "game state with no electric support" corresponds to a normal state or a potential probability state, and corresponds to a "normal mode" or a "latent probability mode" when focusing on the game mode. Additionally, the "time-saving state" includes the time-saving state caused by a jackpot (jackpot time-saving state), the time-saving state caused by winning the support time-saving prize (support time-saving state), and the time-saving state caused by the activation of the ceiling function described below (ceiling time-saving state), and when referring to the time-saving state, unless otherwise specified, these time-saving states can be applied as appropriate.

＜4. About winning＞
Next, the "win" according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning type (jackpot type, support time reduction type, and loss type), the winning game operation mode, and the destination game state (destination game mode) after the winning game.

(4-1. About the winning types)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the winning types (winning types) of the jackpot lottery target include multiple types of winnings such as "10R variable winning", "4R variable winning", and "4R time-saving winning (4R non-variable winning)". These winnings belong to the "jackpot type" that triggers the operation of the condition device, and are different from the winnings (small winnings) that belong to the so-called "small winning type" that does not trigger the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" refers to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of a special device continuous operation device (a device that continuously operates special electric devices) for playing a round game, and which operates when a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or when a game ball passes through a specific area in the large prize opening (excluding those that win the large prize opening while the special device continuous operation device is operating). In addition, the operation of the special device continuous operation device is a condition for generating an electric support state (open extension function operation) or a probability fluctuation (transition from one internal game state to another internal game state).

Therefore, when a "small win" is won, the condition device does not operate, and the consecutive operation device of the role does not operate either, so there is no transition of the internal game state (the transition control of the internal game state due to the winning of a small win is not performed). However, the transition control of the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be performed. In addition, in the winning game due to the small win (small win game), the consecutive operation device of the role does not operate, so a round game like a big win is not executed, but it is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed by determining the opening and closing pattern of the big prize opening. By using such a transition form, for example, when the game state after a small win game and the game state after another big win game are transitioned to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), both can be made to stay in a presentation mode that performs the same presentation. It is also possible to transition from the first variation pattern selection mode to the second variation pattern selection mode, or from the second variation pattern selection mode back to the first variation pattern selection mode, due to a small win.

The operation mode of the small win game is basically the same as the big win game, except that the round game is not executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start INT has elapsed, an "opening and closing action game (pseudo round game)" that opens the big prize entrance is executed, and when the opening and closing action game ends, a series of small win games ends after a predetermined end INT. Such a small win is a winning type that is a transition trigger (execution trigger) of a winning game (special game state) that involves the opening and closing action of the big prize entrance like a big win, and is different in nature from a simple "miss". Note that in this embodiment, there is no "small win", but one or more types of small wins can be set for the lottery target on the special chart 1 side and/or special chart 2 side in consideration of gameplay etc.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the content of the winning games based on each of the above winnings will be explained.

The "10R sure-variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and a maximum opening time of the large prize entry port in one round of play set to a "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)" that is likely to reach the maximum number of prizes (10) in the large prize entry port. In addition, the "4R sure-variable jackpot" and the "4R time-saving jackpot" are jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a maximum opening time of the large prize entry port in one round of play set to a "long opening time" similar to the 10R sure-variable jackpot. The profit state (profit degree) during jackpot play increases the relatively larger the maximum number of rounds, and the longer the maximum opening time of the large prize entry port. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, so the more the maximum number of rounds a jackpot has, the higher the profit state during jackpot play.

The opening pattern of the large prize opening for round play can be freely determined. For example, the opening pattern of the large prize opening for at least some round play (round play for a specific number of rounds) can be set to a "short opening time (e.g., 1.8 seconds)" that is shorter than the long opening time described above, or an even shorter "ultra-short opening time (e.g., 0.2 seconds)." In addition, the large prize opening can be kept open during the maximum opening time, or can be set to an opening pattern involving one or more closures (e.g., "1.3 seconds open + 0.5 seconds closed + 27 seconds open").

(4-3. Regarding the game state to which you transition after winning)
Next, the game state to which the game is transferred after each of the jackpot games is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 4. In the "game state at the time of winning/transition game state" column shown in FIG. 4, the relationship between the game state at the time of winning and the game state to which the game is transferred after the winning game (transition game state) is shown according to the type of winning. Note that the "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the type of internal game state at the time of winning (the type of corresponding game mode is shown in parentheses), and the "transition game state" indicates the type of internal game state to which the game is transferred (the type of corresponding game mode is shown in parentheses). Details of the game mode to which the game is transferred will be described later.

(If you win the 10R or 4R jackpot)
In the case of a "10R probability variable jackpot" or a "4R probability variable jackpot", regardless of the game state at the time of the winning, the game will transition to a "probability variable state" after the jackpot game. These jackpots are called "probability variable jackpots" because they are jackpots that trigger a transition to the probability variable state.

When the game is switched to the "probable state", it can continue until the special symbol change display game is played a specified number of times (number of symbol changes) or until a jackpot is won within the specified number of times. If the special symbol change display game ends without winning a jackpot within the specified number of times, the probable state ends and the game transitions to the normal state from the next game. Note that whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of times that special symbol change display games 1 and 2 are played (number of symbol changes for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) (the same applies to the time-saving state described below). In other words, the probable state ends when the total number of times that special symbol change display games 1 and 2 are played (total number of symbol changes for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) is reached a specified number of times without a jackpot.

In this embodiment, after the game state is transitioned to one in which the probability of winning a jackpot is at least high (probability state or potential probability state), if the special symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot (excluding "small jackpots" which do not trigger a transition of the internal game state), the high probability state is terminated and the probability of winning a jackpot is transitioned to a low probability state, making it a "limited probability type" "number-limited probability change machine (ST machine)". Hereinafter, as necessary, the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation display game (number of times the special symbol changes) in which this high probability state continues is referred to as the "ST number of times".

Therefore, when the probability of a change is reached, there are two cases: as in this embodiment, the probability of a change is ended when the number of ST rounds is completed, and the game is transferred to the normal state (YJ = 00H) (probability → normal), and unlike this embodiment, there are cases where only the high probability state ends when the number of ST rounds is completed, specifically, there are cases where only the "special symbol probability of a change function" ends out of the "special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol probability of a change function, normal symbol time-saving function, and open extension function", and the game is transferred to the "time-saving state (YJ = 02H)" (probability → time-saving). In this embodiment, the number of ST rounds is set to 65,535 (see note (3) in Figure 4), and due to the probability of winning the lottery, the probability of a change is essentially guaranteed until the next big win, and the game is treated as "infinite probability of a change", but in reality, if the number of ST rounds of 65,535 is completed without winning a big win, the game will be transferred to the normal state.

Whether the number of STs is infinite (including the number of STs that can continue until the next jackpot is won) or finite can be determined appropriately according to the game characteristics. When the number of STs is set to a finite value, it is necessary to take into consideration that "it is not the number of STs that can continue until the next jackpot is won", and for example, if the denominator of the high probability jackpot winning probability (value of the probability denominator) is "F1" and the number of STs is "F2 (natural number)", it is preferable to set the number of STs to satisfy "0 < F2 < F1 (any number of STs less than the probability denominator)" or "F1 ≦ F2 ≦ 5 x F1 (within 1 to 5 times the probability denominator: any number of STs with a consecutive win rate of approximately 63% to 99%)".

(If you win the 4R time-saving jackpot)
In the case of a "4R time-saving jackpot", regardless of the game state at the time of the winning, the game will transition to a "time-saving state" after the jackpot game. These jackpots are called "time-saving jackpots" because they are jackpots that trigger a transition to the time-saving state.

When the game is switched to the "time-saving state", the number of times the special symbol change display game is executed continues until the end of a specified number of times, and when the special symbol change display game ends without winning a jackpot (excluding a small jackpot that does not trigger a transition to the internal game state) within the specified number of times, the time-saving state ends and the game is switched to the normal state from the next game. In the case of this embodiment, the specified number of times (time-saving times) related to the time-saving state includes the time-saving state related to the "support time-saving" described later, and includes "100 times (support time-saving A, time-saving jackpot: finite time-saving), " ", "200 times (support time-saving B: finite time-saving), " and "65535 times (support time-saving C: infinite time-saving that can continue until the next jackpot is won)" (see note (2) in FIG. 4). Here, one type of time-saving jackpot, "4R time-saving jackpot", is provided as the time-saving jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different times of time-saving may be provided. In this case, at least one time-saving jackpot may be the same as the number of time-saving times caused by the supported time-saving, and the other time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-saving times caused by the supported time-saving. Also, all time-saving jackpots may be different from the number of time-saving times caused by the supported time-saving.

The number of time-saving times for a time-saving jackpot can be set to infinite (including the number of time-saving times that can continue until the next jackpot) or finite, depending on the game's characteristics. When setting the number of time-saving times to a finite value, it is necessary to take into consideration the fact that "it is not the number of time-saving times that can continue until the next jackpot is won," and it is preferable to set the number of time-saving times to satisfy "0 < F3 < F4 (any number of time-saving times less than the probability denominator)" or "F3 ≦ F4 ≦ 5 x F3 (any number of time-saving times within 1 to 5 times the probability denominator: consecutive win rate of approximately 63% to 99%)" when, for example, the denominator of the jackpot winning probability at low probability (value of probability denominator) is F3 and the number of time-saving times is F4 (natural number).

(About losing)
As shown in the figure, the special drawing 1 side has multiple types of misses A, B, and C, each with a different pattern selection rate. In this embodiment, the relationship is "miss A>miss B>miss C", for example, miss A is 95%, miss B is 4%, and miss C is 1%. Note that the special drawing 2 side shows an example in which one type of miss A is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple types of misses may be provided.

(Regarding reduced support hours)
In this embodiment, as one aspect of the addiction rescue function (supporting bonus), or for the purpose of expanding the freedom of gameplay and improving the fun of the game, a "support time-saving" is provided that provides a "time-saving state" without triggering a jackpot win (time-saving jackpot win). This "support time-saving" has a major feature in that the time-saving state is provided without going through a jackpot win (condition device operation, role continuous operation device operation) (without going through a jackpot game).

(A. Special Telephone Activated Support Time Reduction)
When the "support time reduction" is won, the condition device is not operated (since the condition device is not operated, the continuous role operation device is not operated either), but the special electric role is operated to execute the opening and closing action game (opening and closing the large prize entrance in a predetermined opening pattern) in the same way as when the "small win" is won, and then the time reduction state may be granted. In this specification, the support time reduction that activates the special electric role is called "special electric operation type support time reduction", and the series of opening and closing action games that result from this are called "support time reduction opening and closing game". This support time reduction opening and closing game can be configured to include a predetermined start INT, an opening and closing action game that opens and closes the large prize entrance in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and a predetermined end INT, just like the small win game. Therefore, when the "special electric operation type support time reduction" is won, the time reduction state will be granted through the support time reduction opening and closing game.

In short, the above-mentioned "special electric activation type support time reduction" includes support time reduction that imparts a time-saving state via a small win (small win winning type support time reduction), and support time reduction that imparts a time-saving state via a win of a different type from the small win type (time-saving pattern winning type support time reduction). The former "small win winning type support time reduction" is suitable for cases where you want to set up a special electric activation type support time reduction that imparts a time-saving state via a conventional small win game. On the other hand, the latter "time-saving pattern winning type support time reduction" is suitable for cases where you want to manage the small win type and the support time reduction type separately, for example, when you want to control the small win game related to the small win and the support time reduction opening game related to the special electric activation type support time reduction separately, or when you do not have a small win at all. In addition, the types of time-saving pattern winning support time-saving include support time-saving that provides a time-saving state without activating a special electric device (without playing the support time-saving opening and closing game), such as the "special electric non-operating support time-saving" described below.Whether to provide a small win type support time-saving or a time-saving pattern winning type support time-saving, and whether to provide one or more of each type of support time-saving, can be determined appropriately according to the gameplay.

(When small hits and special electric activation type support time reduction are provided)
In the case of providing a "small win (herein meaning a "simple small win (hereinafter referred to as a "normal small win")" that does not provide a time-saving state)" and a "special electric activation type support time-saving", if the mode of the small win game and the support time-saving open/close game (the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening and closing, and the performance during the game (opening performance (performance during the start INT), ending performance (performance during the end INT), right-hit instruction performance (launch induction notification performance), etc.)) are the same or similar, it is possible to keep which one has been won a secret state (support time-saving winning secret state). This allows the player to have a sense of expectation as to whether he has won a normal small win or a support time-saving. In particular, it is preferable to make at least a part of the performance during the pattern change (changing performance) in the case of winning a small win and in the case of winning a special electric activation type support time-saving a common performance, and to make it possible to keep secret for a predetermined period of time whether the small win or the support time-saving win has been won in terms of performance. For example, in at least a part of the period during the change and the winning game period (small winning game and support time-saving open/close game), the winning is hidden in terms of the performance. More preferably, a common winning change pattern can be selected when a small winning is won and when a support time-saving is won, and the performance during the change is a common performance mode. Then, during the winning game period executed after the winning change ends, the performance mode can be notified as to whether a small winning or support time-saving has been won. Note that the "common performance" here can also include a combination of stop decoration patterns. For example, when the decoration pattern related to the small winning is "123", the decoration pattern related to the support time-saving winning is also "123", and it is preferable to conceal which has been won from the stop pattern of the decoration pattern. Of course, it is also possible to configure it so that it is possible to notify (recognize by the player) which one has been won by appearance or presentation, by varying the presentation during the fluctuation, by varying the opening pattern of the large prize opening, or by varying the start INT and/or end INT (opening presentation and/or ending presentation).

In addition, when multiple types of small win types including small win type support time reduction are provided, the configurations can be as follows (Small 1) to (Small 3).
(Small 1) At least one of the multiple small wins can be made to function as a "normal small win", and the remaining small wins can be made to function as a "small win type support time reduction". For example, if multiple small wins A, B, and C are provided, small win A and small win B can function as "small win type support time reduction", and small win C can function as a "normal small win". In this case, for "small win A" and "small win B" that function as small win type support time reduction, the same time reduction number may be given to both, or different time reduction numbers (for example, 1000 time reduction numbers for small win A and 100 time reduction numbers for small win B) may be given. Regarding the probability of winning a small win, taking into consideration the degree of advantage (profit state) for the player, when the same or approximately the same (hereinafter, when simply referred to as "same" it may mean approximately the same) number of time-saving times are given for small wins A and B, it is preferable to set the winning probability to satisfy the relationship of "small win C < small win B ≦ small win A", and when the number of time-saving times given for small win A is greater than that for small win B, it is preferable to set the winning probability to satisfy the relationship of "small win C < small win B < small win A". In addition, in the case of winning a normal small win (small win C) and winning a small win type support time-saving (in this example, small win A and/or small win B), the above-mentioned support time-saving winning concealment state may be implemented.
(Small 2) Any of the support time-saving A, B, and C shown in Figure 4 can be a small win type support time-saving (in each figure, support time-saving A to C can be read as small wins A to C and applied as appropriate). For example, if you win small win A, you can be granted 100 time-saving times (small win A = the same time-saving performance as support time-saving A), if you win small win B, you can be granted 200 time-saving times (small win B = the same time-saving performance as support time-saving B), and if you win small win C, you can be granted 65535 time-saving times (small win C = the same time-saving performance as support time-saving C).
(Small 3) In the case where multiple small win type support time shortening are provided, if a specific small win type support time shortening is won during the time shortening state, a new number of time shortening times can be set (updated) (the same applies to the above-mentioned (Small 1) and (Small 2) cases). For example, in the case of a small win type support time shortening in which a small win A grants 1000 times of time shortening times and a small win B grants 100 times of time shortening times, if a small win B is won during the time shortening state, the number of time shortening times can be set to 100 times, and if a small win A granting more times of time shortening times than a small win B is won, the number of time shortening times can be configured not to be set. More specifically, for example, if a small win B (100 times of time shortening times) is won at the 30th time of the current remaining time shortening times, a new number of time shortening times of 100 times is set in the winning game, and the remaining number of time shortening times is updated to 100 times. However, if a small win A (1000 times the time-saving feature) is won, a new number of times the time-saving feature is not set, the current small win A is considered invalid (it can be treated as a miss), and the number of games played this time is subtracted from the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is available (remaining number of times the time-saving feature is reduced by 1).

(B. Special Telephone Non-operating Support Time Reduction)
In addition, as a form of support time reduction different from the above-mentioned "special electric activation type support time reduction," it is also possible to transition to the time reduction state (1) after the winning game ends (after the special symbol variation time ends, or after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed), or (2) at the start of the next game, without activating the special electric device. In this specification, this type of support time reduction is referred to as "special electric non-activation type support time reduction."

It is up to you to choose whether to adopt one or more of the above-mentioned special electric power activation type support time reductions or special electric power non-activation type support time reductions, or to adopt one or more of both types of support time reductions. In this embodiment, we will mainly explain an example in which the "special electric power non-activation type support time reduction" is adopted.

The "support time reduction" according to this embodiment is subject to a lottery for a big win, and like a big win, it is set to be won with a certain probability (for example, about 1/500) (a form subject to a lottery for winning or losing). In detail, the lottery for winning or losing will select either a "big win", a "support time reduction", or a "miss" (including a "small win" if a small win is provided), and if the "support time reduction" is won, then the type of support time reduction (for example, one of support time reductions A to C) is determined by lottery through a pattern lottery (see the remarks column (4) in FIG. 4). Note that the lottery probability for the support time reduction is the same for all setting values, but each setting value may have a different lottery probability, or some of the setting values may have the same lottery probability.

(Support time reduction performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, multiple types of support time-saving A, B, and C are provided on the special chart 1 side, and multiple types of support time-saving B and C are provided on the special chart 2 side. When a support time-saving is selected by lottery, one of the support time-savings is determined by a pattern lottery based on a predetermined pattern lottery rate (see the pattern lottery rate column in FIG. 4). In addition, the support time-savings A to C each have different time-saving performance. Specifically, they are as follows. In addition, the time-saving performance means the number of time-savings and/or the operation mode of the normal power opening game during the time-saving state, and basically means the profit state (degree of advantage) due to the number of time-savings and the operation mode of the normal power opening game during the time-saving state. For example, if the operation mode of the normal power opening game in the time-saving state by the support time-saving A (time-saving number of 100 times) and the time-saving state by the support time-saving B (time-saving number of 200 times) is the same, the relationship of the time-saving performance is "support time-saving A < support time-saving B".

(A) If you win the ``Support Time-Saving A'' option, you will be granted 100 time-saving rounds, the same number of time-saving rounds as those granted by a jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) (small bonus).
(B) If you win the "Support Time-Saving B" option, you will be awarded 200 time-saving rounds, which is more than the time-saving rounds awarded by a jackpot (medium bonus).
(C) If you win "Support Time-saving C", you will be granted 65,535 times of time-saving (effectively continuing until the next jackpot), which is more than the time-saving state granted by the jackpot (big bonus). If the number of time-saving times is set to 65,535, due to the probability of winning the jackpot, it will be considered an "infinite time-saving" in which the time-saving state is guaranteed until the next jackpot is won.
Strictly speaking, infinite time-saving means that the number of times the time-saving is performed is "unlimited (infinite)," but in this specification, the number of times the time-saving is performed that essentially guarantees the time-saving state until the next big win (for example, 10,000 times or 65,535 times) is treated as belonging to "infinite time-saving." In addition, when the number of times the time-saving is given that cannot be consumed during the business hours of the pachinko parlor (for example, about 5,000 times) can be given, it can also be treated as belonging to "infinite time-saving."

(Regarding the probability of winning the time-saving support option on machines with multiple setting stages)
In the case of a gaming machine with a setting function (10,000 Stones 1), the probability of winning a jackpot varies according to a number of setting values (in this embodiment, settings 1 to 6) (see FIG. 4), but the probability of winning the support time-saving bonus can be a common winning probability regardless of the setting value. In this embodiment, the winning probability is 1/200 for setting 1, 1/196 for setting 2, 1/192 for setting 3, 1/188 for setting 4, 1/184 for setting 5, and 1/180 for setting 6, but the winning probability of the support time-saving bonus can be, for example, 1/300, which is common to all settings. If the winning probability of the support time-saving bonus is common to all settings, the following configurations (20,000 Stones 2) to (70,000 Stones 3) to (70,000 Stones 4) to (70,000 Stones 5) can be used.

(Mankoku 2) The winning probability of the support time-saving can be set based on the minimum setting 1. For example, if the winning probability of the jackpot at the minimum setting 1 is 1/M and the winning probability of the support time-saving is 1/N, it can be set to satisfy the following relational expression (red 1).
"1/M<1/N" ... (red 1)
In the case of the formula "red 1", the probability of winning the support time reduction can be made higher than the probability of winning the jackpot at least in the lowest setting 1. It should be noted that "1/M = 1/N" may also be used.

(Mankoku 3) In addition, if the probability of winning a jackpot at the lowest setting 1 is 1/M, the probability of winning a jackpot at the highest setting 6 is 1/L, and the probability of winning the support time reduction is 1/N, then they can be determined to satisfy the following relationship (red 2).
"1/M<1/N<1/L" ... (red 2)
In the case of the formula "red 2", for example, it is possible to set the probability of winning the support time-saving function higher than the probability of winning the jackpot at the lowest setting of 1, and to set the probability of winning the support time-saving function lower than the probability of winning the jackpot at the high setting range of settings 4 to 6. In this case, the relationship between the probability of winning the support time-saving function and the probability of winning the jackpot can be set high or low depending on the setting value. This increases the variety of playability in a gaming machine with a setting function, making the game more interesting.

(Mankoku 4) In addition, the winning probability of the support time-saving feature (which is a common probability for all settings) can be determined based on the highest setting of 6. For example, if the winning probability of the jackpot for the highest setting of 6 is 1/L and the winning probability of the support time-saving feature is 1/N, the following relationship (red 3) can be satisfied.
"1/L<1/N" ... (red 3)
In the case of the formula "red 3", the probability of winning the support time-saving bonus can be set to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot at least in the highest setting of 6. In this case, even if the setting value is different, it is possible to create a gameplay in which it is easy to win the support time-saving bonus.

(Mankoku 5) In addition, the winning probability of the support time-saving bonus (which is a common probability for all settings) can be determined based on a setting value other than the lowest setting 1 and the highest setting 6. For example, if the winning probability of the jackpot for the intermediate setting value 3 (which can also be setting 2 or setting 4) is 1/G and the winning probability of the support time-saving bonus is 1/N, the following relationship formula (red 4) or formula (red 5) can be satisfied.
"1/N<1/G" ... (Red 4)
"1/G<1/N" ... (red 5)

(Mankoku 6) In addition, if the probability of winning a jackpot at the lowest setting 1 is 1/M, the probability of winning a jackpot at setting value 3 in the intermediate setting range is 1/G, and the probability of winning the support time reduction is 1/N, then the following relationship (red 6) can be determined to be satisfied.
"1/M<1/N<1/G" ... (red 6)

(Manseki 7) The standard setting value (standard setting value) can be set as appropriate. The winning probability of the support time-saving can be higher or lower than the winning probability of the standard setting value. The winning probability of the support time-saving and the winning probability of the standard setting value may be the same or approximately the same. In any case, the winning probability of the support time-saving can be set based on the winning probability of the standard setting value.

It is up to the player to decide whether to adopt one or more types of support time shortening. There are also no particular restrictions on what type of time-saving performance the support time shortening has on which special chart side. For example, at least one of support time shortening A-C may be provided on the special chart 1 side and/or the special chart 2 side, or at least one of support time shortening A-C may be provided on only one special chart side, and no support time shortening at all may be provided on the other special chart side.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is easier to win a support time-saving bonus with relatively high time-saving performance on the special chart 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special chart 1 side (upper starting port 34 side), and it is also easier to win a jackpot with relatively high jackpot performance (10R sure-win jackpot). Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the special chart 2 side.

In the illustration, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, if support time-saving A, B, or C is won, the time-saving state will be changed to 100 times (finite time-saving), 200 times (finite time-saving), or 65,535 times (infinite time-saving), respectively. However, taking advantage of the special nature of "support time-saving," it is also possible to configure it as shown below in (Structure A) to (Structure G).

(Structure A: Fall prevention function)
In order to prevent a "downward transition" situation, such as transitioning to a less profitable time-saving state, the following configurations (α1) to (α4) can be adopted.
(α1) After the infinite time reduction is granted, if the player wins a support time reduction that grants a finite time reduction (for example, 100 times or 200 times), the infinite time reduction is maintained. For example, if the player wins support time reduction A (100 times of time reduction) or support time reduction B (200 times) during the infinite time reduction, the number of times of time reduction is not updated.
(α2) At least during a game state with electric support (time-saving state or probability change state), the support time-saving is excluded from the lottery. Specifically, when the support time-saving is won during a game state with electric support (time-saving state, probability change state), the winning is treated as invalid and the time-saving state due to the support time-saving is not granted (hereinafter, the time-saving state due to the support time-saving is also referred to as the "support time-saving state"), or the support time-saving is treated as invalid by executing a jackpot lottery in which the support time-saving is excluded from the lottery, and the time-saving state due to the support time-saving is not granted. In the former case, when the support time-saving is won, the same processing as when a loss is won can be performed (in the case where multiple types of losses are provided, the same processing as when any of the losses is won can be performed). In the latter case, the support time-saving is excluded from the jackpot lottery, so that the lottery form does not include the win of the support time-saving itself. In addition, at least during a game state involving a high probability state (high probability state or potential probability state), the support time reduction may be excluded from the lottery (the lottery for the support time reduction itself does not have to be held).
(α3) It may be configured so that the time-saving state (support time-saving state) due to the support time-saving is not given only during the probability change state. Since the probability change state (high probability state + electric support state) is a more advantageous game state than the time-saving state (low probability state + electric support state), if the support time-saving state is given indiscriminately during the probability change state, the game state will fall. Note that if the number of STs is not infinite but is finite (for example, finite probability change such as STs of 100 times or STs of 50 times), the next jackpot is not guaranteed during the ST depending on the number of STs, that is, the probability of consecutive jackpots during ST may be low (for example, the consecutive jackpot rate during ST is about 30% to 50%). In such a case, the number of times the time-saving support is provided and the degree of benefit from the limited probability bonus (the degree of advantage to the player (the state of benefit (degree of benefit) provided to the player)) may be taken into consideration, and the support time-saving support state may be provided even during the probability bonus state. For example, taking into consideration the probability of winning a jackpot (taking into consideration the so-called "TS" value), even if the time-saving state is entered, the winning of the support time-saving support state which can provide the number of times the time-saving support state which can highly expect the next jackpot to be won during the time-saving state (for example, the consecutive win rate is about 95% to 99%) does not have to be treated as invalid. For example, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot at the time of low probability is 1/180 to 1/200 (setting 6 to setting 1), and when support time-saving support A (time-saving number of times 100), support time-saving support B (time-saving number of times 200), and infinite time-saving support (time-saving number of times 65,535) are provided, the consecutive win rates during each time-saving state are , respectively, about 42.7% to 39.4% (time-saving times 100 times), about 67.2% to 63.3% (time-saving times 200 times), and about 100% (time-saving times 65,535 times). The support time-saving C that grants infinite time-saving has a consecutive win rate of about 100%, that is, during the time-saving state, it grants a privilege that can practically guarantee the next big win, so the support time-saving C does not need to be treated as invalid even during the probability of winning. Also, as mentioned above, if the support time-saving that can grant the number of time-saving times that can be expected to win the next big win during the time-saving state, for example, the number of time-saving times that is three times or more the TS (1/240) of setting 1 (time-saving times 720 times or more), can grant a consecutive win rate of about 95% or more in settings 1 to 6. Such a support time-saving that grants a finite time-saving does not need to be treated as invalid even during the probability of winning.
(α4) In this embodiment, when the electric support state is reached, a situation may occur where a "right hit" is made and a lottery is drawn on the special chart 2 side, allowing for a consecutive jackpot state to be aimed for. Therefore, in order to prevent a fall transition from occurring when a lottery is drawn on the special chart 2 side, it is preferable that the special chart 2 side (1) does not have a support time reduction, (2) has a support time reduction that grants infinite time reduction, or (3) has a support time reduction that grants more time reductions than the time reduction jackpot (in this embodiment, the number of time reductions is more than 100).

(Structure B: Added function)
(I-20) If the support time-saving is selected during the time-saving state, the current remaining number of time-saving times is added (the current time-saving number counter is configured to be able to add the number of time-saving times by the support time-saving). For example, if the support time-saving A is selected when the remaining number of time-saving times is 50, the number of time-saving times is updated to "50 times + 100 times = 150 times remaining". In addition, support time-saving that can be added and support time-saving that cannot be added may be provided. For example, if the support time-saving A is selected, the number is added, but if the support time-saving B is selected, the number is not added. The addition function can widen the range of playability and improve the fun of the game. In addition, it can increase the player's interest in the game.
(Means for limiting the number of times time-saving is added)
In addition, in order to prevent excessive addition, the number of times of addition may not be more than a predetermined number (time-saving number of addition limiting means). For example, the upper limit number of times of time-saving by addition may be set to "300 times". When the remaining number of time-saving times is 150, if the support time-saving B (time-saving 200 times) is won, the number is not limited to "remaining number of time-saving times 150 times + 200 times = 350 times", but is limited to the upper limit number of "300 times". Even if the addition limit is set, if the support time-saving C that grants infinite time-saving is won, the limit may be lifted and infinite time-saving (65,535 times) may be granted so as not to give the player a feeling of losing out. In addition, when an additional number of times the time-saving feature has been added, it is preferable to execute an "additional notification effect" that notifies (increases) the number of times the time-saving feature has been added, such as "+50!" or "+100!", in addition to the number of times notified (displayed) by the "remaining time-saving feature (for example, a countdown display)" described below, which notifies (increases) the number of times the time-saving feature has been added.

(Structure C: Infinite/Limited Time-saving Promotion Function)
When the support time-saving is won during the time-saving state, the infinite time-saving can be granted (time-saving state promotion means). In addition, when the time-saving state is due to the infinite time-saving, the number of time-saving times may not be updated even if the support time-saving is won, or may be updated. In addition, instead of granting the infinite time-saving, a predetermined number of time-saving times may be granted. For example, when the support time-saving B is won during the time-saving state, 200 time-saving times are originally granted, but when the time-saving state is won during the time-saving state, a greater number of time-saving times, for example, 300 time-saving times, may be granted. In addition, the maximum number of time-saving times granted by the jackpot and/or the support time-saving may be granted. In the case of this embodiment, the infinite time-saving (65535 times) is the maximum number of time-saving times, so the infinite time-saving is granted. In addition, only when a specific support time-saving is won during the time-saving state, the infinite time-saving or a predetermined number of time-saving times may be granted. For example, if the support time-saving A (high probability of winning) is won, only 100 times of time-saving are awarded, but if the support time-saving B (low probability of winning) is won, infinite time-saving may be awarded. In addition, if the number of time-saving times increases, it is preferable to make the above-mentioned "additional notification effect" appear.

(Structure D: About time-saving jackpots and support time-saving according to special patterns)
If the number of types of support time reduction on the special chart 1 side is "X" and the number of types of support time reduction on the special chart 2 side is "Y", it can be configured to satisfy the following relationship (i).
"X" = "Y", "X"<"Y", or "X">"Y"... (a)
In addition, as long as the above relational formula (i) is satisfied, it is also possible to set "X = 0 (no support time reduction on the Special Drawing 1 side)" or "Y = 0 (no support time reduction on the Special Drawing 1 side)".
In addition, one or more types of support time-saving with the same time-saving performance (time-saving number) may be provided on the special chart 1 side and the special chart 2 side (for example, support time-saving B is provided on special charts 1 and 2), or one or more types of support time-saving with different time-saving performance may be provided (for example, support time-saving C is provided on special chart 1, and support time-saving B is provided on special chart 2). In addition, the support time-saving may be a finite time-saving or an infinite time-saving, and there is no particular limit to the number of types.
In addition, when a time-saving jackpot is provided on the special chart 1 side and/or special chart 2 side, a time-saving jackpot with the same time-saving performance as the support time-saving jackpot may be provided, or a time-saving jackpot with different time-saving performance may be provided.For example, when a "time-saving jackpot" and a "support time-saving" are provided on one special chart side, these may have the same time-saving performance or different time-saving performance.
In the case of this embodiment, during the electric support, the right hit is favorable, that is, it is easier to receive the lottery on the special chart 2 side, so it is preferable to set the support time reduction on the special chart 2 side to a support time reduction with higher time reduction performance than the special chart 1 side. In addition, when providing a support time reduction and a jackpot that essentially provides a time reduction state that is treated as an infinite time reduction, it is preferable to standardize the number of time reductions (for example, 65,535 times) set as the "infinite time reduction" to reduce the control burden.

(Structure E, Structure F: About the lottery probability of the support time reduction)
(Structure E) The winning probability of the support time-saving can be determined according to the set value. For example, the lower the set value is, the higher the winning probability of the support time-saving can be. In this case, the lower the setting, the more the player can benefit from the support time-saving, which can contribute to avoiding getting stuck. Also, the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability of the support time-saving can be. In this case, the higher the setting, the higher the ball output rate can be, without making a difference in the winning probability of the jackpot according to the set value.
(Structure F) The winning probability of the support time reduction (if there are multiple support time reductions, the combined winning probability may be used) is preferably the same or approximately the same as the winning probability of the jackpot at low probability, and preferably lower than that. This is because the support time reduction is a "support-like privilege", and it is preferable not to allow it to be won at an unnecessarily high probability. For example, in the case of setting 1, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/200 (see FIG. 4), so it is preferable to set the winning probability of the support time reduction to the same or approximately the same as 1/200, or to a lower probability (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/500). Note that if it is the same or approximately the same as the winning probability of the jackpot of the setting value that can be set on the gaming machine, or if it is lower than that, the winning probability of the support time reduction will not be excessively high, so it is not necessarily necessary to use the winning probability of the jackpot of a specific setting value, for example, the winning probability of the jackpot of the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6 as the standard.

(Construction Group: Regarding support time-saving opening and closing games using special-electricity-activated support time-saving devices)
In the case where a plurality of special electric operation support time reductions are provided, the support time reduction opening and closing game modes corresponding to each support time reduction may be the same, but at least one of each support time reduction may be different. For example, in the support time reduction opening and closing game by support time reductions A to C, the opening pattern of the large prize winning hole is made different. Specifically, the opening time of the large prize winning hole 50 is 0.4 seconds for support time reduction A, 0.8 seconds for support time reduction B, and 1.8 seconds for support time reduction C. In this case, the number of winning balls obtained by the support time reduction opening and closing game can be made different. In this way, when the opening pattern of the large prize winning hole is different according to the type of support time reduction, there is an advantage that the support time reductions with different advantageous degrees (profit states) can be made even if the number of time reductions to be granted is the same.

(Regarding the number of hours of work reduction provided under the support system)
Here, when granting finite time reduction or infinite time reduction by support time reduction, the grant forms (Ω1) to (Ω4) as follows can be given.

(Limited time-saving grant form Ω1)
In the case where there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot (number of time-saving times granted due to a jackpot win), the number of types of the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is set to a smaller number (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B < number of types A". For example, if two types (number of types A) of 100 times (number of time-saving times A) and 50 times (number of time-saving times B) are provided as the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot, it is configured to grant only one type of time-saving times due to the support time-saving (for example, 100 times of time-saving). Note that, if the relationship of "number of types B < number of types A" is satisfied, a time-saving number different from the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot may be granted as the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving. In addition, two or more types of the number of time-saving times (time-saving states) due to the support time-saving may be provided (in this case, the relationship of "2 ≦ number of types B < number of types A" is set).

(Limited time-saving grant form Ω2)
If the average number of times time is reduced due to a jackpot is N and the average number of times time is reduced due to support time reduction is M, the configuration can be made to satisfy the relationships in (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) below.
(Formula 1) The relationship of "average time-saving number N < average time-saving number M" is satisfied. For example, if the number of time-saving times due to the time-saving jackpot is 100 times and 75 times, the average time-saving number N is 75 times, so the average time-saving number M due to the support time-saving is set to a number of time-saving times greater than this (for example, 100 times). In this case, the time-saving state due to the support time-saving is more profitable than the time-saving state due to the jackpot, so it can be a welcome support benefit for players who are addicted. The average time-saving number M may be an infinite number.
It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time-saving times N = average number of time-saving times M" (Formula 2). In this case, the time-saving state due to a jackpot and the time-saving state due to support time-saving will have the same degree of profit. In addition, both the time-saving state due to a jackpot and the time-saving state due to support time-saving may include "infinite time-saving." In this case, too, "average number of time-saving times N (infinite times) = average number of time-saving times M (infinite times)" is satisfied, and (Formula 2) is satisfied.
(Formula 3) The relationship of "average time-saving count N>average time-saving count M" is satisfied. In this case, the time-saving state by the support time-saving is relatively less profitable than the time-saving state by the jackpot, so the support time-saving can be positioned as a "support benefit" that does not give excessive benefits. Note that the time-saving state by the jackpot may include "infinite time-saving", and in this case, the time-saving state by the support time-saving does not include "infinite time-saving".

(Limited time-saving grant form Ω3)
(4) As with the above formula 3, in order to avoid excessive bonuses, the number of time reductions can be set to satisfy the relationships (4α) and (4β) below.
(4α) Determine the number of time-saving times that satisfies the relationship of at least "the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving ≦ the maximum number of time-saving times due to the jackpot". In this example, the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is set to be equal to or less than the number of time-saving times due to the time-saving jackpot (for example, the number of time-saving times due to the 4R time-saving jackpot is 100 times). For example, the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is 100 times, 90 times, 70 times, etc.
(4β) In addition, when multiple time-saving jackpots with different time-saving times are provided, the time-saving times may be set to satisfy the relationship of "minimum time-saving times due to jackpot MIN≦time-saving times due to support time-saving ≦maximum time-saving times due to jackpot MAX" by focusing on the minimum time-saving times MIN and the maximum time-saving times MAX due to the time-saving jackpot. For example, when multiple time-saving jackpots 1-2 are provided and the time-saving times due to the time-saving jackpot 1 is set to 100 times and the time-saving times due to the time-saving jackpot 2 is set to 50 times, the time-saving times due to the support time-saving can be set to be 50 times or more due to the time-saving jackpot 2, and 100 times or less due to the time-saving jackpot 1. For example, the time-saving times due to the support time-saving can be 60 times, 99 times, etc.
In addition, the time-saving state due to a jackpot may include "infinite time-saving", and in this case, the time-saving state due to the support time-saving does not include "infinite time-saving". In addition, the minimum number of time-saving times due to a jackpot may be 100 or more, and as long as it satisfies the above (Formula 3), a time-saving number of times due to the support time-saving of 100 or more may be adopted. Hereinafter, the "time-saving state due to a jackpot (time-saving state granted due to a jackpot)" is also referred to as the "jackpot time-saving state".

(Limited time-saving grant form Ω4)
With respect to the jackpot or support time reduction, the number of time reductions can be given that is greater than the denominator of the probability of the jackpot lottery when the probability is low. Also, the number of time reductions may be given that is the same or approximately the same as the denominator of the probability of the jackpot lottery when the probability is low. If the probability denominator is not a natural number, the number of time reductions may be a value obtained by rounding down the decimal point. For example, if the probability of the jackpot lottery is 1/300.15, the number of time reductions may be "300 times", which is a value obtained by rounding down the decimal point. If the probability denominator is less than 100, the number of time reductions may be calculated by "the value of the tens digit x 10", and if it is less than 1000, the number of time reductions may be calculated by "the value of the hundreds digit x 100".
In this way, by adopting the same or nearly the same value as the probability denominator, or an approximate value, it is possible to generate an appropriate number of consecutive wins during the time-saving state due to the assisted time-saving. Specifically, since the consecutive win rate can be set to about 63% to 64%, it is possible to set the number of time-saving wins that achieves a balance between the benefits for the player and the hall without providing an excessive bonus.

(Limited time-saving grant form Ω5)
In addition, when considering the point of preventing the assisted time reduction from becoming an excessive benefit, it is preferable to set the number of times the time reduction can be achieved through the assisted time reduction so as to satisfy the following relationship.
(Equation 4) When there are multiple times of time reduction due to assisted time reduction, if the maximum number of times of time reduction among those times is "S" and the denominator of the jackpot probability (1/T) at the time of low probability is "T", it is preferable to satisfy the relational equation "S≦T".
The value of "S" may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities of settings 1 to 6. Preferably, the jackpot lottery probability of the intermediate setting 3 is used as the basis, and more preferably, the jackpot lottery probability of the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6 is used as the basis. For example, referring to FIG. 4, when the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1 is used as the basis, if "M=200 (low probability: 1/200)" is used in the above (Formula 4), it can be said that it is preferable to adopt a maximum number of times of time reduction by the assisted time reduction of 200 times or less.

(Regarding normal power open play related to the support time-saving state and normal power open play related to the time-saving state due to a jackpot or the probability of a special state due to a jackpot)
The relationship between the operation mode of a normal power opening game related to a support time-saving state (hereinafter abbreviated as "support time-saving normal power opening game") and the operation mode of a normal power opening game related to a time-saving state due to a jackpot or a probability variable state due to a jackpot (hereinafter abbreviated as "jackpot normal power opening game") can be configured as follows. The operation mode of a normal power opening game mainly means the opening and closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 when an auxiliary hit occurs. Therefore, if the operation mode of one normal power opening game and the operation mode of another normal power opening game are the same (approximately the same) operation mode, the profit state (degree of advantage) of the normal power opening game will be the same (approximately the same).
(I-4) At least the support time-saving normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game are common. By making the normal power open game common, the programs related to the normal power open game can be reduced. Also, in the development stage, it becomes easier to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Also, depending on how the presentation is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to tell whether the jackpot time-saving state or the support time-saving state is in progress.
(I-5) At least the support time-saving normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game are different. According to this configuration, the winning rate can be made different between the support time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state, improving the playability.

<5. About the production>
(5-1. Presentation mode)
Next, the presentation mode (presentation state) will be described. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of presentation modes that perform presentations related to the game state are provided, and are configured to be able to control transitions between each presentation mode in response to transitions (updates) of the game state. Specifically, the presentation mode can be transitioned when the internal game state or the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated (changed). The presentation mode includes a plurality of types of presentation modes corresponding to each game state, such as a "normal presentation mode" related to a "normal state", a "probability variation presentation mode" related to a probability variation state, a "time-saving presentation mode" related to a time-saving state, and a "during-win presentation mode" related to a winning game. In each presentation mode, the background display (background presentation) as the background of the decorative pattern variation display screen is changed to a presentation mode related to the game state, so that the player can understand which presentation mode corresponds to which game state he is staying under.

For example, in the "normal presentation mode", the first background presentation (e.g., a background presentation displaying a background image of cherry blossom trees) is associated with the season of "spring", in the "time-saving presentation mode", the second background presentation (e.g., a background presentation displaying a background image of the sea) is associated with the season of "summer", and in the "high probability presentation mode", the third background presentation (e.g., a background presentation displaying a background image of autumn leaves) is associated with the season of "autumn", which may suggest the game state during the stay. In addition to changing the background display, the BGM, decorative patterns (pictures), and reserved display mode can also be changed to presentation modes related to the game state. The details will be described later, but the presentation mode can be changed depending on the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of remaining time-saving times (for example, see Figures 7A and 7B described below).

(5-1-1. Production stage)
In addition, at least one presentation mode includes a plurality of types of "presentation stages", and transitions between these presentation stages are possible. This presentation stage is one aspect of the presentation mode that performs presentations related to the game state, just like the presentation mode. For example, in a normal state, the presentation stages belonging to the normal presentation mode (for example, presentation stages reminiscent of the season 'spring') include the "cherry blossom stage (presentation stage A)" that displays a background image of cherry blossom trees, the "rape flower stage (presentation stage B)" that displays a background image of rape blossoms, and the "dandelion stage (presentation stage C)" that displays a background image of dandelions, and the like, and presentations corresponding to each presentation stage are displayed. That is, even in the same presentation mode, presentations corresponding to each presentation stage can be displayed, so that the presentation can be varied. In addition, the transition from one presentation stage to another presentation stage may be triggered by the execution of a certain advance notice presentation (for example, the stage change presentation described later), or may be transitioned according to the number of games played after a jackpot. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation stages belonging to one presentation mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself related to each of the plurality of presentation stages is the same. That is, the variation pattern distribution table used when selecting the variation pattern is the same in any of the multiple performance stages. For example, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) related to the performance stages A to C is the performance stage related to the normal mode (Tcode = 00H), and the variation pattern distribution table used when selecting the variation pattern is the same in any of the performance stages A to C.

The presentation control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be able to control the transition between each presentation mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and has a functional unit (presentation state transition control means) that controls the transition between multiple types of presentation modes. The presentation control unit 24 grasps the game state (internal game state (YJ) and/or variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) based on the information contained in the presentation control command containing information about the game state among the presentation control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the specific presentation control command that specifies the current game state or specifies that the game state is to be transitioned, manages the presentation mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side, and is configured to be able to control the transition from one presentation mode to another presentation mode (transition between multiple types of presentation modes) according to the processing state. The above-mentioned specific presentation control commands include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, and a specific command sent during a win (a jackpot start command or a jackpot end command). In addition, if the performance control unit 24 can independently determine the game state, it can control the transition of performance modes or performance stages without relying on specific performance control commands.

(5-2. Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be described. The performance control unit 24 is configured to be able to execute and control various "preview performances" related to the big win lottery results based on at least the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command (specifically, information included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and/or the decorative pattern designation command, the winning command described later, etc.) (preview performance execution control means). The main role of the preview performance is to suggest (preview) the expectation of whether or not a hit type (including support time reduction) has been won (the well-known "win expectation rate"), and to suggest the expectation rate of occurrence of a specific preview performance (specific preview occurrence expectation rate). Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute performances related to at least the above-mentioned performance modes and the big win lottery results (at least the win/lose lottery results).

Many preview effects act as "hype effects" to heighten the player's anticipation of winning. Typical preview effects include "reach effects," "pseudo consecutive effects," "player participation effects," "step-up effects," "stage change effects," and "preview preview effects." In addition to these effects, there are various other preview effects (such as cut-in effects) that occur in combination (simultaneously or overlapping) or independently.

(5-2-1. Reach performance)
The above-mentioned "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (a variable display mode accompanied by a reach state), specifically, an effect mode in which the game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. The "reach state" refers to a display mode in which, before the result of the decorative pattern variable display game is derived, some of the decorative patterns derived and displayed during the decorative pattern variable display game constitute part of the display mode indicating the occurrence of a jackpot (winning a jackpot), and the variable display mode of the decorative patterns that have not yet been derived and displayed is being performed, suggesting that the display mode indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is likely to be derived (there is a possibility of winning a jackpot) by utilizing the variable display mode of the decorative patterns for the effect, and making the player expect a jackpot win. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) indicating a jackpot (occurrence of a jackpot) is a pattern of "7 (left symbol)", "7 (middle symbol)", "7 (right symbol)", etc., on a predetermined effective winning line, the left and right symbols, which are part of the pattern arrangement, display "7" (so-called "Tenpai state"), and the middle symbol (the remaining symbol that does not constitute the Tenpai state) is fluctuating and displaying while fluctuating at high speed, frame-by-frame, swinging, expanding and contracting, deforming, etc. Therefore, even if a reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol fluctuating display game does not necessarily become a "jackpot", and if the final result is not a stop display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a jackpot, the result of this game will be a "lose".

The above-mentioned "reach effects" include several types of reach effects that are associated with the likelihood of winning. For example, they include the traditionally known "N reach (normal reach)" and the "SP reach (super reach)" which has a relatively higher likelihood of winning than when an N reach appears, and many of these "SP reaches" have a relatively longer performance time (variation time) than N reaches in order to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot. SP reaches also include special SP reaches such as "SP reach," "SP reach + SPSP reach," and "SPSP reach." The content of each reach is explained below.

(r1) "N Reach" is a fluctuation mode in which, after a normal fluctuation, the game simply passes through the normal reach state and ends with the announcement of the game result (hit or miss (information related to the jackpot lottery result)) without the occurrence of an SP reach, and is the reach presentation with the lowest probability of winning. There are two types of N reach: N Reach 1 and N Reach 2, which have different probability of winning, and the relationship between the probability of winning is "N Reach 1 < N Reach 2".
(r2) “SP reach (normal SP reach)” is a reach fluctuation pattern in which the first reach performance (SP reach) occurs after going through a normal reach (N reach 1 or N reach 2), and then the game result is announced and the game ends.
(r3) "SP reach + SPSP reach" is a reach change pattern in which, after normal fluctuations, a first reach performance (SP reach) occurs via a normal reach, and after a miss is announced, a second reach performance (SPSP reach) with a higher chance of winning than the first reach performance occurs (develops into another SP reach type), and the game result is announced and the game ends (hereinafter referred to as an "advanced SPSP reach").
(r4) "SPSP reach" is a reach change pattern in which, after normal fluctuations, the game passes through a normal reach state, but the first reach performance (SP reach) is not passed through, i.e., it is omitted, and the second reach performance (SPSP reach) occurs immediately (develops directly into an SPSP reach), and the game result is announced and the game ends (hereinafter also referred to as a "direct type SPSP reach").

The winning expectation in the reach performance mainly varies depending on the selection rate of the reach performance. For example, the selection rate is determined in relation to the result of the lottery for the jackpot so that the winning expectation relationship between the reaches during normal play is "N reach 1 < reach N2 < SP reach < advanced SPSP reach < direct hit SPSP reach". Also, for example, between the reaches during the probability change shown in Figures 34 and 35, the winning expectation relationship is "direct hit reach 1 < direct hit reach 2", "middle consecutive win reach A < middle consecutive win reach B", and "large consecutive win reach A < large consecutive win reach B < large consecutive win reach C", and between the reaches during the time reduction shown in Figures 40 and 41, the selection rate is determined in relation to the result of the lottery for the jackpot so that the winning expectation relationship is "time reduction reach A < time reduction reach B < time reduction reach C".

The actual probability of winning varies depending on whether or not other advance notice effects (e.g., pseudo consecutive effects) are present. For example, even if an advanced SPSP reach appears, if an advance notice effect with a high probability of winning is involved, the probability of winning may be equal to or greater than that of a direct hit SPSP reach. For the sake of convenience, this specification treats medium consecutive win reach A, medium consecutive win reach B, large consecutive win reach A, large consecutive win reach B, large consecutive win reach C, time-saving reach A, time-saving reach B, and time-saving reach C as being on the same level as reaches that belong to the "SP reach" category, but in some cases, medium consecutive win reach A and time-saving reach A, which have a low probability of winning, may be treated on the same level as "N reach".

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is derived and displayed through the above-mentioned reach effect. For this reason, the presence or absence of a reach effect is a clue for the player to know the possibility of a jackpot. Therefore, multiple types of "expectation notice effects" are provided as a performance mode that predicts (suggests) the possibility of a reach effect occurring, in other words, as a performance mode that can more clearly predict the expected probability of winning. This "expectation notice effect" plays a role as a provocative performance that predicts the expected probability of winning, but also plays a role of predicting the possibility of a specific performance (for example, a reach effect) occurring, or predicting that the occurrence of a specific performance is definite. Therefore, for example, in a reach effect scenario, a certain notice effect may occur before the reach effect occurs, predicting the possibility of the reach effect occurring, and predicting the expected probability of winning. In other words, if one or more expectation notice effects are present, the expected probability of winning may be more clearly defined than when a reach effect occurs alone, and the expected probability of winning may also be increased. These types of expected preview effects include "pre-preview effects" that can occur before a reach effect, and "post-preview effects" that can occur during a reach effect.

(5-2-2. Pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive))
In this embodiment, one of the expected preview effects is a "pseudo consecutive performance (hereinafter, abbreviated as "pseudo consecutive"). "Pseudo consecutive" refers to a performance mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous change display state of the decorative pattern (so-called "pseudo change"). This "pseudo change" refers to a display mode in which, during one decorative pattern change display game, some or all of the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (not the normal decorative patterns, but one or more pseudo consecutive dedicated patterns may be used), and the decorative patterns are re-changed and displayed from the temporary stop state, and such a display operation is repeated one or more times. In this respect, it is different from the "preview preview effect" described below, which can be executed across multiple pattern change display games.

The occurrence rate of "pseudo consecutive wins" is basically set so that the more pseudo fluctuations there are, the higher the chance of winning. For example, two pseudo fluctuations are more likely to produce a pre-release performance with a higher chance of winning, such as an SP reach, than one pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of a performance scenario that includes a reach performance, it is mainly generated before the reach state is formed (before the reach performance), and after one or more pseudo fluctuations, the reach performance, which is the real fluctuation, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In this specification, "pseudo N" refers to the total number of pseudo fluctuations M and the real fluctuation. For example, when "pseudo 2" is written, it means "one pseudo fluctuation + real fluctuation," and when "pseudo 3" is written, it means "two pseudo fluctuations + real fluctuation" (for example, pseudo 2 + SP reach, pseudo 3 + SP reach, etc. in Figure 33). Also, if there is no pseudo 2 or 3 attached, it means "no pseudo consecutive wins" and no pseudo consecutive wins will occur (for example, N reach 2 or SP reach in Figure 33).

(5-2-3. Player Participation Effects)
In this embodiment, one of the expectation preview effects is a "player participation type effect." The "player participation type effect" belongs to the so-called "button preview effect," and is an advance notice effect mode in which the content of the effect can change based on the content of a predetermined operation (for example, a single press, a long press, or repeated presses) performed on the operation means (the effect button 13 and/or the directional key 75). In the player participation type effect, when a predetermined button is valid, an "operation instruction effect" is executed to instruct the operation means to perform a predetermined operation, and when the player operates the operation means during the button valid period, the currently displayed effect changes to another effect (operation time effect) based on the content of the operation, and the probability of winning, the result of winning or losing, or setting suggestion information can be notified according to the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. The presentation control unit 24 includes a valid operation period setting means for setting a valid operation period (button valid period) during which operation of the operating means is valid based on predetermined setting conditions (for example, a predetermined timing during a player participation presentation), a pre-operation presentation control means for controlling a predetermined pre-operation presentation during the button valid period, and a post-operation presentation control means for controlling a predetermined post-operation presentation based on operation of the presentation button during the valid operation period.

(5-2-4. Step-up performance)
In this embodiment, one of the expected preview effects is a "step-up preview effect". The "step-up preview effect" is a presentation mode with one or more stages of presentation steps, specifically, a preview effect mode in which the first stage (step 1) is performed in stages to a multiple stage (step N (N≦2)), and the expectation of winning increases when the stage progresses to a higher stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage progresses to the final stage). For example, in the case of a step-up effect consisting of three stages of effects SU1 to SU3, the expectation of winning increases as the performance step stage becomes relatively higher, such as "performance SU1 (step 1): low expectation of winning", "performance SU1 → performance SU2 (step 2): medium expectation of winning", and "performance SU1 → performance SU2 → performance SU3 (step 3): high expectation of winning". In addition, some step-up effects belong to the player participation type performance, and can progress to a higher stage, for example, when the operation of the operating means (performance button 13 or directional key 75) is triggered, or when the valid period of the button has elapsed.

(5-2-4. Preview performance: Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B)
The "pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "pre-reading notice") is a presentation mode that can notify in advance the winning probability (which may include not only the winning probability for a jackpot but also the winning probability for the support time reduction described below) for an activated reserved ball (an unconsumed activated reserved ball) that has not yet been used in the execution of a pattern change display game (the operation of displaying the changing special patterns) by utilizing the reserved display mode or a presentation during a pattern change display game that is executed first in the chronological order.

Using FIG. 5A, an overview of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to this embodiment, including the above-mentioned pre-reading notice, will be described. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to this embodiment.

In a portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative pattern in the figure), there is provided a reserved display area 76 which displays the number of activated reserved balls for special pattern 1, and a reserved display area 77 which displays the number of activated reserved balls for special pattern 2. Information regarding the current number of activated reserved balls is notified by indicating whether or not there are activated reserved balls by either a lit state (activated reserved balls present: "○ (white circle)" as shown) or an unlit state (no activated reserved balls present: dashed circle as shown).

The display of the presence or absence of these activated reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as "reserved display") is displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each reserved display area 76, 77, the activated reserved ball on the left side is displayed as the activated reserved ball that occurred first on the time axis (i.e., the oldest) among all the activated reserved balls in the reserved display. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, reserved display sections a1 to d1 (corresponding to the special pattern 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special pattern 2 side) consisting of reserved icons (icon images) provided in the same number (4) as the maximum reserved memory number are provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. These reserved display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 usually switch their display mode to the activated state (lit state) for the same number as the number of activated reserved balls present when the pre-reading judgment is made, for example, 3. Therefore, this reserved display section functions as a reserved display means for displaying the number of activated reserved balls. However, when executing the look-ahead notice described below, the hold display mode of the corresponding hold display section among hold display sections a1-d1 and a2-d2 is changed to a specified look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode), thereby functioning as a means for generating the look-ahead notice.

Also, to the left of the reserved display areas 76, 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active reserved ball currently being used in the special pattern change display game. In this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image appears in which the icon of the game in progress reserved ball K currently being used in the game is placed on the icon of the seat J. In other words, when the display of the change of special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 begins, the icon (icon image) of the oldest reserved ball a1 or a2 displayed in the reserved display areas 76, 77 moves onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78 as the icon of the game in progress reserved ball K, and this state is maintained for a specified display time.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the LCD screen shown in FIG. 5A, a sub-display area 79 is provided as a display area for sub-effects (sub-effects) separate from the main effects such as decorative patterns and preview effects, capable of displaying the pending operating balls of special patterns 1 and 2, the number of pending operating balls of the normal pattern, information regarding the variable display operation of special patterns 1 and 2, and information regarding the variable display operation of the normal pattern. The information in this sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed when displaying the preview effect even when the display of the decorative patterns and/or the pending display section are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to identify whether or not a pattern variable display game is currently in progress and how many pending operating balls there are from the information in the sub-display area 79.

Depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), the reserve display area 76 can be displayed more emphasized than the reserve display area 77, or conversely, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed more emphasized than the reserve display area 76. For example, during the first game state (normal state (presentation mode belonging to the normal mode)), the reserve display area 76 can be displayed emphasized. When the reserve display area 76 is displayed emphasized, for example, the reserve display area 76 can be displayed preferentially, the reserve display area 76 can be displayed large, the reserve display area 77 side can be hidden, etc. The same applies when the reserve display area 77 is displayed emphasized, and the reserve display area 77 can be displayed preferentially, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed large, the reserve display area 76 side can be hidden, etc.

In addition, during the second game state (for example, during the time-saving state (presentation mode belonging to the time-saving mode) or the probability bonus state (presentation mode belonging to the probability bonus mode)), the pending display area 77 can be displayed with emphasis. Also, during the first game state, both the pending display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed, and during the second game state, the pending display area 77 can be displayed preferentially (for example, only the pending display area 77 can be displayed).

(About advance notices)
Next, the pre-reading notice will be explained. Regarding the appearance control regarding this pre-reading notice, first, in the main control unit 20, when an activation reserved ball occurs (when the start condition is satisfied), before the activation reserved ball is used for the execution of the pattern variation display game (variable display operation of special patterns), a "pre-reading hit judgment (pre-reading hit judgment, pre-reading pattern judgment)" is performed to determine in advance the big win lottery result (win/lose lottery result, pattern lottery result) related to the activation reserved ball (see the random number judgment process to the special stop pattern data creation process (steps S318 to S319) in FIG. 11 and the "random number judgment process for special electric role activation judgment to the special stop pattern creation process (steps S410 to S411)" in FIG. 12).

Furthermore, using the result of the above-mentioned "pre-reading hit determination", a "pre-reading change pattern determination" is performed to determine in advance the change pattern of the special symbol (the change pattern at the start of the change) when the activated reserved ball is used in the execution of the symbol change display game in the future (see "Random number determination process when winning in the starting hole (step S320)" in FIG. 11). This change pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is called the "pre-reading change pattern". In this pre-reading change pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach change pattern will go through, or whether it will be a normal change pattern that does not go through a reach state.

The above-mentioned pre-reading fluctuation pattern is determined using at least the winning/losing lottery results (in this embodiment, the results of the advance determination of the winning/losing lottery and the pattern lottery), so the pre-reading fluctuation pattern information may include not only information on whether it is a "winning fluctuation pattern" when a winning lottery is won or a "losing fluctuation pattern" when a losing lottery is won (information on the winning/losing lottery results), but also information on the execution of a specific preview performance, such as the presence or absence of a reach (if there is a reach, its type) and the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive (if there is a pseudo-consecutive, the number of times). In this way, the series of processes that determine the pre-reading fluctuation pattern through the pre-reading winning determination is called "pre-reading determination".

When this information on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control unit 20 to the performance control unit 24, the performance control unit 24 performs a performance control process related to the look-ahead notice. In detail, when a look-ahead judgment is executed, a "reserved addition command" that can identify the number of active reserved balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the current number of active reserved balls including the currently generated active reserved balls) and a "winning time command" that can identify the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern information (at least information on the look-ahead judgment of the winning/losing lottery results at the start of the fluctuation) are sent from the main control unit 20 to the performance control unit 24, and when the performance control unit 24 receives these commands, performance control process related to the reserved display and the look-ahead notice is performed based on the information contained in the commands.

Specifically, when the performance control unit 24 receives the reserved addition command and the winning command, it performs a "pre-reading notice lottery" to determine whether or not to execute (display) the pre-reading notice based on the pre-reading change pattern information. If the pre-reading notice is to be executed, a performance scenario related to the pre-reading notice is created, and the pre-reading notice is displayed according to the performance scenario (see Figures 5A and 5B). The pre-reading notice is executed with a higher probability for a "jackpot" than for a "miss," and for pre-reading change patterns with a relatively high probability of winning. Therefore, the probability of winning is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice occurs. The pre-reading notice may appear when the activated reserved ball occurs, or at the same time as the start of the pattern change display game that is played first chronologically, or at a specified timing during that game, with the pre-reading notice targeting the current activated reserved ball.

The reserved addition command described above is composed of two bytes: the data on the upper byte side that can identify the special chart type information (special chart 1 or 2), and the data on the lower byte side that can identify the number of reserved balls in operation at the time of the pre-reading judgment. The winning command is composed of two bytes: the data on the upper byte side that specifies the winning result (MODE 1), and the data on the lower byte side that can identify the contents of the pre-reading fluctuation pattern as the pre-reading judgment information (EVENT). It is also possible to send a single command instead of using two commands, the reserved addition command and the winning command. For example, a reserved addition command (or a winning command) in which the data on the upper byte side that can identify the special chart type information and the number of reserved balls in operation at the time of the pre-reading judgment is used as the data on the upper byte side, and the data on the upper byte side that can identify the winning result information and the pre-reading fluctuation pattern information is used as the data on the upper byte side, and a pre-reading notice can be executed based on the command.

(Winning time prediction: Reserve change prediction)
In this embodiment, when a look-ahead notice is executed (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), a look-ahead notice may be executed in which the reserved icon that is the subject of the look-ahead notice among the reserved icons in the reserved display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 changes from the white color of the normal reserved display (normal reserved display mode) to a reserved display (special reserved display mode) with a special reserved color or color such as a flashing white, blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow color. This look-ahead notice may be revealed when a prize is won (reserved display), so it is also called a "win-time look-ahead notice."

As an example of this reserve change notice, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched reserve display part b1's operating reserve ball has changed to a special reserve display. Here, the white flashing, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow display of the reserve icon indicate a higher winning expectancy in that order, and the rainbow-colored reserve icon display is a premium reserve icon (guaranteed reserve notice) that indicates a guaranteed jackpot (win). The white flashing icon display is a reserve icon that suggests the possibility of a "step-up reserve change notice" to be described later, and creates anticipation as to what color the final reserve color will be (there are also cases where the reserve color does not change and remains flashing white). In the case of white flashing, if the reserve display remains the same, the winning expectancy is the lowest among the special reserve displays, but if it changes to another reserve color, the winning expectancy increases to that of that reserve color.

In this embodiment, the preview performance has a high expectation of winning, that is, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate) when the jackpot lottery result is a miss, and is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate) when the jackpot lottery result is a win. In this embodiment, preview performances with a winning expectation rate of a predetermined value or more (in this embodiment, preview performances with a winning expectation rate of 20% or more) are treated as "high expectation (high winning expectation) preview performances," and the rest are treated as low expectation preview performances. In the case of the hold change preview mentioned above, the following colors are treated as preview performances: flashing white, blue, yellow, green, red If the winning expectancy of green, red, and rainbow colors is 1%, 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, and 100%, respectively, then "green, red, and rainbow" belong to the high expectancy preview effects, and the rest (flashing white, blue, and yellow) belong to the low expectancy preview effects. When a pre-reading preview occurs, if a high expectancy preview (such as a high number of pseudo consecutive hits or SP reach) with a relatively high winning expectancy occurs during the pattern change display game targeting that activated reserved ball, combined with the content of the pre-reading preview effect, the expectation of winning will be further increased.

Existing activated reserved balls are consumed in sequence when the pattern change display game is executed. At this time, to indicate that one activated reserved ball has been consumed, the display position of the reserved display section corresponding to the existing activated reserved ball is moved forward (sequentially shifted to the left) and the number of displayed balls is reduced, a display control (shift display) is performed, but the above-mentioned special reserved display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the reserved display during this time. In this respect, the pre-reading notice differs from the notice performance that is performed during one pattern change operation such as pseudo consecutive, in that a dedicated notice performance can be displayed across multiple pattern change display games (multiple pattern change display operations).

The special reserve display related to the reserve change notice may be (A) made to appear when a prize is won, in other words, made to appear at the timing of the reserve display, (B) when a prize is won, the normal reserve display (white) is changed from the normal reserve display to a special reserve display (blue, etc.), or (C) changed to a special reserve display with a relatively higher winning expectation than the current special reserve display (for example, a step-up change from blue to a reserve color of yellow or higher). In the cases of (B) and (C), the reserve display may be changed from one reserve display mode to another reserve display mode at a predetermined timing during the shift display, at a predetermined timing during the previously executed pattern change display game, at a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific notice performance, during a player-participation performance for the reserve change notice (for example, during the valid period of button operation), etc. The reserve change notice that changes to a reserve display with a higher winning expectation as in (B) or (C) above is called a "step-up reserve change notice".

In addition, when the game-in-progress reserved ball K is placed on the receiving seat J, the display mode is basically maintained to be the same as the reserved ball display mode in the reserved ball display areas 76 and 77, and a pre-reading notice (special reserved ball display) targeting the active reserved ball related to the current symbol change display game can be notified to the player even during the game, but at a specified timing during the symbol change display game, the reserved ball display mode of the game-in-progress reserved ball K may change to another reserved ball display mode. Such a change in the display mode of the game-in-progress reserved ball K is also treated as belonging to the step-up reserved ball change notice.

As a general rule, there is no "special reserve display downgrade" in which the current reserve color changes to a reserve color with a relatively low winning probability, but in exceptional cases where a downgrade occurs, it indicates that the activated reserve ball is a guaranteed win, and becomes a premium reserve change notification the same as a guaranteed win notification. An example of a downgrade is when the reserve color changes to a reserve display with a lower winning probability than the current reserve display, such as "blue to white" or "red to blue." In addition, the reserve display mode is not limited to a still image reserve icon display (static display mode), but may also be a video (animation) reserve icon display (dynamic display mode: for example, the reserve icon is displayed by rotating, vibrating, rocking, or flashing (fast flashing or slow flashing)).

(Pattern change mid-game prediction: Change mid-game prediction)
In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned "winning time type" look-ahead notice performance, it is possible to make a "change during look-ahead notice" that is made when the pattern change display game starts. This change during look-ahead notice, unlike the above-mentioned reserved change notice, can be made at a predetermined timing during the pattern change display, so it is also called a "pattern change during type (change at the start of change type)" look-ahead notice.

This "pre-reading during change" is, for example, a pre-reading prediction such that a pre-reading-only prediction image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and executed (single-shot or continuous display) in one or more pattern change display games. That is, in the pre-reading during change prediction, when a game ball enters the start hole during a certain pattern change display game and a start condition is established, the right to execute the pattern change display game related to the establishment of the start condition is temporarily reserved and stored, and a pre-reading prediction lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, and when this pre-reading prediction lottery is performed, if there are multiple operating reserved balls (reserved memories) currently existing at that time, the pattern change display games for all or some of the reserved memories can be expressed in a related manner. For example, a pre-reading-only prediction image (for example, a prediction image imitating a lightning bolt in FIG. 5B) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 during all or some of the pattern change display games related to the currently existing operating reserved balls from the oldest operating reserved ball in memory order to the operating reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading prediction. In this case, in each pattern change display game, all or part of the pre-reading notice may be different. For example, if it is displayed over three pattern change display games, the first pattern change display game may be a thundercloud image, the second pattern change display game may be a rain image (image display expressing rain falling from a thundercloud) or a thundercloud image, and the third pattern change display game may be a lightning image. Also, the winning expectation may differ depending on the pre-reading image. In the above example, the thundercloud image may be a low expectation, the rain image may be a medium expectation, and the lightning image may be a high expectation. In this case, if the game ends with only a thundercloud image, the expectation of winning is low, but if a lightning image is displayed, the expectation of winning increases dramatically. Also, a step-up pre-reading notice may be displayed in which the expectation level develops stepwise (increases) from "thundercloud image → rain image → lightning image" each time the pattern change display game is executed.

In this embodiment, the during-change look-ahead notice and the pending change notice can be displayed independently of each other. Specifically, the execution lottery for the pending change notice and the execution lottery for the pending change look-ahead notice are independent of each other. Therefore, there are cases where the pending change notice occurs alone, where the pending change look-ahead notice occurs alone, and where the pending change notice and the pending change look-ahead notice occur simultaneously (overlapping). The presentation means used when executing the pending change look-ahead notice and the content of that presentation can be determined as appropriate.

(Example of pre-reading notice performance: FIG. 5B)
Next, referring to FIG. 5B, an example of a pre-reading preview effect created by the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the pattern change display game (the "↓" in the figure indicates that the decorative pattern is being changed), a ball enters the upper start hole 34, bringing the number of activated reserved balls on the special pattern 1 side to three, and of the third, the activated reserved ball that is the second to have the change start action executed is the target of the look-ahead notice performance, and here shows a case in which the reserved change notice and the during-change look-ahead notice occur at the same time. Also, here, the first activated reserved ball that was reserved first and the third activated reserved ball that was reserved later are activated reserved balls that do not execute the look-ahead notice (do not win the look-ahead lottery).

As shown in FIG. 1(1), the performance control unit 24 changes the reserved display of the second activated reserved ball that is the subject of the pre-reading notice to a special reserved display. At this time, the reserved displays corresponding to the first and third activated reserved balls that are not the subject of the pre-reading notice are maintained as normal reserved displays (white). The figure shows a case where the reserved display of the second activated reserved ball that is the subject of the pre-reading notice has changed from a normal reserved display (white circle (○) mark) to a special reserved display (hatched circle mark). This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice performance has started. Note that FIG. 1(1) shows the currently running symbol change display game ending, with the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as "246" corresponding to a miss.

The game progresses to (2) in the figure, where the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol change display game based on the activated reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side, which was the first (oldest activated reserved ball), and consumes that activated reserved ball (one consumed). The performance control unit 24 shifts the reserved display mode corresponding to each activated reserved ball to the left as the special symbol change display game starts, and sets it to a reserved display mode indicating that one activated reserved ball has been consumed, and starts a decorative symbol change display game based on the first activated reserved ball. At this time, a special background image (lightning effect with a lightning image display) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 as a preview of the change. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 becomes the display mode shown in (2) in the figure.

Then, the game progresses to (3) in the same figure, the currently running symbol change display game ends, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "351", which corresponds to a loss.

Then, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), where the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol change display game based on the second reserved ball, that is, the reserved ball that was the target of the look-ahead notice performance, and consumes the reserved ball. The performance control unit 24 shifts the reserved display mode corresponding to each reserved ball to the left with the start of the special symbol change display game, and starts a decorative symbol change display game based on the second reserved ball. At this time, the special reserved display of the reserved change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated with the start of the current symbol change display game (with the consumption of the reserved ball), and is then displayed as a game execution reserved K. Also, the change-in-progress pre-reading notice (here, the lightning performance) is also terminated with the occurrence during the current symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows an example of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol change display game. In FIG. 4, it was explained that the lightning effect of the in-flight read-ahead notice (in-flight read-ahead notice) ends when it occurs during the current symbol change display game (the symbol change display game related to the activated reserved ball (second) that is the target of the read-ahead notice), but this is not limited to this, and it may end when it occurs during the previous symbol change display game. In this case, the in-flight read-ahead notice ends when the "special reserved display" of the reserved change notice is used to play the symbol change display game.

(5-2-6. Setting hints)
In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to present a presentation mode (setting suggestion presentation) that suggests information regarding the above-mentioned "setting value." For example, the following setting suggestion presentations (A) to (C) are possible.
(a) A "low setting suggestion" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc.).
(c) A "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(k) An "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests an even number setting (settings 2, 4, or 6).
(Yu) An "odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests an odd number setting (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) A "specific setting confirmation effect" that definitively notifies a specific setting value (which can be any of settings 1 to 6). For example, a "setting N confirmation effect" that definitively notifies "setting N". However, it is not desirable to definitively notify an internal setting value without reason. The reason is that definitive indications of a low setting region, such as setting 1 or setting 2 confirmation, reduce the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitively notify one of settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a setting suggestion effect appears that confirms a high setting, such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation, it can increase the player's willingness to play.
(m) A "specific setting negation effect" that definitively notifies that a specific setting value (which may be any of settings 1 to 6) is not present.
(c) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests a specific range of setting values. For example, it suggests settings 3 to 5 (α≦setting value≦β), suggests settings 4 or higher (α≦setting value), suggests multiple specific values such as "settings 1, 3, 5, 6", etc. It is also possible to suggest the high/low probability of a certain setting value by varying the occurrence rate according to the setting value, for example, that a certain effect is unlikely to appear at setting 1, fairly likely to appear at setting 4, and likely to appear at setting 6.

The appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be set appropriately according to the setting value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the setting value is relatively lower. Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the presentation format of the setting suggestion effect, and one or more of the following effects can be used: sound effects, light effects, image display effects, and movable object effects.

The setting suggestion effect can be displayed at a specific timing during the symbol change display game, for example, in combination with the preview effect or alone. Also, it can be displayed not only during the symbol change game, but also during a jackpot game, or while waiting for the game to start, in the "pre-customer waiting effect (demo start waiting display)" and "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described below.

In addition, by specifying the occurrence rate of a specific preview effect according to the setting value, the preview effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, by varying the occurrence rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo consecutive win (a specific pseudo consecutive win pattern or a specific number of pseudo consecutive wins), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific pre-reading preview according to the setting value, the preview effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, if a specific SP reach is likely to appear when you lose, it is "high setting likely", if three pseudo consecutive wins (two pseudo fluctuations + main fluctuation) are likely to appear when you lose, it is "high setting likely", and if a specific button operation effect appears, it is "setting 6 confirmed", etc. In addition, by using the pre-reading preview effect, a pre-reading preview mode dedicated to the setting suggestion effect can be made to appear. For example, if the reserved icon flashes rapidly, it is "high setting likely", and if one or all of the reserved icons change to a dedicated reserved icon (dedicated character or item image), it is "high setting likely".

(About the setting suggestion during the support time reduction state)
(I-6) Multiple setting suggestion effects can be executed, and during the support time-saving state, execution of some or all of the multiple setting suggestion effects is prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be made different compared to other game states. This includes the following (I-6-1) to (I-6-4).
(I-6-1) During the support time-saving state, the probability of execution of the setting suggestion effect can be made lower than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be made lower.
(I-6-2) During the support time-saving state, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be made higher.
(I6-3) During the support time-saving state, the execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There are no particular restrictions on the specific setting suggestion effects, but for example, when the setting suggestion effects shown in (A) to (C) above can be executed, the execution of at least one of those setting suggestion effects can be prohibited. Specifically, during the support time-saving state, it is preferable to prohibit the execution of setting suggestion effects that are less useful as setting guessing elements, such as the even number setting suggestion effect of (Ki) and the odd number setting suggestion effect of (Yu).
(I 6-4) There are one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the support time-saving state. For example, only during the support time-saving state, it is possible to make the setting N confirmation effect of (M), which is highly useful as a setting guessing element, appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion notice can be changed according to the game state. Also, a specific setting suggestion effect can be made to appear only in a specific game state (support time-saving state). This makes the effects more diverse and improves the fun of the game.

(About the decorative designs during the support time reduction state)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time reduction state can be configured as follows.
(I-9) At least the decorative pattern during the support time-saving state (e.g., Arabic numerals) is different from the decorative pattern during the normal state (e.g., Chinese numerals) or the decorative pattern during the jackpot time-saving state (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals). In this case, the decorative pattern is different depending on the game state, so the presentation becomes more diverse. Also, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the support time-saving state is in progress. Also, since the decorative pattern can be displayed while waiting for customers (e.g., the presentation before waiting for customers) when the player selects a game machine, the player can easily identify that the support time-saving state is in progress by simply checking the display screen.
(I-10) At least the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the support time-saving state are different from the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the normal state or the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the jackpot time-saving state. According to this configuration, it becomes easier for players and hall staff to know whether the game machine is in the support time-saving state or not when they understand the state of the game machine first thing in the morning.

(Regarding the reserved display area related to the support time reduction status)
(I-11) After the winning game of the support time reduction ends (when the pattern change time ends (see Figure 16), or during the pattern fixed display time (see Figures 16 and 17A), or when the pattern fixed display time has elapsed (see Figures 17A to 17B)), the reserve display area 77 (the reserve display area on the special pattern 2 side) can be displayed in an emphasized manner (with priority) as described above. When the reserve display area 77 is displayed in an emphasized manner, as already explained, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed with priority, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed larger, the reserve display area 76 side can be hidden, etc.
When the support time reduction is won in the pattern change display game 1 on the special chart 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the reserved display from the special chart 1 side to the special chart 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends (because right-handed hits are advantageous during the support time reduction state and the pattern change display game on the special chart 2 side becomes the main). By changing the priority of the reserved display at the timing when the game on the special chart 1 side ends, the reserved display of the special chart 2 can be displayed with priority before the first pattern change display game on the special chart 2 side starts during the support time reduction state.

(Regarding the management of the support time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state)
The support time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(I-12) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the support time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state can be configured to be managed as one easy-to-win state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the support time-saving state is in progress and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in progress can be managed as a "common flag (first specific time-saving state flag)". By making the flag common to both, it leads to a reduction in RAM capacity. In addition, the data for the performance control unit 24 and the transmission process thereof can also be easily shared, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(I-13) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the support time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state can be configured to be managed as different winning-prone states. For example, the game state determination number YJ for the support time-shortening state can be set to 05H, and the game state determination number YJ for the jackpot time-shortening state can be set to 07H, and each can be managed as a different internal game state. According to this configuration, the support time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state can be managed by individual flags, so that the main control unit 20 can easily grasp each game state. In addition, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be sent to the performance control unit 24 regarding the support time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can easily transition to different performance modes during the support time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state, or easily execute different performances.

(Conditions for activating the support time reduction state)
(I-14) In order to transition to the support time-saving state, a win in the big win lottery is required for the support time-saving type, but the support time-saving state may be transitioned to when the number of times the special electric device is activated by a normal small win (the number of times the small win game is executed) reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times). In this case, it is possible to transition to the support time-saving state without going through a big win lottery, which improves the playability. In addition, the mere existence of a small win becomes important, which increases the significance of providing a normal small win, greatly expanding the range of playability.
(I-15) When a specific support time-saving is won, if a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games) are played from the winning game, the game can be switched to the support time-saving state after the game is over (after the third game is over). According to this configuration, a novel gameplay can be created in which the support time-saving state is scheduled to be entered in a game played after the game in which the support time-saving was won, and the degree of freedom of the gameplay can be increased.

(Special gameplay using time-saving support)
(I-17) If the support time-saving is won during the normal state, a predetermined number of time-saving times is given, whereas if the support time-saving is won in a game state (such as time-saving state, probability change state, or potential state) that is more favorable than the normal state, 0 time-saving times is given. For example, as a virtual gaming machine, the special chart 1 side is provided with at least the support time-saving D (low probability of winning 1/5000) as a winning type, and the special chart 2 side is provided with only "10R time-saving jackpot (1/100 win) that gives 1000 time-saving times" and "special support time-saving with 0 time-saving times (1/200 win)" as a winning type. During the normal state, the game proceeds while receiving a lottery for a jackpot on the special chart 1 side. Then, if the extremely low probability support time-saving D is won, the game is transferred to the time-saving state, and the game proceeds while receiving a lottery for a jackpot on the special chart 2 side. Since the "10R time-saving jackpot" and "special support time-saving with 0 time-saving times" are the targets of the jackpot lottery on the special chart 2 side, if the 10R time-saving jackpot is won before the special support time-saving with 0 time-saving times is won, the jackpot will be consecutive, but if the special support time-saving is won before the 10R time-saving jackpot is won, the time-saving times will be 0 and the time-saving state will be forcibly ended. In other words, the special support time-saving win will cause the machine to fall into the normal state, and the chance of consecutive wins will end. Therefore, if the special support time-saving is not won, the fall into the normal state will be avoided, and the possibility of consecutive wins will remain, making it possible to create a pseudo "falling lottery type (see (machine 3) described later)" gaming machine. By providing a special support time-saving with 0 time-saving times, the range of playability will be expanded, and innovative playability can be expected.

(Conditions for ending the support time reduction period)
(I-18) The end condition of the support time-saving state according to this embodiment is that the time-saving count is consumed or that the jackpot is won. However, other end conditions may be adopted. For example, when the support time-saving count is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (when the normal opening game is played a predetermined number of times), when the normal small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when the small win game by the normal small win is played a predetermined number of times), when one of the special figures (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) changes a predetermined number of times, when the "ceiling privilege" described later is granted (when the ceiling function activation condition is established), when the ceiling game described later is reached, etc. can be adopted. One or more end conditions can be set. This allows the conditions for ending the support time-saving state to be made more diverse, the range of playability to be expanded, and the fun of the game to be improved.

<6. Production methods>
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are produced by the effect producing means provided in the gaming machine. Such effect producing means exerts effects by appealing to human senses such as sight, hearing, and touch. Any stimulus transmission means that can obtain the stimulus may be used, and may be a light generating means (light performance means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device, a sound generating device (sound performance means) such as a speaker 46, or a performance display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36. means), a pressure device that transmits contact pressure to the body of the operator, a vibration device that applies vibration to the player (for example, the launch operation handle 15 vibrates), a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the body of the player, or any of the above. A typical example is a movable prop that exerts a visual effect by its movement. Here, the performance display device is a display device that appeals to the visual sense just like the image display device (image display means), but it is a device that does not use images. The term "image display device" refers to a type that produces a performance (image display performance) mainly by displaying images, and the ... type that produces a performance (image display performance) by displaying images. Such devices that produce effects using methods other than images are included in the concept of the effect display device.

<7. Game mode transition: Figure 6>
Next, referring to Fig. 6, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the transition control between each game mode (between each game state), and the presentation mode related to the game mode will be described. Fig. 6 is a game flow showing an outline of each game mode and the presentation mode related thereto.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, multiple types of game modes are provided, broadly categorized as "normal mode," "time-saving mode," and "high probability mode," and the progress of the game is controlled under these game modes. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, it is explained that when left-handed hitting is advantageous (normal state), "pattern change display game 1 on the special chart 1 side" is executed, and when right-handed hitting is advantageous (high probability state, time-saving state), "pattern change display game 2 on the special chart 2 side" is executed.

(7-1. About "Normal Mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is associated with the normal state (YJ=00H), and this normal mode is the initial game mode, and is also entered when the RAM within the area is cleared by a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, for example, in addition to the transition control between game modes due to game progress.

This normal mode includes a "normal mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "00H". This "normal mode" is the game mode in which the player will likely remain the longest during gameplay, and will transition from the normal mode to another game mode (such as the special mode or time-saving mode, described below) if a jackpot or support time-saving win occurs from the normal mode.

(7-1. About normal mode)
During the "normal mode", the player stays in a "normal presentation mode" which performs presentations related to the normal mode. In the normal presentation mode, as a background presentation, for example, a presentation expressing an air battle with fighter planes flying around, as shown in Fig. 7B (b) (c), is displayed, and the normal presentation mode is also called an "air battle mode".

(7-2. About "Kyakuten Mode")
Next, the "probability mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the probability mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the probability state (YJ = 01H), and the probability mode includes "probability modes 1 to 3 (Tcode = "01H" to "03H")" with different variation pattern selection modes. This probability mode can be entered when a 10R probability jackpot or a 4R probability jackpot is won (see FIG. 4).

In this embodiment, when the first hit occurs (for example, a big win during normal mode (normal state)), the mode is switched to "high probability mode 1" belonging to the high probability mode, and if the player wins consecutive big wins (consecutive wins) without falling from high probability mode 1 to normal mode, the mode is switched stepwise from "high probability mode 1 ⇒ high probability mode 2 ⇒ high probability mode 3" according to the number of wins (consecutive wins). In other words, the number of consecutive wins is determined as the change condition (transition condition) of the game mode, and for example, the mode is switched to high probability mode 1 up to the third consecutive win, the mode is switched to high probability mode 2 from the fourth to sixth consecutive wins, and the mode is switched to high probability mode 3 from the seventh consecutive win onwards (see FIG. 7A). By changing the high probability mode according to the number of consecutive wins, the presentation and playability during the consecutive wins are made more diverse, greatly enhancing the player's interest in the game. In this embodiment, the special state is set to infinite special state (ST count is 65,535 times, which is practically an infinite number of times), so there is no possibility of falling from the special state to the normal state (from special mode to normal mode). However, if a finite special state (for example, ST count is 50 times, 100 times, etc.) is adopted as the special state, there is a possibility that all ST counts will be consumed without winning a jackpot during the special state (special mode), and the state will fall to the normal state (normal mode).

To make the present invention easier to understand, we will first explain the method of counting the number of consecutive wins, which is used to trigger a change in game mode.

The "number of consecutive wins" will be explained with reference to the "example of consecutive win count" shown in FIG. 7A (A). The number of consecutive wins is basically counted as shown in FIG. 7A (A), by counting the number of consecutive wins (number of consecutive wins) of the special jackpot until the mode switches to normal mode (normal state), as follows: "special jackpot (first win) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (2 consecutive wins) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (3 consecutive wins) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (4 consecutive wins) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (5 consecutive wins) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (6 consecutive wins) ⇒ special jackpot during special jackpot state (7 consecutive wins)..." The "special jackpot 1", "special jackpot 2", and "special jackpot 3" shown in the figure indicate special jackpot mode 1, special jackpot mode 2, and special jackpot mode 3, respectively.

In this embodiment, a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) is provided, so the question arises as to whether or not the time-saving jackpot should be counted in the consecutive win count.

<(A-1) Cases in which time-saving jackpots are not counted (no count)>
As shown in the figure (A-1), the time-saving jackpot may not be counted in the consecutive win count. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot won during the second consecutive win probability mode 1 and the time-saving jackpot won during the third consecutive win probability mode 1 are not counted (no count). In this case, the actual consecutive win count is 7 times, but the consecutive win count is "5 consecutive wins."

<(A-2) Case where the consecutive win count is cleared when a time-saving jackpot is won>
As shown in the figure (A-2), if a time-saving jackpot is won, the count of consecutive wins may be reset to zero. In the illustrated case, the time-saving jackpot won during the probability variation mode 1 of the second consecutive win sets the consecutive win count to "zero", and the probability variation jackpot won in the subsequent time-saving state is treated as the first consecutive win, that is, the same count as the first win.

When counting special jackpots, you are free to choose either the counting method (A-1) or (A-2) described above.

Also, as shown in the same figure (B), all jackpots may be counted. In this case, as shown in the figure, even if the first jackpot is a time-saving jackpot, it is counted as the first consecutive jackpot, and thereafter, the number of consecutive jackpots is incremented by +1 for each jackpot won until the game falls back to normal (normal mode). In the case shown in the figure, there were three time-saving jackpots (first jackpot, third consecutive jackpot, fourth consecutive jackpot) and four special jackpots (second consecutive jackpot, fifth consecutive jackpot, sixth consecutive jackpot, seventh consecutive jackpot), for a total of seven jackpots, so the number of consecutive jackpots is seven.

The "consecutive win count" is counted by the "consecutive win counting means" whose functional part is the main control unit 20. The consecutive win counting means works as a functional part that counts the consecutive win count during a specific game period, provided that a winning jackpot is won. The "consecutive win count" can be counted, for example, by the number of wins of the jackpot to be counted (+1 for each win of the jackpot), the number of times that the jackpot game is played (for example, +1 for each jackpot game), or the number of times that the condition device or consecutive role operating device related to the jackpot to be counted is operated (for example, by monitoring the ON (operation)/OFF (non-operation) of the condition device or consecutive role operating device, and +1 each time it is turned ON). In the case of this embodiment, the number of wins of the jackpot is counted, and for example, in the various setting processes (step S475) when the jackpot pattern stops in FIG. 17A described later, if the jackpot is the one to be counted, the current consecutive win count (the consecutive win count is zero at the first win) is increased by +1.

Also, support time reduction is not counted because it does not belong to the big win category, but support time reduction may also be counted. However, when support time reduction is counted, it is preferable to count "special electric operation type support time reduction" in which the special electric device is activated to obtain prize balls, and not count "special electric non-operation type support time reduction" in which the special electric device is not activated and prize balls cannot be obtained. Also, "small wins" in which the special electric device is activated may also be counted. Since the condition device and continuous device activation device do not operate for special electric operation type support time reduction and small wins, when counting them, it is sufficient to count the number of times support time reduction is won, the number of times small wins are won, the number of times support time reduction opening and closing play, the number of times small win play is performed (the number of times the special electric device is activated), etc.

(7-2-1. Features of the probability mode)
Next, the characteristics of the probability mode (probability modes 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be described. As already described, probability modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 43), and a variation pattern allocation table (see FIG. 34 and FIG. 35) corresponding to probability modes 1 to 3 is selected. By utilizing this, probability modes 1 to 3 can create their own characteristic probability modes.
For example, in the variation pattern distribution table for the probability variable mode 1, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds (for example, normal variation) is selected with a high probability, in the variation pattern distribution table for the probability variable mode 2, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected with a high probability, and in the variation pattern distribution table for the probability variable mode 3, a variation pattern with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected with a high probability (see FH11, FH15, and FH19 in FIG. 35). In this way, it is possible to vary the average variation time of the special symbols related to each probability variable mode, in other words, the average consumption time of the symbol variation display game (the average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of executions of the symbol variation display game per unit time: hereinafter also referred to as the "average consumption time"). The average consumption time of the symbol variation display game mentioned above is at least the average consumption time when it is a miss, that is, the "average variation time of the miss variation pattern" in each probability variable mode.

In this embodiment, the relationship of the average consumption time for the special modes is set to satisfy "special mode 3 < special mode 2 < special mode 1". In other words, in terms of the relationship of the fluctuation state between the special modes, special mode 1 is controlled in a "high-speed fluctuation state", special mode 2 is controlled in a "medium-speed fluctuation state", and special mode 3 is controlled in a "low-speed fluctuation state". In other words, the more consecutive wins there are, the longer the average consumption time is controlled. Note that there is no particular limit to the average consumption time in each mode as long as it satisfies the above-mentioned relationship of "special mode 3 < special mode 2 < special mode 1", but since the special mode is a game mode related to the special mode and the "special pattern time-saving function" operates during the special mode, the average consumption time for each fluctuation state is at least shorter than that of the normal mode (normal state).

As mentioned above, the reason for setting the relationship between the average game duration times (game duration speed) for the special probability modes as "special probability mode 3 < special probability mode 2 < special probability mode 1" is as follows.

In recent years, in order to moderately suppress the incitement of gambling, legal requirements have been put in place to regulate the ball-dispensing performance of gaming machines. For example, the ball-dispensing rate (safe balls/out balls) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the above-mentioned model test is limited from the upper limit of 300% (old standard) to 220% (new standard) (Regulations on the Certification and Inspection of Models of Gaming Machines, Appendix 4, Technical Standards for Pachinko Machines (Article 6-related) (1) Performance Standards, B (C), etc.). This regulation has a significant effect on ball-dispensing performance, especially when a series of consecutive wins is played, and complying with it may reduce the ball-dispensing "speed" to about 2/3 of the previous ball-dispensing performance. In detail, if the firing time is one hour, the number of out balls is 6,000 (firing performance of the firing device 32: 100 shots/min x 60 min = 6,000 shots), and under the old standard, the upper limit ball output rate is "300%," so the number of safe balls is allowed to be up to 18,000 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots/h). However, under the new standard, the upper limit ball output rate is limited to "220%," so the upper limit of safe balls is reduced to 13,200 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 220% = 13,200 shots/h). In particular, during the time-saving state or the probability change state, the high base state (electric support state) is created, so if the jackpot is hit excessively in succession, the upper limit ball output rate of 220% (13,200 shots) can easily be exceeded, resulting in non-compliance in the type test. For example, if the base value during electric support is 70 (BA70), the number of safe balls in normal electric play will be 4,200 per hour (BA70 x 100 balls/min x 60 min = 4,200 balls). Therefore, under the old standards, it would be possible to pay out "13,800 balls" (18,000 balls - 4,200 balls) in a jackpot play, but under the new standards, only "9,000 balls" (13,200 balls - 4,200 balls) can be paid out. Therefore, under the above regulations, there is a need for ingenuity in controlling ball-out performance so that it is easier to pass (conform to) the model test without compromising the feeling of ball-out as much as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the average duration of the symbol variation display game is set to be longer as the number of consecutive wins increases, in order to prevent the ball dispense speed from increasing drastically when consecutive jackpots occur.

On the other hand, by varying the average time of the pattern change display game according to each game mode (here, each probability change mode 1 to 3), the gameplay and the freedom of presentation can be increased, and the game can be made deeper. In detail, the above-mentioned "high-speed change state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that places emphasis on gameplay, such as "increasing the average game consumption speed and improving the time efficiency of the game progress." During the probability change mode (probability change state), it becomes "electric support state + high probability state (special pattern probability change function activated) + special pattern time-saving state (special pattern time-saving function activated)", and the average time of the pattern change display game is relatively shorter than at least the normal mode, and it is a game state designed to make it easier to win a jackpot, but in such a game state, many players want to get a jackpot quickly rather than enjoying the presentation. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case of probability change mode 1, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is easily selected, and a "high-speed variation state" is generated. On the other hand, in the "medium speed change state" or "slow speed change state," the average time taken to play the symbol change display game is longer than in the "fast speed change state," but in return, the presentation time can be longer, making this a useful game mode that places emphasis on playability, such as "enjoying the presentation."

As described above, in order to provide the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low-speed change state) < probability change mode 2 (medium-speed change state) < probability change mode 1 (high-speed change state)" with respect to the average consumption time of the pattern change display game, it is preferable to configure as shown in (T1) to (T19) below with respect to the "miss fluctuation pattern allocation table (Fig. 35)" which is referred to when a miss is most likely to be encountered in the course of the game. Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three probability change modes 1 to 3. In other words, the present invention has at least a probability change mode (hereinafter referred to as "probability change mode A") in which the number of consecutive wins is less than a predetermined number, and a probability change mode (hereinafter referred to as "probability change mode B") in which the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and when comparing the average consumption time of probability change mode A and probability change mode B, it is sufficient to have a configuration that satisfies the relationship of "probability change mode A < probability change mode B" (the same applies to modified examples A and B described below). Hereinafter, when we say "in the order of 'Chance Mode A ⇒ Chance Mode B'", this also means "in the order of 'Chance Mode 1 ⇒ Chance Mode 2 ⇒ Chance Mode 3'".

(T1) The average fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is lengthened in the order of "probability fluctuation mode A ⇒ probability fluctuation mode B". Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(T2) The average fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is increased in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B." Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T3) The fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation, which has the highest selection rate, is lengthened in the order of "probability fluctuation mode A ⇒ probability fluctuation mode B."
(T4) The fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selection rate is lengthened in the order of "probability variable mode A ⇒ probability variable mode B."
(T5) The selection rate of the normal variation is decreased in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B". Note that one or more normal variations can be provided.
(T6) The selection rate of the reach fluctuation is increased in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B." Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(T7) The fluctuation time of the shortest normal fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B."
(T8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is lengthened in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B."
(T9) Reduce the number of types of normal fluctuations in the order of "high probability mode A ⇒ high probability mode B."
(T10) Increase the types of reach fluctuations in the order of "high probability mode A ⇒ high probability mode B."
(T11) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the number of types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more is increased in the order of "probability fluctuation mode A ⇒ probability fluctuation mode B". The "fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (same below).
(T12) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the types of fluctuation patterns below the first fluctuation time are reduced in the order of "probability fluctuation mode A ⇒ probability fluctuation mode B". The "fluctuation pattern below the first fluctuation time" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (same below).
(T13) If "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the special rate mode A has no fluctuation pattern that is longer than the second fluctuation time, and the special rate mode B has a fluctuation pattern that is longer than the second fluctuation time.
(T14) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the probability variable mode A has a fluctuation pattern equal to or shorter than the first fluctuation time, and the probability variable mode B has no fluctuation pattern equal to or shorter than the first fluctuation time.
(T15) If "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the probability variable mode 1 and the probability variable mode 2 have no fluctuation patterns that are longer than the second fluctuation time, and the probability variable mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern that is longer than the second fluctuation time.
(T16) If "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", then the probability variable mode 1 and the probability variable mode 2 have fluctuation patterns that are equal to or shorter than the first fluctuation time, and the probability variable mode 3 has no fluctuation patterns that are equal to or shorter than the first fluctuation time.
(T17) In the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected when the number of operation reserved balls (the number of existing operation reserved balls excluding the operation reserved balls provided for the current fluctuation display operation) at the start of the fluctuation is set to be a common (may be the same or approximately the same) fluctuation time, and when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern with a different fluctuation time can be selected. For example, in the probability change modes 1 to 3, when the number of operation reserved balls is 0, only the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, normal fluctuation 8s during small consecutive wins, normal fluctuation 8s during medium consecutive wins, normal fluctuation 8s during large consecutive wins) is selected, and when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern with a different fluctuation time can be selected. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0 is lengthened in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B".
(T18)) The normal fluctuation is common to probability variable mode A and probability variable mode B, and the selection rate of reach fluctuation is set to a high probability in the order of "probability variable mode A ⇒ probability variable mode B." For example, the normal fluctuation is common to probability variable modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of reach fluctuation is set to a high probability in the order of "probability variable mode 1 ⇒ probability variable mode 2 ⇒ probability variable mode 3."
(T19) The normal fluctuation is common to the probability variable mode A and the probability variable mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time is set to be high in the order of "probability variable mode A ⇒ probability variable mode B." For example, the normal fluctuation is common to the probability variable modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time is set to be high in the order of "probability variable mode 1 ⇒ probability variable mode 2 ⇒ probability variable mode 3."

In addition, since the electric support state is a state in which it is easy for operating reserved balls to accumulate, it is important to focus on the fluctuation patterns that are likely to be selected when there are relatively many operating reserved balls, and to adopt a miss fluctuation pattern allocation table with the above-mentioned configuration of (T1) to (T6). On the other hand, since it is difficult for operating reserved balls to accumulate during a state without electric support, such as a potential state, in order to realize the above-mentioned "probability mode 3 (slow fluctuation state) < probability mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 1 (fast fluctuation state)", it is important to focus on the fluctuation patterns that are likely to be selected when there are relatively few operating reserved balls, and to adopt a miss fluctuation pattern allocation table with the above-mentioned configuration of (T1) to (T19).

The winning variation pattern allocation table shown in Figure 34 can be configured as follows (T20) to (T27).

(T20) The time period during which the reach variation is likely to be selected in the event of a win is lengthened in the order of "probability variation mode A ⇒ probability variation mode B."
(T21) When the degree of advantage (degree of profit) is "first winning type < second winning type", the reach fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected when the second winning type is won than when the first winning type is won. In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B".
(T22) When the degree of advantage (degree of profit) is "first winning type < second winning type", the reach fluctuation when the first winning type is won is the same (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is the same), and the reach fluctuation that is likely to be selected when the second winning type is won is different (the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is different). In this case, the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation can be lengthened in the order of "probability change mode A ⇒ probability change mode B".
(T23) If the time period of the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in the probability change mode A (the longest reach variation for the first win) is set to "R seconds," and the time period of the longest reach variation that can be selected when winning in the probability change mode B (the longest reach variation for the second win) is set to "S seconds,"
The value of R/S (variable time extension rate at the time of winning),
If the time period of the longest reach variation that can be selected when you miss in probability mode A (the longest reach variation when you miss the first one) is "T seconds," and the time period of the longest reach variation that can be selected when you miss in probability mode B (the longest reach variation when you miss the second one) is "U seconds,"
The value of T/U (variable time extension rate when losing) is different. In this case, it can be said that "T/U"<"R/S". Also, when the degree of advantage (degree of profit) is "first winning type < second winning type", the value of "R/S" is larger for the second winning type than for the first winning type.
(T24) In the order of "high probability mode A ⇒ high probability mode B," at least the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation that can be selected when the highest profit type (in this embodiment, 10R high probability jackpot) is won is at least lengthened.
(T25) In the order of "high probability mode A ⇒ high probability mode B", among the reach fluctuations that can be selected when the winning type with the highest profitability (in this embodiment, a 10R high probability jackpot) is won, the fluctuation time of the longest reach fluctuation is at least lengthened.
(T26) When comparing the probability change mode A and the probability change mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a miss does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Although not shown, for example, the variation pattern allocation table referred to in each probability change mode 1 to 3 in the case of a miss is the "miss variation pattern allocation table (for medium consecutive wins)" corresponding to the probability change mode 2 in FIG. 35, and in the case of a win, the "probability change mid-win/support time-saving win variation pattern allocation table" shown in FIG. 34 is used according to the number of consecutive wins. Note that "win" here means "jackpot win" and/or "support time-saving win" (the same applies to (T27) described next).
(T27) When comparing the probability variation mode A and the probability variation mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of winning does not change, but the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of losing becomes relatively longer. Although not shown, for example, the variation pattern allocation table referred to in each probability variation mode 1 to 3 in the case of winning is the "probability variation hit / support time reduction winning variation pattern allocation table (for medium consecutive wins)" corresponding to the probability variation mode 2 in Figure 33, and in the case of losing, the "probability variation loss variation pattern allocation table" shown in Figure 35 is used according to the number of consecutive wins.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to the special mode 3, the game mode will not transition from the special mode 3 to another game mode until a jackpot is won or the number of STs is consumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (number of fluctuations) is played during the special mode 3, the game mode may transition to another game mode (special mode 1 or special mode 2). If the special mode 3 in a slow fluctuation state continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition form of "special mode 3 ⇒ special mode 2 or special mode 1", but may be "special mode 3 (first number of fluctuations consumed) ⇒ special mode 2 (second number of fluctuations consumed) ⇒ special mode 1" or "special mode 3 (first number of fluctuations consumed) ⇒ special mode 1 (second number of fluctuations consumed) ⇒ special mode 2". In addition, if the first number of changes is K times and the second number of changes is L times, it is possible for "K times" to be equal to "L times", "K times < L times", or "K times > L times".

(Variation A)
In this embodiment, as described above, the relationship of "probability mode 3 (low-speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state)" is realized by using the miss fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 35) corresponding to each of the probability mode 1 to 3, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the relationship of "probability mode 3 (low-speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 1 (high-speed fluctuation state)" and the same fluctuation state of the event can be realized by using the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to one probability mode (one Tcode). FIG. 36 shows an example of a probability mode during hit/support time reduction winning fluctuation pattern distribution table (winning system fluctuation pattern distribution table) related to the modified example A, and FIG. 37 shows an example of a miss fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the modified example A.

First, the outline of this example will be explained with reference to the failure fluctuation pattern allocation table shown in FIG. 37. In this example, the failure fluctuation pattern allocation table used in the case of a small consecutive win (1st to 3rd consecutive wins) is used as the reference table (see FIG. 37 (A)), and in the case of a medium consecutive win (4th to 6th consecutive wins), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is obtained by adding the first addition time (for example, 5 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in this reference table (see FIG. 37 (B)). In addition, in the case of a large consecutive win (7th or more consecutive wins), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the current fluctuation is obtained by adding the second addition time (for example, 10 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in the above reference table (see FIG. 37 (C)). In other words, this is a fluctuation pattern selection technique in which a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a single game mode is used to obtain a fluctuation pattern corresponding to multiple game modes. In this example, the fluctuation pattern selected is obtained by adding a predetermined time, so the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern does not change as shown in FIG. 37 (A) to (B). The same applies to the "Win/Support Time-saving Winning Variation Pattern Allocation Table" shown in Figures 36 (a) to (b).

Figure 37 (a) shows a failure fluctuation pattern allocation table used for the first to third consecutive wins. For ease of explanation, the following fluctuation pattern types are shown as representative examples to choose from: normal fluctuation 1 to 4 during high probability fluctuation (fluctuation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during high probability fluctuation, SP reach A during high probability fluctuation (low chance of winning), and SP reach B during high probability fluctuation (high chance of winning).

As can be seen from Figure 37 (a) to (c), while the selection rate of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the more consecutive wins there are, the longer the fluctuation pattern is selected (the same goes for Figure 36 (a) to (c)). This makes it possible to realize a fluctuation state of the same phenomenon as the above-mentioned "probability mode 3 (slow fluctuation state) < probability mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < probability mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, a fluctuation state of "small consecutive wins (high speed fluctuation state) < medium consecutive wins (medium speed fluctuation state) < large consecutive wins (slow speed fluctuation state)."

In addition, FIG. 37(b) is configured to add 5 seconds (first added time) to each fluctuation pattern in the reference table, and FIG. 37(c) is configured to add 10 seconds (second added time) to each fluctuation pattern in the reference table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as follows (S1) to (S7).

(S1) A predetermined time is not added (hereinafter, simply referred to as "addition") to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuations 1 to 4 during the probability change), but is added to at least one reach fluctuation (N reach during the probability change, SP reach A during the probability change, SP reach B during the probability change). For example, in the case of a medium consecutive win, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to the N reach during the probability change in the reference table (FIG. 37 (a)), and in the case of a large consecutive win, 10 seconds (second addition time) is added to the N reach during the probability change. Note that it is preferable to add a reach fluctuation that is relatively easy to select (here, the N reach during the probability change, which has the highest selection rate during the reach fluctuation). In addition, the first addition time and the second addition time may be any time that satisfies the relationship of "first addition time < second addition time" (the same applies to (S2) to (S5) described later).
(S2) Addition is made to at least one normal fluctuation (normal fluctuations 1-4 during probability change), and no addition is made to reach fluctuations (N reach during probability change, SP reach A during probability change, SP reach B during probability change). For example, in the case of a medium consecutive win, 5 seconds (first addition time) is added to normal fluctuation 1 during probability change in the reference table (FIG. 37(a)), and in the case of a large consecutive win, 10 seconds (second addition time) is added to normal fluctuation 1 during probability change. It is preferable to add a normal fluctuation that is relatively easy to select (here, normal fluctuation 1 during probability change, which has the highest selection rate among normal fluctuations).
(S3) In the case of a loss, no addition is made, but in the case of a win, an addition is made. For example, in the case of a win, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added as shown in Fig. 37 (b) and (c), but in the case of a loss, no addition is made (in the case of a loss, the reference table: Fig. 37 (a) is used). In other words, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" here means "winning a jackpot" and/or "winning the support time reduction" (the same applies to (S4) described later).
(S4) In the case of a loss, an addition is made, and in the case of a win, no addition is made. For example, in the case of a loss, 5 seconds (first addition time) and 10 seconds (second addition time) are added as shown in Fig. 37 (b) and (c), but in the case of a win, no addition is made (in the case of a win, the reference table: Fig. 36 (a) is used). In other words, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, but the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer.
(S5) At least the longest fluctuation pattern is not added. For example, SP Reach B during the probability change is excluded from the addition, and at least one of the fluctuation patterns with a shorter fluctuation time than this is added (the addition content can be the above (T7) or (T8)). The longest fluctuation pattern is because the original fluctuation time is long. The "longest fluctuation pattern" may be the longest one (in this example, SP Reach B during the probability change) among the losing fluctuations (Fig. 37), or the longest one (in this example, SP Reach B during the probability change) among the winning fluctuations (Fig. 36) in the table.
(S6) A common presentation can be performed during the first or second addition time. For example, "presentation A" can be performed during the 5-second addition (during the first addition time), and "presentation B" can be performed during the 10-second addition (during the second addition time). Also, during the 10-second addition (during the second addition time), "presentation A (the same presentation as during the first addition time)" can be performed during the first 5 seconds, and "presentation C (a presentation different from the first addition time)" can be performed during the last 5 seconds. Note that "presentation A" is preferably a pseudo-repeated combination. Also, "presentation B" is preferably a player-participation type presentation.
(S7) If the number of pending balls at the start of the fluctuation (the number of currently pending balls excluding the pending balls used for the current fluctuation display operation) is 0, no addition is made, but if the number of pending balls is not 0, addition is made. If the number of pending balls is 0, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (in this example, only reach fluctuation is selected), so it is not desirable to add indiscriminately. Note that the configuration may be such that the longest fluctuation pattern among the normal fluctuation types (in this example, normal fluctuation 3 during high probability fluctuation or normal fluctuation 4 during high probability fluctuation) is easily selected.

(Variation B)
Furthermore, the relationship of "high probability mode 3 (slow fluctuation state) < high probability mode 2 (medium fluctuation state) < high probability mode 1 (fast fluctuation state)" is not limited to the above modified example A, and can also be realized, for example, by using a fluctuation pattern allocation table that changes the selection rate (allocation value) of a fluctuation pattern depending on the number of consecutive wins, as shown in Figures 38 and 39.

First, the outline of this example will be explained with reference to Fig. 39. In this example, the miss variation pattern allocation table used in a small consecutive game (1st to 3rd consecutive games) is used as the reference table (see Fig. 39(a)), and in a medium consecutive game (4th to 6th consecutive games), the "first selection rate variation table (Fig. 39(b))" in which the selection rate of the variation pattern defined in this reference table is changed is referred to.
In addition, when a long winning streak occurs (after the seventh consecutive win), the selection rate of the variation pattern defined in the above-mentioned standard table is changed, but a "second selection rate variation table (Fig. 39(c)" having a different selection rate from the "first selection rate variation table (Fig. 39(b))" is referenced.
Here, the reference table (FIG. 39(a)) used for a small consecutive game (1st to 3rd consecutive game)
The above-mentioned "first selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 39(B))" is used in the middle consecutive win (fourth to sixth consecutive wins),
The relationship of the average fluctuation time of the above "second selection rate fluctuation table (FIG. 39(c))" used in the case of a long consecutive win (7 or more consecutive wins) is as follows:
The selection rate is changed so as to satisfy at least the relationship of "second selection rate fluctuation table (low speed) < first selection rate fluctuation table (medium speed) < reference table (high speed)". This makes it possible to realize the relationship of "probability change mode 3 (low speed fluctuation state) < probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)".
In this example, in order to obtain a variation pattern of the reference table with a changed selection rate, the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table does not change (the variation pattern designation command (MODE2+EVENT1) does not change either) (the same applies to the "win/support time-saving winning variation pattern distribution table" in FIG. 38). In this respect, it is significantly different from the above modified example A, in which the variation time of the variation pattern related to each variation pattern distribution table changes but the selection rate does not change.

Figure 39 (a) shows a failure fluctuation pattern allocation table used for the first to third consecutive wins. For ease of explanation, as with the above modification A, the following fluctuation pattern types are shown as representative examples to be selected: normal fluctuation 1 to 4 during high probability fluctuation (fluctuation time 1 second, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 3 seconds), N reach during high probability fluctuation, SP reach A during high probability fluctuation (low chance of winning), and SP reach B during high probability fluctuation (high chance of winning).

As can be seen from Figure 39 (a) to (c), while the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is the same, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of consecutive wins, and as the number of consecutive wins increases, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected (similar to Figure 39 (a) to (c)). This makes it possible to realize a fluctuation state of the same phenomenon as the above-mentioned "probability change mode 3 (slow fluctuation state) < probability change mode 2 (medium speed fluctuation state) < probability change mode 1 (high speed fluctuation state)", that is, a fluctuation state of "small consecutive wins (high speed fluctuation state) < medium consecutive wins (medium speed fluctuation state) < large consecutive wins (slow speed fluctuation state)."

This modified example can be configured as follows (P1) to (P15).

(P1) If the average fluctuation time of the “reference table” is “X seconds”, the average fluctuation time of the “first selection rate fluctuation table” is “Y seconds”, and the average fluctuation time of the “second selection rate fluctuation table” is “Z seconds”, the following relational expression (α) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y" (α)
The extension rate of the average fluctuation time from "Chance mode 2 ⇒ Chance mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the average fluctuation time from "Chance mode 1 ⇒ Chance mode 2".

(P2) If the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the “reference table” is “X seconds,” the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the “first selection rate fluctuation table” is “Y seconds,” and the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern in the “second selection rate fluctuation table” is “Z seconds,” the following relational expression (β) is satisfied.
"Y/X"<"Z/Y" (β)
The extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern "probability change mode 2 ⇒ probability change mode 3" is greater than the extension rate of the fluctuation time of the longest fluctuation pattern "probability change mode 1 ⇒ probability change mode 2".

(P3) The total selection rates of the normal fluctuations of the “reference table”, “first selection rate fluctuation table” and “second selection rate fluctuation table” are “X1”, “Y1”, and “Z1”,
If the combined selection rates of the reach fluctuations of the "reference table", "first selection rate fluctuation table" and "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "X2", "Y2", and "Z2", the following relational expression (γ) is satisfied.
"X2"<"X1","Y2"<"Y1", and "Z2"<"Z1"... (γ)
In this case, it is possible to prevent the game time from becoming unnecessarily long. However, in the tables other than the reference table, the combined selection rates may be reversed ("Y2">"Y1" or "Z2">"Z1").

(P4) If the combined selection rates of the reach fluctuations of the “reference table”, “first selection rate fluctuation table”, and “second selection rate fluctuation table” are “X2”, “Y2”, and “Z2”, the following relational expression (ε) is satisfied.
"X2"<"Y2"<Z2" (γ)

(P5) If the combined selection rates of N reach fluctuations in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" are "Y3" and "Z3", and the combined selection rates of SP reach are "Y4" and "Z4", the following relational formula (ε) is satisfied in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table".
"Y4" ≦ "Y3", "Z4" ≦ "Z3" ... (γ)

(P6) In the “first selection rate fluctuation table” and/or the “second selection rate fluctuation table”, one or more specific fluctuation patterns are not selected (selection rate 0: subject to the lottery, but not selected because the selection rate is 0).
(P7) The shortest normal fluctuation in the "reference table" is not selected in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table" (selection rate 0).
(P7) The longest reach fluctuation in the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is not selected in the "reference table" (selection rate is 0).

(P8) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of the longest normal fluctuation is the highest. When referring to the "selection rate" of a certain fluctuation pattern, if there are multiple such fluctuation patterns, it includes the combined selection rate of these (hereinafter the same).
(P9) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of N reach fluctuation is the highest.
(P10) In the "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table", the selection rate of the SP reach fluctuation is the highest.

(P11) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" and/or the "second selection rate fluctuation table" have a low selection rate for normal fluctuations in the "reference table", and the amount of the reduction in the selection rate for normal fluctuations in the "reference table" is allocated to increase the selection rate of at least one reach fluctuation. In this case, if there are at least multiple types of reach fluctuations of "first fluctuation time < second fluctuation time < third fluctuation time", the reach fluctuation of the third fluctuation time is changed to a high probability, and the selection rates of the reach fluctuations of the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time are not changed. Alternatively, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the first fluctuation time is not changed, and the selection rates of the reach fluctuations of the second fluctuation time and the third fluctuation time are changed (in this case, it can be set as "the increase in the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time ≦ the increase in the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the third fluctuation time" or "the increase in the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the third fluctuation time ≦ the increase in the selection rate of the reach fluctuation of the second fluctuation time").

(P12) If the average fluctuation time of the "reference table" is "X seconds", the average fluctuation time of the "first selection rate fluctuation table" is "Y seconds", and the average fluctuation time of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is "Z seconds", the selection rates of the fluctuation patterns other than the longest fluctuation pattern are changed,
It is configured to satisfy "X seconds"<"Yseconds"<"Zseconds."
In this case, the fluctuation pattern that changes the selection rate (a fluctuation pattern other than the longest fluctuation pattern) may be a "normal fluctuation" or a reach fluctuation.

(P13) The "first selection rate fluctuation table" is a table in which the selection rates of one or more fluctuation patterns in the reference table are changed, and the "second selection rate fluctuation table" utilizes a table other than the reference table.
In this case, the following configurations (P13-1) to (P13-7) can be used.
(P13-1) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" has more types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation and/or reach fluctuation) than the reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table).
(P13-2) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" has fewer types of fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation and/or reach fluctuation) than the reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table), but the average fluctuation time is longer.
(P13-3) The longest fluctuation pattern of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is longer than the longest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table).
(P13-4) The shortest fluctuation pattern of the "second selection rate fluctuation table" is longer than the shortest fluctuation pattern of the reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table).
(P13-5) In the "second selection rate fluctuation table," reach fluctuation is more likely to be selected than normal fluctuation.
(P13-6) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have in common the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of activated reserved balls is 0 (the fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of activated reserved balls is other than 0 is different).
(P13-7) The "second selection rate fluctuation table" and the "reference table (first selection rate fluctuation table)" have in common the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of activated reserved balls is 0 to 2 (the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of activated reserved balls is 3 are different).

(P14) When a player loses, a table with a changed selection rate of the standard table is used, but when a player wins (when a jackpot and/or support time reduction is won), a common table is used.
(P15) When a win occurs (when a jackpot and/or support time reduction win occurs), a table with a changed selection rate of the standard table is used, but when a loss occurs, a common table is used.

(7-2-2. About the performance during the probability mode: Figure 7A)
Next, the effects during the probability variation mode will be described. In this embodiment, probability variation modes 1 to 3 corresponding to probability variation modes 1 to 3 are provided as probability variation modes. FIG. 7A (c) shows an example of effects during probability variation modes 1 to 3.

With reference to FIG. 7A, the probability change performance mode 1 is an "intercept mode" that performs a performance that expresses the interception of an enemy aircraft, the probability change performance mode 2 is a "bombing mode" that performs a performance that expresses the air raid of an enemy fleet or an enemy base by dive bombing, and the probability change performance mode 3 is a "battle bombing mode" that performs a performance that expresses the air raid of an enemy city by a strategic bomber. In other words, the probability change mode period is divided into three modes, a small consecutive consecutive performance mode, a medium consecutive consecutive performance mode, and a large consecutive consecutive performance mode, according to the number of consecutive consecutive times, and the player is notified of which of the three categories the player is staying in as a consecutive consecutive performance mainly by a dynamic change in the fluctuation pattern (a change in the fluctuation state from high speed to medium speed to low speed) and the accompanying performance (a change in the background performance, a notice performance, etc.). The display of "Right hit ⇒" shown in the figure is a "right hit instruction performance (launch guidance notification performance)" that encourages the player to hit right. Although the reserved icons are not shown in the figure, reserved icons corresponding to the probability variation presentation modes 1 to 3 are displayed. Also, in the figure, it shows that the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, the current game is being played, and if there is an active reserved ball after the current game ends, the decorative pattern variable display game will be played sequentially under the current presentation mode.

If a time-saving jackpot is won, the mode will be switched to the "time-saving presentation mode" shown in FIG. 7B described below. However, if a time-saving jackpot is won during a winning streak, the mode will be switched to a time-saving mode specifically for winning streaks (for example, time-saving mode 4 (Tcode = "07H") shown in FIG. 43), and the corresponding presentation mode may be configured to be able to switch to a "time-saving presentation mode specifically for winning streaks (special time-saving presentation mode: lightning strike mode)" as shown in FIG. 7A (B).

This special time-saving presentation mode is for use only during consecutive wins, and is preferably switched to when a time-saving jackpot is won other than the first win, or when a predetermined number of consecutive wins (for example, four consecutive wins (middle consecutive wins)) or more are won. Specifically, it can be used as a presentation mode related to the time-saving state after a time-saving jackpot in the case of "time-saving jackpots are not counted" in FIG. 7A (A-1), or the time-saving state after the third or fourth consecutive win in the case of "all jackpots are counted" in FIG. 7A (B). In the case of FIG. 7A (B), the time-saving jackpot is counted, so it is preferable to display a presentation image 761 that notifies the current number of consecutive wins, such as "X consecutive wins in progress!", and in the case of FIG. 7A (A-1), the time-saving jackpot is not counted (no count), so it is preferable to display a presentation image 761 such as "Challenge for consecutive wins" rather than notifying the number of consecutive wins. In the case of "clearing the consecutive win count by winning the time-saving jackpot" in Figure 7A (A-2), it is preferable to transition to the time-saving presentation mode as usual.

(Results Production)
In addition, if a time-saving jackpot (4R time-saving jackpot) is won during a series of consecutive wins, a result effect can be displayed at the final variation (100th spin) when the number of times of the time-saving is completed. This "result effect" is an effect that notifies the final result, such as the number of consecutive wins of the jackpot that have been won up to that point and the total number of balls (total number of winning balls) acquired in the winning game, as predetermined game information at the time of the pattern variation at which the time-saving state ends (for example, JP Patent Publication No. 2017-086102, Figures 50, 54 to 56 of the same publication, etc.). Here, if the support time-saving is won without going through the first win and the time-saving state (support time-saving state) is entered (transitioned), specifically, if the time-saving state is entered by the support time-saving A or support time-saving B that grants a finite time-saving, the result effect may be executed at the final variation at which the number of times of the time-saving is completed (support time-saving C is excluded here because it is an infinite time-saving and cannot actually reach the final variation). It can be said that it is preferable not to execute the result effect. The reason is as follows.

If the time-saving state is entered without ever winning a jackpot, and the time-saving state ends without winning a jackpot, the total number of winning balls is very small, and there is little need to display the result effect. The same is true when the time-saving state is entered due to the ceiling time-saving (finite time-saving) described below (when the time-saving state is entered due to the activation of the ceiling function). In addition, in general gaming machines, the payout rate (low base payout rate) when in a state without electric support (normal state or potential state) is approximately 30% to 40%, and the payout rate (high base payout rate) when in a state with electric support (time-saving state or probability change state) is approximately 80% to 95%, and in both cases the payout rate is less than 100% (when playing continuously). From this point of view, if the machine enters a supported time-saving state without going through an initial hit, or if the machine enters a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (finite time-saving) described below, and the time-saving state ends without winning a jackpot, it can be said that there is little need to display the result effect.

However, when going through the first win, the significance of reporting the number of consecutive wins and the total number of balls acquired (total number of winning balls) is increased. Therefore, after the first win, if the time-saving state due to winning the support time-saving A or support time-saving B of the finite time-saving system or the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving state is entered, it is preferable to execute the result effect in the final fluctuation. For example, as shown in the remarks column (3) and (4) of FIG. 41, the final fluctuation can be configured as a fluctuation pattern for the result effect, and in the case of the time-saving mode 1, the longest normal fluctuation in the time-saving mode 1 (for example, normal fluctuation 40 s), and in the case of the time-saving mode 2, the longest normal fluctuation in the time-saving mode 2 (for example, normal fluctuation 45 s) can be selected, and the result effect can be made to appear using the performance time width (fluctuation time). In this case, different result effects (for example, different display modes of game information and background images, etc.) can be made to appear in the time-saving mode 1 and the time-saving mode 2. Of course, the longest normal fluctuation may be the same fluctuation time or the same fluctuation pattern in time-saving mode 1 and time-saving mode 2, and the same result presentation (for example, the same display format of game information, background image, etc.) may be displayed.

(Other performances)
In addition, the effects related to the special mode can be configured as follows (Special Performance 1) to (Special Performance 5).
(Probable Performance 1) The probability of a player participation type performance occurring is set to be high in the order of "Probable Variety Mode 1 ⇒ Probable Variety Mode 2 ⇒ Probable Variety Mode 3."
(Confirmed Performance 2) The occurrence rate of the pre-reading notice is set to a low or high probability in the order of "Confirmed Mode A ⇒ Confirmed Mode B".
(Confirmed Performance 3) The probability of pseudo-consecutive wins occurring is set to be high in the order of "Confirmed Variation Mode A ⇒ Confirmed Variation Mode B" (the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-consecutive wins becomes higher).
(Probable Performance 4) Increase the number of pseudo consecutive wins in the order of "Probable Mode A ⇒ Probable Mode B". For example, Probable Mode 1 is up to "Pseudo 2", Probable Mode 2 is up to "Pseudo 3", Probable Mode 3 is up to "Pseudo 4", etc.
(Probable Play 5) Regarding reach fluctuation (reach performance), the probability variable mode 3 includes at least the first fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time,
The probability change mode 2 includes at least the second fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time, but does not include the first fluctuation pattern.
The high probability mode 1 includes at least the third fluctuation pattern of the third fluctuation time, but does not include the first fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern.
In this case, it is preferable to configure the relationship of "third variation time < second variation time < first variation time" to be satisfied. For example, the probability variable mode 3 includes at least an "advanced special reach variation" that performs a full rotation performance after an advanced SPSP reach (SP reach + SPSP reach), the probability variable mode 2 includes at least an "advanced SPSP reach" but does not include an "advanced special reach variation", and the probability variable mode 1 includes at least an SP reach but does not include an "advanced SPSP reach" or an "advanced special reach variation". In this case, the SP reach performance executed in the first half section is common, and when the SP reach performance appears, it becomes possible to enjoy how far the reach performance develops depending on the difference in the probability variable mode.
For example, probability variable mode 3 includes at least a "direct hit type special reach variation" that performs a full rotation performance after a direct hit type SPSP reach (SPSP reach), probability variable mode 2 includes at least an "SP reach including the execution of a specific advance notice performance" but does not include a "direct hit type special reach variation," and probability variable mode 1 includes at least an SP reach, but does not include an "SP reach including the execution of a specific advance notice performance" or a "direct hit type special reach variation." In this case, too, you can enjoy how far the reach performance will develop depending on the difference in probability variable mode.

(7-3. About time-saving mode)
Next, the "time-saving mode" will be described. As shown in the figure, the time-saving mode is a game mode associated with the internal game state being in a sure-change state (YJ=01H), and includes time-saving modes 1 to 3 (Tcode="04H" to "06H") with different variation pattern selection modes. If the above-mentioned "special time-saving performance mode" is provided, time-saving mode 4 (Tcode="07H") can be provided (see FIG. 7A (B), the remarks column in FIG. 42, and FIG. 43). This time-saving mode is entered when a 4R time-saving jackpot or support time-saving A to C is won (see FIG. 4).

In this embodiment, if a 4R time-saving jackpot or one of the support time-saving A to C is won, the game will first switch to time-saving mode 1, and then switch to time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3 depending on the number of time-saving times granted. That is, the game will switch from one time-saving mode to another depending on the number of games played in the time-saving state. In other words, the game will switch from one time-saving mode to another depending on the number of remaining time-saving times. Specifically, with reference to the block frame of "time-saving mode" in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7B, the game will stay in time-saving mode 1 until the number of time-saving times reaches 100, stay in time-saving mode 2 until the number of time-saving times reaches 101 to 200, and stay in time-saving mode 3 if the number of time-saving times reaches 251 or more.

Therefore, if you win the 4R time-saving jackpot or support time-saving A, which grants 100 time-saving turns, you will only stay in time-saving mode 1, if you win support time-saving B, which grants 200 time-saving turns, you will stay in time-saving mode 1 and time-saving mode 2, and if you win support time-saving C, which grants infinite time-saving (65,535 time-saving turns), you will stay in time-saving modes 1 to 3. Note that if the number of time-saving turns can be increased by the "top-up function" mentioned above, there are cases where you will stay in time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3 even if you win support time-saving A or support time-saving B, but here we will focus on configurations without top-ups, unless otherwise necessary.

(7-3-1. Features of the time-saving mode)
Next, the characteristics of the time-saving modes (probability change modes 1 to 3) according to this embodiment will be described. As already explained, the time-saving modes 1 to 3 are game modes with different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see Figs. 40 to 41, Fig. 43), and a variation pattern allocation table (see Figs. 40 and 41) corresponding to the time-saving modes 1 to 3 is selected. By utilizing this, the time-saving modes 1 to 3 can each create a time-saving mode with its own characteristics. This is done by the same method as the probability change mode already explained.

The time-saving modes in this embodiment are set so that the relationship of the average consumption time satisfies "time-saving mode 1 < time-saving mode 2 < time-saving mode 3" (see Note 2 in FIG. 7B). In other words, the relatively greater the number of time-saving modes, in other words, the shorter the average consumption time is controlled to be each time the game mode is stepped up. In this respect, it differs from the high-rate mode, in which the average consumption time is controlled to be longer each time the game mode is stepped up. The reason for setting the relationship of the average consumption time (game consumption speed) for the time-saving modes as "time-saving mode 1 < time-saving mode 2 < time-saving mode 3" is as follows.

In the time-saving mode (time-saving state), unlike the probability of winning a jackpot in the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot is low, making it harder to win a jackpot than in the probability of winning a jackpot. In this embodiment, the average time required for the pattern-changing game is varied to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the time-saving mode. Specifically, in the time-saving modes 1 and 2, the game mode is set to a "low-speed changing state" or "medium-speed changing state" in which the average time required for the pattern-changing game is long, and the game mode is set to a "high-speed changing state" in which the game mode is set to "increase the average game-consuming speed to improve the time efficiency of the game's progress." In particular, when the relationship of the average game-consuming time (game-consuming speed) is set to "time-saving mode 1 < time-saving mode 2 < time-saving mode 3," there are the following advantages.

In this embodiment, more time-saving times than the conventional 100 times can be awarded. In particular, when a number of time-saving times that can take a long time to be used up, such as 200 times or infinite time-saving times, is awarded, if the game is played slowly and the time-saving times are used up sluggishly, this can cause stress and dissatisfaction for the player. Therefore, as the number of games played during the time-saving state increases, the game is played at a faster speed, allowing the player to aim for the next jackpot in as short a time as possible.

Specifically, by referring to the "Time-saving Miss Fluctuation Pattern Allocation Table" in FIG. 41, normal fluctuation 4s is likely to be selected in time-saving mode 1, normal fluctuation 2s is likely to be selected in time-saving mode 2, and normal fluctuation 1s (shortest normal fluctuation) is likely to be selected in time-saving mode 3. This realizes an increase in the game progress speed in the order of "time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3".

As described above, in order to provide the relationship of "time-saving mode 1 (low-speed fluctuation state) < time-saving mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state) < time-saving mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state)" with respect to the average consumption time of the pattern fluctuation display game, it is preferable that the time-saving modes 1, 2, and 3 of this embodiment have the following configurations (J1) to (J20) with respect to the "miss fluctuation pattern allocation table (FIG. 41)" that is referred to when the most likely miss occurs during the game progress. Note that the present invention is not necessarily limited to the relationship between the three time-saving modes 1 to 3. In other words, the present invention has at least a time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode A") in which the number of game executions (number of fluctuations) in the time-saving state is less than a predetermined number, and a time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving mode B") in which the number of game executions is equal to or more than the predetermined number, and the configuration satisfies the relationship of "time-saving mode A < time-saving mode B" when the average consumption time of the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B are compared. Hereinafter, when we say "in the order of 'time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B'," it also means "in the order of 'time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3'."

(J1) The average fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B." Note that one or more normal fluctuations can be provided.
(J2) The average fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B." Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J3) The fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation, which has the highest selection rate, is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B."
(J4) The fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation having the highest selection rate is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B."
(J5) The selection rate of the normal variation is increased in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B." Note that one or more normal variations may be provided.
(J6) The selection rate of the reach fluctuation is decreased in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B." Note that one or more reach fluctuations can be provided.
(J7) The shortest normal fluctuation time in each mode is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B".
(J8) The fluctuation time of the shortest reach fluctuation in each mode is shortened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B".
(J9) Increase the types of normal fluctuations in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B."
(J10) The number of reach fluctuation types is reduced in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B."
(J11) In the case where "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the number of types of fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more is reduced in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B". The "fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (same below).
(J12) In the case where "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the number of types of fluctuation patterns less than the first fluctuation time is increased in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B". The "fluctuation pattern less than the first fluctuation time" may be a normal fluctuation or a reach fluctuation (same below).
(J13) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the time-saving mode A has a fluctuation pattern that is equal to or longer than the second fluctuation time, and the time-saving mode B has no fluctuation pattern that is equal to or longer than the second fluctuation time.
(J14) When "the first variable time < the second variable time" is set, the time-saving mode A has no variable pattern that is shorter than the first variable time, and the time-saving mode B has a variable pattern that is shorter than the first variable time.
(J15) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time", the time-saving mode 1 and the time-saving mode 2 have fluctuation patterns of the second fluctuation time or more, and the time-saving mode 3 has no fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time or more.
(J16) When "the first fluctuation time < the second fluctuation time" is set, the time-saving mode 1 and the time-saving mode 2 do not have a fluctuation pattern shorter than the first fluctuation time, and the time-saving mode 3 has a fluctuation pattern shorter than the first fluctuation time.
(J17) In the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected when the number of operation reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation is 0 is set as a common (may be the same or approximately the same) fluctuation time, and when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern with a different fluctuation time is selectable. For example, in the time-saving modes 1 to 3, when the number of operation reserved balls is 0, only the normal fluctuation 8s type (in this example, normal fluctuation 8s during time-saving, normal fluctuation 8s during time-saving, normal fluctuation 8s during time-saving) is selected, and when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0, a fluctuation pattern with a different fluctuation time is selectable. In this case, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected when the number of operation reserved balls is other than 0 is lengthened in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B".
(J18) In the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B, the normal fluctuation is common, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to a low probability in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B". For example, in the time-saving modes 1 to 3, the normal fluctuation is common, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation is set to a low probability in the order of "time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3".
(J19) The normal fluctuation is common to the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a low probability in the order of "time-saving mode A ⇒ time-saving mode B." For example, the normal fluctuation is common to the time-saving modes 1 to 3, and the selection rate of the reach fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time is set to a low probability in the order of "time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3."
(J20) When comparing time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a loss does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a win becomes relatively longer. Also, the variation time of the variation pattern that can be selected in the case of a win does not change, but the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss becomes relatively longer. Note that "winning" here means "winning a jackpot" and/or "winning the support time-saving".

In this embodiment, the time-saving reach A common to time-saving modes 1 to 3, and the time-saving reach A and B common to time-saving modes 1 and 2 can be selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. If there is a relationship of "time-saving mode 1 (slow fluctuation state) < time-saving mode 2 (medium fluctuation state) < time-saving mode 3 (fast fluctuation state)" regarding the average consumption time of the pattern fluctuation display game, a reach fluctuation different from that of the other time-saving modes may be selected in at least one of time-saving modes 1 to 3.

In the present embodiment, after the transition to the time-saving mode 3, the game mode is not transitioned from the time-saving mode 3 to another game mode until a jackpot is won or the time-saving number of times is consumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined number of games (variable number of times) are played during the time-saving mode 3, the game mode may be transitioned to another game mode (time-saving mode 1 or time-saving mode 2). Since the time-saving mode 3 is a "high-speed variable state," the game consumption speed proceeds at a good tempo, but if the same game mode continues for a long period of time, the player may feel tired or the game may become monotonous. Therefore, it is preferable to transition to another time-saving mode when a predetermined number of games are played during the time-saving mode 3. The transition of the game mode is not limited to the transition form of "time-saving mode 3 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 1", but may be "time-saving mode 3 (first variable number of times consumed) ⇒ time-saving mode 2 (second variable number of times consumed) ⇒ time-saving mode 1" or "time-saving mode 3 (first variable number of times consumed) ⇒ time-saving mode 1 (second variable number of times consumed) ⇒ time-saving mode 2". In addition, if the first number of changes is G times and the second number of changes is H times, it is possible for "G times" to be equal to "H times", "G times < H times", or "G times > H times".

(7-3-2. About the effects during time-saving mode)
In this embodiment, as the time-saving performance modes, time-saving performance modes 1 to 3 corresponding to the time-saving performance modes 1 to 3 are provided. Fig. 7B shows performance examples in the time-saving performance modes 1 to 3.

Referring to FIG. 7B, time-saving presentation mode 1 is an "underwater acoustic battle mode" that presents a battle between submarines, time-saving presentation mode 2 is a "surface battle mode" that presents a battle between fleets, and time-saving presentation mode 3 is a "land battle mode" that presents a battle between tanks. In other words, the time-saving mode period is divided into three time-saving modes 1 to 3 depending on the number of times the game is executed during the time-saving state, and the player is notified of which of the three sections the player is in, mainly by dynamic changes in the fluctuation pattern (changes in the fluctuation state from high speed to medium speed to low speed) and the accompanying effects (switching of the background effects, advance notice effects, etc.), just like the probability mode described above.

In addition, when transitioning to the jackpot time-saving state and when transitioning to the support time-saving state, the same time-saving mode is entered, but each may be entered into a different presentation stage. In this case, while it is the same time-saving mode (same Tcode), at least one of the background presentation, decorative pattern, hold icon, launch induction notification presentation (right hit instruction presentation), various preview presentations, and pre-reading notices (pre-reading notice during fluctuation and/or hold change notice) corresponding to each presentation stage can be a different presentation style. This makes it possible to transition to the same time-saving mode for the time-saving jackpot and support time-saving, while distinguishing between the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state through presentation.

(About the preview of the winning of the time-saving support lottery)
As already explained, there are "special electric power operation type support time reduction" and "special electric power non-operation type support time reduction", but in either case, although there are exceptions such as support time reduction that does not execute round play like jackpot play and gives a high number of time reductions such as infinite time reduction, basically, it is less profitable than a jackpot. For this reason, if a flashy promotional performance like a jackpot winning is displayed in the preview performance during the pattern change display game in which the support time reduction is won, it will overly arouse the player's expectations. Therefore, when the support time reduction is won, it is preferable not to display a "winning performance" that definitely notifies the winning of the jackpot as a preview performance. For example, if it is a reservation change notice, the rainbow reservation of the premium reservation is not displayed (in the case of a gaming machine that does not execute premium reservation, the reservation change notice with the highest winning expectation degree at the time of winning the jackpot is not displayed), and if it is a preview performance during the change, a specific character or item indicating a winning confirmation is not displayed. In other words, when the support time-saving is won, it is possible to make the high expectation notice effect appear, except for the high expectation notice effect that shows the highest expectation at the time of winning the jackpot. However, only the support time-saving that gives the infinite time-saving with the highest profit among the support time-saving (support time-saving C in this embodiment) may be configured to be able to execute the same winning effect as the jackpot. Also, when the support time-saving is won, the winning effect same as the jackpot is not displayed, but the winning effect for the support time-saving may be executed.

In addition, in the case of a pre-reading forecast, if a ball reserve occurs that activates the support time-saving feature, the pre-reading forecast may be prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories (four times in this embodiment)).In addition, after the time-saving state due to the support time-saving feature begins, the pre-reading forecast may be prohibited for a predetermined number of games (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories).

(Regarding the winning presentation at the starting gate)
In the case where a "winning performance" can be executed when a winning is entered into the upper starting hole 34 and/or the lower starting hole 35, different winning performances may be executed in the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state. Note that the winning performance may not be executed during the jackpot time-saving state, and may be executed during the support time-saving state (or vice versa).

(Notification of remaining time reduction)
In addition, during the time-saving mode (time-saving state), a "remaining time-saving number notification effect (for example, a countdown display)" that notifies the remaining number of time-saving times in a dramatic manner is configured to be able to appear. The remaining time-saving number notification effect may be the same presentation mode (same countdown display mode) for at least the support time-saving A and the support time-saving B (support time-saving with limited time-saving grant), or may be the same presentation mode for the time-saving big win and the support time-saving (support time-saving A and/or support time-saving B). Also, different presentation modes may be used depending on the type of support time-saving, or different presentation modes may be used for the time-saving big win and the support time-saving. In the former case of using the same presentation mode, it is preferable to start the countdown display at the same division and when the remaining number of time-saving times reaches a predetermined number. For example, a countdown display is performed from the remaining 10 times to the final variation. In the latter case of using different presentation modes, the countdown display can be started at different divisions. For example, in the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the countdown display can start from 50 spins remaining, and in the case of support time-saving A (or support time-saving B), the countdown display can start from 10 spins remaining.

In the case of finite time reduction, it is preferable to configure the device so that a display notifying the player of the remaining number of time reductions can be executed. On the other hand, in the case of infinite time reduction, since the remaining number of times is infinite, there is little need to execute a display notifying the player of the remaining number of time reductions, and it is not necessary to execute the display notifying the player of the remaining number of time reductions. However, there are cases where it is appropriate to notify the player that the remaining number of times is infinite. Therefore, when executing a display notifying the player of the remaining number of time reductions related to infinite time reductions, for example, an image display can be used to display a display mode that allows the player to understand that the remaining number of times is infinite, such as "∞ times remaining" or "Continue until the next jackpot."

(Secret remaining time reduction notification performance)
In addition, the fact that any of the support time-savings has been won may be kept secret in terms of presentation. For example, the presentation (preview presentation, etc.) during the game in which each support time-saving has been won may be a common presentation, and the presentation of the remaining time-saving count notification presentation may also be a common presentation mode, for example, "remaining number of times??? times" or "remaining number of times XX times (the same initial value is displayed and a countdown display is performed regardless of which support time-saving is won)" or "0 times (the initial value is started from zero and a countup display is performed)". This allows the number of time-savings to be kept secret, creating a sense of tension that it is not known how many times it will continue (not knowing when it will end).

When the above-mentioned "remaining times XX times" is displayed and a countdown display is executed, it is preferable to display the remaining number of time-saving times as described below. For example, when any of the support time-saving A to C is won, the least number of time-saving times, "100 times", is displayed. When the count reaches zero, if the support time-saving B or support time-saving C, which are awarded with a number of time-saving times greater than 100, is won, an additional display effect such as "+50 times!" or "+100!" is displayed to notify the player that the time-saving state will continue. On the other hand, in the case of a count-up display, when any of the support time-savings are won, the count-up display is started from zero, and when or whenever a predetermined number of times is reached, an additional display effect such as "It's still going on!", "50 more to go!", or "Infinite time-saving confirmed!" is displayed to notify the player that the time-saving state will continue. In either case, it is preferable to perform an additional display effect after a performance that teases whether the time-saving has ended, in order to stimulate the player's sense of tension.

In addition, when the time-saving state is due to assisted time-saving, the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number notification effect" may not be executed, and when the time-saving state is due to a jackpot, the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number notification effect" may be executed.In addition, when the time-saving state is due to a jackpot, the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number notification effect" may not be executed, and when the time-saving state is due to an assisted time-saving, the above-mentioned "remaining time-saving number notification effect" may be executed.

(About the effects related to the winning game (winning fluctuation pattern) of the support time reduction)
In addition, in the normal mode (normal state), when the support time-saving is won in the current game, taking into consideration that the "electric support state" occurs after the current game ends, for example, a "time-saving entry notification effect 780" as shown in FIG. 6 (A) is displayed as a winning effect to notify the player of the support time-saving win during the game. This time-saving entry notification effect is one form of a game state transition notification effect that notifies (suggests) that the game state will transition to a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the current game state (normal state). In the illustrated example of effect, as the time-saving entry notification effect 780, a text image 778 saying "We will enter the time-saving state" is displayed, a dedicated character image 777 is displayed as the background display of the decorative pattern 775, and the decorative pattern 775 shows a state in which the dedicated support time-saving winning patterns "'Time', "'☆', and "Short'" are stopped and displayed (usually, for example, a number pattern). This provides a prior notification that the game will transition to the time-saving state after the current game ends.

The reason for the appearance of such a "time-saving entry notification effect" is as follows. In particular, if the winning support time-saving is a "non-operating special electric support time-saving", when the current game ends (the variable time ends), the time-saving state will be entered after a very short fixed display time (500 ms) has elapsed (see the special symbol variable processing (step S307) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in FIG. 10). To be precise, the current game ends with the lapse of this fixed display time (500 ms). For this reason, it is to notify early that a state in which right hitting is advantageous will occur, and to prevent the player from continuing to "hit left" during the time-saving state (suffering a disadvantage). In addition, a launch induction notification effect (right hit instruction effect) may be displayed during the winning game of the support time-saving. However, in reality, the game is in the "normal state" rather than the "time-saving state" until the fixed display time has elapsed. Therefore, if the player has been too hasty and hits the ball to the right, a launch guidance notification display (left hit instruction display (warning notification)) may be displayed to encourage the player to hit to the left. In this case, it is preferable to give priority (higher display priority) to the left hit instruction display over the right hit instruction display. Note that the determination of whether or not a right hit is being made during the normal state is made based on whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the normal symbol starting hole 37.

On the other hand, in the case of "special electric activation type support time reduction," the time reduction state is entered after the support time reduction opening and closing game (small win game in the case of small win winning type support time reduction), so there is no problem as long as the launch induction notification effect (right hit instruction effect) is displayed during the support time reduction opening and closing game (for example, during the start INT). In the case of special electric activation type support time reduction, it is preferable that the period of the support time reduction opening and closing game be approximately several seconds or more.

(Regarding the confirmed display time for the winning game of the time-saving support)
In addition, in the winning game of the support time reduction, the fixed display time can be different from the normal fixed display time (500 ms). Specifically, it can be longer than the normal fixed display time (500 ms) (for example, about 1 to 10 seconds). By using this long fixed display time, there is an advantage that a margin of performance time width for executing the above-mentioned "time reduction entry notification performance" can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since a fixed display time longer than normal is intervened after the execution time (winning fluctuation time) of the winning game ends, there is also an advantage that the player can operate the launch operation handle 15 from "left hit" to "right hit" with a certain margin. Note that, only in the winning game of the support time reduction, a "right hit notification" (for example, a right hit instruction image such as the right hit notification image 779) may be executed in advance during a predetermined period during the winning game, or at least by using the fixed display time.

<Examples of time-saving entry notification effects: Fig. 47, Fig. 48>
Next, an example of the time-saving entry notification effect when the support time-saving is "non-operational support time-saving" will be described. First, in order to make this example easier to understand, the transition of the effect when the number of operation reserved balls is zero after the game ends will be described with reference to FIG.

The time chart in Figure 46 shows a case where the number of active reserved balls remains at zero (the number of active reserved balls on Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 is zero) for a while after the game ends with a "miss (no big win, small win, or no win in the support time reduction)".

Referring to the time chart in FIG. 46, when the variable display of the current special symbol ends (time T2), the special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery (here, the special symbol corresponding to a miss is displayed frozen), and the current game ends (time T3). At this time, if there is an activated reserved ball, the next game (variable display of the special symbol) starts immediately, but if there are zero activated reserved balls (no activated reserved balls), after the fixed display time Tb has elapsed, the presentation state is transitioned to "Waiting for customers (Waiting for customers)" until the next game starts (until a new activated reserved ball is generated) (times T3 to T5).

Specifically, if there are zero active balls remaining after the confirmation display time Tb has elapsed, the main control unit 20 sends a "customer waiting command" to the performance control unit 24 (see S419 in FIG. 12 described below). When the performance control unit 24 receives this customer waiting command, it performs performance processing related to the "customer waiting (waiting for customer)" performance state.

In detail, when the performance control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command, it recognizes that the game is stopped and "waiting for customers (waiting for customers)", and if a predetermined waiting time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the reception of the customer waiting command without a new activated reserved ball being generated (in this embodiment, without receiving a winning command and/or reserved addition command transmitted when an activated reserved ball is generated), that is, if a predetermined time has passed without the activated reserved balls becoming zero and the game being started (if the customer waiting performance start condition is satisfied), it displays a "customer waiting performance (demo display)" in which a demo movie is played to explain the game related to the gaming machine 1 and introduce (demonstrate) the gaming machine. Note that, if an operation related to the game setting by the player, such as a menu screen display operation described later, is detected, the measurement of the above-mentioned waiting time (120 seconds) is cleared and 120 seconds is set again. Note that the measurement of the waiting time (120 seconds) may be started after the game setting is ended and the game returns to the "customer waiting pre-performance" described later.

Figure (C) shows an example of a customer waiting effect. The example in Figure (C) shows a part of a demo movie as a customer waiting effect, where the name of the gaming machine ("CR Fujimaru-kun Senki") is displayed large in the center of the screen, and a specific character (Fujimaru-kun) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. During the customer waiting effect period, a specified demo movie is repeatedly played and displayed, effectively appealing to the appeal of the gaming machine.

However, during the period until the customer waiting performance starts (until the specified time Td has elapsed), the "customer waiting pre-waiting performance (demo start waiting display)" is displayed (times T3 to T4). For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a background performance (background image) according to the game status and a decorative pattern (decorative stop pattern) that has stopped in the current game, and this display state is maintained until the customer waiting performance starts (demo movie starts).

Figure (A) shows an example of a pre-waiting performance. In the example of Figure (A), a display state is shown in which a decorative pattern corresponding to a loss (decorative stop pattern corresponding to a loss), which is the most recent game result, is stopped during the normal performance mode (air battle mode). In this embodiment, after the pre-waiting performance starts (after the customer waiting command is received), when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (when time Tm has arrived), a "menu display possible notification performance 811" including a text display of "menu screen display →" and a button image (here, an image imitating the performance button 13) appears at the bottom of the screen. The role of this menu display possible notification performance 811 is to notify that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened by operating the performance button 13, in other words, to notify that the menu operation is possible. When the performance button 13 is pressed during the menu operation possible period, a "menu screen" as shown in the figure is displayed, and various game environment settings such as volume and light intensity can be set.

Figure (B) shows an example of a menu screen. Here, a text image of the name of the gaming machine "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" is displayed at the top of the menu screen 811a, a specific character 813 is displayed in the center right-hand part of the screen, and menu items such as "character selection," "volume adjustment," "light adjustment," "BGM selection," and "back" are displayed as examples of menu items. On this menu screen 811a, the player can operate the cursor 812 with the directional keys 75 to select the desired menu item, and when the cursor 812 is pointing at the menu item and the effect button 13 is pressed, the game settings corresponding to that menu item can be made.

For example, when the menu item "volume adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a volume adjustment screen 811b as shown in FIG. (D) is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, the desired volume level can be selected with the cross key 75 and confirmed with the performance button 13. When the volume level is confirmed, the screen returns to the pre-customer waiting performance screen in FIG. (A). In the example of FIG. (D), five levels of adjustment are possible from the reference volume value (MIN) to a predetermined maximum volume value (MAX).
Although not shown, when "Light Adjustment" is selected, a light adjustment screen similar to the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the light adjustment can be adjusted in multiple steps (for example, four steps). When "Character Selection" is selected, a friendly character or enemy character related to the current presentation mode can be selected. This allows a preferred character to appear in the preview presentation (such as a specific reach) or during a hit. When "BGM Selection" is selected, a BGM related to the current presentation mode can be selected from multiple types of BGM.

In this example, four game settings are possible: "character selection", "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment" and "BGM selection". However, the game machine may have a volume adjustment means capable of at least adjusting the volume. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of only adjusting the volume, it is not necessary to display the menu screen (menu item) 811a as shown in FIG. (B), so the volume adjustment screen (adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (D)) can be displayed directly. When the adjustment screen 811b is displayed, for example, as in the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (E), an adjustment screen 811c including a background image related to the current presentation mode can be displayed in the background presentation. In the example shown in the figure, a background image related to the normal presentation mode is displayed, and a five-level volume adjustment screen is displayed preferentially over the background image. In the case of this adjustment screen 811c, since it is a game setting screen capable of notifying the current presentation mode, there is an advantage in that the current game state (game mode) can be notified when adjusting the volume or the light intensity. Hereinafter, the mode in which the menu screen 811a is not displayed and the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed will be referred to as the "adjustment screen direct display mode."

The above-mentioned "menu operation possible period" may start immediately when a customer waiting command is received. For example, the menu operation possible period may start after the confirmed display time has elapsed (after time T3 has elapsed). In this case, the menu operation possible period is specifically the "menu operation possible period A" shown in the figure.

The above-mentioned "menu operation possible period" may also start a predetermined time after the customer waiting command is received. For example, when a predetermined time has passed after the confirmed display time has elapsed (for example, when the time Tm at which the menu display possible notification performance 811 starts has arrived), the menu operation possible period can start. Specifically, the menu operation possible period in this case is the "menu operation possible period B" shown in the figure.

The menu display available notification display 811 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the menu operation available period (in the case of notifying the start of the menu operation available period), or may be displayed from a specified timing during the menu operation available period.

<Examples: Figure 47, Figure 48>
Next, referring to Figures 47 to 48, a description will be given of a presentation example in the case where the current game is a winning game of "Special Electric Non-operating Support Time Reduction". Figures 47 to 48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the transition of presentation when the number of operation reserved balls is zero for a while after the current game ends, and show presentation example 1 and presentation example 2, which have different transitions of presentation. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned Figure 46 will also be used as appropriate.

(Example 1: Figure 47)
First, referring to FIG. 47, we will explain performance example 1.

(1-1. Timing of starting the time-saving entry notification performance)
In the case of the performance example 1 shown in FIG. 47, at a predetermined timing during the pattern change or at the end of the pattern change (symbol 801 indicates decorative patterns (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern)), for example, a time-saving entry notification performance 871 as shown in FIG. (β) is displayed. Specifically, the time-saving entry notification performance 871 is displayed at a predetermined timing during the pattern change (for example, time T1 in FIG. 46) or at the arrival of a fixed display period (time T2 in FIG. 46). The time-saving entry notification performance 871 in this performance example is a performance image including a character image 803 and a text image 802 saying "Entering sound battle mode" which notifies (suggests) the transition to the time-saving mode (time-saving state). Also, in FIG. (β), the three decorative patterns are displayed in a small retreat in the right corner of the liquid crystal screen (the decorative patterns shown in the figure 801a), an example is shown in which a decorative stop pattern (pattern corresponding to the support time-saving winning) showing the current game result is displayed. Here, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns 801a are displayed as "5", "7", and "9". This is because "Hour", "☆", and "Short" are displayed as temporary stop decorative patterns during fluctuation, making it easier for the player to grasp the support time-saving winning, as shown in FIG. 6(A), while there is no particular need for this during the final display, so that the decorative stop patterns for the support time-saving winning are displayed as number-based decorative stop patterns used during normal times (here, "5", "7", and "9"). Of course, "Hour", "☆", and "Short" shown in FIG. 6(A) may be displayed as the decorative pattern 801a. Note that the decorative pattern 801a does not have to be displayed after the final display time has elapsed.

(1-2. Display period of time-saving entry notification effect)
The time-saving entry notification effect 871 continues to appear for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the pattern change ends and the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in FIG. 46) (FIG. (γ)). However, since the game enters a "time-saving state" after the fixed display time has elapsed, the time-saving entry notification effect 871 becomes a time-saving entry notification effect 872 in which a launch guidance notification effect (right-hit instruction effect) 851 is additionally displayed, as shown in FIG. (γ). This notifies the gamer that the game has entered a time-saving state and that a right-hit favorable situation has been entered. The time-saving entry notification effect 872 here is displayed as part of the effect before the game begins.

Then, after displaying the time-saving entry notification effect 872 shown in Fig. (γ) for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (for example, when time Tm arrives), the time-saving entry notification effect 872 is terminated and the normal customer waiting pre-waiting effect 890 is displayed (Fig. (δ)). The normal customer waiting pre-waiting effect 890 here is an effect mode related to the time-saving mode (time-saving state), and as shown in Fig. (δ), a background image related to the time-saving effect mode (for example, underwater acoustic warfare mode: see Fig. 7B) is displayed as a background image according to the game state (if an effect mode dedicated to support time-saving is provided, a background image related to that effect mode may be displayed), and the most recent game result (in this effect example, "579": support time-saving corresponding decorative stop pattern) is displayed as a decorative stop pattern. In addition, with regard to the right-hit instruction effect, as it switches to the normal pre-waiting effect, the "right-hit instruction effect 851 related to the time-saving entry notification effect (first right-hit notification: right-hit instruction effect executed for a predetermined time after the confirmed display time in the supported time-saving winning game has elapsed)" ends, and a "right-hit instruction effect 852 related to electric support (second right-hit notification: right-hit instruction effect for electric support)" appears, which is a display mode (presentation mode) different from the right-hit instruction effect 851.

In addition, the above-mentioned "right-hit instruction effect for electric support (second right-hit notification)" can be the following (instruction effect 1) to (instruction effect 7).
(Instruction effect 1) A right-hit instruction effect (second right-hit notification) is common during electric support, that is, during the time-saving state (time-saving state due to a jackpot), during the special mode state, and during the supported time-saving state.
(Instruction effect 2) During game states other than the supported time-saving state (in this embodiment, the time-saving state and the special bonus state), a "common right-hit instruction effect (second right-hit notification)" is displayed, and during the supported time-saving state, a different right-hit instruction effect is displayed (a right-hit instruction effect exclusive to the supported time-saving state: third right-hit notification).
(Instruction performance 3) A common right-hit instruction performance (second right-hit notification) is provided at least during the time-saving state and the assisted time-saving state.
(Instruction effect 4) During the time-saving state and the assisted time-saving state, a common right-hit instruction effect (right-hit notification for time-saving: for example, the first right-hit notification for electric support (second right-hit notification)) is used, and during the special bonus state, a different right-hit instruction effect (right-hit notification for special bonus: for example, the second right-hit notification for electric support (third right-hit notification)) is used.
(Instruction performance 5) Different right-hit instruction performances are provided during the time-saving state, the special rate state, and the supported time-saving state.
(Instruction effect 6) After the confirmation display time in the support time-saving winning game has elapsed, a first right-hit instruction effect (the above-mentioned first right-hit notification) that is executed for a predetermined time, a second right-hit instruction effect during the support time-saving, and a right-hit instruction effect during a win (a right-hit instruction effect executed for at least a part of the time during a win) can be executed, and the first right-hit instruction effect and the right-hit instruction effect during a win are different presentation modes. In this case, the right-hit instruction effect during the time-saving state after the win and the second right-hit instruction effect are the same right-hit instruction effect.
(Instruction performance 7) After the confirmation display time has elapsed in the support time-saving winning game, the first right-hit instruction performance (the above-mentioned first right-hit notification) that is executed for a predetermined time, the second right-hit instruction performance during the support time-saving, and at least the right-hit instruction performance during a jackpot game due to a time-saving jackpot (a right-hit instruction performance executed for at least a part of the jackpot game) can be executed, and the first right-hit instruction performance and the right-hit instruction performance during a jackpot game are the same performance mode. In this case, the right-hit instruction performance during the time-saving state after the jackpot game and the second right-hit instruction performance are different right-hit instruction performances.

In addition, in the case where a small hit (including a small hit winning type support time reduction) is provided, the following (instruction performance 8) can be used.
(Instruction Display 8) After the confirmed display time has elapsed in the support time-saving winning game, it is possible to execute a first right-hit instruction display (the above-mentioned first right-hit notification) which is executed for only a predetermined time, a second right-hit instruction display during the support time-saving game, and a right-hit instruction display during a small hit game (a right-hit instruction display executed for at least a part of the period during a small hit game), and at least the first right-hit instruction display and the right-hit instruction display during a small hit game are of the same presentation type.

In the above, we have explained about the special electric non-operating type support time reduction, but when the support time reduction is a "special electric operating type support time reduction", it is preferable that the right hit instruction display (the right hit instruction display executed for at least a part of the period during the support time reduction opening and closing game) during the support time reduction opening and closing game (in the case of a small hit winning type support time reduction, during the small hit game related to that small hit) and the right hit instruction display during the hit (the right hit instruction display executed for at least a part of the period during the small hit game) during the small hit game (here, a small hit game due to a normal small hit) are the same presentation style, but they may be different presentation styles.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47 (δ), a menu display possible notification effect 811 is also displayed here to notify the user that the menu operation is possible. If the menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in FIG. (η), adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-1) (here, an adjustment screen including a background image related to the time-saving effect mode (for example, the underwater acoustic warfare mode: see FIG. 7B)), or adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (η-2) can be displayed.

(1-3. Regarding the end timing of the right hit instruction performance 851 (first right hit notification))
In this example, the end timing of the right hit instruction effect 851 (first right hit notification) is explained as the timing when it switches to the normal customer waiting before effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be the following (Tim1) to (Tim4).
(Tim1) The first right hit notification may end before the menu display possible notification performance 811 is executed (appears).
(Tim2) The first right-hit notification may be ended before the menu operation possible period starts. Specifically, in the case where the menu operation possible period B is adopted, the first right-hit notification may be ended before the time Tm (FIG. 46) arrives, for example.
(Tim 3) The first right hit notification can be ended during the menu operable period before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed (appears). For example, in a case where the menu display possible notification effect 811 is started with a predetermined delay from the start of the menu operable period, the first right hit notification can be ended before the menu display possible notification effect 811 is executed.
(Tim4) The first right hit notification may be terminated when a menu operation (game setting operation) is performed. For example, the notification may be terminated when the operation means is operated for the menu operation. For example, the first right hit notification may be terminated when the menu screen 811a shown in FIG. (η), the adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-2) is displayed. In addition, the first right hit notification may be terminated when an adjustment operation (game setting operation: for example, an operation to change or determine the volume level) is performed after the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed. In other words, the first right hit notification is not terminated at the stage when the adjustment screen 811b or the adjustment screen 811c is displayed, but is terminated when an adjustment operation is performed.
In addition, when the first right hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right hit notification), the second right hit notification starts.

(1-4. Waiting for customers (demo display))
Then, when the customer waiting performance start condition is satisfied, that is, when a predetermined waiting time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving entry notification performance 872 has started (since the customer waiting command has been received) without a menu display operation, or when an operation related to the game setting by the player has been detected, when the waiting time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the detection (it may also be the case that the game setting has ended and the waiting time (120 seconds) has elapsed since returning to the pre-customer waiting performance), the customer waiting performance is displayed (Figure (ε)). When an operating reserved ball occurs during the pre-customer waiting performance or during the customer waiting performance (during customer waiting waiting (including during the game setting screen display)), a symbol variation display game in the time-saving mode (time-saving performance mode) is executed (Figure (ζ)).

(1-5. Regarding the end timing of the right hit instruction effect 851 (first right hit notification) when there is an active reserved ball)
The above describes the end timing of the right hit instruction effect 851 (first right hit notification) when there are no active reserved balls for a while after the winning game of the support time reduction. Below, the end timing of the right hit instruction effect 851 (first right hit notification) is described when there is an active reserved ball during the winning game of the support time reduction, or when an active reserved ball occurs within a short time (for example, before the normal customer waiting effect 890 is displayed) after the winning game of the support time reduction. The right hit instruction effect 851 (first right hit notification) in this case can be the following (Tim5) to (Tim12).
(Tim5) The first right hit notification can be ended until the symbol change of the next game starts, or when the symbol change of the next game starts. For example, the presentation transition is "Figure (β) or Figure (γ) → Figure (ζ)". If an operating reserved ball exists during a winning game of the support time reduction, the next game starts immediately, but the time reduction entry notification presentation 871 may be displayed across the next game. For example, it may be displayed for a predetermined time from the start of the next game, or it may be displayed until the high-speed change of the decorative symbol of the next game starts (see FIG. 44, etc. described later for high-speed change). In this case, instead of displaying the time reduction entry notification presentation 871 as it is, only a part of the display, for example, only the character image 802 or the character image 803 may be displayed.
(Tim 6) The first right hit notification can be ended before the high speed fluctuation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see Figure 44, etc. described below) begins.
(Tim 7) The first right hit notification can be ended before the stopping operation of at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game (see Figures 44 to 45, etc. described below) begins.
(Tim 8) The first right hit notification can be ended before at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game is stopped and displayed.
(Tim 9) The first right hit notification can be ended after at least one of the decorative symbols in the next game has stopped and been displayed.
(Tim 10) The first right hit notification can be ended before the variation time of the special pattern (or decorative pattern) in the next game ends (the variation time has elapsed).
(Tim11) The first right hit notification can be ended at least after the end of the variation time of the special pattern (or decorative pattern) in the next game (after the variation time has elapsed).
(Tim12) The first right hit notification can be ended during the fixed display time in the next game. For example, the first right hit notification can be ended when the fixed display time starts, is in the middle of, or ends.
In addition, when the first right hit notification ends (triggered by the end of the first right hit notification), the second right hit notification starts.

(Example 2: Figure 48)
Next, a modified example (exemplary performance example 2) of the above-mentioned exemplary performance example 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. The difference between the exemplary performance example 1 of Fig. 47 and the exemplary performance example 2 of Fig. 48 is mainly in that the display period of the time-saving entry notification performance is different, and the accompanying exemplary performance mode is different.

In the case of the performance example 2 shown in FIG. 48, the time-saving entry notification performance 871 is displayed until the next game starts or until the customer waiting performance starts. Specifically, if a predetermined time has passed without the next game being started, the customer waiting performance is displayed without the customer waiting pre-performance being displayed.

The time-saving entry notification effect 871 in this example is substantially the same as the above-mentioned example 1 (Fig. 47) in that it continues to be displayed for a predetermined period (predetermined time) even after the pattern change has ended and the fixed display time has elapsed (after time T3 in Fig. 46), and that the time-saving entry notification effect 872, which is additionally displayed with the launch guidance notification effect (right-hit instruction effect) 851, is displayed after the fixed display time has elapsed. However, in this example, even after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the normal customer waiting pre-show effect 890 does not appear, and the time-saving entry notification effect 872 continues to be displayed as it is. This is a crucial difference from example 1. Also, in this example, after the time-saving entry notification effect 872 has been displayed for a predetermined time, the right-hit instruction effect 851 (first right-hit notification) is switched to the right-hit instruction effect 852 (second right-hit notification) as shown in Fig. (δ) (time-saving entry notification effect 873 in Fig. (δ)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. (δ), the menu display possible notification effect 811 is displayed during the appearance of the time-saving entry notification effect 873. At this time, it is preferable to make the transparency of at least a part of the display of the time-saving entry notification effect 873 (here, at least one of the display of the text image 802, the character image 803, the right-hit instruction effect 852, and the decorative pattern 801a) higher than that of the menu display possible notification effect 811 (the menu display possible notification effect 811 is displayed with priority over the time-saving entry notification effect 873) (see FIG. (δ)). In particular, it is preferable to make the menu display possible notification effect 811 stand out by increasing the transparency of the display of the effect (here, the character image 803) that overlaps with the menu display possible notification effect 811. Also, in order to emphasize the right-hit advantage state, it is preferable not to increase the transparency of at least the right-hit instruction effect 852 (to have the same transparency as the menu display possible notification effect 811).

In addition, when a menu display operation is performed during the menu operation possible period, the menu screen shown in FIG. (η), the adjustment screen 811c shown in FIG. (η-1), or the adjustment screen 811b shown in FIG. (η-2) is displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. (η-1), the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving performance mode. However, in the present performance example, since the time-saving entry notification performance is continuously displayed and the customer waiting pre-performance is not displayed, the adjustment screen 811c may include a background image related to the time-saving entry notification performance. For example, instead of the submarine image, an image related to the time-saving entry notification performance (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. Also, instead of the specific character 813 in the menu screen shown in FIG. (η), an image related to the time-saving entry notification performance (for example, the character image 803) or a specific image for the support time-saving state may be displayed. This allows the player to be notified that the support time-saving state is in progress even when a screen related to the game settings is being displayed.

The advantage of this example of presentation is that the "time-saving entry notification presentation" appears until the next game starts or until the customer waiting presentation starts, so that the player can be clearly notified that the support time-saving state is in effect for a relatively long period of time.

(Customer waiting during support time reduction)
In the first and second performance examples, the customer waiting performance (demo screen) in the time-saving state (support time-saving state) due to the support time-saving may be a customer waiting performance (customer waiting performance for the support state) different from the normal customer waiting performance (customer waiting performance in other game states other than the support time-saving state). Preferably, a customer waiting performance different from the customer waiting performance in at least the normal state is displayed. For example, at least a part of the performance mode by one or more performance means used for the customer waiting performance can be a different performance mode. As an example, for example, the display color of "CR Fujimaru-kun Senki" shown in FIG. (ε) is different (at least a part of the display content of the demo screen (demo movie) is different: a part of the image display performance is different), the light performance is different (a part of the light performance is different, etc. In this case, by displaying a customer waiting performance (demo screen) different from the normal one, it is possible to notify that the support time-saving state is in effect even during the customer waiting performance.

In addition, in the above-mentioned performance example 2, a configuration capable of displaying the customer waiting effect was described, but the configuration may be such that the customer waiting effect itself is not displayed. Specifically, the time-saving entry notification effect is continued until the next game starts. In this case, the performance progression is (α) to (ζ) shown in FIG. 48, excluding the customer waiting effect (demo display) of (ε).

(2. Irregular Patterns)
(A) When the change time related to the support time reduction winning game ends, the main control unit 20 transmits a "change stop command" as a performance control command to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24, upon receiving this, understands that the change time has ended and stops displaying the decorative pattern being changed (see step S452 in FIG. 16). However, if this change stop command is not correctly transmitted to the performance control unit 24 due to some malfunction (noise, etc.) (if the performance control unit 24 cannot correctly receive the change stop command), the decorative pattern is made to enter the support time reduction state while remaining in a special change state for error (for example, so-called "swing change"). In other words, the decorative pattern remains in a swinging swing, but the electric support state due to the support time reduction is generated (the normal pattern swing display game is executed as usual). In addition, if the swing swing is still in the waiting state for customers (if the performance control unit 24 receives a customer waiting command), the swing swing is terminated and the decorative pattern is stopped (determined stop display). Specifically, the customer waiting performance is displayed and the decorative pattern is stopped.

(Modification of time-saving mode transition)
In this embodiment, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving are first shifted to a common "time-saving mode 1" (contributing to reducing the control burden), but for the purpose of diversifying the gameplay and the presentation, they may be shifted to different time-saving modes. For example, the time-saving jackpot may be shifted to time-saving mode 1, and the support time-saving may be shifted to time-saving mode 2. In this case, the 4R time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving A, which give the same number of time-saving times, may be shifted to different time-saving modes (fluctuation states). In this case, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the final fluctuation of the time-saving jackpot and the final fluctuation of the support time-saving may be different. For example, the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation can be shorter for the support time-saving than for the 4R time-saving jackpot.
Also, the time-saving jackpot and the support time-saving may be shifted to different time-saving modes. For example, the time-saving state due to the 4R time-saving jackpot is played under a low-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 1), and the support time-saving A is played under a medium-speed or high-speed fluctuation state (for example, time-saving mode 2 or time-saving mode 3). In this case, the average consumption time (game consumption speed) related to the time-saving mode can be made different between the jackpot time-saving state (normal time-saving state) and the time-saving state due to the support time-saving (support time-saving state) (the fluctuation time or average fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is different). As a result, the freedom of playability and presentation can be expanded and made more diverse. In this case, the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern described later may be the same, but it is preferable that it is made different.

In addition, when a specific support time-saving option is selected among multiple types of support time-saving options, the time-saving mode may be changed to a different mode from when other support time-saving options are selected. For example, support time-saving options A and B that grant limited time-saving options may be changed to time-saving mode 1 (low-speed fluctuation state) or time-saving mode 2 (medium-speed fluctuation state), and support time-saving option C that grants unlimited time-saving options may be changed to time-saving mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state). In other words, some or all of the multiple types of support time-saving options may be changed to different time-saving modes. In this case, it is preferable to change to a fluctuation state in which the average consumption time (game consumption speed) is relatively short when a support time-saving option that grants a relatively large number of time-saving options is selected. For example, if the supported time-saving options are A, B, and C (time-saving counts of 100, 200, and 65,535), if the supported time-saving option A is selected, the player will transition to time-saving mode 1 (slow fluctuation state), if the supported time-saving option B is selected, the player will transition to time-saving mode 2 (medium fluctuation state), and if the supported time-saving option C is selected, the player will transition to time-saving mode 3 (high fluctuation state).

(Game mode related to the potential state)
In addition, when a potential state is provided, a data value different from Tcode and YJ (see FIG. 43) corresponding to other game states may be set. In this way, a "potential mode" and a "potential effect mode" may be provided as game modes and effect modes. In addition, the probability mode according to the present embodiment has been described as a game mode corresponding to a "probability state", but this is not limited thereto, and all or a part of the probability mode may be treated as a game mode corresponding to a "potential state". In addition, it is preferable that the fluctuation state in the potential mode (potential state) is the same or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state (a fluctuation state in which the average consumption time is relatively long) than the time-saving mode.

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figs. 8 to 21>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 8 to 21. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is mainly composed of an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: Figure 8) and a timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 9) that is started by a regular interrupt from the CTC.

<12. Main processing on the main control side: Figure 8>
The main processing on the main control unit 20 side (main control side main processing) will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the details of the main control side main processing.

Triggers for starting the main processing on the main control side include a system reset occurring when recovering from a power outage or power abnormality, or when the control program goes out of control and the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated, forcing the CPU to be reset (WDT reset). In either case, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes the initial setting processing required to start the game operation as part of the power-on processing (step S011).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a setting change mode transition state in which the setting values can be changed (step S014). In this embodiment, with the power to the gaming machine 1 off and the door open (the door open sensor 61 is ON (open detection)), if the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are both turned ON (the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are both ON) and the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the setting change mode transition conditions are met, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a setting change permitted state (setting change mode transition state) in which the setting values can be changed.

When the game is in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), a setting change process that manages the change operation of the setting value (levels 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, it is first determined whether the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the internal RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6). If the game is playing normally, the setting value storage area stores setting value data (setting value Nc) of any of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to settings 1 to 6. However, it is possible that the setting value data is corrupted due to some malfunction, and a value that does not correspond to any of settings 1 to 6 is set (setting abnormal error). Therefore, if the setting value Nc is not a normal value, the setting value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If the setting is returned to the initial value or is a normal value, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97. After that, the ON/OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) each time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As already explained, the setting value during the setting change (setting change operation) is switched cyclically between settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, and the current setting value during the setting change is displayed on the setting display 97. Then, when the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed to be turned ON, the setting value is confirmed and the current setting value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203. This exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-area RAM clear process (step S031) described later.

In addition, the setting change switch 95 may not be provided, and the RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, one of the setting values from Settings 1 to 6 may be selected. Also, the setting change completion switch 96 may not be provided, and the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning the setting key switch 94 OFF.

On the other hand, if the setting change mode has not been entered (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it is checked whether the setting value data (setting value Nc) in the setting value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, etc. If there is an abnormality in the RAM contents (step S015: YES), the power re-on waiting process (step S020) for when there is a RAM abnormality, which will be described later, is executed.

If the contents of the RAM are normal (step S015: NO), it is then determined whether the backup flag BF is ON (5AH) (step S016). When the backup process is executed normally in the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 9) described later, this backup flag BF is set to "5AH (normal value)" in the BF flag storage area of the internal RAM. Therefore, under normal circumstances, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, some kind of malfunction may occur and the backup flag BF may not be the normal value (≠ 5AH). Therefore, if the backup flag BF is not ON (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In the power re-on waiting process in step S020, the game is controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. Specifically, after sending a power re-on command and clearing the backup flag BF, the WDT clear process to clear the WDT and the process to check the ON state of the power abnormality signal (power cut confirmation) (power abnormality check process) are repeated until a power cut occurs. In addition, if a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power cut is confirmed, and a WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated. In addition, when the power re-on command is received by the performance control unit 24, a performance image such as "RAM error Please turn the power back on and set the setting value to 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as a RAM error notification (power re-on instruction performance), all performance LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

When the power re-on waiting process is executed and the game is stopped, the currently occurring RAM error state cannot be resolved unless the power of the gaming machine 1 is re-turned and the setting change mode transition state is set at the time of re-powering, thereby executing the setting change process (step S023). In this embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the setting value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting abnormality error), the in-area RAM clear process of step S031 described below is executed, which essentially clears the entire area of RAM 203 (excluding the RAM area related to performance display (external RAM area)), thereby returning RAM 203 to its initial state and resolving the RAM error.

If the backup flag BF is ON (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not the game is in a RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In this embodiment, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is OFF, the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF (not operated to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON), and then the game machine 1 is powered on, the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied and the game machine is controlled to a RAM clear mode transition state.

If the RAM clear mode transition state is reached (step S025: YES), an in-area RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clear process, the memory areas of the RAM 203 are cleared except for at least the out-area RAM area related to the performance display and the in-area RAM area including the setting value storage area. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF set at the time of power interruption and the checksum value are both cleared to zero in this process. Also, various commands required for RAM clearing (for example, a "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared and a "customer waiting command") are sent to the performance control unit 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, it executes an initialization notification performance to notify the RAM clearing, and sets the performance mode to the "normal performance mode" as the initial performance mode. In other words, when the in-area RAM clear process is executed, the game mode is set to the initial mode of normal mode, and the performance mode is also set to the normal performance mode associated with the normal mode.

After the RAM clear process in step S031 is completed, the initial setting process when the RAM is cleared (initial data setting process when power is turned on) is executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process when power is turned on, for example, the timer for sending the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) is set to 30,000 ms, and the losing symbol data is set as the special symbol (special symbol 1 stop symbol, special symbol 2 stop symbol) data to be displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described below is executed. The ceiling counter initial data setting process (step S032a) in the dashed line portion shown in the figure will be described in the third embodiment (with ceiling function) described below.

Returning to the explanation of step S025, if the game machine is not in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025: NO), it is then determined whether the game machine is in the setting check mode transition state (setting check permitted state) in which the current setting value can be confirmed (step S026). In this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is powered off, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned OFF (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF), and then the game machine 1 is powered on, the game machine 1 is controlled to the setting check mode transition state as the setting check mode transition conditions are met (see steps S014 to S026).

If the setting check mode transition state is reached (step S026: YES), a setting check process (step S027) is executed to control the device to a setting check state in which the current setting value can be checked. After the setting check process is completed, a backup recovery process (step S028) is executed to restore the game process from the backup data that was backed up at the time of power outage. In the setting check process of step S027, a display process is executed to display the current setting value (setting check display) on the setting display 97. The display of the setting value is terminated when the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF. After the setting key switch 94 is turned OFF, the backup recovery process is executed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described below is executed.

On the other hand, if the game has not transitioned to the setting confirmation mode (step S026: NO), that is, if the game machine 1 is simply powered on, the above-mentioned backup recovery process (step S028) is performed, and the game processing at the time of backup is restored based on the backup data.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup recovery processing (step S028), the CTC setting processing is executed (step S036). Here, the CTC setting processing is executed to generate a timer interrupt periodically every 4 ms. As a result, an interrupt request signal is periodically output to the interrupt controller, and the main control side timer interrupt processing (4 ms interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game can be started, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from OFF (launch prohibited state) to ON (launch permitted state), and a game start command is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S037). This allows the launch operation of the game ball from the launch device 32. Furthermore, when the performance control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) for the movable device. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is solely for checking the operation of the movable device when the power is turned on.

After the backup recovery process in step S028 is performed, and before the CTC setting process in step S036 is performed, the system may be configured to execute an "operation check setting process" required to check whether the performance indicator 99 is operating normally. In this performance indicator 99 check operation, for example, the display mode of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d is controlled to a "full blinking display (operation check display)" mode in which all lights are turned on and off periodically for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (operation check display process). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display process related to the operation check is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102: out-of-area program) during the main control side timer interrupt process described below. Since the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not executed at this stage during the setting change process (step S023) or the setting confirmation process (step S027). Taking advantage of this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 can be configured to be usable as the setting display 97, and the performance indicator 99 can be configured to temporarily function as the setting display 97. In this case, the setting display 97 can be substituted by the performance indicator 99, which contributes to reducing the control burden and reducing costs.

After completing the above series of power-on processes, an infinite loop process of steps S040 to S045 related to normal game progress is executed. This puts the game in a state where game progress is possible. When the loop process is started, the CPU is set to an interrupt-prohibited state (step S040) and various random number update processes are executed (step S041). In the various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers that circulate within a predetermined range of values by increment processing) used in the special symbol variable display game and the normal symbol variable display game are updated. For example, the random numbers (initial value random number for special symbol determination, initial value random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc.) used to change the initial value (start value) of the random numbers related to the special symbol lottery used for the symbol lottery, the random numbers related to the auxiliary hit lottery (random number for auxiliary hit determination used for the lottery for the auxiliary hit, normal symbol determination random number used for the lottery for the auxiliary hit), and the random numbers for the variable pattern used to select the variable pattern are updated.

After the various random number update processes (step S041) are completed, the performance display monitor tally division process for the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor tally division process, the processes required to calculate the base value to be displayed on the performance indicator 99 are executed.

When the performance display monitor tally division process in step S043 is completed, an interrupt is permitted (step S045), and the process returns to step S040. Thereafter, steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed (main loop process). The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and the performance display monitor tally division process, except when performing timer interrupt processes that are executed intermittently.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt processing: Figure 9>
Next, the timer interruption process on the main control side will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the timer interruption process on the main control side. This timer interruption process on the main control side is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (about 4 ms) and is executed by interrupting the main process on the main control side.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the registers (step S081). This power supply abnormality check process monitors the power level supplied from a power supply board (not shown), and if a power failure or other power abnormality occurs, it performs backup processing including setting the backup flag BF (BF←5AH), performing a checksum calculation to calculate a checksum value (here, an 8-bit addition calculation process targeting the RAM within the area), and storing the calculation results. The power supply abnormality check process acts as a backup means that retains data in a specified area of RAM even after the power is cut off.

Next, a timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (times) used to control the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning slot) are updated based on input information (detection information) from various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1 (input data creation process). Here, input data is also created based on input information of a status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error process corresponding to the abnormal status is carried out in the error management process (step S089) described below.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the setting value data is a normal value (a value indicating a setting 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH). Then, a setting value abnormality command is sent to the performance control unit 24, and the setting abnormality check process is exited. When the performance control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, it uses the performance means to execute a setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification). Note that when this setting abnormality check process is executed again, if the setting error flag is ON, nothing is done and the process is exited.

Next, a random number management process within the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process within the timer interrupt, the random numbers for each variable display game are periodically updated. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random numbers for determining special symbols and for determining supplementary hits are updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) and the start value of the random number counter is changed each time the random number counter goes around once. Note that the random numbers for internal lottery (random numbers for determining big hits) are generated by the random number generation circuit described above and are not updated here.

Next, an error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, it is monitored whether an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., and if an error has occurred, an error command capable of identifying the type of error is sent to the performance control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. In addition, if the error is cleared, an error clear command is sent to the performance control unit 24, and the error clear processing is executed.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is checked, and if a prize is won, a payout control command specifying the number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, it controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information contained therein, and causes it to execute the payout operation of the specified number of prize balls.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, the process required for the normal symbol variable display game (variable display operation of normal symbols) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start hole sensor 37a, and if a game ball is detected, it acquires predetermined game information (random number for determining a supplementary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery (normal symbol random number acquisition process), and reserves and stores the game information as reserved data (normal symbol operation reserved ball) up to the maximum reserved memory number (here, 4 pieces) (normal symbol reserved storage process). Then, when a predetermined start condition is established, a supplementary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation reserved ball is performed, and the selection of the normal symbol variable pattern and the stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop symbol) are determined based on the result of the auxiliary hit lottery. Here, in order to perform the variable display operation of the normal symbol, if it is changing, LED display data for the variable display is created, and if it is not changing, LED display data for the stop display is created (normal symbol display data update process).

Next, the normal electric role management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric role management process, the process required to execute the normal electric open game is executed based on the result of the lottery for the above-mentioned auxiliary win lottery. Specifically, the process generates and sets solenoid control data for the normal electric role solenoid 41c. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal based on the solenoid control data is output to the normal electric role solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, and the operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processes necessary for the special symbol change display game are executed. In this special symbol management process, mainly processes related to reserved memory for special symbol activation reserved balls, look-ahead judgment, determination of the look-ahead change pattern based on the look-ahead judgment result, jackpot lottery, determination of the change pattern at the start of the change based on the jackpot lottery, determination of the special stop symbol, control of the special symbol change display operation, and game state transition settings are performed. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later using FIG. 10.

Next, the special electric device management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric device management process, the processes required for winning games (jackpot games and small jackpot games) are executed. In the special electric device management process, mainly, the execution control of the winning game based on the jackpot lottery result, the setting of the destination game state after the jackpot game, etc. are executed. The details of the special electric device management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Next, a right-hit notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-hit notification information management process, LED data is created to turn on the right-hit display device 39b when the game state is "right-hit favorable" (during a winning game, during an electric support state (time-saving state or special probability state)), and LED data is created to turn off the right-hit display device 39b when the game state is "left-hit favorable" (normal state).

Next, LED management processing is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) for various LED display devices such as the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the right-hit display device 39b is executed. Control signals based on LED display data created in the normal symbol management processing (step S091), the special symbol management processing (step S093), the right-hit notification information management processing (step S097), and the like are output in this LED management processing.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created and output control is executed to the external device through the frame external terminal board 21.

Next, solenoid management processing is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management processing, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric role management processing (step S092) and the special electric role management processing (step S094), excitation signal output control is executed for the normal electric role solenoid 41c and the large prize opening solenoid 52c. This drives and controls the movable wing piece 47 and the opening door 52b, and realizes the opening and closing operation of the lower start opening 35 and the large prize opening 50.

Next, all registers are saved (step S101), a performance display monitor process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor process, calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and necessary processes related to display control are executed. Also, here, the type test signal is created and output process is executed.

Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). This resets the WDT with each interrupt and returns the count value to its initial value.

When the above steps S081 to S104 have been completed, the timer interrupt process ends and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10. Special symbol management process: Figure 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in Fig. 9 will be described. Fig. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process. Here, the case where the special electric non-operation type support time reduction is adopted as the support time reduction will be mainly described.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs a "special chart 1 starting hole check process" for the special chart 1 side (upper starting hole 34 side) (step S301), and then executes a "special chart 2 starting hole check process" for the special chart 2 side (lower starting hole 35 side) (step S302). Details of the special chart 1 starting hole check process and the special chart 2 starting hole check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 11.

After completing the start port check process in steps S301-S302, the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag that specifies whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that a jackpot game is not in progress.

If the condition device operation flag is ON, that is, if a jackpot game is in progress (step S304: = 5AH), the process for the variable display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and the process proceeds directly to the special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, if a jackpot game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. In other words, during a jackpot game, the stopped display mode of the special symbol is maintained as a fixed display of the support time-saving symbol or the jackpot symbol. Note that in cases where a special-electricity-activated support time-saving or small jackpot game is provided, even if the support time-saving opening/closing game or small jackpot game is in progress, the process proceeds directly to the special symbol display data update process in step S309, without performing the process for the variable display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308, just like in the case of a jackpot game described above.

On the other hand, in step S304, if the condition device operation flag is OFF (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), processing is performed according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). Note that the "special symbol operation status" is a status value that indicates the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, one of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is executed depending on whether the special symbol operation status is "Waiting (00H, 01H)", "Changing (02H)", or "Confirming (03H)". Specifically, if the special symbol operation status is "Waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is executed, if it is "Changing (02H)", the special symbol change process (step S307) is executed, and if it is "Confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "Waiting" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a waiting state for the next change, "Changing" indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (changing display), and the above-mentioned "Confirming" indicates that the change of the special symbol has ended and the display is stopped (confirmed) (during the special symbol confirmation time). These processes realize the special symbol variable display operation (display operation that sets the start and stop of the variable). Details of steps S306 to S308, which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later using Figures 12, 16, and 17A to 17B, respectively.

When any of the above steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process is performed in step S309, which will be described later. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether the special symbol is changing or not, and if it is changing, data for the special symbol that flashes repeatedly at predetermined intervals (data for the 7-segment flashing display while changing) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for the stationary display (data for the 7-segment flashing display while the stationary display is being displayed) is created. The special symbol display data created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) in FIG. 9, and the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, realizing the display of the changing and stationary special symbols. This leaves the special symbol management process, and the special electric device management process in step S095 in FIG. 9 is executed.

<9. Special Diagram 1 Starting Port Check Processing: Figure 11>
With reference to FIG. 11, the special chart 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the special chart 1 start port check process. This special chart 1 start port check process plays a role as a winning time process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly composed of a process related to reserved memory when a game ball wins in the upper start port 34 and a process related to pre-reading judgment. Note that the special chart 1 start port check process and the special chart 2 start port check process are essentially the same process content, with the only difference being whether the process content is related to the special chart 1 side or the special chart 2 side. Therefore, in order to avoid overlapping description, the special chart 1 start port check process will be described here.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether a winning ball has been detected at the upper starting hole 34 (step S311).

If a winning entry is detected at the upper starting hole 34 (the starting hole on the special chart 1 side) (step S311: YES), it is determined whether the number of balls reserved for operation on the special chart 1 is 4 or more (step S312). In other words, it is determined whether the number of balls reserved for operation on the special chart 1 is less than the maximum reserved memory number (here, 4). Note that if a winning entry is not detected at the upper starting hole 34 (step S311: NO), the special chart 1 starting hole check process is exited without doing anything.

If the number of reserved balls in operation for special chart 1 is 4 or more, that is, an over-winning that exceeds the maximum reserved memory number occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command specifying an over-winning (for example, B406H for special chart 1, B506H for special chart 2) is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in operation for special chart 1 is not 4 or more, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls in operation for special chart 1 (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used in the special pattern change display game 1 related to the currently generated special pattern 1 activation reserved ball are obtained (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random numbers for jackpot determination, special pattern determination, and change pattern are obtained from various random number counters, and the obtained random number values are stored in the reserved memory area of the RAM in the area. This reserved memory area is an area that stores predetermined game information related to the pattern change display game as activation reserved balls (reserved data), and in this reserved memory area, the above-mentioned various random number values as reserved data are reserved and stored in the order of establishment of the starting condition (order of winning) until they are used for the special pattern 1 activation display operation (until the special pattern change display game 1 is executed). In addition, the reserved memory area is provided with reserved memory areas corresponding to the special pattern 1 side and the special pattern 2 side (special pattern 1 reserved memory area corresponding to special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 reserved memory area corresponding to special pattern 2), and each is capable of storing reserved data for the maximum number of activation reserved balls.

Next, the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command is provided with pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits pre-reading judgment (step S315), and then it is determined whether or not the "pre-reading prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition that prohibits pre-reading judgment, specifically, a condition that prohibits pre-reading notice. In the case of the special chart 1 start port check process, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special chart 1 operation reserved ball is satisfied, and in the case of the special chart 2 start port check process, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading prohibition condition for the special chart 2 operation reserved ball is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the current game state is a "game state with electric support state", that is, a game state in which the special chart 2 operation reserved ball is likely to occur (a state in which it is easy to win), it is set to "special chart 1 pre-reading prohibited", and in the case of a "game state with no electric support state", that is, a game state in which the special chart 1 operation reserved ball is likely to occur, it is set to "special chart 2 pre-reading prohibited". Therefore, in the judgment process of step S316, if the current game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the special chart 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is established, and the judgment result is 'YES'. In addition, whether special chart 1 or special chart 2 is to be pre-reading prohibited can be determined according to the internal game state (game state judgment number YJ) and/or the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode).

If the above-mentioned special chart 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is met (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the pre-reading judgment process (steps S318-S320) are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S321 described below. In this case, the pre-reading judgment targeting the current special chart 1 activation reserved ball is not executed, and a winning command with pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see the random number determination process (step S320) when the ball enters the starting hole described below). As a result, the execution of the pre-reading notice for the current activation reserved ball is controlled to a prohibited state (the pre-reading notice for the current activation reserved ball is not executed).

If the special chart 1 pre-reading prohibition condition is not met (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is ON (step S317: = 5AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting abnormality error) has occurred, the pre-reading judgment process (steps S318 to S320) is skipped and the process proceeds to step S321 described below. In this case, the pre-reading judgment targeting the current activation reserved ball is not executed, and a winning command with pre-reading prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, and the pre-reading notice is not executed. In other words, the pre-reading prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the pre-reading judgment process (steps S318 to S320) has not been executed.

If the setting error flag is not ON (step S317: ≠ 5AH), a setting value command is sent to execute random number determination processing (step S318). This random number determination processing is performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' processing, and here, a 'pre-reading winning/losing determination' is performed to determine in advance the result of the 'winning/losing lottery at the start of fluctuation (random number determination processing for determining the operation of special electric role devices described below (step S410 in Figure 12))' which is performed when the current pending activation ball is used for the variable display operation.

(Settings command)
The "setting value command" includes information that can identify the current setting value, and is used by the performance control unit 24 when controlling the appearance of a preview performance based on that setting value (a setting suggestion performance, described below). This setting value command is sent each time an activated reserved ball is generated during the start port check process. This allows the performance control unit 24 to control the appearance of a preview performance related to an activated reserved ball (for example, a setting suggestion performance related to a pre-reading preview performance) based on correct setting value information. Note that in the case of a "game machine without a setting function" or a "game machine with one-stage setting", there is no need to send a setting value command (there is no need to provide a process for sending a setting value command).

In the random number determination process in step S318, the "win random number determination table" is first obtained, and then a random number value for jackpot determination is obtained. Then, based on the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and the win random number determination table, a lottery (pre-read win/lose determination) is performed for the currently active reserved ball, and the lottery result (pre-read win/lose result) is obtained.

(T-1. Winning Random Number Judgment Table: Figure 26)
FIG. 26 shows an example of a winning random number judgment table according to this embodiment. FIG. 26(A) shows a winning random number judgment table in the case where a support time reduction is provided on the special chart 2 side, and FIG. 26(B) shows a winning random number judgment table in the case where a support time reduction is not provided on the special chart 2 side (including a case equivalent to a case where the lottery probability (winning area) is 0 and therefore substantially not provided). The "support time reduction" in the embodiment is determined as a target for a winning/losing lottery. From this point of view, the lottery form related to the support time reduction is called a "lottery form subject to winning/losing lottery". In addition, if a winning random number judgment table such as FIG. 26(B) or FIG. 27 described later is used according to a specific game state (a winning random number judgment table with no winning area for the support time reduction or with a winning area of zero), it is possible to set a form in which the support time reduction is not activated during a specific game state.

The above-mentioned winning random number judgment table includes a winning random number judgment table (winning random number judgment table for special chart 1: Fig. (A) (a) or Fig. (B) (c)) for the special chart 1 activation reserved ball (special chart variable display game 1) and a winning random number judgment table (winning random number judgment table for special chart 2: Fig. (A) (b) or Fig. (B) (d)) for the special chart 2 activation reserved ball (special chart variable display game 2). That is, during the special chart 1 start hole check process, the "winning random number judgment table for special chart 1" is referenced, and during the special chart 2 start hole check process, the "winning random number judgment table for special chart 2" is referenced. This winning random number judgment table is also used when performing the winning/losing lottery in the "random number judgment process for special electric role activation judgment (step S410 in Fig. 12)" described later.

These random number jackpot determination tables associate a determination area (determination value) for determining the type of win or loss (whether it is a jackpot, a time-saving support, or a miss (which may include a small win)) with a random number value for jackpot determination (size of the random number for jackpot determination: 65536) according to the state of probability of winning or losing (high probability or low probability), and the type of win or loss is determined depending on which determination value the random number value for jackpot determination belongs to.

In this embodiment, the random number judgment table is provided with a random number judgment table corresponding to each setting value (settings 1 to 6) (at least a table with a different probability of winning depending on settings 1 to 6 (for example, six types of random number judgment tables)) (in the figure, judgment values for settings 1, 3, and 6 are shown as representatives). In this embodiment, the ratio of the probability of winning at high probability to the probability of winning at low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability/low probability) is the same for each setting value, and the ratio is set to a value not exceeding 10. For example, a jackpot is won at setting 6 "1/180 at low probability, 1/45 at high probability", setting 5 "1/184 at low probability, 1/46 at high probability", ..., setting 2 "1/196 at low probability, 1/49 at high probability", and setting 1 "1/200 at low probability, 1/50 at high probability". The probability increase ratio may be different for each setting value. Also, in the case of a "game machine without a setting function" or a "game machine with one-stage setting," there is only one type of setting, so there is also only one type of the winning random number determination table.

Figure 26 (B) is a random number judgment table for special chart 2 when there is no support time reduction on the special chart 2 side, but in this embodiment, not only the data corresponding to the judgment value for the support time reduction win (65405 to 65535) but all judgment values are "00H". In other words, regardless of the value of the random number value for jackpot judgment, the result is a non-win for the support time reduction (in this example, a "miss" that is neither a jackpot win nor a support time reduction win). In this way, when there is no support time reduction, instead of a lottery form in which a lottery for the support time reduction is not performed, a lottery for the support time reduction is performed, but if all judgment values (here, 0 to 65535) are set as judgment values that are not wins for the support time reduction, if you want to set a support time reduction on the special chart 2 side later, you only need to change the data corresponding to the judgment value you want to win the support time reduction to "5AH", and there is no need to change the entire data structure again. This makes it easier to adjust when developing a new model or during the design and development stage.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, and here, a 'pre-reading symbol determination' is performed to determine in advance the result of the 'symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation (special stop symbol creation process (step S411) in Figure 12 described below)' which is executed when the current pending activation ball is used for the fluctuation display operation.

In the special stop pattern data creation process, a "pattern table" is selected according to the pre-read result obtained in step S318 and the type of special pattern to be processed this time (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2).

(T-2. Design table selection table: Figure 28)
The selection of this symbol table is determined based on the "symbol table selection table" shown in FIG. 28. As shown in the figure, the symbol table selection table has symbol table selection tables (symbol table selection table for special symbol 1, symbol table selection table for special symbol 2) corresponding to the special symbol change display game 1 and the special symbol change display game 2, respectively. For example, if the current change is the special symbol 1 side and the result of the lottery is "support time reduction,""support time reduction symbol table 1" is selected. These symbol table selection tables are also used when selecting the symbol table at the start of the change in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later.

As shown in FIG. 28, the "symbol table" includes a "big win symbol table", a "support time-saving symbol table", and a "miss symbol table" for determining the big win type, the support time-saving symbol type, and the miss type, and each symbol table is provided corresponding to the special symbol type. These symbol tables are also used when drawing symbols at the start of the fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later. Note that FIG. 28 (a) and (b) show symbol table selection tables when the special symbol 2 side has a support time-saving symbol in the selection target for winning or losing, and FIG. 28 (b) and (c) show symbol table selection tables when the special symbol 2 side does not have a "support time-saving symbol". In addition, since there is no small win in this embodiment, there is no "small win symbol table".

Then, the random number value for determining the special pattern obtained in step S314 is acquired, and a pattern lottery (pre-reading pattern determination) is performed for the currently activated reserved ball based on the selected pattern table and the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern, and the lottery result (pre-reading pattern result) is acquired.

(T-3. Design table: Figures 29 to 31)
29 to 31 show the "jackpot symbol table", "support time-saving symbol table", and "losing symbol table". In the symbol table, as shown in FIG. 29 to 31, a judgment area (judgment value) for determining a winning type (symbol type) and a random number value for special symbol judgment (for example, the size of the random number value for special symbol judgment: 200) are associated and defined. Specifically, depending on which judgment value the random number value for special symbol judgment belongs to, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate, and the special symbol judgment data, the special stop symbol number, and the offset value for variable pattern selection (offset value shown in the figure) are obtained as data showing the lottery result. In this embodiment, the type of winning (type of winning: type of jackpot (10R certain jackpot, 4R certain jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot), type of support time-saving (support time-saving A, support time-saving B, support time-saving C) and type of loss (loss A, loss B, loss C)) is determined according to a predetermined pattern selection rate (for example, see the "Pattern Selection Rate" column in Figure 4).

The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying the type of winning, specifically, data for identifying whether the winning type (10R sure-variable jackpot, 4R sure-variable jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot), the support time-saving type (support time-saving A, support time-saving B, support time-saving C), or the loss type (loss A, loss B, loss C) has been won. This special symbol determination data is used in processes that require winning type information (for example, the game state transition preparation process (step S412) shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol change pattern creation process (step S413), and processes related to the execution control of the jackpot game (special electric device management process in FIG. 21), etc.).

The above-mentioned "special stop pattern number" is data that specifies the special stop pattern mode to be displayed on the special pattern display device, and is used when the main control unit 20 specifies the stop pattern type of the special pattern (in this embodiment, the '7-segment' display mode). Even if the winning type is the same, the display mode of the special stop pattern displayed on the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the '7-segment' display mode) may differ depending on the judgment value. Similarly to the special patterns, normal pattern judgment data and normal stop pattern numbers are provided for normal patterns.

The above-mentioned "offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern" is data used to select the desired fluctuation pattern allocation table.

In the illustration, for ease of explanation, the values of the special pattern determination data, special stop pattern number, and offset value for variable pattern selection are written as "**H", but appropriate values are set here for each winning type.

(About other types of lottery)
In this embodiment, one or more types of "support time-saving (time-saving granting pattern)" that grants a time-saving state are set as the target of the "win/lose lottery" using the random number for jackpot determination, and one "support time-saving" is selected by "pattern lottery" using the win/lose lottery result and the random number for special pattern determination (win/lose lottery target lottery type). Specifically, a predetermined judgment area (winning area) related to the support time-saving is set in the win random number judgment table, and the "support time-saving pattern table" shown in FIG. 30 is set as the pattern table. In the case of the win/lose lottery target lottery type, the jackpot and the support time-saving are selected independently, so that the selection probability of the support time-saving does not change even if the selection probability of the jackpot changes (see FIG. 26).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning type (see the "Winning Type" column in FIG. 4) may be determined using only the random number for jackpot determination, that is, without using the random number value for special pattern determination (a configuration that does not execute the pattern lottery process). For example, if the winning type on the special pattern 2 side is explained as a representative example (see FIG. 4), if the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is "0≦A≦B (B>0)," it is a miss A, if "B<C≦D," it is a 10R sure-win, if "D<E≦F," it is a 4R sure-win, if "F<G≦H," it is a 4R time-saving jackpot, if "H<I≦J," it is a support time-saving B, and if "J<K≦L (L=65535)," it is a support time-saving C. The winning area (winning probability) for each winning type can be determined appropriately. In addition, at least the type of support time reduction (in this example, the type of support time reduction A, B, or C on the special chart 1 side, and the type of support time reduction B or C on the special chart 2 side) may be determined using only the random number for determining a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11, once the special stop symbol data creation process of step S319 described above has been completed, the random number determination process for when the ball enters the start hole is then executed (step S320). This random number determination process for when the ball enters the start hole is also carried out as part of the 'pre-reading determination' process, in which a 'pre-reading fluctuation pattern determination' is carried out to determine in advance the 'fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation' when the current pending activation ball is used for the fluctuation display operation. Specifically, the result of the 'special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413)' shown in FIG. 12 described below is pre-read and determined.

In more detail, the result of the look-ahead pattern determination obtained in the special stop pattern data creation process (step S319) (at least the winning/losing lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) and the random number for the fluctuation pattern obtained in step S314 (magnitude of random number value: 10,000) are used to look-ahead and determine the "fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation" for the current pending activation ball. Note that the look-ahead pattern determination determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, and therefore is performed by referring to a separately provided "look-ahead determination table" that has the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern allocation table used at the start of fluctuation. However, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, a fluctuation pattern allocation table is provided for both winning (pre-reading judgment) and fluctuation start (see MODE 1, MODE 2, EVENT in Figures 32, 33, etc.), and at both winning and fluctuation start, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is pre-read and judged based on this fluctuation pattern allocation table and the fluctuation pattern random number value obtained in the processing of step S314.

Then, "winning command data" is obtained as the result of the look-ahead judgment. Here, the command data that constitutes the winning command includes "MODE 1 (first byte (higher byte))" command data, which can identify whether it is a win or a miss, and "EVENT (second byte (lower byte))" command data, which can identify the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. In other words, the command data determined in this start-hole winning random number judgment process specifies the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the information on the number of balls in operation).

To facilitate understanding of the present invention, the above-mentioned "random number determination process at the time of winning at the start port (step S320)" will be explained using the variation pattern allocation table shown in Figure 33 as a representative example, touching on not only the content at the time of winning (when the pre-reading determination is made) but also the content at the time of the start of the variation (special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) in Figure 12).

The random number determination process when the starting port is won is a process for determining a "winning command" for specifying a look-ahead fluctuation pattern, and is composed of the following processes (a) and (b).
(a) A “winning time fluctuation pattern allocation table determination process” that refers to a “fluctuation pattern allocation table selection table (not shown)” for selecting a fluctuation pattern allocation table and determines the “fluctuation pattern allocation table” to be referenced this time;
(b) It is composed of a "winning command data determination process (pre-reading fluctuation pattern determination process)" which refers to the "fluctuation pattern allocation table" determined in (a) above and determines winning command data corresponding to the pre-reading fluctuation pattern based on the random number value for the fluctuation pattern obtained in the processing of step S314.

(Variation pattern allocation table selection table (when winning): not shown)
In the above-mentioned "variation pattern allocation table selection table", multiple types of "variation pattern allocation tables" associated with the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of reserved balls in operation, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) are defined. The variation pattern allocation table selection table is configured to be able to determine any one of the multiple types of variation pattern allocation tables (FH1 to 7) based on the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of reserved balls in operation, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

This variation pattern allocation table selection table is not only used when determining the "winning command" at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment), but also when processing the determination of the "variation pattern designation command" at the start of the variation (special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S413) in FIG. 12 described later), and is a variation pattern allocation table selection table that is used both at the time of winning and the start of the variation. However, at the time of pre-reading judgment (the above "winning time variation pattern allocation table determination processing"), the number of operation reserved balls is ignored (operation reserved balls are set to zero) and the desired variation pattern allocation table is selected from the above variation pattern allocation table selection table (this will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of the variation, the value obtained by subtracting the number of operation reserved balls used for the current variation display operation from the existing operation reserved balls (number of operation reserved balls - 1) is referenced as information on the number of operation reserved balls (see the "number of operation reserved balls" column in FIG. 33, and steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 12 described later).

(Fluctuation pattern allocation table (when winning))
Next, the contents of the variation pattern allocation table will be explained. Here, for the convenience of explanation, the variation pattern allocation table related to normal in Fig. 32 and Fig. 33 will be explained as a representative example. Fig. 32 shows the "normal win/support time-saving winning variation pattern allocation table" that is referred to when a big win or support time-saving winning occurs in normal mode (normal state), and Fig. 33 shows the "normal miss variation pattern allocation table" that is referred to when a miss occurs in normal mode.

Referring to Figures 32 and 33, the fluctuation pattern allocation table for normal mode includes the winning fluctuation pattern allocation table "FB1-FB6" and the losing fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1-FH7". These fluctuation pattern allocation tables are provided as tables to be used both when making a pre-reading judgment and when fluctuations start. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern allocation table.

(a) In the variation pattern allocation table, the command data ("MODE1" in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for configuring the "winning command" that specifies the pre-reading variation pattern, the command data ("EVENT" in the figure) on the lower byte (second byte) side, and the random number value for the variation pattern (size of the random number value for the variation pattern: 10000) are associated and defined. The above "MODE1" is command data that can identify whether it is a win or a miss, and "EVENT" is command data that can identify the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern. When the pre-reading judgment is made, this variation pattern allocation table is referenced, and the command data for configuring the winning command is determined depending on whether the random number value for the variation pattern belongs to which judgment value (a lottery using the random number value for the variation pattern). This creates a winning command and specifies the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern. When this winning command is sent to the performance control unit 24, the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern are grasped by the performance control unit 24 side and used for the performance processing related to the pre-reading notice.

(B) The fluctuation pattern distribution table also defines data on the "fluctuation pattern designation command" that specifies the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern distribution table defines the command data ("MODE2" in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for configuring the fluctuation pattern designation command, the command data ("EVENT" in the figure) on the lower byte (second byte) side for correlating with the random number value for the fluctuation pattern. The above "MODE2" is command data that can identify whether it is a win or a miss, and "EVENT" is command data that can identify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referenced at the start of fluctuation (see the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) in FIG. 12 described later), and the command data for configuring the fluctuation pattern designation command is determined by lottery using the random number value for the fluctuation pattern. As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command (upper byte MODE2 + lower byte EVENT) is created, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified. The "variation pattern designation command", like the winning command, is composed of two bytes of control data consisting of "MODE 2" and "EVENT". When this variation pattern designation command is sent to the performance control unit 24, the variation pattern at the start of the variation is grasped by the performance control unit 24, and is used for performance processing related to the performance during the pattern variation.

The illustration here shows the "selection rate," but in reality, a judgment range (judgment value: range of 0 to 9999) is set for determining the winning command data or the fluctuation pattern designation command according to the random number value for the fluctuation pattern, and these command data are determined depending on which judgment value the random number value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random number value for the fluctuation pattern and the judgment value is as follows. For example, if we take the failure fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1" shown in FIG. 33 as a representative example, when looking from the front of the drawing in the top-down column direction, the judgment values are written in the order of "10", "8990", and "1000". This content is such that if the random number value for the fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is in the range of judgment values 0 to 9 (corresponding to the above-mentioned "10" entry column), command data specifying "normal fluctuation 13s" is selected, if it is in the range of judgment values 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the above-mentioned "8990" entry column), command data specifying "normal fluctuation 16s" is selected, and if it is in the range of judgment values 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the above-mentioned "1000" entry column), command data specifying "N reach 1" is selected. In the case of this embodiment, it is not that no judgment value data is stored in the blank parts in the figure, that is, in the address where the judgment value is stored, but rather "0" is stored as the judgment value. This is to make it easier to adjust the selection rate when developing new models or during the design and development stage.

To explain this with a simple example, for example, the failure fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1" allocates judgment values to normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, and N reach 1, but if you want to add normal fluctuation 8s as an additional selection target, it will be necessary to change the entire data structure again, which may mean starting the design from scratch. Also, although not shown in the figure, if there are fluctuation pattern allocation tables for each setting value, it may be necessary to change the data structure of all these tables. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set and the design is carried out while adjusting the judgment values, taking into account the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of presentation such as reach presentation. Therefore, the design may be as expected with the judgment values set initially, or changes may be required.

Therefore, in the design stage, the address for storing the judgment value of a fluctuation pattern that is not considered to be selectable is provisionally set to "0 (zero)" as the judgment value data, and if any changes occur, the value can be changed appropriately to easily include it in the fluctuation pattern to be selected. For example, the judgment value data of the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1" actually stores data including zeros (the blanks in the figure), such as normal fluctuation 4s "0", normal fluctuation 8s "0", normal fluctuation 13s "10", normal fluctuation 16s "8990", normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice "0", N reach 1 for pre-reading notice "0", and N reach 1 "1000".

In the case of this embodiment, when the loss A is won, as shown in the figure, N reach 2 and onwards are set as fluctuation patterns that cannot be selected, so in each of "FH1" to "FH4", judgment value data including "0" is stored within the address range (contiguous addresses in this case) related to normal fluctuation 4s to N reach 1 (of course, the selection target may be N reach 2 and onwards). Even when the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (process for determining the pre-reading fluctuation pattern and process for determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation) is executed, but since a fluctuation pattern with a judgment value of zero is not actually selected, it can be registered as a "fluctuation pattern that is not used". If the "judgment value zero" part needs to be adjusted during the design stage, etc., it can be easily changed from an "unused fluctuation pattern" to a "variation pattern to be selected" by appropriately setting a value other than zero. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, if the judgment value is left as zero, and when developing a new model, the same address assignment as the address assignment during the development stage is set, there is no need to change the table data structure each time, and design changes become extremely easy. The same applies to other fluctuation pattern allocation tables.

As described above, depending on which judgment value the random number value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to in the fluctuation pattern allocation table, the command data that constitutes the "winning command" is determined when a win is won, and the command data that constitutes the "fluctuation pattern designation command" is determined when the fluctuation starts.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that when making a look-ahead judgment, the number of pending active balls is ignored (the number of pending active balls is set to zero) and the desired variation pattern allocation table is selected, and the reason for this is as follows.

The fluctuation pattern allocation table shown in FIG. 33 is a table that is used both when winning and when fluctuation starts (the same is true for other fluctuation pattern allocation tables), but in reality, the number of activated reserved balls at the time of winning does not necessarily match the number of activated reserved balls at the time of fluctuation start. Therefore, when making a look-ahead judgment (when winning), the number of activated reserved balls is set to zero and the desired fluctuation pattern allocation table is selected. For example, referring to FIG. 33, when the current game state is normal (Tcode = 00H), and the activated reserved ball to be looked-ahead this time is on the special chart 1 side and the winning type is miss A (winning miss A on the special chart 1 side), the fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1" will be selected regardless of the number of activated reserved balls at the time of winning.

However, if the number of reserved balls in operation at the time of the pre-reading judgment does not match the number of reserved balls in operation at the start of the fluctuation, blindly ignoring the number of reserved balls in operation and judging the pre-reading fluctuation pattern, there is a possibility that a large difference will occur between the contents of the pre-reading fluctuation pattern and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation. In detail, when a prize is won, the main control unit 20 sends a "winning time command" including the pre-reading fluctuation pattern information to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24, which receives this, performs performance control related to the pre-reading notice performance based on the reserved addition command. On the other hand, when the fluctuation starts, the main control unit 20 sends a "variation pattern designation command" including the fluctuation pattern information at the start of the fluctuation to the performance control unit 24, and the performance control unit 24, which receives this, performs performance control including the decorative pattern change display operation performance (decorative pattern change display performance (decorative pattern performance described later)) and the notice performance (notice performance during fluctuation) based on the variation pattern designation command. Due to this relationship, if there is a large difference between the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation, the relationship between the contents of the look-ahead notice and the contents of the notice during the fluctuation will be lost, the reliability and interest of the notice performance will decrease, and the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, the look-ahead judgment is given the following characteristic element (first characteristic element).

(First Characteristic Element)
For example, when the current game state is normal, the active reserved ball to be pre-read this time is the special chart 1 side, and the winning type is miss A (miss A on the special chart 1 side), as described above, the miss variation pattern allocation table "FH1" is selected at the time of pre-reading judgment regardless of the number of active reserved balls. On the other hand, at the start of the variation, one of the variation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of active reserved balls (see the "00H (normal), special chart 1, miss A" column in Figure 33).

Now, referring to FIG. 33, the fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH3-FH4" allows selection (decision) of "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s" and the like belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type, but these are defined as "non-pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern types" in which no pre-reading notice is executed. Specifically, this non-pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern is a pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern that is "not subject to pre-reading notice lottery" or "subject to pre-reading notice lottery but has zero winning probability (pre-reading notice not executed)." In this embodiment, the only normal fluctuation type that is subject to pre-reading notice is the "pre-reading notice normal fluctuation 16s" that can be selected in the case of miss B (see FH5).

In addition, the fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1" and "FH2" allow the selection of "normal fluctuation 13s and normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the normal fluctuation type, as well as N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type. Here, simply "N reach 1" belongs to the above-mentioned non-pre-reading prediction fluctuation pattern, unlike N reach 1 for pre-reading prediction. Therefore, if you win the special chart 1 side miss A during normal play, the fluctuation pattern (pre-reading fluctuation pattern) that is the target of the pre-reading prediction will not be selected at the time of winning ("FH1" is selected at the time of pre-reading judgment). In other words, even if a different type of fluctuation pattern is determined at the time of winning and the start of the fluctuation, for example, it is determined to be N reach 1 at the time of pre-reading judgment and is determined to be normal fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation, in the case of the special chart 1 side miss A during normal play, the pre-reading prediction will not be displayed, so no particular problem will occur. It is not necessary to configure the system so that no pre-reading notice appears at all, and it is considered that no particular problem will arise if the pre-reading notice rarely appears when normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 is selected. For example, at least one of the fluctuation patterns of normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, and N reach 1 can be used as the pre-reading notice fluctuation pattern. Preferably, it is "normal fluctuation 13s" and/or "N reach", which have a relatively low selection rate, and more preferably, it is "normal fluctuation 13s", which has the lowest selection rate. However, in this case, in order to prevent the pre-reading notice from appearing excessively, it is preferable to set the appearance rate of the pre-reading notice (probability of winning the pre-reading lottery) to a lower probability than "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and/or "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice".

Also, as shown in FIG. 33, when the special chart 1 side miss B (normal special chart 1 side miss B) is won during normal play, when the special chart 1 side miss C (normal special chart 1 side miss C) is won, or when the special chart 2 side miss A is won (normal special chart 2 side miss), the common miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH5", "FH6", or "FH7 (common to all misses)" is selected regardless of the number of activated reserved balls at the time of winning and the start of fluctuation. In other words, when the pre-reading judgment is made when the normal special chart 1 side miss B, the normal special chart 1 side miss C, or the special chart 2 side miss A is won, the common fluctuation pattern allocation table is referenced for each number of activated reserved balls at the time of winning and the start of fluctuation, so that the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be accurately read ahead.

(Regarding the second characteristic element)
Generally, even in a state without electric support, the number of operating reserved balls can change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short time. If a variation pattern according to the number of operating reserved balls can be selected using this, it is possible to change the presentation time (execution time of the pattern variation display game) for each pattern variation display game, and generate a variety of presentations. In particular, if the average execution time (pattern variation time) of one pattern variation display game at the time of losing is set to a short time (for example, about a few seconds), the occurrence rate of so-called "variation slump (period when the pattern variation display game is not executed)" increases, and the player is likely to feel that "it doesn't spin, it's not interesting", and the interest in the game decreases, and the repeat rate of the game decreases. Therefore, it is thought that if the average execution time of one pattern variation display game is lengthened, the operating reserved balls will be easier to accumulate, and the occurrence rate of the variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the pattern change display game is made unnecessarily long, the game progress speed will slow down, the performance during the change will become uninteresting, and the tension of the big win caused by the advance notice will be broken, causing the player to feel bored and dissatisfied. In addition, if the execution time of the pattern change display game is made unnecessarily long, it will be easy for the operating reserved balls to overflow (initial winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved memories (4)), which means that many of the game execution rights will be lost, and the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to generate a well-balanced execution time of the pattern change display game. For example, it is important to have a change pattern selection technique that takes into account the number of operating reserved balls and the game state at the start of the change. In particular, it is important to have a change pattern selection technique that focuses on the times when players often encounter losses during the game progress.

In consideration of these issues, in this embodiment, the "miss fluctuation pattern allocation table" in FIG. 33 has a unique configuration. Below, we will explain in detail, focusing on the "miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1-FH7"" that is selected when a miss is won.

<A. Features of the fluctuation pattern allocation table for winning during normal wins>
In this embodiment, the miss type includes multiple types of misses A to C, and the pattern selection rate of these is 95% for miss A, 4% for miss B, and 1% for miss C (see the remarks column in FIG. 4). Here, as shown in FIG. 33, when the special chart 1 side miss A is won, one of the variation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of operation reserved balls. However, when the special chart 1 side miss B is won, the common variation pattern allocation table "FH5" is selected regardless of the number of operation reserved balls, and when the special chart 1 side miss C is won, the common variation pattern allocation table "FH6" is selected regardless of the number of operation reserved balls. Also, when the special chart 2 side miss is won, the common variation pattern allocation table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of operation reserved balls.

These fluctuation pattern allocation tables (FH1 to FH7) for winning a miss during normal draws have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). For ease of explanation, the fluctuation pattern allocation table that is selected regardless of the number of pending balls will be referred to as the "common fluctuation pattern allocation table" below.

(A-1. Fluctuation pattern allocation table for when you win a special A during normal play (fluctuation pattern allocation table by reserved number) "FH1-FH4")
(α) Each of the miss fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH4" is at least "selectable from multiple types of normal fluctuations." Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 (fluctuation time 26s) may be selected, and when "FH2" is selected, normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 may be selected. Also, when "FH3" is selected, normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s may be selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s may be selected. Normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the longest fluctuation time among normal fluctuation types, and normal fluctuation 4s belongs to the "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest normal fluctuation pattern) type" which has the shortest fluctuation time among normal fluctuation types. In this embodiment, depending on the number of active reserved balls (reserved memory number), the "normal variation 16s" which has a variation time that is the same or approximately the same as the variation time of at least the "normal variation 16s for advance notice" can be selected (determined) with different selection rates.
In addition, (Z1) the present invention can include a miss fluctuation pattern allocation table that can select the longest normal fluctuation and/or the shortest normal fluctuation with different selection rates according to the number of reserved balls for operation. (Z2) The present invention can also include a first miss fluctuation pattern allocation table that can select either a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) or a shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, or normal fluctuation 13s) having a shorter fluctuation time than the first specific fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved balls for operation, and a second miss fluctuation pattern allocation table that can determine a second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for advance notice) having the same or approximately the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls for operation. (Z3) The present invention can also include a first miss fluctuation pattern allocation table that can determine a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) with different selection rates depending on the number of reserved balls in operation, and a second miss fluctuation pattern allocation table that can determine a second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice) that has a fluctuation time that is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls in operation. In this case, the selection rate of the first specific fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of reserved balls in operation.

Therefore, if we look at the overall picture of the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1-FH4", when a miss (miss A in this embodiment) that players often encounter during game progress is won, if there are relatively many operating reserved balls (when the number of reserved balls is 2-3), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and if there are relatively few operating reserved balls (when the number of reserved balls is 0-1), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected. This allows for an appropriate variation in the fluctuation time, which can contribute to reducing the occurrence rate of a fluctuation slump, and makes the player feel as if the operating reserved balls are accumulated and rotating. Also, in the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1-FH4", normal fluctuation is selected with a high probability, and the fewer the number of operating reserved balls, the higher the selection rate of the reach fluctuation. And the reach fluctuation to be selected is "N reach (reach fluctuation with a relatively short fluctuation time)" which belongs to the low expectation reach. This does not unnecessarily incite the expectation of winning when losing. The failure fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1-FH4" according to this embodiment contribute to reducing the occurrence rate of fluctuation slumps, and can create a well-balanced pattern fluctuation display game that does not unnecessarily increase the expectation of winning when a failure occurs.

Note that the miss fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1" and "FH2" are configured to allow "reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation)" to be selected, in other words, reach fluctuation can be selected when the number of activated reserved balls is relatively small, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to allow reach fluctuation to be selected only in the fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1", that is, reach fluctuation is selected only when the number of activated reserved balls is the smallest. Also, it may be configured to allow only normal fluctuation to be selected in the fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1-FH4".

In this embodiment, when normal fluctuation types are distinguished by the length of the fluctuation time, fluctuation patterns of 10 seconds or more, such as the normal fluctuation 16s type and the normal fluctuation 13s type, are treated as "long fluctuation patterns" with relatively long fluctuation times. On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as the normal fluctuation 4s type and the normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" with relatively short fluctuation times. The reason for this distinction is that in a typical pinball game machine, if game balls are continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is thought that there is a high probability that an activated reserved ball will occur. In this embodiment, the short fluctuation patterns include normal fluctuation 4s and normal fluctuation 8s that can be selected during normal play, as well as normal fluctuations that can be selected during special play (normal fluctuation 2s during small consecutive wins, normal fluctuation 8s during small consecutive wins, etc.: see Figure 35), and normal fluctuations that can be selected during time-saving (normal fluctuation 4s during time-saving, normal fluctuation 8s during time-saving, etc.: see Figure 41). However, such short fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected when there are a large number of existing active reserved balls, or in a game state that includes an "electric support state" in which active reserved balls are more likely to be generated.

(β) The miss fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH4" are set so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern with the highest selection rate (high-frequency fluctuation pattern) among the fluctuation patterns determined by each table is different (the fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of activated reserved balls). Specifically, the fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is set so that the fluctuation time becomes longer in the following order: "FH4 (reserved 3), FH3 (reserved 2), FH2 (reserved 1), FH1 (reserved 0)". In other words, the fluctuation time of the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is set so that the smaller the number of activated reserved balls is, the longer the fluctuation time becomes relatively. In the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned high-frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high-frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case of the fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1", it is "normal fluctuation 16s", in the case of "FH2", it is "normal fluctuation 13s", in the case of "FH3", it is "normal fluctuation 8s", and in the case of "FH4", it is "normal fluctuation 4s". In addition, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) when the fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH1-FH4" is selected is set so that the average fluctuation time is longer in the following order: "FH4 (reserved 3), FH3 (reserved 2), FH2 (reserved 1), FH1 (reserved 0)". In other words, the average fluctuation time is set so that the fewer the number of activated reserved balls, the longer the average fluctuation time.

(A-2. Common variable pattern allocation table for winning B on the normal special chart 1 side: "FH5")
(γ) The miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH5" allows the selection of a fluctuation pattern type having a winning expectation of "less than the SPSP reach type (highest expectation reach type)". In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal fluctuation type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types is selectable. Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach)" which has a higher winning expectation than the "SP reach type" (has a longer fluctuation time than the SP reach type) is not selected. The average fluctuation time when this miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than the miss fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH4" described above.

(A-3. Common variable pattern allocation table for winning the normal special chart 1 side C: "FH6")
(δ) The miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH6" allows at least the "SPSP reach type" to be selected, that is, the highest expectation reach fluctuation type to be selected. In other words, it can be said that this is a table configuration in which the reach fluctuation with the longest fluctuation time is selected among the reach fluctuations. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach) is selectable. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table "FH6" is selected is longer (the longest average fluctuation time) than the fluctuation pattern allocation tables "FH1 to FH5" related to other normal miss wins.

(Common fluctuation pattern allocation table for winning during normal wins on the special chart 2 side: "FH7")
(ε) The miss variation pattern allocation table "FH7" is a variation pattern allocation table when the special pattern 2 side misses. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special pattern variation display game 2 during normal (during the special pattern 2 variation), the winning confirmation is notified at that point. The reason for having fewer types of variation patterns when the special pattern 2 side misses is as follows. During normal, there is no electric support, there is almost no winning in the lower starting hole 35, and the special pattern 2 operation reserved ball rarely occurs. Therefore, there is no need to be able to select a wide variety of variation patterns, and providing a wide variety of variation patterns without reason leads to an increase in the control burden.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern allocation table for winning a losing jackpot" can provide the following effects:

(A) The miss type includes multiple types of miss A to C, and the pattern selection rate of these is 95% for miss A, 4% for miss B, and 1% for miss C (the relationship of the lottery probability is "miss A>miss B>miss C") (see the remarks column in FIG. 4). In this embodiment, by utilizing such a relationship of the pattern selection rate, when miss A is selected during normal play, if there are relatively many operation reserved balls, multiple short fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are likely to be selected, and when there are relatively few operation reserved balls, multiple long fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are likely to be selected. Also, when miss A is selected, the reach fluctuation is selected with a lower probability than when miss B or miss C is selected. This not only prevents long pattern changes from occurring unnecessarily frequently, i.e., provides an appropriate pace to the change time, which contributes to reducing the incidence of change slumps, but also creates a well-balanced execution time for the pattern change display game in which the player feels as if the pending operating balls are stored and spinning (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(B) Also, if Miss A is won during normal play, the fewer the number of pending active balls, the longer the average fluctuation time (the average execution time of one pattern fluctuation display game). In other words, the more the number of pending active balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time (for example, see (α) and (β) above). This allows for a well-balanced execution time of the pattern fluctuation display game, in which the execution time of the pattern fluctuation display game is not unnecessarily extended, the occurrence rate of fluctuation slumps is suppressed, and the occurrence rate of pending active ball overflows is also suppressed. This is particularly suitable for "normal play" where the duration of play can be long in terms of game progress.
(Γ) In addition, if a miss A is won during normal play, normal variation is selected with a higher probability than reach variation, if a miss B is won, low expectation reach types (N reach and SP reach) are selected with a higher probability, and if a miss C is won, high expectation reach types (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach) are selected with a higher probability (see (α) to (δ) above, for example). In other words, in most cases of misses, the effects related to normal variation (normal variation effects) are displayed, and reach effects can be displayed with an appropriate frequency. This prevents excessive excitement of the player's expectation of winning. In addition, the rare appearance of high expectation reach effects can greatly increase the interest in the game (expectation of winning).
(Δ) During the probability variation or time reduction, a common variation pattern allocation table is selected regardless of the type of miss and the number of balls in operation (see (ζ) above). This reduces the program capacity and greatly reduces the control burden.

(Third Characteristic Element)
In addition, in this embodiment, as already explained, "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" are provided. These fluctuation patterns are defined as pre-reading notice fluctuation patterns, and have the following characteristics.
(A) As shown in Figure 33, the fluctuation time of "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" is approximately the same as the fluctuation time of "normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to a non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type, and the fluctuation time of "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice" is approximately the same as the fluctuation time of "N reach 1" belonging to a non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type. These fluctuation patterns belong to long fluctuation patterns. In the case of this embodiment, "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are defined as the longest fluctuation times among the normal fluctuation types (belonging to the longest normal fluctuation type).
(B) Also, as shown in Figure 33, "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "Normal fluctuation 16s" are the same type of fluctuation pattern, but the command values at the time of winning are different. Also, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1" are the same type of fluctuation pattern, but the command values at the time of winning are different.
(C) "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "Normal fluctuation 16s" are fluctuation patterns belonging to low expectation fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation type, N reach type), and their winning expectation is approximately the same. Similarly, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns belonging to low expectation fluctuation patterns, and their winning expectation is approximately the same.

The function of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" will be explained using the miss fluctuation pattern allocation table in Figure 33, touching on the relationship with the appearance control of the pre-reading notice.

Referring to FIG. 33, if Miss A is won during normal play, at the start of play, one of the miss play pattern allocation tables "FH1-FH4" (tables for allocating pattern by number of reserved balls) is selected according to the number of balls in play, and normal play 16s or N-reach 1 may be selected. Also, in rare cases, Miss B (symbol selection rate 4%) is won, and in this case, Miss play pattern allocation table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern allocation table) is selected, and "normal play 16s for pre-reading notice" or "N-reach 1 for pre-reading notice" may be selected. Here, during "normal play," where the duration of play may be long, the game situation that the player is most likely to encounter is the win of Miss A (symbol selection rate 95%).

Therefore, as a first effect, when a fluctuation pattern with a low expectation level is selected, excessive pre-reading notices are not displayed, and the player's expectation of winning is not unnecessarily aroused.
As a second effect, when the operation reserved ball related to the pre-reading notice is provided to the pattern change display game, the expectation of winning due to the pre-reading notice can be sustained for a long time. In detail, when a pre-reading notice related to a short change pattern such as normal change 4s or normal change 8s is generated, the execution time of the pattern change display game related to the operation reserved ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is short, so that the game ends abruptly without any significant notice performance. In addition, if the execution time of the pattern change display game is short, the game ends abruptly without inciting the expectation of occurrence that suggests a step-up reserved change notice using a reserved K during game execution, or when a white flashing reserved icon (indicating a step-up reserved change notice) is displayed. In such a case, the player becomes disheartened, wondering, "What on earth was the meaning of that pre-reading notice?" However, in the case of this embodiment, "normal change 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" belong to a long change pattern (the longest normal change in this embodiment), so that such a problem can be prevented from occurring.

Although the "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and the "normal fluctuation 16s" differ in whether they are pre-reading notice targets or not, it is preferable that the same presentation can be executed in both pattern change display games (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1"). In other words, the presentation during the pattern change is the same for the "normal fluctuation 16s" for non-pre-reading notice and the "normal fluctuation 16s" for pre-reading notice with a fluctuation time that is approximately the same (including the same), and the presentation makes the player recognize that the same fluctuation pattern has been selected, regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected. In this way, by distinguishing between non-pre-reading notice and pre-reading notice, fluctuation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates, it is possible to prevent excessive pre-reading notices from being executed by appropriately displaying pre-reading notices when losing, and to moderately stimulate the player's expectation of winning (it is possible to prevent the player from feeling stressed due to the appearance of excessive pre-reading notices). Note that "same presentation" here means that it is preferable that the presentation style including at least the decorative pattern change display (decorative pattern presentation described below) and the preview presentation is the same, but it is also acceptable to make the "decorative pattern change display" and/or the "preview presentation" the same. However, in order to make the presentation look similar, it is preferable that the decorative pattern change display style is different but the other presentations are the same. Also, it is acceptable to provide only one or more types of pre-reading normal change that have the same function as "pre-reading preview normal change 16s", or to provide only one or more types of pre-reading N reach that have the same function as "pre-reading preview N reach 1".

As already explained, "normal fluctuation 16s" and/or "N reach 1" may be defined as the fluctuation pattern for look-ahead notice. In this case, the occurrence rate of the look-ahead notice is set to a lower probability than "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and/or "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". For example, the occurrence rate (execution rate) of the look-ahead notice may be set to a relationship that satisfies "normal fluctuation 16s < normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" or "N reach 1 < N reach 1 for look-ahead notice".

Although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation pattern allocation table is provided with a fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to the setting value (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the probability of one or more specific fluctuation patterns being drawn may differ depending on the setting value, and for example, it is possible to provide a setting prediction element based on the difference in the appearance rate of the effects related to the specific fluctuation pattern.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11, once the random number determination process for winning at the start port in step S320 is completed, a "winning command" is created based on the command data determined in the random number determination process for winning at the start port, and this is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S321). Note that if look-ahead is prohibited or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibited data "9FH" is maintained as is, and a winning command with the "look-ahead prohibited data" is sent to the performance control unit 24. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H", is obtained for the value on the upper byte (MODE1) side, and a winning command with look-ahead prohibited (B39FH) is sent.

Next, a "reserved addition command" that specifies the number of active reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading judgment is created (step S322), and this is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S323). This "reserved addition command" is composed of two bytes, with an upper byte (MODE) that specifies whether the active reserved ball that is the subject of the pre-reading this time is on the special chart 1 side or the special chart 2 side, and a lower byte (EVENT) that specifies the number of active reserved balls at the time of winning. The reserved addition command is used by the performance control unit 24 to notify the reserve display areas 76, 77 of information regarding the current number of active reserved balls when an active reserved ball is generated, and is also used to display a pre-reading notice about the reserved ball that is the subject of the notice when a pre-reading notice performance is executed.

When the winning command and reserved addition command are sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control unit 24 that receives them, if the information included in the command is "other than the prohibition of pre-reading", holds a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice, and if it is won, creates a performance scenario for the pre-reading notice and controls the execution of the pre-reading notice targeting the currently activated reserved ball based on that scenario. On the other hand, if "prohibition of pre-reading" is specified, the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed but the lottery result is forcibly processed as a miss (no notice performance executed), and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, the winning command with the prohibition of pre-reading is sent in both cases when pre-reading is prohibited or when a setting abnormal error occurs, and the reason for this is as follows.

In the present embodiment, even if a setting abnormality error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped. The reason is that, first, as already explained, a setting abnormality error can be resolved by performing a setting change operation, but setting change operations during business hours are likely to be prohibited from the viewpoint of legal requirements as an act that incites gambling. Secondly, if the game operation processing is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player will feel distrustful of the sudden game stop. For example, if a setting abnormality error occurs by chance when a pattern variation display game in progress is executed during normal operation or during a jackpot game, and the game is immediately controlled to a state where it cannot be played, the profit that the player should have obtained will disappear, leading to distrust from the player. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting abnormality error occurs, only an error notification is performed, and the game progress itself is allowed to continue, although it is conditional. I say "conditionally" because if a setting abnormality error occurs, the pre-reading notice is prohibited and the result of the symbol change display game is forcibly set to a loss (see the processing route of step S317 (=5AH) in FIG. 11 and step S409 (=5AH) in FIG. 12 described below).

As a result of the above, the special chart 1 start port check process is exited, and the special chart 2 start port check process (step S302) is then executed.

<12. Special symbol variation start process: Figure 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) in Fig. 10 will be described. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

12, the CPU 201 first determines whether the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), it executes the processing at the start of the change targeting the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 2 (steps S403 to S416). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it then determines whether the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 1 is zero (step S402), and if the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 1 is not zero (step S402: NO), it executes the processing at the start of the change targeting the number of reserved balls for operation of the special chart 1 (steps S403 to S416). The processing of steps S401 and S402 determines the "priority change order" of which of the reserved balls for operation of the special chart 1 or the reserved balls for operation of the special chart 2 is given priority for the change display operation (which reserved balls for operation are consumed). In this embodiment, if there are activation reserved balls in both the special chart 1 activation reserved ball and the special chart 2 activation reserved ball, the special chart 2 activation reserved ball will be consumed preferentially.

If the number of activated balls for both Special Pattern 2 and Special Pattern 1 is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state is "no activated balls pending." This "no activated balls pending" state occurs when a special pattern is waiting and there is no reserved memory. If the state is "no activated balls pending," proceed to step S417 and determine whether the special pattern operation status is "waiting (00H)," which indicates the above-mentioned "no activated balls pending" state (step S417).

If the special symbol operation status when the "no activated balls pending" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (see step S472 during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 17A described below), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is sent to the performance control unit 24 as a performance control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start processing is terminated. When the performance control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, the pre-customer waiting performance is displayed, and then the "customer waiting performance (demo display)" is displayed.

Furthermore, if a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is met after the start of the customer waiting performance (demo display), the performance control unit 24 ends the customer waiting performance and transitions to the "power saving mode". In this embodiment, if a predetermined time (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting performance (demo screen) without an activated reserved ball being generated and without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen), the performance mode is transitioned to the power saving mode, a power saving screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (e.g., the text "Power saving in progress" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and some or all of the decorative lamps 45 and other performance LEDs are turned off (power saving control).

If the number of activated reserved balls for Special Chart 1 or the number of activated reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are executed in sequence. Note that the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below is essentially the same, with the only difference being whether the target is the activated reserved ball for Special Chart 1 or the activated reserved ball for Special Chart 2. Therefore, to avoid repetition, unless otherwise necessary, the description will be made without distinguishing which activated reserved ball is the target of the processing.

When the process proceeds to step S403, the number of active reserved balls on the special chart side used for this variable display operation is decremented by one (step S403), and a "reserved subtraction command" including the number of active reserved balls after subtraction is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S404). When the performance control unit 24 receives this reserved subtraction command, it performs performance processing related to the above-mentioned shift display in the reserved display unit.

Next, the special symbol activation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol activation confirmation data is data for identifying the type of special symbol on the side that starts the current change, and if special symbol 1 is on the side that starts the change, "01H" is stored in the special symbol activation confirmation data, and if special symbol 2 is on the side that starts the change, "02H" is stored in the special symbol activation confirmation data.

Then, the reserved data stored in the reserved memory area of RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the process of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved memory area (reserved 1 memory area) corresponding to the reserved memory number n = 1 is read and stored in the random number memory area for judgment in the RAM in the area, and the reserved data stored in the reserved memory area corresponding to the reserved n memory area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the reserved memory area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol change display game matches the order of the number of activated reserved balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and it is determined which reserved memory area the activated reserved ball obtained at the time of winning the starting hole corresponds to, and it is possible to reserve and store a new activated reserved ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is sent to the performance control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can identify the game state at the start of the game. When the performance control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it grasps the current game state based on the information contained therein and manages the presentation mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20. The game state information included in the game state designation command may be the minimum information required to perform the desired game processing, and may be, for example, information including the "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and/or the "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)". In addition, the game state designation command may be configured to be capable of transmitting an "internal game information command" that can identify the game state determination number YJ and/or a "distribution mode designation command" that can identify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). The game status information transmission process for transmitting such a game status designation command includes S477B, step S482, step S487, step S492, etc. during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 17B described below.

Here, if necessary, a "time-saving number command (information on the special pattern time-saving number counter)" that can specify the remaining number of time-saving times is sent during the time-saving state, and a "ST number command (information on the special pattern probability change number counter)" that can specify the remaining ST number is sent during the probability change state. Based on the information contained in these commands, the performance control unit 24 can grasp the remaining number of time-saving times and the remaining ST number, and can produce the above-mentioned remaining time-saving number notification performance that notifies the remaining number of time-saving times in a dramatic way, and the remaining ST number notification performance that notifies the remaining ST number in a dramatic way. When an infinite-type privilege is granted by a jackpot or support time-saving, specifically, when "infinite time-saving" with no limit on the number of time-saving times, "infinite probability change" or "infinite potential probability" with no limit on the number of ST times, or infinite time-saving, infinite probability change, or infinite potential probability that can be considered as an infinite number of times are granted, it is possible to configure not to send the time-saving number command or ST number command in order to reduce the control burden during the game state related to the privilege.

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route following S410)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not ON (step S409: ≠ 5AH), a setting value command is sent to the performance control unit 24, and then a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device is executed (step S410). In this random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device, a random number value for determining a big win is used to execute a "win/lose lottery at the start of the fluctuation" for the operation reserved balls provided for the current fluctuation display operation. The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the random number determination process of step S318 in FIG. 11 already described, so it will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

(13. Random number determination process for determining operation of special electric role: FIG. 13)
FIG. 13 shows details of the random number determination process for determining whether or not a special electric feature is activated (step S410).
In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires the "win random number judgment table (FIG. 26)" corresponding to the current processing target side based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type information of the current fluctuation start side) (step S941). For example, if the current fluctuation is the special symbol 1 side, the "win random number judgment table for special symbol 1" is acquired, and if the current fluctuation is the special symbol 2 side, the "win random number judgment table for special symbol 2" is acquired. Next, the random number value for jackpot judgment stored in the above-mentioned judgment random number storage area is acquired (step S942), and random number judgment processing (win/lose lottery at the start of fluctuation) is performed based on the random number value for jackpot judgment and the acquired win random number judgment table (step S943). The random number judgment processing of this step S943 is the same processing content as the random number judgment processing of step S318 in FIG. 11.

Then, a judgment flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM according to the result of the random number judgment process (win/lose judgment result) (step S944). If the result of the lottery is a "jackpot", the jackpot judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if it is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a "miss", the jackpot judgment flag is set to "00H". In this embodiment, since the support time reduction is also a subject of the lottery, if the result of the lottery is a "support time reduction" win, the support time reduction judgment flag is set to "5AH" (see FIG. 26). Therefore, if the result of the random number judgment process (lottery result) this time is a jackpot, "jackpot judgment flag = "5AH", support time reduction judgment flag = "00H"" is stored, if the support time reduction is a win, "jackpot judgment flag = "00H", support time reduction judgment flag = "5AH"" is stored, and if it is a miss, "jackpot judgment flag = "00H", support time reduction judgment flag = "00H"" is stored.

Next, a special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the result of the lottery in step S410 and the random number value for determining the special symbol are used to execute a "symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation." The basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the processing procedure of the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) shown in FIG. 11, which has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

In the special stop pattern creation process of step S411, first, referring to the pattern table selection table shown in FIG. 28, the pattern tables (jackpot pattern table, losing pattern table, support time-saving pattern table: see FIG. 29 to FIG. 31) are obtained based on the special pattern operation confirmation data (special pattern type information of the current variable side) and the result of the lottery in step S410. For example, if the special pattern operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current variable start side is the 'special pattern 1 side' and the lottery result is 'jackpot', the "jackpot pattern table for special pattern 1" is selected. Then, the random number value for special pattern determination stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area for determination is obtained, and a pattern lottery is performed based on the selected pattern table and the random number value for special pattern determination, and the special pattern determination data and special stop pattern number, which are the lottery results, are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

(Continuous game count counter (consecutive game count means))
In addition, in the special stop pattern creation process, the number of consecutive wins related to the above-mentioned probability variation mode is also counted based on the result of the pattern lottery. Here, if a winning type that is the target of the consecutive win count (for example, a probability variation jackpot: see FIG. 5E (A)) is won, the consecutive win count counter is incremented by +1. This makes it possible to manage how many consecutive wins the jackpot game will be played after the current winning game. However, if all jackpots are to be counted as the number of consecutive wins, the counting process can also be performed based on the result of the winning/losing lottery. In this case, for example, the counting process can be performed in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device (winning/losing lottery process) in step S410. Specifically, if a winning type that is the target of the count is won in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device, that is, in the winning/losing lottery, the consecutive win count counter can be incremented by +1.

Note that, rather than counting the current number of consecutive wins using a count-up method of incrementing the consecutive win counter by +1, a count-down method of decrementing the number of consecutive wins from an initial value may be used. Specifically, when switching to normal mode or when the RAM is cleared, the consecutive win counter is set to an initial value of "07H". Then, each time a win of the winning type that is the subject of the count is won, the consecutive win counter is decremented by 1 until it reaches zero. In this case, if the consecutive win counter has a value of "06H", it indicates the first win (first consecutive win), and if it is between "05H" and "00H", it indicates the second to seventh consecutive wins. Therefore, in the case of the countdown system, in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described below, if the value of the consecutive wins counter is between "06H" and "04H" (1st to 3rd consecutive wins), data for transitioning to special probability mode 1 is set in the buffer, if it is between "03H" and "01H" (4th to 6th consecutive wins), data for transitioning to special probability mode 2 is set in the buffer, and if it is "00H", data for transitioning to special probability mode 3 is set in the buffer (see the remarks column in Figure 42).

The present invention does not necessarily require a configuration in which the game mode can be changed according to the number of consecutive games, as in the probability mode shown in FIG. 7A, and in this case, a consecutive game count counter (consecutive game count counting means) is not necessary. For example, there may be a single game mode during a specific game mode, or a configuration in which the game mode can be changed according to the number of games executed, as shown in FIG. 7A.

After the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is then executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, the necessary setting process is performed to specify the game state to transition to when a jackpot or support time reduction is won.

(14. Game State Transition Preparation Process: FIG. 14)
FIG. 14 shows details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412).
14, the CPU 201 first judges the state of the big win judgment flag (step S911). If the big win judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S911:=5AH), the CPU 201 proceeds to the game state transition table acquisition process of step S915 described later. On the other hand, if the big win judgment flag is OFF (00H) (step S911:≠5AH), the CPU 201 then judges the state of the support time reduction judgment flag (step S912).

If the support time-saving judgment flag is ON (00H) (step S912: ≠ 5AH), that is, if the player has not won a jackpot or the support time-saving feature and has "missed", the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything. If the support time-saving judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), it is then determined whether or not the support time-saving feature is in a prohibited state (whether or not the support time-saving feature activation prohibition condition is met) (step S914).

(Regarding the state in which support time reduction is prohibited)
The above-mentioned "support time-saving activation prohibition state" refers to a prohibition state that prohibits the occurrence of the support time-saving state. Specifically, it means a case where the processing state managed by the main control unit 20 side is under a specific state, for example, one or more "specific internal game states (at least one internal game state of normal state, probability change state, time-saving state, and potential probability state)", one or more "specific functions (at least one function of special symbol probability change function, normal symbol probability change function, special symbol time-saving function, normal symbol time-saving function, and open extension function)" related to the game state are in operation or non-operation state (for example, electric support state, semi-electric support state in which the normal symbol probability change function is not operated among the electric support state), one or more "specific game modes (at least one game mode of normal mode, time-saving mode, probability change mode, and potential probability mode), one or more "specific variation pattern selection modes", during a specific game (for example, the ceiling game described later), etc. What state is adopted as the support time-saving activation prohibition state can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

In this embodiment, the state that is not in the normal state is defined as the "support time-saving activation prohibited state", and the state that is in the normal state is defined as the "support time-saving activation permitted state" in which the activation of the support time-saving is permitted (see step S914). Specifically, the probability change state, the time-saving state (the time-saving state after a big win, the support time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state described below), and the potential state (when the potential state is set) are defined as the "support time-saving activation prohibited state", and even if the support time-saving is won during these internal game states, the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited (restricted) (the support time-saving state is not activated). However, if it is won during the normal state, the occurrence of the support time-saving state is permitted. In the following, unless otherwise specified, the state that is not in the normal state is described as the "support time-saving activation prohibited state", in other words, at least the normal state is described as the "support time-saving activation permitted state". Therefore, the control technology for gaming machines according to the present invention includes a configuration example that allows the occurrence (activation) of a support time-saving state when a support time-saving effect is won during a time-saving state (including a jackpot time-saving state, a support time-saving state, and a ceiling time-saving state, which will be described later) and/or during a probability change state.

In FIG. 14, when the support time-saving determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), if the current game state is not normal (step S914: NO), the process of steps S915 to S916 described below (processing for specifying the game state to transition to in the event of a jackpot win or support time-saving win) is skipped and the game state transition preparation process is exited. As a result, even if the support time-saving win is won when not in the normal state (when the support time-saving activation prohibited state is in effect), the occurrence of the time-saving state is prohibited.

On the other hand, if the game is in the normal state (when the support time-saving activation is permitted) (step S914: YES), it is determined that the support time-saving activation is not prohibited, and the game state transition table acquisition process of step S915 and the state buffer setting process of step S916 are executed in sequence.

In the game state transition table acquisition process (step S915), the "game state transition table" shown in FIG. 42 is acquired, which defines a data group that specifies the destination game state according to the winning type (special symbol determination data) determined by the symbol lottery and the current game state (game state determination number (YJ)), i.e., according to the winning type and the game state at the time of winning. Then, by referring to the acquired game state transition table, various data are stored in the corresponding state buffer (step S916).

The game state transition table shown in FIG. 42 has JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 for specifying each game state (game mode). As shown in the figure, JTTBL-1, JTTBL-4 to JTTBL-6 define data for specifying the internal game state and various data for transitioning to probability mode 1 to 3 and time-saving mode 1 to 3. In this embodiment, "JTTBL1" is referenced in the case of a 10R or 4R probability jackpot, "JTTBL-4" in the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, "JTTBL-4" in the case of support time-saving A, "JTTBL-5" in the case of support time-saving C, and "JTTBL-6" in the case of support time-saving C. This specifies the game state in the case of a jackpot (game state after jackpot play) or the game state in the case of winning the support time-saving. In addition, in the case of non-telephone-activated support time reduction, the game state after the end of this game (the game in which the support time reduction is won) will be specified, and in the case of special-telephone-activated support time reduction, the game state after the support time reduction opening and closing game will be specified (for example, see Figures 4 and 42).

Note that JTTBL-1 is the data for transitioning to the probability variable state (probability variable mode 1), but as shown in the remarks column in the figure, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer is set to "01H" to "03H" appropriately according to the number of consecutive wins (value of the consecutive wins counter).

The value stored in the above-mentioned state buffer is read out in the case of a jackpot by the jackpot end process (step S509) shown in FIG. 21 described below, and in the case of a special-electricity non-operating support time reduction, it is read out by the support time reduction winning state flag setting process (step S477A) shown in FIG. 17A described below, and stored in a specified memory area of RAM 203 (a flag memory area or counter memory area corresponding to each state buffer). This specifies the game state to transition to when a jackpot or support time reduction is won. Note that in the case of a special-electricity operating support time reduction, the game state after the support time reduction opening and closing game is specified.

The roles of the various status buffers mentioned above are as follows:
(α) "Normal electric device opening extension transition state buffer, normal pattern time reduction transition state buffer, normal pattern probability change transition state buffer, special pattern time reduction transition state buffer, special pattern probability change transition state buffer"
Designation data for ON (operating)/OFF (not operating) of each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, data for a normal electric device opening extension state flag designating the operating state of the opening extension function, a normal symbol time-saving state flag designating the operating state of the normal symbol time-saving function, a normal symbol probability variable state flag designating the operating state of the normal symbol probability variable function, a special symbol time-saving state flag designating the operating state of the special symbol time-saving function, and a special symbol probability variable state flag designating the operating state of the special symbol probability variable function are set.
(β) "Special pattern time-saving counter buffer"
Data (data for the special symbol time-saving counter) for designating the number of time-saving times (number of electric support times) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIG. 17A to FIG. 17B). The special symbol time-saving counter serves as a remaining time-saving counting means for counting the remaining number of time-saving times.
(γ) "Special pattern probability change count counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of STs (data for the special symbol probability change counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 17B). The special symbol probability change counter serves as a remaining ST counting means for counting the number of remaining STs.
(δ) "Special pattern change count counter 1 to 3 buffer"
Data for specifying the number of times a specific variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) continues (data for the special symbol variation counter) is set.
(ε) "Fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 1 to 3 buffer"
When a predetermined update condition is satisfied, data (data for the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) that specifies the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be updated is set. The update conditions include, for example, when a jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 17A), when the time-saving mode ends (step S481 in FIG. 17B), when the probability of a special pattern changing mode ends (step S486 in FIG. 17B), when the special pattern changing counter becomes zero (steps S490, S491 in FIG. 17B), when a jackpot game ends (S509 in FIG. 21), when a support time-saving mode is won (step S477A in FIG. 17B), and the like.

Then, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern allocation table corresponding to the symbol lottery result (the result of the special stop symbol creation process in step S411), the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), the setting value information (obtained as necessary), and the number of pending activation balls (the number of currently existing pending activation balls, 0 to 3 (see step S403) excluding the pending activation balls used in the current variation display operation) is obtained.

Then, by referring to the variation pattern allocation table, a variation pattern of the special symbol targeted at the activation reserved ball to be used in this variation display operation is determined based on a variation pattern lottery using the variation pattern random number (obtained in the processing of step S314 in FIG. 10). Next, a "variation pattern designation command" capable of identifying the determined variation pattern content is created and sent to the performance control unit 24. Note that the basic processing procedure of this process is the same as the processing procedure for random number determination when the ball enters the starting hole in step S320 in FIG. 11 already explained, and therefore will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 above includes the following processes (A) to (F).

(A) A "fluctuation start time fluctuation pattern allocation table determination process" that selects (determines) the "fluctuation pattern allocation table" to be referenced this time;
(B) A "variation pattern determination process" that refers to the "variation pattern allocation table" determined in (A) above and determines a variation pattern according to the random number value for the variation pattern;
(C) A "variable time setting process" that determines the variable time (including the addition time required for pseudo-consecutive wins) corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process and sets it in the "special pattern gambling operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area;
(D) A "command transmission process" that transmits a "variation pattern designation command" capable of identifying the content of the variation pattern acquired in (B) to the performance control unit 24. The variation pattern determination process in (B) is a process for acquiring command data of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern.

At the start of the fluctuation, unlike when a win occurs (when a pre-reading judgment is made), a fluctuation pattern allocation table can be selected taking into consideration the number of balls pending operation (the number of balls pending operation at the start of the fluctuation in step S403). When the fluctuation pattern is decided, the command data on the upper byte side (MODE 2: specifies whether it is a hit or a miss) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for constituting the "fluctuation pattern designation command" is decided. This determines the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is specified.

When the change pattern is determined, a change time corresponding to that change pattern is also determined. This change time becomes the play time (decorative pattern change display time (performance time)) of the decorative pattern change display game that is executed in sync with the special pattern change display game.

The information relating to the variation pattern determined in this manner includes at least the winning/losing lottery result (in this embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current game state, variation time information, and execution designation information for specific preview effects (presence or absence of reach effects and their type, and pseudo-consecutive designation information). The main control unit 20 transmits a "variation pattern designation command" whose contents can be specified to the performance control unit 24, and the information contained in this variation pattern designation command is used by the performance control unit 24 when determining the performance scenario for the current game (such as the decorative symbol variation display and various preview effects).

(Regarding the fluctuation pattern related to winning the support time-saving win while the support time-saving activation is prohibited)
In this embodiment, even if the support time-saving is won during the support time-saving activation prohibition state (in the case of this embodiment, during the time-saving state or the probability change state), the winning flag (support time-saving judgment flag = 5AH) is maintained without being cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed, and the winning flag is cleared by the support time-saving flag management process of step S422 described later. In other words, when the support time-saving is won during the support time-saving activation prohibition state, the winning itself is not simply treated as invalid (treated as a loss) and a variation pattern related to the loss is selected, but a variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning can be selected, thereby expanding the freedom of the performance aspect and making it possible to enrich the variation of the performance during the game (the variation during the game). However, if a variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning is selected without taking any measures, a problem may occur in which the result of the game this time is reported as the support time-saving winning even though the support time-saving state is not activated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibition state, a performance is made to appear to inform that the final game result is a miss. For example, when the support time reduction B on the special chart 2 side is won in the probability variation mode 1 (for small consecutive games) during the probability variation state, regardless of whether the support time reduction activation prohibition state is in progress or not, the "probability variation hit/support time reduction winning variation pattern allocation table" in Figure 34 is referenced, and direct hit reach 1 or direct hit reach 2 is selected, but in the case of the support time reduction winning, the performance result of the reach is not to inform that the support time reduction is won, but to inform that it is a miss.
In short, the effect during the change related to the change pattern that can be selected when the support time reduction is won while the support time reduction is prohibited (hereinafter also referred to as the "support winning change pattern during the activation prohibition") is different from the effect during the change related to the change pattern that can be selected when the support time reduction is not prohibited (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal support winning change pattern"). For example, a different reach effect is executed, the appearance rate of the reach effect is different, one change pattern executes a specific reach effect but the other does not execute a specific reach effect, one change pattern selects a specific normal change but the other does not select a specific normal change, etc. Also, for example, the support winning change pattern during the activation prohibition may be configured to be able to select a failure change pattern related to the current game state (if in the time reduction state, the failure change pattern related to the time reduction state is selected).
In particular, when the direct hit reach 1, which is also selected when a jackpot is won, is selected, a tense reach effect can be produced in which the performance content encouraging the jackpot win is executed and then a miss is finally notified. In addition, the direct hit reach 2, which is not selected when a jackpot is won, can be made to function as a reach effect for diversifying the reach effect. In addition, even when a variation pattern related to the support time-saving win during the time-saving state shown in FIG. 40 is selected, it is sufficient to configure it so that the same event occurs as in the case of FIG. 34 described above. In other words, it is a variation pattern selection technique in which a variation pattern related to the support time-saving win in the current game state can be selected regardless of whether the support time-saving activation is prohibited or not, and then the performance content is changed depending on whether the support time-saving activation is prohibited or not. Since the performance control unit 24 side is aware of the current game state by a game state designation command or the like, it is possible to produce different performance contents even if the same variation pattern designation command is sent when the support time-saving activation is prohibited and when it is not. Alternatively, the main control unit 20 may be configured to be able to send information capable of identifying whether or not the support time reduction activation is prohibited (a command specifying the support time reduction activation prohibited state) to the performance control unit 24.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned variation pattern selection technique, and may be the following one.
For example, in order to make it possible to select a support winning variation pattern during the activation prohibition, a dedicated variation pattern distribution table (special variation pattern distribution table) is separately provided, and when the activation of the support time reduction is prohibited, the variation pattern distribution table can be referred to and one or more variation patterns can be selected. When an activation prohibition support winning variation pattern is selected, a corresponding performance may be displayed, but in any case, because the activation of the support time reduction is prohibited, even if the support time reduction is won, the final (game result) performance content (consistent performance) that notifies the non-winning of the support time reduction is displayed.

Also, the support winning variation pattern during the activation prohibition can be, for example, the same variation pattern as one or more of the variation patterns belonging to the miss variation pattern allocation table (FIG. 35, FIG. 37, FIG. 39, FIG. 41) related to the probability variable state (probability variable mode) or the time-saving state (time-saving mode). In this case, the support winning variation pattern during the activation prohibition may be either a reach variation pattern or a normal variation (a reachless miss variation pattern), but is preferably a normal variation because the support time-saving state is not activated even if the support time-saving is won. There is no particular restriction on the type of variation time of the normal variation, but considering that it is a variation pattern similar to a miss, it is preferably the shortest variation time.
In addition, when selecting the support winning variation pattern during the activation prohibition, if the current game state is in the high probability state, a loss variation pattern related to the high probability state may be selected, and if the current game state is in the time-saving state, a loss variation pattern related to the time-saving state may be selected. In addition, in the case of the support time-saving activation prohibition state (in the high probability state and the time-saving state), a loss variation pattern related to a specific game state may be selected as the target. As the "specific game state", for example, at least one of the time-saving state, the high probability state, and the normal state can be determined.
In addition, when the same fluctuation pattern as the failure fluctuation pattern related to the time-saving state or the probability change state can be selected as the activation-prohibited support winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern designation command can be made different from the failure fluctuation pattern. As a result, even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the performance control unit 24 can grasp whether it is the activation-prohibited support winning fluctuation pattern or the normal failure fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to produce a performance (different performance) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

When the support time reduction activation is not prohibited and a preview effect (for example, a support time reduction winning preview effect) that suggests a win in the support time reduction is possible, it is preferable that the effect related to the support winning change pattern during the activation prohibition (hereinafter also referred to as a "specific support winning effect") does not include a support time reduction winning preview effect. As a support time reduction winning preview effect, a plurality of option images are displayed (for example, a plurality of option images that suggest the winning expectation of the support time reduction, such as "support time reduction confirmed (high winning expectation)", "support time reduction?! (medium winning expectation)", and "miss (low winning expectation)" are displayed on the screen), and depending on the content of the image finally selected from them, a performance that suggests the winning expectation of the support time reduction or the winning content of the support time reduction is included. It is preferable that the specific support winning effect does not include such a support time reduction winning preview effect. Naturally, the performance result of the specific support winning effect does not notify the winning of the support time reduction.

In addition, if an activated reserved ball related to a support time-saving win occurs during a state in which the activation of the support time-saving is prohibited, it is preferable not to execute a pre-reading forecast targeting at least that activated reserved ball. In other words, even during a state in which the activation of the support time-saving is prohibited, it is possible to configure the system so that pre-reading forecasts targeting activated reserved balls related to a jackpot win and/or activated reserved balls for losses are not prohibited.

Note that Figures 34, 36, and 38 show examples of variation pattern allocation tables for cases in which the support time-saving activation is not prohibited during the special probability state, and Figure 40 shows examples of variation pattern allocation tables for cases in which the support time-saving activation is not prohibited during the time-saving state. However, if the support time-saving activation is not prohibited during the special probability state or the time-saving state, the presentation result when the support time-saving activation is won can be determined to be one that notifies the user that the support time-saving activation has been won.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413 is completed, the fluctuating flag corresponding to the current fluctuating start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The "fluctuating flag" is a flag indicating whether special symbol 1 or 2 is fluctuating. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, a "special symbol 1 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 1 and a "special symbol 2 fluctuating flag" corresponding to special symbol 2 are handled. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the current processing target (fluctuating start side), the special symbol 1 fluctuating flag is set to ON and the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of identifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is obtained, and this is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information regarding the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command is mainly used when determining the combination of decorative symbols (symbol types that are components of the reach symbol) when forming a reach state, the combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) that are finally stopped and displayed, and the preview performance corresponding to the winning type in the symbol change display game. When the performance control unit 24 receives the change pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, it determines the performance (changing performance) to be executed during the symbol change display game based on the information included in these commands, and starts the current decorative symbol change display game.

Next, the support time-saving flag management process is executed (step S422). In this support time-saving flag management process, if it is determined that the support time-saving has been won in the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device (step S410), the support time-saving determination flag is cleared depending on whether or not the win occurs during a state in which the support time-saving activation is prohibited.

(15. Support Time Reduction Flag Management Process: FIG. 15)
The assisted time-saving flag management process (step S422) is shown in detail in Fig. 15. There are two processing forms of the assisted time-saving flag management process shown in Fig. 15(a) and (b), but either processing form may be used.
In the support time-saving flag management process shown in FIG. (A), the CPU 201 first judges whether or not it is in a normal state (whether or not the support time-saving activation is prohibited) (step S962). If it is not in the normal state (step S962: NO), it clears the support time-saving judgment flag (step S963) as it is a win during the support time-saving activation prohibited state, and if it is in the normal state (step S962; YES), it does not win during the support time-saving activation prohibited state, and exits the process without doing anything.

On the other hand, in the support time reduction flag management process shown in FIG. (B), first, the state of the support time reduction judgment flag is judged (step S960). If the support time reduction judgment flag is OFF (00H) (step S960: ≠ 5AH), the process is terminated without doing anything. On the other hand, if the support time reduction judgment flag is OFF (5AH) (step S960: = 5AH), as in FIG. (A), it is judged whether or not the normal state is being held (step S962), and if the normal state is not being held (step S962: NO), the support time reduction judgment flag is cleared (step S963), and if the normal state is being held (step S962; YES), the process is terminated without doing anything.

(Regarding the special stop symbols related to winning the support time reduction during the support time reduction prohibition state)
(Manseki 11) In this embodiment, even if the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited, the support time-saving winning information (support time-saving judgment flag) is maintained until the support time-saving flag management process is executed, so the special stop pattern number corresponding to the support time-saving winning is acquired in step S411. Therefore, even during the support time-saving activation prohibition state, the special pattern display device 38a, 38b (7-segment) displays a special pattern corresponding to the winning support time-saving type (support time-saving A to C) instead of a special pattern corresponding to a miss. However, in this case, it is possible to clearly notify the support time-saving winning, but on the other hand, since it is notified that the support time-saving has been won but the support time-saving will not be activated, a player who knows the special stop pattern type will feel a sense of loss. Therefore, the special stop pattern during the support time-saving activation prohibition state may be configured to stop a special pattern corresponding to a miss (in this embodiment, a special stop pattern corresponding to any of misses A to C). In this embodiment, since misses A to C are defined on the special chart 1 side and miss A is defined on the special chart 2 side, it is preferable to stop and display the special stop pattern corresponding to any of misses A to C in the event of a support time-saving win on the special chart 1 side, and to stop and display the special stop pattern corresponding to miss A in the event of a support time-saving win on the special chart 2 side.
In addition, the special stop pattern may be common (same) and the decorative stop pattern may be different between the case where the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction prohibition state and the case where the support time reduction is won when the support time reduction prohibition state is not in effect (in the support time reduction permission state). For example, during the support time reduction prohibition state and during the support time reduction permission state, the special stop pattern (7-segment) of the special pattern display device is stopped and displayed as "1.". On the other hand, regarding the decorative pattern, during the support time reduction prohibition state, a "decorative stop pattern corresponding to a miss" may be stopped and displayed, or a "decorative stop pattern for winning during the support time reduction prohibition state" may be stopped and displayed. Also, during the support time reduction permission state, a decorative stop pattern corresponding to the support time reduction win (for example, "time ☆ reduction" or "579") may be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 77).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, when the support time reduction flag management process in step S422 is completed, as the change start setting process, the special pattern operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special pattern operation status), and 00H is stored in the judgment random number storage area (zero clear) (step S416).

(In case of a setting error: Processing route S409 → S411)
Returning to the explanation of the judgment process of step S409, in step S409, if the setting error flag is ON (5AH), that is, if a setting abnormality error is occurring (step S409:=5AH), the random number judgment process for judging the operation of the special electric role object in step S410 (lottery for winning or losing) is skipped, and the special stop pattern creation process in step S411 is executed. In other words, if a setting abnormality error occurs, the lottery for winning or losing at the start of the fluctuation is not executed, and the result of the current lottery for winning or losing is always processed as "losing" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the error and select this, but it may be configured so that an existing specific fluctuation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing fluctuation pattern, it is preferable to select only the normal fluctuation pattern type without selecting the reach fluctuation type that stimulates the expectation of winning, considering that a serious error called "setting abnormality error" has occurred. Note that, in a forced loss situation, since the game is no longer meaningful, it is preferable to select the long fluctuation pattern type, and more preferably, only the longest normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s in this embodiment) is selected. In addition, in the case of a setting abnormality error, the game may be configured to be "unable to continue playing" and the symbol variation display game itself may not be started (the symbol variation may not be started). In this case, the error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. In this embodiment, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is released.

As a result of the above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbols is started. This exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric role management process (step S095) in FIG. 9.

<13. Special symbol change processing: Figure 16>
Next, the special symbol variation process (step S307) shown in Fig. 10 will be described. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation process in Fig. 10.

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol role operation timer is at zero, i.e., whether the special symbol change time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol role operation timer is not at zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, i.e., the special symbol is changing, so the CPU 201 does nothing and exits the special symbol change process.

When the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero (step S451: YES), a "change stop command" indicating that the special symbol change has ended is sent to the performance control unit 24 as a performance control command (step S452). This change stop command causes the performance control unit 24 to understand that the special symbol change time has elapsed and the special symbol change display game has ended, and causes the decorative symbol currently being displayed to stop changing (confirmed display). This ends the special symbol change display game, and the decorative symbol change display game also ends.

Next, as a setting process for when the special symbol stops changing, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (e.g., 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of RAM 203, the confirmation display time (e.g., 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol role operation timer, the special symbol operation status is switched to "checking (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S454), and this special symbol changing process is terminated. The above "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is the margin time to ensure the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal that notifies the hall computer HC that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed from the frame external terminal board 21. Also, the "confirmed display time" is the time (stopped display time) for which the stopped display is maintained when the special symbol changing display ends and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During this fixed display time, the decorative pattern is also fixedly displayed (finally stopped) (for example, the fixed display period CT in FIG. 44).

When the above special symbol changing process is completed, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is completed, and the process proceeds to the special electric device management process in step S095 in FIG. 9.

<17. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 17A and Fig. 17B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) will be described. Figures 17A and 17B are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process of Figure 10.

In Figures 17A and 17B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol role operation timer is at zero (step S471). The special symbol role operation timer here is set to a "determined display time" (see step S454 in Figure 16). Until the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero (step S471: NO), the CPU 201 does nothing and exits the special symbol confirmation time processing.

When the special symbol feature operation timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), this special symbol change display game is deemed to have ended, the special symbol operation status is switched to "Waiting (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) (step S472), and the game status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is obtained and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big win determination flag is ON)
In the judgment of step S474, if the jackpot judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot pattern stops (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot judgment flag is set to OFF (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to ON (5AH), and the "low probability + no electric support state" is set (the normal electric device opening extension flag, the normal pattern time-saving state flag, the normal pattern probability change state flag, the special pattern time-saving state flag, the special pattern probability change state flag, the special pattern time-saving count counter, the special pattern probability change count counter, and the special pattern change count counter are set to OFF (00H)), a predetermined value (for example, 00H) is set to the game state notification LED output number that specifies the lighting/extinction of the game state notification LED (not shown), and the support time-saving flag described later is set to OFF (00H)), and the special pattern confirmation time processing is exited.

The above-mentioned "game status notification LED" is a status notification means provided at an appropriate location of the gaming machine (for example, it may be provided as one of the display functions of the composite display device 38c, or a dedicated LED may be provided separately) for notifying the current game status information. The game status notification LED of this embodiment is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to notify whether or not the game is in a time-saving state (special pattern time-saving state), whether or not the game is in a support time-saving state, whether or not the game is in a ceiling bonus (for example, a time-saving state due to a ceiling time-saving state (hereinafter also referred to as a "ceiling time-saving state")) described later, and the like. The CPU 201 can change the notification mode of the game status notification LED according to the game status notification LED output number, and can notify the current game status information. The notification mode of the game status notification LED can be determined as follows.
(I-8) During the support time-saving state, the game status notification LED for support time-saving is turned on, and the right-hit notification LED (right-hit display device 39b), which is turned on during the jackpot time-saving state, can be turned on or off.
(I-93) During the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state, the ceiling/support time-saving LED (combined LED) is turned on. In this case, the right-hit notification LED (right-hit display device 39b) that is turned on during the jackpot time-saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to distinguish whether the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state, the support time-saving state, or the jackpot time-saving state. In particular, the hall can immediately grasp whether the game state at the time of power outage recovery is in the support time-saving state, the jackpot time-saving state, or the ceiling time-saving state described below.
(I-94) The ceiling time-saving LED is turned on during the ceiling time-saving state, and the support time-saving LED is turned on during the support time-saving state. In this case, the right-hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time-saving state can be turned on or off. It becomes easy to distinguish whether the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state, the support time-saving state, or the jackpot time-saving state. In particular, the hall can immediately grasp whether the game state at the time of power outage recovery is in the support time-saving state, the jackpot time-saving state, or the ceiling time-saving state described below.
(I-95) When the support time-saving is selected during the ceiling time-saving state, if the ceiling time-saving state is terminated and the support time-saving state is newly controlled, the ceiling time-saving LED is turned off and the support time-saving LED is turned on. Even if the support time-saving is selected during the ceiling time-saving state, it is easy to distinguish whether the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state.
(I-96) When the support time-saving state is selected during the ceiling time-saving state, the support time-saving LED is turned on. Even if the support time-saving state is selected during the ceiling time-saving state, it is easy to distinguish whether the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state.
(I-28) During the ceiling time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving LED is turned on. In this case, the right-hit notification LED that is turned on during the jackpot time-saving state can be turned on or off. This makes it easy to identify whether the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state or not.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
In the judgment of step S474, if the big win judgment flag is OFF (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the support time-saving judgment flag is judged (step S476). If the support time-saving judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), a support time-saving winning state flag setting process is executed (step S477A). Here, as a transition process to the support time-saving state, the value of each state buffer set in the state buffer setting process (S916 in FIG. 14) during the game state transition preparation process (step S412) (see FIG. 42) is set in the flag area or counter corresponding to each state buffer. As a result, a time-saving state (such as the number of time-saving times) corresponding to the support time-saving type won in this game is specified, and the support time-saving state occurs after the fixed display time has elapsed.

Next, various setting processes are performed when the support time-saving symbol stops (step S477B). Here, the support time-saving judgment flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the "support time-saving flag" that specifies that the support time-saving state is in is set to the ON state (5AH), a predetermined value (support time-saving state notification number) is set to the game status notification LED output number, and each status buffer is cleared (set to 00H). The support time-saving flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support time-saving state is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the support time-saving state is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the support time-saving state is not in progress.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S447C). Here, a game state designation command is sent to the performance control unit 24. The game state designation command sent here includes information designating the start of the support time-saving state. When the performance control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it understands that the support time-saving state will be entered after the current game ends, and transitions the presentation mode to a presentation mode corresponding to the support time-saving state (in this example, a time-saving presentation mode (for example, any one of time-saving presentation modes 1 to 4, or a presentation mode dedicated to the support time-saving state not shown)). This causes the special symbol confirmation time process to be exited, and the special symbol display data update process of step S309 in FIG. 10 is executed.

When the configuration is such that the support time-saving state is immediately initiated after the end of the fluctuation time, the judgment process of step S476 is executed after the judgment process of S451 (if the judgment result is YES) in the special pattern fluctuation process of FIG. 16 (for example, between the process of step S452 and step S454), and if the support time-saving judgment flag is "00H" (≠ 5AH), the process of step S454 is executed, and if the support time-saving judgment flag is "= 5AH", the processes of steps S477A to S477C (at least steps S447A and S447B) are executed, and then the process of step S454 is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S476 above, if the support time-saving judgment flag is OFF (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), it is judged whether the special pattern time-saving count counter (remaining number of time-saving counts) is zero (step S478). If the special pattern time-saving count counter is zero (step S478: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S483.

If the special symbol time-saving count counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 to represent the time spent in this game (display of the current special symbol's changes) (step S479), and it is determined whether the special symbol time-saving count counter after the decrement is zero (step S480).

If the special pattern time-saving count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times the special pattern time-saving state has ended (the specified number of time-saving times) has not been reached, so nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S483.

If the special symbol time-saving counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of games executed) has reached the number of times the special symbol time-saving state ends (the specified number of times the time-saving state has been consumed), and the setting process at the end of the time-saving state is executed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of the time-saving state, as shown in the figure, the function related to the time-saving state is set to the OFF state (no electric support state), Tcode is set to "00H (normal)", the game state notification LED output number is set to a predetermined value (00H), and the transition setting process to the normal state is executed. Note that when the support time-saving state ends, the support time-saving state flag is set to the OFF state (00H). Also, in a configuration that employs multiple game modes according to the number of consecutive wins (see FIG. 7A), when the consecutive win count is returned to zero upon the end of the time-saving state, the consecutive win count counter is cleared. This will transition the game state to normal mode (normal state), and the special symbol variation pattern associated with normal mode will be selected for the next special symbol variation display game.

After completing the setting process for the time-saving end in step S481, the game status information transmission process is then executed (step S482). The game status designation command transmitted here includes information designating the end of the time-saving state, and can also include information that can identify the type of time-saving state that has ended (such as a jackpot time-saving state or a support time-saving state). When the performance control unit 24 receives this game status designation command, it determines that the time-saving state has ended in this game, and transitions the performance mode to the normal performance mode. At this time, it can perform performance control processing to make the "launch position guidance performance (left-hit notification performance)" that instructs the player to aim for the left flow path 3b as the launch position appear (the same applies when the special probability state ends (step S487) described below).

When the process proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether the special symbol probability change counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability change counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability change counter is decremented by 1 to represent the amount of time that has been consumed in this game (step S484), and it is determined whether the special symbol probability change counter after the decrement is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability change counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S488.

If the special symbol probability change counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), the number of times the special symbol changes is deemed to have consumed the specified number of STs, and the setting process for the end of the probability change is executed (step S486). Here, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to OFF, Tcode is set to "00H (normal)", the consecutive win count counter is cleared (00H), and a transition setting process to the normal state is executed as the setting process for the end of the probability change. This transitions the game state to the normal mode (normal state), and in the next special symbol change display game, the special symbol change pattern related to the normal mode is selected. Note that if a potential probability state is set, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485, just like the processing for the probability change state, and the end setting process for the potential probability state is executed in the setting process for the end of this probability change.

In addition, as a jackpot, a "high probability time-saving jackpot" can be provided, which transitions to a time-saving state after the high probability state has ended, i.e., after the ST number of times has been completed. The number of time-saving times may be a finite number (for example, 100 times or less), a time-saving number exceeding 100 times (150 times, 200 times, etc.), or an infinite number, and can be set appropriately according to the nature of the game. When providing such a "probable time-saving jackpot," it is preferable to set the number of STs to a finite type (ST times of 100 times, 50 times, etc.). The above-mentioned probable time-saving jackpot is not a "pure probable jackpot (jackpot that only gives probable jackpot: 10R probable jackpot or 4R probable jackpot)" in that it is a jackpot that gives "probable jackpot state of a specified number of STs + time-saving state of a specified number of time-saving times," but in this specification it is treated as belonging to "probable jackpot" in that it first transitions to the probable jackpot state. Probable jackpots can include one or more "probable jackpots" that do not give a time-saving state and/or "probable time-saving jackpots" that can give a time-saving state.

After completing the setting process for the end of the high probability state in step S486 above, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482 above, a game state designation command is sent to the presentation control unit 24, but this game state designation command includes information designating the end of the high probability state (high probability state or potential probability state). When the presentation control unit 24 receives this game state designation command, it determines that the high probability state (or potential probability state) has ended in this game, and transitions the presentation mode to the normal presentation mode.

After completing the game status information transmission process in step S487, it is then determined whether the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488). Here, the timing of changing the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) based on the number of times the special symbol has changed (number of times the game has been executed) is monitored.

If the special pattern change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits from this special pattern confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special pattern change count counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special pattern change count counter is decremented by 1 to represent the current change count (step S489), and it is determined whether the special pattern change count counter after the decrement is zero (step S490).

If the special pattern change count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is not the time to update the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) (update game), so the process exits from this special pattern confirmation time without doing anything.

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is determined that the timing for updating the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and a game status update process (Tcode update process) is executed (step S491).
For example, when infinite time-saving is granted and the game mode is changed from "time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3" as shown in FIG. 7B (a), first, when the current time-saving mode is "time-saving mode 1 (Tcode = 04H (value of fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 1))" and the special pattern fluctuation count counter becomes zero, the value of Tcode is updated from "04H" which designates the current time-saving mode 1 to "05H (value of fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2)" which designates the time-saving mode 2, and the special pattern fluctuation count counter is set to 100 times (the number of times set at update 1 in FIG. 42). Then, when the game progresses and the current time-saving mode is "time-saving mode 2" and the special symbol variation counter becomes zero, the value of Tcode is updated from "05H" which specifies the current time-saving mode 2 to "06H (value of variation pattern allocation designation number 3)" which specifies the time-saving mode 3, and 65335 times (the set number at the time of update 2 in FIG. 42) is set in the special symbol variation counter. This realizes the transition of the game mode from "time-saving mode 1 ⇒ time-saving mode 2 ⇒ time-saving mode 3" according to the number of times the game is executed in the time-saving mode (number of times of pattern variation). In the same manner, for other game modes, when the timing for updating the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) arrives, a game state update process is performed to transition to the target game mode, thereby realizing the transition of the game mode shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 7B, and FIG. 49A to FIG. 49B described later. The process of this step S491 serves as a variation pattern mode update means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

After the game status update process of step S491 is completed, the game status information transmission process is then executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482 above, a game status designation command is sent to the presentation control unit 24, but the information contained in the game status designation command here includes information that can identify the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode). When the presentation control unit 24 receives this game status designation command, it transitions the current presentation mode to a presentation mode that corresponds to the updated variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

As a result of the above, when this special symbol variation start process is completed, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is completed, and the process proceeds to the special electric role management process (step S095) in FIG. 21.

[Second embodiment]
"Modification of the first embodiment (first support time-saving type): Figures 18 to 20"
Next, referring to Figures 18 to 20, a modified example (hereinafter also referred to as "second support time-saving type") of the special pattern change start processing relating to the above-mentioned first embodiment (first support time-saving type) will be described.

In the first embodiment (first support time reduction type) described above, even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state, the winning flag is maintained without being cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed, and the winning flag is cleared in the support time reduction flag management process (step S422). In contrast, in this modified example (second embodiment), if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state, the winning flag is cleared at least before the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is executed, or the support time reduction winning flag itself is not established. Note that the contents already explained in the first embodiment of this modified example will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication. Also, the same step numbers are assigned to substantially the same processing contents.

(18. Special pattern variation start process for the second support time-saving type: FIG. 18)
Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process according to this modified example. The difference between this embodiment and the first embodiment is that the process procedure of the special electric device operation determination random number determination process (step S410) and the game state transition preparation process (step S411) in Fig. 12, and the support time reduction flag management process (step S422) are not provided. In addition, the special electric device operation determination random number determination process according to this modified example includes two determination processes 1 and 2 shown in Fig. 19A and Fig. 19B.

(19A. Random number determination process 1 for determining operation of special electric role: FIG. 19A)
First, referring to FIG. 19A, the random number determination process 1 for determining the operation of the special electric feature in this modified example will be described.

In FIG. 19A, the CPU 201 first obtains a winning random number determination table and a random number for determining a jackpot, similar to S941 to S943 in FIG. 13, and executes the random number determination process.

Next, it is determined whether or not the support time-saving activation is prohibited, that is, whether or not the game state is other than the normal state (step S945). If the support time-saving activation is not prohibited, that is, if the game is in the normal state (support time-saving activation permitted state) (step S945: YES), a determination flag is set according to the determination result of the random number determination process (step S944).

On the other hand, if the support time reduction activation is prohibited, that is, if the normal state is not in effect (step S953: YES), then it is determined whether the result of the random number determination process is "support time reduction win" (step S946).

If the support time-saving win has not been won (step S946: NO), nothing is done and the process proceeds directly to step S944, where a judgment flag is set according to the judgment result of the random number judgment process (step S943). However, if the support time-saving win has been won (step S946: YES), the support time-saving win is forcibly rewritten to non-win (step S947). Specifically, the support time-saving judgment flag is updated from win (5AH) to non-win (00H) (forced loss process), and the updated result is set as the judgment result of the random number judgment process (step S943). In other words, when the forced loss process of step S947 is performed, it is processed as a "loss" that is neither a jackpot win nor a support time-saving win. Therefore, if the support time-saving activation prohibition state is in place, activation of the support time-saving will be prohibited.

(19B. Random number determination process 2 for determining operation of special electric role: FIG. 19B)
Next, referring to FIG. 19B, the random number determination process 2 for determining the operation of the special electric feature in this modified example will be described.

In FIG. 19B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal state is in effect (whether or not the support time reduction activation is prohibited) (step S951).

If it is in the normal state (support time-saving activation permitted state), that is, if the support time-saving activation is not prohibited (step S951: NO), a "win random number determination table for normal lottery" corresponding to the current processing target is obtained based on the special symbol activation confirmation data (step S952). On the other hand, if it is not in the normal state, that is, if the support time-saving activation is prohibited (step S951: YES), a "win random number determination table for special lottery" corresponding to the current processing target is obtained based on the special symbol activation confirmation data (step S953). Then, similar to S942 to S944 in FIG. 13, a random number for jackpot determination is obtained (step S942), a random number determination process is performed (step S943), and a determination flag is set according to the determination result (step S944).

Figure 27 shows the above-mentioned "Winning Random Number Determination Table for Normal Lottery" and "Winning Random Number Determination Table for Special Lottery." The above-mentioned "Winning Random Number Determination Table for Normal Lottery" is, for example, a random number determination table related to the "Normal" column of the winning random number determination table shown in the figure with respect to support time reduction, and the above-mentioned "Winning Random Number Determination Table for Special Lottery" is a random number determination table related to the "Special" column shown in the figure. Note that the notation "Allowed" in the figure means "Support time reduction activation permitted state," and the notation "Prohibited" means "Support time reduction activation prohibited state."

In this determination process 2 (Figure 19B), depending on whether the support time-saving activation is prohibited or not, different winning random number determination tables (winning random number determination tables provided corresponding to whether the support time-saving activation is permitted or prohibited) are used to determine whether or not a jackpot and a support time-saving activation have been won.

As shown in Figure 27 (A) and (B), in the winning random number judgment table for normal lottery (see the "normal" column), if the random number value for jackpot judgment is in the range of "65405 to 65535", the support time reduction will be won, but in the winning random number judgment table for special lottery (see the "special" column), the support time reduction will be "not won" regardless of the value of the random number value for jackpot judgment. In other words, it is equivalent to a lottery format in which a lottery is held for a jackpot, but a lottery for support time reduction is not held. Note that the winning random number judgment table in Figure (D) is a table for "no support time reduction win on special chart 2 side" where there is no support time reduction on the special chart 2 side, and in either range, the support time reduction will not be won.

Therefore, if the support time-saving activation is prohibited, at the stage of the jackpot lottery (here, the win/lose lottery), the result will always be "support time-saving not won (support time-saving judgment flag = 00H)." As a result, if the support time-saving activation is prohibited, the support time-saving judgment flag will always be in the OFF state (00H), and activation of the support time-saving will be prohibited.

In the example of FIG. 19B, the "special lottery winning random number judgment table" is used when the support time reduction is prohibited, but it is also possible to determine whether or not a jackpot only (or a jackpot and a small jackpot if a small jackpot is also included) is won or not without referencing the special lottery data in the special lottery winning random number judgment table. In other words, it is a lottery type in which the win or non-win of a jackpot only is judged on the premise that the support time reduction is not won, and the lottery for the support time reduction itself is not executed. In this case, too, it is processed as a non-win for the support time reduction, so if the jackpot is not won, it will always be processed as a loss. This lottery type can be said to be a pure support time reduction no lottery type in that no lottery is held for the support time reduction.

As described above, in both judgment processes 1 and 2 shown in Fig. 19A and Fig. 19B, the support time reduction is forcibly determined to be a non-win by the jackpot lottery (here, a win/lose lottery) during the support time reduction activation prohibited state. Therefore, when the support time reduction activation prohibited state is in effect, unless there is a jackpot win (or a jackpot or small win if a small win is provided), the result of the jackpot lottery is always processed as a "lose". In this respect, it is significantly different from the first embodiment described above, in which even if the support time reduction is won during the support time reduction activation prohibited state, the win flag is maintained without being cleared until the special symbol change pattern creation process (step S413) is completed (see steps S410 and 422 in Fig. 12, and Figs. 13 to 15).

(FIG. 20. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 20)
Next, the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) for the second support time-saving mounted type will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state transition preparation process for the second support time-saving mounted type.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S911). If the jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S911: = 5AH), the process proceeds to step S915, game state transition table acquisition processing. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination flag is OFF (00H) (step S911: ≠ 5AH), the CPU 201 then determines the state of the support time reduction determination flag (step S912).

If the support time reduction judgment flag is ON (00H) (step S912: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything. If the support time reduction judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), the game state transition table acquisition process of step S915 and the state buffer setting process of step S916 are executed in sequence.

The game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 20 differs from the game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 14 in that it does not require a process for determining whether or not the support time-saving activation is prohibited (step S914 in FIG. 14). In this modified example, whether or not the support time-saving activation is prohibited is determined during the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device in the pre-processing (step S410A), and accordingly, it is determined whether the support time-saving activation judgment flag is in the ON state (win (5AH)) or the OFF state (non-win (00H)), and if there is a win while the support time-saving activation is prohibited, the support time-saving activation judgment flag is always in the OFF state (00H).

When judgment processes 1 and 2 are adopted, even if the support time reduction is won during a state in which the support time reduction is prohibited (in this example, when not in a normal state), it will be treated as a loss, and the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) will be the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss (loss fluctuation pattern: see Figures 35, 37, 39, 41, etc.). Note that if it is treated as a loss, the loss symbol table is referenced in the symbol lottery process (special stop symbol creation process in step S411), and one of the loss patterns A to C is determined. Therefore, in the case of this modified example, there is no need to go through the complicated processing as in the first embodiment (selecting a variation pattern when the support time-saving feature is won regardless of whether the support time-saving feature is prohibited or not, but making the content of the presentation different, or executing a variation pattern selection process specifically for when the support time-saving feature is won while the support time-saving feature is prohibited), and instead simply carrying out the same processing as when it is lost. This sacrifices the diversification of presentation as in the first embodiment, but has the great advantage of reducing the control burden.

(Manseki 30) Here, if the support time-saving feature is selected in this game, the game state can be judged at the end of the game (for example, during processing for the special pattern confirmation time after the fixed display time has elapsed (the judgment process is provided in Figures 17A to 17B) and a decision can be made as to whether or not to trigger the support time-saving feature. For example, if the state in which the support state cannot be activated is defined as the time-saving feature, it can be judged at the end of the game whether or not the current game state is the time-saving feature, and based on the judgment result, it can be decided whether or not to trigger the support time-saving feature.

However, if the support time-saving feature is selected on the final time-saving feature, whether or not the support time-saving feature occurs differs between the processing mode in which the remaining number of time-saving features is counted when the pattern changes (when the game starts) (hereinafter referred to as the "game start count mode") and the processing mode in which the remaining number of time-saving features is counted when the pattern changes (when the game ends) (hereinafter referred to as the "game end count mode"). This will be described in detail below. Note that the "remaining time-saving feature count mode" here includes a process that ends the time-saving feature when the remaining number of time-saving features becomes zero (a process equivalent to the setting process at the end of the time-saving feature in this embodiment (for example, step S481)).

(Manseki 31) In the case of the above game start count format, the game ends in the normal state, so if the support time-saving feature is selected on the final time of the time-saving feature, the support time-saving feature will always occur.

(Manseki 32) However, in the case of the counting format at the end of the game, the support time-saving state may or may not occur depending on the processing procedure.
(Manseki 32-1) In more detail, after the support time-saving compatible symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether or not to activate the support time-saving state based on the current game state (hereinafter referred to as "support time-saving activation determination"), and then the remaining number of time-saving times is counted (processing procedure 1), in the case of a processing procedure in which the game state at the time of the support time-saving activation determination is the "time-saving state" (support state activation prohibited state), so the support time-saving state does not occur. In other words, when the support time-saving compatible symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state is the "time-saving state", so the support time-saving state is not activated.
(Manseki 32-2) On the other hand, in the case of a processing procedure (processing procedure 2) in which the support time-saving corresponding pattern is stopped and the remaining number of time-saving times is counted and then the support time-saving activation judgment is made, the support time-saving state occurs because the game state at the time of the support time-saving activation judgment is "normal state" (support state activation permitted state). In other words, when the support time-saving corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed, the game state is "normal state", so the support time-saving state is generated. In the case of this processing procedure 2 (similar to the above-mentioned game start count form), only at the final time of the time-saving number of times, a variable performance or a decorative stop pattern related to the support time-saving winning may be displayed. Also, in terms of performance, it is possible to make it look like a new time-saving state has occurred during the time-saving state. For example, it is possible to make performances such as "Time-saving continues!" and "Time-saving number added!" appear.

(Manseki 33) Note that, although the above explanation focuses on the final time of the time-saving count, the same phenomenon also occurs in the final time of the ST count. When the support time-saving is won in the final ST count, whether or not the support time-saving state occurs differs between the "game start count mode" in which the remaining ST count process is executed when the pattern change starts (when the game starts) and the "game end count mode" in which the ST count process is executed when the pattern change ends (when the game ends). Note that the above "ST count process" here includes a process that ends the special probability state when the ST count becomes zero (a process that corresponds to the setting process at the end of the special probability state in this embodiment (for example, step S486)).

(Manseki 34) In the case of the count mode at the start of the game, just like the events described above in the time-saving state, if the support time-saving state is won on the final ST count, the support time-saving state will always occur (because the game ends in the normal state).

(Mankoku 35) However, in the case of the count mode at the end of the game, just as with the events described in the time-saving state above, the support time-saving state may or may not occur depending on the processing procedure.
(Manseki 35-1) In the game end count format, if the support time-saving activation judgment process is performed before the ST count process, the support time-saving state does not occur when the support time-saving compatible symbol is stopped and displayed because the game state is "probable bonus state". On the other hand, if the support time-saving activation judgment process is performed after the ST count process, the support time-saving compatible symbol is stopped and displayed because the game state is "normal state".

<18. Special Electric Device Management Processing: Figure 21>
Next, the special electric role management process (step S095) in Fig. 9 will be described. Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric role management process in step S095. Here, the special electric role management process in the case where a special electric non-operating type support time reduction is provided will be described.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether the condition device operation flag is ON/OFF (step S502). If the condition device operation flag is OFF (step S502: ≠ 5AH), that is, if a jackpot game is not being played, the CPU 201 does nothing and exits the special electric device management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric device operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric device status branching processing). The "special electric device operation status" is a status value that indicates the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing status and stored in the special electric device operation status storage area of the RAM in the area. The special electric device operation status includes "start processing in progress (00H)" that specifies the standby state before the start of a jackpot game, "operation start processing in progress (01H)" that specifies the standby state before the start of a round game, "operating (02H)" that specifies that a round game is being played, "continuation determination in progress (03H)" that specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game, and "jackpot end processing in progress (04H)" that specifies that end processing is being performed at the end of a jackpot game.

In the special electric device operation status branching process in step S503, one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the special electric device operation status value is one of the status values "start processing in progress (00H)", "operation start processing in progress (01H)", "operating (02H)", "continuation determination in progress (03H)", or "jackpot end processing in progress (04H)". These processes are processes for controlling the execution of jackpot games, and after going through the processes in steps S505 to S509, a winning game corresponding to each type of winning is realized. The process contents of steps S505 to S509 are explained below.

<Jackpot Game Control Processing (Steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The "jackpot start process" in step S505 will be described. When a jackpot game starts, the special electric device operation status is set to the initial value of "start process in progress (00H)". Therefore, when a "jackpot" is hit, this "jackpot start process" is executed first.

When the jackpot start process starts, the CPU 201 first sets the feature continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as a setting process (start-time setting process) required when starting a jackpot game. This allows continuous operation of the special electric feature (round play). Then, the special electric feature operation status is updated to "operation start process in progress (01H)" and the "continuous number counter" that counts the number of rounds is set to 01H, which specifies the first round. Next, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to the type of jackpot won this time (special symbol determination data) and data for displaying the maximum number of rounds information on the round display LED (round display LED number) are set in the corresponding area of the RAM within the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol feature operation timer. "Start interval time (start INT)" refers to the interval period from when the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 17A) and a jackpot has been confirmed until the special variable winning device 52 is activated (until the first round of play begins), and refers to the time span that defines the opening performance period.

Next, a "jackpot start command" is sent to the performance control unit 24, and the jackpot start process is terminated. The "jackpot start command" includes information that can identify the type of jackpot this time and the game state at the time of the jackpot being won. When the performance control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, it determines the series of winning effects (opening effect, during-round effect, between-round interval effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc.) that will be played out during this jackpot game (during the start INT, between rounds, during rounds, during the end INT, etc.), and starts the opening effect. Thus, the jackpot game and the during-jackpot effect begin.

(9-2. Special electric device operation start processing)
Next, the "special electric accessory operation start process" in step S506 will be described.

When the special electric device operation start process is started, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol device operation timer is zero. The special symbol device operation timer here is set to a pre-round interval time. In the first round (1R), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the "jackpot start process (step S505)" is monitored as this interval time, but when passing through this process (step S506) from the 2nd round onwards, the "pre-open interval time", specifically the interval time between the end of the current round and the start of the next round (inter-round INT), is monitored. Since the current round has not ended until the special symbol device operation timer reaches zero, the special electric device operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol device operation timer is zero, that is, the pre-open interval time (in the case of the first round, the start interval time) has elapsed, the opening and closing operation pattern of the large prize opening 50 is set according to the type of big win (special symbol determination data) and the current round number (consecutive number counter value) (large prize opening opening and closing operation setting process). Here, the large prize opening opening and closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol device operation timer, and solenoid control data (data for the large prize opening opening and closing operation pattern executed corresponding to the number of rounds) for controlling the large prize opening solenoid 52c is set. In addition, with the operation of the special variable prize device (special electric device) 50 (start of opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 50), the special electric device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH). The "special electric device operation flag" is a flag used to check whether the special variable prize winning device 50 is in operation. When the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the special variable prize winning device 50 is in operation, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that the special variable prize winning device 50 is not in operation. The period during which the special electric device operation flag is ON (5AH) between rounds of play, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is in operation, is the period from when the large prize winning port is opened to when the large prize winning port is closed until the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) described below has elapsed. On the other hand, the period during which the special electric device operation flag is OFF (00H) between rounds of play, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is not in operation, is the period during the interval time (pre-open interval time: 20 ms described below) from when the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) has elapsed until the next round of play begins. If a win occurs in the large prize slot while the special electric device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H), it is considered an illegal win, and illegal win detection error processing is executed, such as sounding an alarm from the speaker 46.

In addition, when the large prize opening opening start operation starts, a large prize opening opening command is sent to the performance control unit 24. This "large prize opening opening command" contains the current round number information, and is used by the performance control unit 24 when causing the performance during the round corresponding to the round number to appear. Then, the special electric device operation status is switched to "operating (02H)" and the special electric device management process is exited. This causes the large prize opening 50 to be opened up to the upper limit of the large prize opening opening and closing operation time, and the current round of play begins.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric devices)
Next, the "special electric feature operation processing" in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric device operation process is started, the CPU 201 first monitors whether the number of winning balls in the large winning hole 50 has reached the maximum number of winning balls, and if the maximum number of winning balls has been reached, the special symbol device operation timer is cleared to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above "special electric device operation start process (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the large winning hole 50 that is open will be closed when the maximum number of winning balls has been reached. In addition, here, a "large winning hole winning command" is sent to the performance control unit 24 every time a winning ball is won in the large winning hole 50. This large winning hole winning command includes winning information and winning ball number information in the large winning hole (it may also include setting value information), and is used for the winning performance that notifies the fact that a winning ball has been won in the large winning hole 50, as well as for controlling the appearance of the setting suggestion performance using the winning performance. For example, if an over win occurs that exceeds the maximum number of wins, a special over win effect will be displayed instead of the normal over win effect, according to the appearance rate determined by the set value.

In addition, until the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the time for opening the large prize opening (maximum opening time) has elapsed or the maximum number of prizes has been reached, the special electric role operation process will be exited without doing anything.

When the maximum number of winnings is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol device operation timer reaches zero, the current round of play is deemed to have ended, the special electric device operation status is switched to "continuation judgment in progress (03H)", and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol device operation timer. This "remaining ball discharge time" refers to the extra time required to discharge the remaining balls inside the large prize entrance after the large prize entrance is closed. In addition, when the large prize entrance is closed (end of round play), an inter-round interval command is sent to the performance control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round play and the current round number information, and is used in the performance control unit 24 when the inter-round INT performance is displayed until the start of the next round play. As a result, the special electric device operation processing is exited. The "inter-round interval time (inter-round INT)" between rounds of play consists of the above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms)" and the "pre-open interval time (20 ms)" described below, which is the time from when the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed until the start of the next round of play.

(9-4. Special electric device operation continuation determination process)
Next, the "special electric device operation continuation determination process" in step S508 will be described.

When the special electric device operation continuation determination process is started, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol device operation timer is at zero. Since the special symbol device operation timer here is set to the remaining ball discharge time after the large prize opening is closed (1980 ms) (see step S507), it is determined whether this remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Until the special symbol device operation timer reaches zero, the process exits from the special electric device operation continuation determination process without doing anything.

When the special symbol device operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the consecutive number counter is obtained to determine whether the current number of rounds is the maximum number of rounds. If it is not the maximum number of rounds, one is added to the consecutive number counter (+1) as processing for continuing round play. In addition, the "pre-release interval time (e.g., 20 ms)" is stored in the special symbol device operation timer, the special electric device operation flag is set to the OFF state (00H), and the special electric device operation status is switched to "operation start processing in progress (01H)". During the pre-release interval time, the special electric device operation flag is set to the OFF state, and as a result, the pre-release interval time becomes a large prize port winning invalid period (period of monitoring for illegal winning during a jackpot) in which winning at the large prize port is invalid.

On the other hand, if the current number of rounds is the maximum number of rounds, the "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol device operation timer as the setting process for the end of the final round, and the special electric device operation status is switched to "end processing in progress (04H)." The above "end INT" refers to the interval period from the end of the final round play and the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed until the end of the jackpot play, and refers to the time width that determines the ending performance period.

Then, a "jackpot end command" that instructs the start of an ending performance is sent to the performance control unit 24, and the special electric device operation continuation determination process is exited. This ends the maximum number of rounds of play. The jackpot end command includes information regarding the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the win, that is, information that can identify the game state after the jackpot play ends, and is also used by the performance control unit 24 when determining the performance mode after the jackpot play.

(9-5. Big win end processing)
Next, the "jackpot end processing" of step S509 will be described.

When the jackpot end process starts, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol role operation timer is at zero. Since the special symbol role operation timer here is set to the end interval time (end INT) described above, it determines whether this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero, the CPU 201 does nothing and exits this jackpot end process.

When the special symbol feature operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed), the values of the state buffers set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10) are set in the flag areas and counters corresponding to the state buffers. This specifies the game state after a jackpot play. If a ceiling function, described below, is provided, this process sets an initial value (for example, the ceiling number of games (1000 games)) in the ceiling counter, described below. This specifies the game state after a jackpot play.

Next, as various setting processes at the end of the jackpot, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game status notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric device operation status is switched to "start processing in progress (00H)."

When the above jackpot end process is completed, the series of control processes related to the jackpot game ends, and the current jackpot game ends.

(When special telephone activation type support time reduction is implemented)
In the above embodiment, the explanation focuses on the case where the "special electric non-operating type support time reduction" is provided. When the special electric operating type support time reduction is provided, the support time reduction state by the special electric operating type support time reduction may be controlled by configuring as follows.

In the judgment process of S476 in FIG. 17A, if the support time-saving judgment flag is ON (5AH), instead of the processing of steps S477A to S447C, various setting processes when the support time-saving pattern stops are performed by setting the support time-saving judgment flag to OFF (00H) and setting the support time-saving pre-start flag that specifies the execution of the support time-saving open/close game to ON (5AH).

In the special electric device management process in FIG. 21, first, before the judgment process of step S502, a process is performed to judge the state of the support time-saving pre-start flag. If the support time-saving pre-start flag is OFF, the process from step S502 onwards is executed, and if the support time-saving pre-start flag is ON, a process for executing the support time-saving open/close game (support time-saving special electric device operation process) is executed, and then the process returns. In the support time-saving special electric device operation process, first, at the start of the support time-saving open/close game, the "support time-saving open/close game in progress flag" is set to the ON state (5AH), and the setting process required to execute the support time-saving open/close game is executed. Then, when the support time-saving open/close game is finished, the values of the state buffers set in the above-mentioned "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" are set in the flag area or counter corresponding to the state buffer, the "support time-saving flag" that specifies that the support time-saving state is in the ON state (5AH), and the flag before the support time-saving start and the support time-saving open/close game flag are set to the OFF state (00H). In addition, in the case of a special electric non-operation type support time-saving, since the support time-saving open/close game is not performed, the support time-saving open/close game is not performed, so the support time-saving open/close game flag is set to the ON state after the game in which the support time-saving is won is finished (triggered by the lapse of the fixed display time or the end of the variable time) (see step S477B in FIG. 17A). This specifies the game state (transition to the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times) after the support time-saving open/close game. When the support time-saving opening and closing game starts, a "support time-saving opening and closing game start command" is sent to the performance control unit 24, and when the support time-saving opening and closing game ends, a "support time-saving opening and closing game end command" is sent to the performance control unit 24. These commands are used by the performance control unit 24 to produce the performance during the support time-saving open/close game (opening performance (start INT performance), opening/closing action game performance, ending performance (end INT performance, etc.). Here, in the case of special electric activation type support time saving, the support time-saving open/close game (small win game in the case of small win winning type support time saving) is executed first, and then the time-saving state is granted, so the question is whether the support time-saving state is a period that includes the support time-saving open/close game. In this case, depending on the gameplay, if the period that includes the support time-saving open/close game is treated as the support time-saving state, the support time-saving flag may be set to ON at the start of the support time-saving open/close game, or if the period excluding the support time-saving open/close game is treated as the support time-saving state, the support time-saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the support time-saving open/close game.

To summarize the preferred embodiments of the first embodiment, the following configuration examples 1A to 9A can be considered.

[Configuration Example 1A]
An acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of random number values including at least a first random number value and a second random number value based on the establishment of a starting condition;
A winning/losing determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a winning/losing determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value;
A symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A pattern display means (special pattern display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that performs a variable pattern display operation and can stop and display the pattern in a display mode corresponding to the determination result of the pattern determination means;
A special electric device (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the large winning port;
A special electric accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 21) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory;
A gaming machine equipped with a game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 21, FIG. 42, FIG. 43) capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of executing the variable display operation of the pattern in a shorter variable time than in a normal state is high,
The objects to be judged by the winning/losing judgment means include:
The jackpots include at least jackpots (for example, 10R probability jackpot, 4R probability jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot: FIG. 4) that trigger the operation of the consecutive operation means of the reels, and special time-savings (support time-savings A, support time-savings B, support time-savings C: FIG. 4) that do not trigger the operation of the consecutive operation means of the reels,
The game state control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that when the special time-saving option is selected, the game machine is controlled to the time-saving mode (FIGS. 4 and 42).

[Configuration Example 2A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11 ) for acquiring a plurality of types of random number values including at least a first random number value and a second random number value based on the establishment of a starting condition;
A winning/losing determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a winning/losing determination regarding a predetermined winning based on the first random value;
A symbol determination means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) for determining the type of winning based on the result of the winning/losing determination and the second random number value;
A pattern display means (special pattern display devices 38a, 38b, liquid crystal display device 36) that performs a variable pattern display operation and can stop and display the pattern in a display mode corresponding to the determination result of the pattern determination means;
A special electric device (special variable winning device 52) configured to open or expand the entrance of the large winning port;
A special electric accessory continuous operation means (main control unit 20 (accessory continuous operation device), FIG. 21) capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory;
A gaming machine equipped with a game state control means (main control unit 20, FIG. 4, S412 in FIG. 12, S509 in FIG. 21, FIG. 42, FIG. 43) capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of executing the variable display operation of the pattern in a shorter variable time than in a normal state is high,
The objects to be judged by the winning/losing judgment means include:
The jackpots include at least jackpots (for example, 10R probability jackpot, 4R probability jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot: FIG. 4) that trigger the operation of the consecutive operation means of the reels, and special time-savings (support time-savings A, support time-savings B, support time-savings C: FIG. 4) that do not trigger the operation of the consecutive operation means of the reels,
The game state control means includes:
When the special time-saving is won, the number of times the pattern is displayed is controlled to the time-saving state until the number of times the pattern is displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The special time reduction includes a plurality of types of special time reduction (support time reduction A, support time reduction B, support time reduction C: FIG. 4) having different upper limit counts,
The pattern determination means includes:
When the result of the winning/losing judgment is a winning of the special time-saving option, the type of winning is judged to be one of the multiple types of special time-saving options (FIGS. 4 and 30).

[Configuration Example 3A]
An acquisition means (main control unit 20, S314 in FIG. 11 ) for acquiring a plurality of types of random number values including a first random number value and a second random number value based on the establishment of a start condition;
A winning/losing determination means (main control unit 20, S410 in FIG. 12) for performing a winning/losing determination based on the first random value;
When the result of the winning/losing judgment is a winning, a symbol judgment means (main control unit 20, S411 in FIG. 12) capable of judging the type of the winning based on the second random number value;
A pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of a pattern and capable of stopping and displaying the pattern in a display mode according to a determination result of the pattern determination means;
A gaming machine equipped with a game state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving state in which the rate of executing the variable display operation of the pattern in a variable time shorter than that in a normal state is high,
The pattern determination means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the result of the win/loss judgment by the win/loss judgment means is not a win, a lottery is conducted using the second random number value to determine whether or not to grant the time-saving state (Figures 26 to 31).
In addition, when the "lottery result is not a win", it means that the winner did not win "at least a big win (if a normal small win is provided, it may be a big win and a normal small win, or it may be only a big win excluding a normal small win)" in the win/lose lottery (Figure 26 or Figure 27), and in this case it means a case where the support time reduction is won (the same applies to configuration examples 4A and 5A described below).

[Configuration Example 4A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of symbols and for stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a time-saving state in which the rate of executing the variable display operation of the pattern in a shorter variable time than in a normal state is high,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state until the number of times the pattern is variably displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times controlled to the time-shortened state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of times of time-shortened awarded by a time-shortened jackpot) is different from the upper limit number of times controlled to the time-shortened state when the lottery result is not a hit (the number of times of time-shortened awarded by a supported time-shortened state) (time-shortened performance of a 4R time-shortened jackpot (100 times of time-shortened play) ≠ time-shortened performance of a supported time-shortened play (200 times of time-shortened play by supported time-shortened play B or infinite time-shortened play by supported time-shortened play C (65,535 times of time-shortened play)).

[Configuration Example 5A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of symbols and for stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a time-saving state in which the rate of executing the variable display operation of the pattern in a shorter variable time than in a normal state is high,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state until the number of times the pattern is variably displayed reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The time-saving state is configured to be controllable depending on whether the lottery result is a winning result or not,
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times controlled to the time-shortened state when the lottery result is a hit (the number of times of time-shortened awarded by a time-shortened jackpot) is the same as the upper limit number of times controlled to the time-shortened state when the lottery result is not a hit (the number of times of time-shortened awarded by a supported time-shortened state) (time-shortened performance of a 4R time-shortened jackpot (100 times of time-shortened play) = time-shortened performance of a supported time-shortened play (100 times of time-shortened play by a supported time-shortened play A)).

[Configuration Example 6A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of symbols and for stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A variation pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including a reach variation pattern based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
A pattern display control means for controlling the variable display operation of the pattern in the pattern display means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means;
A game machine including a consecutive win counting means for counting the number of consecutive wins in a specific game period on the condition that the winning is won,
The reach fluctuation pattern includes a plurality of reach fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a reach fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number than before the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number (Figure 35).

[Configuration Example 7A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
a pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of a pattern and for stopping and displaying the pattern in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A variation pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
A pattern display control means for controlling the variable display operation of the pattern in the pattern display means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means;
A game machine including a consecutive win counting means for counting the number of consecutive wins in a specific game period on the condition that the winning is won,
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the selection rate of a normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is higher after the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number than before the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number (Figure 35).

[Configuration Example 8A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of symbols and for stopping and displaying the symbols in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A variation pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
A pattern display control means for controlling the variable display operation of the pattern in the pattern display means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means;
A game machine including a consecutive win counting means for counting the number of consecutive wins in a specific game period on the condition that the winning is won,
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is not a win becomes relatively longer after the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number compared to before the lottery result exceeds a predetermined number, while the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is a win does not change (the configuration of (T27) above, a modified example of Figure 34).
In addition, in configuration examples 8A and 9A, when the "lottery result is not a win", it means that the player has "lost" either the "jackpot (if a normal small win is provided, it may be a jackpot and a normal small win, or it may be only a jackpot excluding a normal small win) or the support time-saving feature (this includes the case where a win in the support time-saving feature is forcibly made a loss by Figure 19A or Figure 19B).

[Configuration Example 9A]
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning prize;
a pattern display means for performing a variable display operation of a pattern and for stopping and displaying the pattern in a display mode corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means;
A variation pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
A pattern display control means for controlling the variable display operation of the pattern in the pattern display means based on the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means;
A game machine including a consecutive win counting means for counting the number of consecutive wins in a specific game period on the condition that the winning is won,
The plurality of types of fluctuation patterns include a plurality of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times,
A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is a hit becomes relatively longer after the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number compared to before the number of consecutive wins exceeds a predetermined number, while the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result is not a hit does not change (the configuration of (T26) above, a modified example of Figure 35).

<Decorative pattern change display operation performance: Figure 44 to Figure 45>
Next, referring to Figures 44 and 45, the decorative symbol variable display performance will be described. The decorative symbol variable display performance is a series of symbol variable display operation modes (decorative symbol variable pattern) from the start of the decorative symbol variable display to the stop display (particularly the fixed display), and here, the three decorative symbols, the left symbol, the center symbol, and the right symbol, shown in Figure 4, are treated as variable display modes. The decorative symbol variable display performance is used as a part of the performance during the symbol variable display game. Unless otherwise necessary, the decorative symbol variable display performance will be abbreviated to "decorative symbol performance".

The decorative pattern effects are used to notify players of a reach state (reach effect), the occurrence of pseudo consecutive wins, and the final game result (jackpot lottery result), as well as to liven up advance notice effects (advance notice during fluctuations), and also function as important identification information to notify the start and end of a game, and can be said to be the core of decorative pattern fluctuation display games. In other words, decorative pattern effects not only enrich the variety of effects through their display operations, but are also considered to be important effects in making players less likely to feel stressed when the game ends with a loss, and less likely to feel the occurrence of a fluctuation slump. Therefore, in this embodiment, the objective is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation effect of decorative pattern effects.

In this embodiment, the focus is on the misses that players often encounter during gameplay, and in order to enrich the presentation variations during the pattern changes and improve the player's playing comfort, the "decorative pattern stopping operation pattern (decorative pattern stopping operation mode)" that is executed towards the end of the game has been devised.

(Outline of decorative design presentation)
The outline of the decorative symbol presentation will be described below. First, the outline of the series of variable display operations of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Details of the "decorative symbol stop operation pattern" will be described later with reference to Fig. 45.

Figure 44 is a timing chart illustrating a decorative pattern presentation (decorative pattern change pattern) associated with a certain normal change (for example, normal change 13s).

In the decorative pattern performance, as shown in the "long stop operation" of FIG. 44(a), for example, first, the three decorative patterns start to change display simultaneously or separately from the stopped display state (determined display state), and each decorative pattern starts a "high-speed change state (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed change")" (at the time of 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed change, each decorative pattern is in a display state in which it is difficult or impossible to distinguish, and the transparency of the decorative pattern is higher than when it is stopped, and for example, the background image corresponding to the current performance mode becomes distinguishable through the decorative pattern during high-speed change. Note that FIG. 44 shows a state in which the three decorative patterns start to change display simultaneously from the stopped display state, but as described above, the three decorative patterns may start to change display separately and start high-speed change. For example, the left pattern may be displayed to change at high speed after 0.5 seconds, the middle pattern after 0.7 seconds, and the right pattern after 0.9 seconds. In this case, all patterns enter a high-speed change state after 0.9 seconds.

The above-mentioned "transparency" means the degree or percentage through which other images present behind the image for which the transparency is set can be seen through the image. Specifically, when the transparency of an image is set to 0%, other images superimposed on the back of the image become completely invisible (undistinguishable state), but when the transparency is set to 100%, the image becomes completely transparent and only the other images are visible. Therefore, if the transparency is set to an appropriate value, the image is displayed as a semi-transparent image according to the transparency (0% < transparency A < 99%). The transparency of the decorative pattern during the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation should be at least higher than the transparency during the slow fluctuation described below (transparency α% during slow fluctuation < transparency β% during fast fluctuation), and it is preferable that the display state has a transparency that allows other images (background images) superimposed behind the decorative pattern to be sufficiently distinguished. In addition, various preview performances are also performed when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stopping operation starts in the order of "left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern" at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, respectively, and each pattern starts to decelerate from the high-speed fluctuation and enters a period of "slow-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as "slow-speed fluctuation")". This period of slow-speed fluctuation is a "slow-down display period (deceleration period)" in which the pattern gradually slows down and stops, and immediately after the start of the stopping operation (timing of the start of the stopping operation), the transparency is reduced to approximately the same as the confirmed display (including the same; the same applies below), and the decorative pattern is redisplayed in a state where it can be identified. Therefore, during the slow-speed fluctuation period, the transparency of the decorative pattern is always lower than during the high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during slow-speed fluctuation < transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). Note that the transparency may be configured to gradually decrease as the stopping operation time progresses.

After the above-mentioned "slow fluctuation (slow down display)" period has elapsed, a "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as "temporary stop")" period will begin. In this example, each symbol will enter this temporary stop period at 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds, respectively. During this temporary stop period, the symbols will undergo "swaying fluctuations." The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols related to "pseudo consecutive wins" (the temporary stop state before the decorative symbols are re-varied and displayed). Note that the transparency during the temporary stop is approximately the same as the transparency during the fixed display (transparency γ% during fixed display = transparency δ% during the temporary stop period = approximately 0%), and the symbols are displayed in a state where they can be fully distinguished. Therefore, the player can clearly understand what symbol has stopped.

Then, when the provisional stop period has elapsed (at 13 seconds), the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time of the special symbols) ends and the decorative symbols are displayed as fixed (fixed display period), which ends the series of decorative symbol presentations, i.e., ends this decorative symbol variable display game. Note that this fixed display period is a time span set in accordance with the "fixed display time (see step S454 in FIG. 16)" that is set when the special symbols have finished their fluctuation time, and is used as the fixed display time to definitively notify the final combination of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed. The next decorative symbol variable display game will start after this fixed display period has elapsed.

Although not shown in the figure, to be precise, the speed of the decorative symbols becomes zero at the end of the slow fluctuation, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, stopped and displayed for 0.3 seconds: pause period), after which a provisional stop is initiated. In other words, the basic flow of the decorative symbols' change display operation in one symbol change display game is, to be precise, "fast change → slow change → pause → provisional stop → all symbols confirmed display." Therefore, when referring to the "first symbol to stop," it means the symbol that ends the slow change first, or the symbol that provisionally stops first. In this specification, to simplify the explanation, the "first symbol to stop," "second symbol to stop," and "last symbol to stop" are treated as the "first symbol to provisionally stop," "second symbol to provisionally stop," and "last symbol to provisionally stop," respectively.

Furthermore, for ease of explanation, in the following, focusing on the fact that the above-mentioned "slow fluctuation period (slow-down display period)" is "the period from the start of the stopping operation to the temporary stop", this slow fluctuation period may be referred to as the "period during the stopping operation". Also, the presentation during this stopping operation period may be referred to as the "presentation during the stopping operation".

(About the stopping operation pattern of the decorative pattern: Figure 45)
The outline of the series of variable display operations of the decorative symbols has been described above. Next, the stopping operation patterns of the decorative symbols according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern (display mode during the stop operation period). Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, three stop operation patterns, "stop operation short", "stop operation middle", and "stop operation long" shown in FIG. 45 (a) to (c) are handled. Note that FIG. 45 shows the time transition of each pattern in the stop operation pattern of each pattern, with the time t when the pattern that stops first (temporarily stopped) starts the stop operation being 0 seconds (note that the relational expressions connected by equal signs have approximately the same meaning). Also, for convenience of explanation, each period related to the decorative pattern performance (variable display operation of the decorative pattern) in FIG. 45 is expressed as follows.
(a) The period during which the left pattern is stopped is called the "left stop period LMT."
(b) The period during which the right pattern is stopped is called the "Right Stop Period RMT."
(C) The period during which the center pattern stops is called the "middle stop operation period CMT."
(D) The temporary stop period of the left pattern is called the "Left temporary stop period LPT."
(E) The temporary stop period of the right pattern is called "Right temporary stop period RPT."
(F) The temporary stop period of the center pattern is called the "left temporary stop period CPT."
(G) The fixed display period (common to each decorative pattern) is called the "fixed display period CT"
(H) The left pattern stop operation period (LMT + LPT) is called the "left stop operation period LST."
(Ri) The stop operation period of the right pattern (RMT + RPT) is called the "right stop operation period RST"
(Ju) The stop operation period of the center pattern (CMT + CPT) is called the "middle stop operation period CST"

In this embodiment, multiple stop motion patterns are provided with different stop motion periods (here, corresponding to the "left stop motion period LST") from when at least one symbol first starts its stop motion until all symbols stop (confirmed display). The multiple stop motion patterns include at least a first period, a second period, and a third period stop motion pattern with different stop motion periods (stop motion times), with the first period being the longest, followed by the second period, and then the third period. Of these, the first period stop motion pattern is referred to as a "stop motion short", the second period stop motion pattern with a stop motion period longer than the first period is referred to as a "stop motion middle", and the third period stop motion pattern with a stop motion period longer than the second period is referred to as a "stop motion long". For example, in terms of the relationship between the stop operation patterns (a) to (c) shown in FIG. 45, a stop operation pattern with the shortest stop operation period (shortest time) is a "stop operation short," a stop operation pattern with the longest stop operation period (longest time) is a "stop operation long," and a stop operation pattern with a stop operation period longer than the stop operation short but shorter than the stop operation long is a "stop operation middle."

(Example of a stop operation short circuit: FIG. 45(a))
The "stopping operation short circuit" will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in the figure, in the "short stopping operation" according to this embodiment, the left, right and center symbols all start the stopping operation (slow down display) at approximately the same time (at 0 seconds), and after a 0.5 second slow fluctuation period (period during stopping operation), all symbols temporarily stop (pause) at approximately the same time. After that, after a 0.5 second temporary stop (swaying fluctuation), all symbols are finally displayed (at 1 second). In the case of this short stopping operation, all symbols simultaneously perform the stopping operation and are finally displayed after just 1 second, so they appear to stop quickly.

(Example of a middle stop motion: FIG. 45(b))
Next, the "stopping motion middle" will be described with reference to FIG.

The "stop operation middle" according to this embodiment is different from the above-mentioned stop operation short, in that the stop operation order of each pattern is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slow down display) starts in the order of "left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern". In the case of this embodiment, after the left pattern that stops first (temporarily stopped) enters the stop operation, the right pattern and the middle pattern enter the stop operation sequentially in the middle of the left pattern's stop operation (at the time of 0.5 seconds and 1 second), and each pattern enters the temporary stop sequentially in the order in which the stop operation started (see the time of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds in the figure). Then, when 0.5 seconds has passed since the last temporarily stopped middle pattern, all the patterns are displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop operation middle, the stop operation period (3 seconds) is longer than the stop operation short (1 second), that is, each pattern appears to stop more slowly than the stop operation short. However, in the case of the middle stopping action, "while the first symbol is stopping, the other symbols stop in sequence," so in terms of presentation, it tends to give the impression that each symbol is stopping at a good tempo.

(Example of a long stopping motion: FIG. 45(c))
Next, the above-mentioned "long stopping operation" will be described with reference to FIG.

The "long stop operation" according to this embodiment is the same as the middle stop operation in that the stop operation order of each pattern starts the stop operation (slow down display) in the order of "left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern". However, it differs in the following respects. In the case of the long stop operation, the left pattern starts the stop operation first, and then enters a temporary stop at 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right pattern starts the stop operation at 1.5 seconds when the left pattern enters the temporary stop, and then enters a temporary stop at 3 seconds. Also, the middle pattern starts the stop operation at 3 seconds when the right pattern enters the temporary stop, and enters a temporary stop at 3.5 seconds. In other words, each time the pattern that started the stop operation first in chronological order enters a temporary stop, the remaining patterns enter a temporary stop in sequence, and all the patterns are displayed 0.5 seconds after the last pattern that was temporarily stopped, that is, 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation of the left pattern. Therefore, when the long stop operation is applied, each pattern appears to stop more slowly than the middle stop operation. In addition, in the case of a long stopping action, the last symbol to stop (temporarily stop) is characterized by the fact that it stops for a shorter period of time than the other symbols.

For each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns (short stop operation, middle stop operation, long stop operation), the relationships when focusing on each period (periods LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) are as shown in Figure 45, and matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between high and low transmittance, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, etc.) are self-evident matters and are included in the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the short stop motion, middle stop motion, and long stop motion each have different stopping motion patterns (performance patterns during the stopping motion) of the decorative patterns, and therefore can give different impressions in terms of performance.

<Processing on the production control unit side: Figs. 22 to 25>
Next, the performance control process on the performance control unit 24 side of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 22 to 25. The process on the performance control unit 24 side is mainly composed of a predetermined main process (performance control side main process: Figure 22) and a timer interrupt process (performance control side timer interrupt process: Figure 23) that is started by a regular interrupt from the CTC (the same applies to the third embodiment described later).

<16. Main processing on the performance control side: Figure 22>
22 is a flowchart showing the main process on the performance control unit side (main process on the performance control side). When power is applied to the gaming machine main body from the outside, the performance control unit 24 starts the main process on the performance control side shown in FIG.

In the main processing on the presentation control side, the presentation control unit 24 (CPU 241) first performs the necessary initial setting processing before the start of game operation (step S1001). Here, the initial setting processing includes, for example, setting a command reception interrupt, returning the movable role object to its starting point, initial setting of the CTC, enabling timer interrupts, and initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

After completing the above initial setting process, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as normal operation processing, and otherwise the performance software random number update process of step S1013 is repeatedly performed.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and judges whether the main loop update period (counter value > 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the performance control side timer interrupt process that is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, the main loop process is executed approximately every 16 ms, and in the judgment process of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is judged, and if the value is greater than "15" (step S1002: YES), it is determined that the timing to execute the main loop process has arrived, and the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed. Otherwise, various performance lottery random numbers used for lotteries such as advance notice performances during the decorative pattern variation display game are updated until the main loop update period arrives (step S1002: NO) (step S1012).

When the main loop update period has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of a performance scenario for error notification during an error and error cancellation processing when the error is cleared are executed. Errors related to the performance means (movable object errors, audio IC errors, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, demo/power-saving mode processing is executed (step S1005). In this demo/power-saving mode processing, the pre-customer waiting performance (demo start waiting display), customer waiting performance (demo display), and setting processing required for the power-saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, directional key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to that operation is executed. The input state of the operation means is monitored in the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 23 described later.

Next, a command analysis process is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not a performance control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if a performance control command is stored, the command is read out and performance processing corresponding to the read performance control command is executed. When an interrupt occurs based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. The performance control command is obtained by this command reception interrupt process, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of RAM 243.

For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, when a variation pattern designation command and a decorative design designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer), in the command analysis process, one or more types of presentation patterns are determined based on the information contained in the command (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)). The presentation pattern determined here serves as a "part presentation" that constitutes the presentation scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined for the timing and presentation time width for the presentation pattern (part presentation) determined above, which constitutes a presentation scenario, and the data of the presentation scenario is stored in the scenario setting area of RAM 243. The various presentation patterns (part presentations) incorporated in this presentation scenario are deployed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing a "presentation scenario" in the broad sense.

After the command analysis process is completed, the scenario update process is then executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required for executing the performance scenario are updated, and the performance scenario is advanced based on the timer value. A typical example of the timer is the performance scenario timer, which manages the time schedule regarding the timing of performance occurrence. For example, during the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (decorative pattern variable period), which is substantially the same period as the period during which the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner (special pattern variable period), the timer manages the time schedule regarding what performance pattern is to be displayed, with what time width, and by what performance means on that time axis. Such a performance scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the performance character operation update process (step S1053) described later. Here, the performance scenario timer is monitored, and when the time for a certain performance to occur arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and liquid crystal commands for image display control are created, and each is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. Note that LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described below, and motor control data for the movable props is created in the prop operation update process (step S1053) described below.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output processing, the sound data created in the scenario update processing in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be played, data such as phrases and volume is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI) based on the sound data set for each sound channel, and sound effects are produced from the speaker 46 via the sound control unit. This realizes sound effects that match the performance scenario.

Next, an LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for light display devices such as decorative lamps 13 and various LEDs for performance is created based on the performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S1011). In this LED output processing, the LED data created in the LED drive data update processing is output to the light display control unit, and light-emitting means such as the decorative lamp unit 45 and the performance LEDs are turned on and off via the light display control unit. This realizes a light performance according to the performance scenario.

When the main loop processing is thus terminated, the performance software random number update processing is performed in step S1013 until the next main loop update period arrives.

<17. Timer interrupt processing on the performance control side: Figure 23>
Next, the timer interruption process on the performance control side will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing the timer interruption process on the performance control side. This timer interruption process on the performance control side is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms) and is executed by interrupting the main process on the performance control side.

In FIG. 23, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S1051) and then executes a button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, directional key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that an operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a specified area of the RAM 243. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1008) in FIG. 22 when displaying player participation type effects, menu screens, information related to menu items, and the like. In this embodiment, it is also possible to detect single presses, long presses, repeated presses, etc.

Next, a prop action update process is executed (step S1053). In this prop action update process, motor control data for the movable props is created based on the prop scenario data and the prop scenario timer.

Next, SOL/MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL/MOT output processing, the control data for the movable body part created in the performance part operation update processing is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body part motor of the movable body part to be operated, and controls its operation. This allows a movable body performance to be realized using the movable body part (such as the clock-shaped part 80 or the flower-shaped part 90) in accordance with the performance scenario.

Next, an LCD command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this LCD command transmission process, if there is an LCD command created in the scenario update process (step S1008) of FIG. 22, the LCD command is transmitted to the display control unit (LCD control CPU), which executes image display control on the LCD display device 36. This allows image presentation according to the presentation scenario to be realized.

Next, an RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) kept by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when producing effects based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the performance control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0 to 15.

After completing the processing of step S1057 above, the saved register contents are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the main processing on the performance control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Details of Received Command Analysis Process: Figs. 24 and 25>
24 and 25 show the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 in FIG. 22) that are closely related to the present invention. Below, we will explain the cases where a "reserved addition command" and a "decorative symbol designation command" are received.

(Reserved addition command reception process: FIG. 24)
In FIG. 24, the performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a winning command reception confirmation process (step S2201). When the performance control unit 24 receives a winning command, it first analyzes the contents of the winning command, acquires the look-ahead judgment result information (look-ahead fluctuation pattern information), and performs a winning command reception process (not shown) in which the acquired information is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. Here, the winning command is correctly received, and a reception confirmation process is performed to confirm that the information has been acquired. In the look-ahead information storage area, look-ahead information storage areas corresponding to the special chart 1 side and the special chart 2 side are provided, similar to the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side. In addition, these look-ahead information storage areas are provided with reserved 1 look-ahead information storage area to reserved n look-ahead information storage area (n=4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of operating reserved balls, and each of them can store the look-ahead judgment result information for the maximum number of operating reserved balls.

Next, it is determined whether the read-ahead determination result information indicates that read-ahead is prohibited (step S2203). If it is during the read-ahead prohibition period (step S2203: YES), nothing is done and the pending addition command reception process is exited.

If pre-reading is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, where it is determined whether the "continuous preview counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous preview counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period that prohibits the occurrence of duplicate pre-reading preview effects. Specifically, if the current activated reserved ball is set as the target for the execution of the pre-reading preview effect by the pre-reading preview lottery in step S2205 described below, this counter is used to prevent a newly generated activated reserved ball from being set as the target for the execution of the pre-reading performance until the current activated reserved ball is provided to the pattern change display game. For the reasons mentioned above, the "continuous preview counter" is designed to store the value of the current number of activated reserved balls N (see step S2208 described below).

If the continuous preview counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is determined that the pre-read preview lottery is prohibited, and the pending addition command reception process is terminated without doing anything. If the value of the continuous preview counter is zero (step S2204: YES), it is determined that the pre-read preview lottery is permitted, and the pre-read preview lottery process is performed (step S2205). In the pre-read performance lottery process, a lottery is performed on whether or not to perform a pre-read preview based on the pre-read fluctuation pattern information as a result of pre-reading the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation. The "winning command" contains the pre-read fluctuation pattern information, and the "pending addition command" contains information regarding the special symbol type, and this information is used in the pre-read preview lottery.

There are two types of look-ahead predictions in this embodiment. One is a winning time-based look-ahead prediction (reserved change prediction) that occurs mainly when a game ball enters the starting hole and the starting conditions are met (i.e. when a winning ball is won or when the starting conditions are met). The other is a pattern change mid-stage look-ahead prediction (change mid-stage look-ahead prediction) that occurs during the pattern change display game that is executed first chronologically. Therefore, the look-ahead prediction lottery includes a lottery on whether to make a reserve change prediction and a lottery on whether to make a change mid-stage look-ahead prediction, and here both are performed independently.

In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance lottery process, a look-ahead notice is drawn using the look-ahead change pattern information specified by the winning command and a look-ahead performance lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and performance information (information related to the look-ahead performance lottery result) based on the result of the look-ahead performance lottery is set (step 2206). This performance information is used when the look-ahead notice appears. The performance information set here includes (i) information specifying the reserved change notice, for example, a performance scenario related to the reserved change notice such as reserved color and reservation change timing specification information, (ii) information specifying the change-in-progress look-ahead notice, for example, a performance scenario related to the change-in-progress look-ahead notice such as the notice image type (thundercloud image, rain image, lightning image) and execution count information, and (iii) look-ahead performance lottery non-winning (missing) information (information not to execute the look-ahead notice), etc. In this example, the lottery for whether or not to make a reserve change notice and the lottery for whether or not to make a look-ahead notice during fluctuation are conducted independently, so there are cases where only the reserve change notice is conducted, cases where only the look-ahead notice during fluctuation is conducted, and cases where both the reserve change notice and the look-ahead notice during fluctuation are conducted; when both the reserve change notice and the look-ahead notice during fluctuation are conducted, the odds of winning are higher than when the look-ahead notice is conducted alone.

When executing the above (i) and (ii) look-ahead notice, the performance control unit 24 performs the performance control processing required for the hold change notice and/or the changing notice based on the performance information (performance scenario related to the look-ahead notice) based on the result of the look-ahead performance lottery, thereby realizing the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 5B, for example. On the other hand, if the above (iii) look-ahead performance lottery is not won, the look-ahead notice is not executed, and the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) in white hold is displayed in the corresponding hold display section (a1-d1, a2-d2 in FIG. 4).

When the result of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance lottery process is to execute a look-ahead notice, the value of the current number of operation reserved balls is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). This prohibits a look-ahead notice lottery for a new operation reserved ball for a certain period of time. This counter value is decremented by one each time an old operation reserved ball that was generated earlier is consumed in the decorative pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 25 described later (see step S2306 described later). By setting the value of the currently existing number of operation reserved balls when the look-ahead performance lottery is won as described above to the "continuous notice counter", even if a new operation reserved ball occurs during the number of pattern changes corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls, the lottery for the look-ahead notice performance is prohibited (step S2204: NO route). For example, if the current number of reserved balls is three, the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited during the three pattern changes corresponding to the number of reserved balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of a look-ahead notice. The above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding the winning of the look-ahead notice. In other words, if the "continuous preview counter" is zero, the pre-read preview is not winning (pre-read preview not in execution state), and if it is a value other than zero, it is determining that the pre-read preview is winning (pre-read preview in execution state).

(Decorative design designation command reception process: FIG. 25)
25, the performance control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a process for confirming receipt of a variation pattern designation command (step S2301). When the performance control unit 24 receives a variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the contents of the command, acquires variation pattern information (variation pattern information at the time of the start of variation), and performs a variation pattern designation command reception process (not shown) for storing the acquired information in a read-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. Here, it is confirmed that the variation pattern designation command has been correctly received and that the information has been acquired.

Next, the contents of the decorative pattern designation command are analyzed, and pattern information regarding the special pattern type and winning type (pattern lottery result) is obtained (step S2302).

Next, a lottery is performed for the type of performance scenario (step S2303). Here, based on the current performance mode (the current performance stage if a performance stage is provided) and the change pattern information, the performance scenario during the current pattern change is determined by lottery from among multiple types of performance scenarios. The performance scenario includes various performance scenarios related to the preview performance to be executed during the current pattern change. When the performance scenario is determined, the specific type of preview performance belonging to the determined preview performance type is further determined. For example, if there are performance scenarios A to C, and performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to the step-up performance type, performance scenario B is a performance scenario related to the player participation type performance type, and performance scenario C is a performance scenario related to the background change notice, then it is assumed that performance scenario A is determined by the lottery for the type of performance scenario. This performance scenario A is a performance scenario related to the step-up performance type (for example, step-up performance C that ends in one stage, step-up performance B that develops to two stages, and step-up performance A that develops to the final stage), so which of step-up performances A to C belonging to the step-up performance type will be executed is determined by a predetermined lottery for the type of preview performance. The probability of selection for step-up effects A to C is determined according to the variation pattern, and the higher the probability of winning for a variation pattern, the more likely step-up effect C, which has a relatively high probability of winning, is to be selected. This also determines other effects (setting suggestion effects and non-notice effects) that will be executed in conjunction with the execution of the step-up effect.

Then, when a specific preview performance (here, one of step-up performances A to C) is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern related to the current performance scenario is determined. The step-up performances A to C have a performance execution time that is predetermined according to the performance content. For example, the step-up performance C for one stage is set to 9 seconds, the step-up performance B for two stages is set to 10 seconds, and the step-up performance A that develops to the final stage (three stages) is set to 12 seconds. Therefore, for example, if the step-up performance C (performance execution time is 9 seconds) is determined by the current preview type lottery, a decorative pattern performance with a long stop action is determined as the decorative pattern performance, if the step-up performance B (performance execution time is 10 seconds) is determined, a decorative pattern performance with a middle stop action is determined as the decorative pattern performance, and if the step-up performance A (performance execution time is 12 seconds) is determined, a decorative pattern performance with a short stop action is determined as the decorative pattern performance. This realizes the decorative pattern performance shown in Figures 45 to 46. For example, if the current fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation of 13s, a decorative pattern presentation like that shown in Figure 45 will be realized.

Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the provisional stop symbol and the left, middle, and right symbols (combinations of decorative symbol stop symbols) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery based on the performance scenario and symbol information. For example, if the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated by reach performance and the winning type information is a 10R probability variable big win, the left symbol is first determined by lottery in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to the big win, and then the decorative symbol that can form a reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and based on the determined left and right symbols, the middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol row related to the 10R probability variable big win is finally stopped. Also, if the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern (for example, normal variation 13s), the combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped is determined so that a losing eye is stopped and displayed. This determines the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol change display game is completed, and determines a series of during-change effects (preview effect scenario, decorative symbol effect scenario (effect scenario related to the change pattern of the decorative symbols)) to be executed during the current symbol change. Then, scenario data related to the determined during-change effects is set (step S2305).

Next, the continuous preview performance management process is executed (step S2306). Here, performance processing related to the during-change pre-reading preview is executed. For example, the continuous preview counter is decremented by the execution of the current game, and a preview image related to the during-change pre-reading preview is displayed, and other performance processing required for the execution of the during-change pre-reading preview is executed.

After completing the continuous preview performance management process in step S2306, various setting processes at the start of the decorative pattern change (step S2307) are performed, and the decorative pattern designation command reception process is terminated. After this, the decorative pattern change display game based on the above performance scenario will start.

[Third embodiment]
In the above first and second embodiments, the embodiment in which "support time reduction" is provided has been mainly described. In the third embodiment described below, an embodiment in which a "ceiling function" that provides a predetermined profit state as a relief function when a player is stuck (ceiling function-equipped type) will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are used for components (including processes) that are substantially the same as those in the first or second embodiment. Also, the description of the components that are substantially the same as those in the first or second embodiment will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

(About the ceiling function)
In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "ceiling function" will first be explained.

In conventional gaming machines, the transition to the time-saving state or the probability change state was limited to when a jackpot was won, and the game tended to become monotonous. In particular, if a player encounters a major slump before winning the jackpot (for example, not winning the jackpot even after playing more than twice the number of times the jackpot probability denominator), this significantly reduces the player's motivation to play. Therefore, a gaming machine that can transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player from a trigger other than the jackpot winning trigger is desired. Therefore, in this embodiment, a gaming machine is provided that has a "ceiling function" that grants a predetermined profit state as a rescue function when a player is stuck. This makes it possible to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player from a trigger other than the jackpot winning trigger, and prevents a significant decline in the player's motivation to play even if the player is stuck.

The "ceiling function" is a function for rescuing players from a stuck game by granting a predetermined profit state (ceiling bonus) when a predetermined number of fluctuations (predetermined number of games, hereafter also referred to as the "ceiling game number") is reached without winning a jackpot, in other words, when a predetermined number of games have been played without winning a jackpot. In this respect, it differs in nature from the support time-saving function, in which a profit is awarded through a lottery. From the perspective of a function for rescuing players from a stuck game, the ceiling bonus is, of course, at least a profit state that is more favorable than the normal state.

As mentioned above, the ceiling function has a strong connotation of a function to rescue players from a losing streak, so it is preferable to activate (occur) when a predetermined number of games have been played (when the ceiling number of games has been reached) without winning at least a jackpot during a game state (time-saving state (time-saving mode) and normal state (normal mode), preferably during a normal state (normal mode)) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low, rather than during a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high, such as a high probability state or a potential high probability state. The meaning of "at least without winning a jackpot" as mentioned above includes "without winning a jackpot", as well as "without winning a jackpot and a support time-saving", "without winning a jackpot and a small jackpot", "without winning a jackpot, a support time-saving, and a small jackpot", etc. The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a gaming machine with a ceiling function without a support time-saving function, or a gaming machine with a support time-saving function and a ceiling function (details on the types of gaming machines will be explained later in "(931. Types of gaming machines with a ceiling function)").

(About the ceiling bonus)
The types of the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege" will be explained. As shown in the list of "Examples of Ceiling Privileges" in Note 2 of FIG. 49B, the types of ceiling privileges include, for example, "infinite time reduction", "limited time reduction", "infinite probability change", "limited probability change", "infinite potential probability", "limited potential probability", and "forced hit". If these privileges are roughly categorized, "infinite time reduction" and "limited time reduction" are ceiling privileges belonging to the "ceiling time reduction type", "infinite probability change" and "limited probability change" are ceiling probability change types, "infinite potential probability" and "limited potential probability" are ceiling privileges belonging to the "ceiling hit type". Below, these ceiling privilege types will be explained one by one.

(Infinite time saving)
(A) "Infinite time-saving" is a privilege that provides a time-saving state until the next big win. In the case of infinite time-saving, the number of times of time-saving is "unlimited (infinite)", but the number of times of time-saving is finite, but the number of times of time-saving that will be until the next big win, for example, 10,000 times or 65,535 times, etc., due to the probability of winning the lottery, when the possibility of the time-saving state ending due to the number of times of time-saving is reached is zero (when it is acceptable to consider it as 0%), or when the number of times of time-saving that cannot be consumed within the business hours of the pachinko parlor is provided (for example, 5,000 times, etc.), can be treated as belonging to infinite time-saving in the present invention. The same applies to "infinite time-saving (infinite number of times of time-saving)" related to the support time-saving.

(Limited time reduction)
(B) "Limited time reduction" refers to a state in which the time reduction state is granted up to a certain number of times so as to obtain an appropriate jackpot winning rate. In this respect, it is different from the aforementioned infinite time reduction, which has no limit. The number of time reductions granted is, for example, 100 times, the same as the time reduction jackpot (4R time reduction jackpot), but it is not limited to granting the same number of time reductions as the time reduction jackpot, and may be a different number of time reductions. For example, if the number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is M times (for example, 100 times for the 4R time reduction jackpot) and the number of finite time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is N times, it is possible to grant the number of times that satisfy "time reduction number N < time reduction number M" (M = 100 times, N = 50 times or 75 times, etc.) or "time reduction number N > time reduction number M" (M = 100 times, N = 200 times, 400 times, etc.). The same can be applied to the number of time reductions related to the support time reduction. In addition, in the above-mentioned "infinite time reduction," when the number of times time reduction is granted that is "effectively until the next jackpot" is reached, it can be said to belong to this finite time reduction in that there is a limit to the number of times it can be used, but as mentioned above, in the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time reduction.

(Examples of cases where limited working hours are granted)
Here, when a limited time-saving feature is provided by a ceiling benefit, the following types of benefit (1) to (5) can be used. Note that, although the explanation here focuses on the limited time-saving feature, this is not a concept that completely excludes the provision of an unlimited time-saving feature.

(Limited time-saving grant form 1)
(1) When there are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot (number of time-saving times granted due to a jackpot win (jackpot time-saving state)), the number of types of the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling privilege (limited time-saving) (ceiling time-saving state) is set to a smaller number (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B < number of types A". For example, when two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time-saving times A) and 50 times (time-saving times B) are set as the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot, it is configured to grant only one type of time-saving times due to the ceiling privilege (for example, 100 times (time-saving times A)). Note that, if the relationship of "number of types B < number of types A" is satisfied, a number of time-saving times different from the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot (for example, 150 times) may be granted. In addition, when there are two or more types of the number of time-saving times (time-saving states) by the ceiling privilege (when "2 ≦ number of types B < number of types A"), any one of the number of time-saving times (time-saving states) can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, the above-mentioned "number of types A" may be the number of types of the number of time-saving times (finite time-saving times) by the support time-saving. As an exception to this granting form, it may include infinite time-saving as long as it satisfies the relationship of "number of types B < number of types A". In addition, the relationship between the number of time-saving times by the jackpot and the number of time-saving times by the ceiling privilege in this granting form can be applied as the relationship between the number of time-saving times by the jackpot and the number of time-saving times by the support time-saving by appropriately replacing the part "number of time-saving times by the ceiling privilege" with "number of time-saving times by the support time-saving" (the same applies to the finite time-saving granting forms 3 to 5 described later).

(Limited time-saving grant form 2)
(2) If there are multiple types of the number of times time is reduced by the ceiling bonus (ceiling time-reduction state), one of the types of the number of times time is reduced (ceiling time-reduction state) can be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling bonus lottery).
In the case where there are multiple types of time-saving times due to a jackpot, for example, when there are 50 times of time-saving times and 100 times of time-saving times, the same number of time-saving times as the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot (50 times and 100 times) can be selected in the ceiling bonus lottery. In this case, the same number of time-saving times as the jackpot can be awarded as the ceiling bonus. Of course, multiple times of time-saving times (for example, 100 times, 75 times, and 25 times) including times of time-saving times different from the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot may be selected in the ceiling bonus lottery. In this case, since a different number of time-saving times than the jackpot is awarded, an excessive ceiling bonus is not awarded.
Of course, the number of time-saving times to be selected for the lottery can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics (I-49), and can include, for example, 100 times, 200 times, infinite time-saving times, or more times than the existing time-saving jackpot, or even infinite time-saving times as an exception. In addition, the ceiling bonus lottery can be provided with a "miss" that does not award the ceiling bonus. When a miss is provided, it is suitable for ceiling bonuses that include infinite time-saving times or a high number of time-saving times (for example, 1000 times), in order to reduce the ceiling bonus award rate and not award excessive ceiling bonuses.

This type of ceiling bonus lottery function can improve gameplay by not awarding a fixed ceiling bonus each time the ceiling is reached.

The probability of selection (selection rate) of the ceiling bonus type (here, multiple times of time reduction) that is the subject of the ceiling bonus lottery may be the same or approximately the same, or may be different in whole or in part. The lottery may also include a "ceiling bonus miss" that does not grant a ceiling bonus. When a ceiling bonus miss is included, the ceiling bonus is not necessarily granted even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, the "execution of the ceiling bonus lottery (right to execute)" serves as a function to rescue players from getting stuck.

In addition, a lottery probability according to the "setting value" may be set, and the number of time-saving times (time-saving state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling bonus lottery according to the setting value). For example, the higher the setting value, the more likely it is that a relatively large number of time-saving times (time-saving state) will be selected. In other words, the higher the setting value, the more likely it is that a bonus with a relatively high degree of profit will be granted (the same applies to other ceiling bonuses described below). Specifically, if "100 times, 75 times, and 50 times" are set as the types of time-saving times, the lottery probability for these is "25%, 35%, and 40%" for "setting 1", and "45%, 30%, and 25%" for "setting 6". However, on the other hand, considering that the lower the setting value, the more likely it is that a player will get addicted, the lower the setting value, the more likely it is that a relatively large number of time-saving times will be selected. In other words, the lower the setting value, the more likely it is that a bonus with a relatively high degree of profit will be granted (the same applies to other ceiling bonuses described below). It may also be configured such that "when a specific ceiling bonus is awarded, a specific setting value is determined." For example, when 25 time-saving times are awarded, "setting 6 is determined," and when 75 time-saving times are awarded, "setting 4 or higher is determined." In this way, a ceiling bonus determination method related to a setting value can provide the player with useful information, that is, a setting prediction element, and is therefore useful in increasing the motivation of players who are stuck in a rut.

(Limited time-saving grant form 3)
(3) If the average number of times time is reduced due to a jackpot is N and the average number of times time is reduced due to a ceiling bonus is M, the system can be configured to satisfy the relationships shown in (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) below.
(Formula 1) The relationship of "average number of time-saving times N < average number of time-saving times M" is satisfied. For example, if the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot is 100 times and 75 times, the average number of time-saving times N is 75 times, so the average number of time-saving times M due to the ceiling bonus is set to a number of time-saving times greater than this. In this example, the ceiling bonus has a relatively higher profitability than a normal jackpot win, so it is a welcome bonus for players who are stuck and have lost interest in playing. The average number of time-saving times M may be set to an infinite number. Setting the average number of time-saving times M to an infinite number is equivalent to granting the above-mentioned "infinite time-saving".
The relationship of "average time-saving number N = average time-saving number M" (Formula 2) is satisfied. In this case, the profit degree from the jackpot (time-saving number) and the profit degree from the ceiling privilege are equal.
(Formula 3) The relationship of "average number of time-saving times N>average number of time-saving times M" is satisfied. In this case, the profit degree due to the jackpot is relatively lower than the profit degree due to the ceiling privilege, so that excessive bonuses are not given. Note that the average number of time-saving times M due to the ceiling privilege can be read as the average number of time-saving times M due to the support time-saving, and the relationship between the average number of time-saving times N due to the jackpot and the average number of time-saving times M due to the support time-saving can be applied.

(Limited time-saving grant form 4)
(4) As with the above formula 3, with a focus on preventing excessive bonuses from being given, the formula can be configured to satisfy the following formula 4.
(Formula 4) It is configured to satisfy at least the relationship of "number of time-saving times due to ceiling privilege ≦ maximum number of time-saving times due to jackpot". For example, if the number of time-saving times due to jackpot is 100 times and 75 times, the maximum number of time-saving times is 100 times, so the number of time-saving times due to ceiling privilege is set to, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Also, focusing on the minimum number of time-saving times due to jackpot, the number of time-saving times may be set to satisfy the relationship of "minimum number of time-saving times due to jackpot ≦ number of time-saving times due to ceiling privilege < maximum number of time-saving times due to jackpot". For example, if the number of time-saving times due to jackpot is 100 times and 75 times, it can be set to the number of time-saving times that satisfies the relationship of "75 times ≦ number of time-saving times due to ceiling privilege < 100 times".

(Limited time-saving grant form 5)
Although there is no particular restriction on the number of times the finite time reduction is performed, it is preferable to set the number of times the finite time reduction is performed so as to satisfy the following relationship.
(Mankoku 9) If the number of times the finite time-saving feature is performed is "Z" and the denominator of the low probability jackpot probability (1/M) is "M," then it is determined so as to satisfy the following relationship (red 7).
"0.4M≦Z≦3.8M (can be set to 3.8M to 4.0M)" (Red 7)
In the case of formula (red 7), for example, if the maximum number of time-saving times is about four times the probability denominator M, the probability of winning a jackpot within that number of time-saving times is very high (the occurrence rate of non-winning is about 2%), and it can be said that this is an appropriate bonus for players who continue playing until the ceiling number of games. The value of M may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities of settings 1 to 6. It is preferably based on the jackpot lottery probabilities of the intermediate setting 3, and more preferably, the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6. For example, referring to FIG. 4, when the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, it is preferable to substitute "M = 200 (low probability: 1/200)" into the above (formula 5) and adopt the number of time-saving times that satisfies the relationship of "80 times ≦ Z ≦ 760 times". For example, when the probability of winning the lottery at the low probability of setting 6 is used as the standard, it is preferable to substitute "M = 180 (low probability: 1/180)" into the above (Equation 10) and adopt the number of time-saving times that satisfies the relationship of "72 times ≦ Z ≦ 684 times." The relationship of the above (Equation 5) can also be applied to the number of time-saving times related to the support time-saving.

(Infinite chance change)
(C) "Infinite probability" is a privilege that grants a probability state until the next big win. In the case of infinite probability, the number of times of ST is "unlimited (infinite)", but as in the same event as the above "infinite time reduction", the number of times of ST until the next big win (for example, 10,000 times or 65,536 times) may be granted.

(Limited chance)
(D) "Limited probability change" is different from the infinite probability change described above, and is a state in which a certain number of STs is limited so as to provide an appropriate probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, when the number of STs that are "effectively until the next jackpot" in the above "infinite probability change" is given, it can be said to belong to this finite probability change in that there is a limit to the number of times, but like the above "infinite time reduction", it may be treated as belonging to infinite probability change or as belonging to finite probability change (the same applies to the infinite potential probability described below).

(Example of when a limited probability change is applied)
Here, when a limited probability change is granted, the following ceiling privilege grant forms (limited probability change grant forms) 1 to 4 can be used, as in the same phenomenon as the contents explained in the limited time-saving grant forms 1 to 5 of the above "limited time-saving". Note that the following limited probability change grant forms 1 to 5 are substantially the same as the contents (concepts) explained in the above "limited time-saving grant forms 1 to 4" where the "time-saving count" is appropriately replaced with the "ST count" and the "time-saving state" is appropriately replaced with the "probable variable state", etc., and therefore for the sake of convenience, the contents will be omitted as appropriate in the explanation to avoid duplication.

(Limited probability change grant form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of ST counts due to a jackpot (the number of ST counts (probable bonus state) granted due to a jackpot win), but the number of ST counts (probable bonus state) due to the ceiling bonus is fewer types (number of types B). In other words, it is configured to satisfy the relationship "number of types B < number of types A".

In this embodiment, the number of ST times (probability change state) awarded as a result of winning a probability change jackpot is one type, an infinite number of times (65,535 times), so for ease of explanation, we will explain here that there is a probability change jackpot that awards three types of ST times (number of types B): 100 times (probability change A), 75 times (probability change B), and 25 times (probability change C). In this case, for example, the ceiling bonus is configured to award only one type of ST time, 100 times (probability change A).

(Limited probability change grant form 2)
(2) When there are multiple types of ST counts (high probability state) due to ceiling privilege, one of the ST counts (high probability state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery). In this respect, it is substantially the same as the content explained in "(Limited time-saving grant form 2)" in the above-mentioned limited time saving, except that "time-saving count" is appropriately read as "ST count" and "time-saving state" is appropriately read as "high probability state", etc.

(Limited probability change grant form 3)
(3) If the average number of STs due to the probability of a special jackpot is N and the average number of STs due to the ceiling bonus is M, the following relationships (Formula 4) to (Formula 6) can be satisfied. These (Formula 4) to (Formula 6) are essentially the same as those in (Formula 1) to (Formula 3) described in "(Limited time-saving grant form 3)" in the above-mentioned limited time-saving, with the wording "time-saving number of times" replaced with the wording "ST number of times".
(Formula 4) The relationship of "average ST number N < average ST number M" is satisfied. The average ST number M may be an infinite number. When the average ST number M is an infinite number, it is equivalent to the case where the above-mentioned "infinite probability change" is given.
It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N = average number of STs M" (Equation 5).
It is configured to satisfy the relationship of (Equation 6) "average number of STs N>average number of STs M".

(Limited probability change grant form 4)
(4) In order to avoid excessive bonuses, the number of STs is set to at least satisfy the relationship of "number of STs due to ceiling bonuses ≦ maximum number of STs due to big wins". For example, if there are three types of STs due to big wins, 100 times (probability A), 75 times (probability B), and 25 times (probability C), the maximum number of STs can be set to 100 times (probability A) or less, for example, 100 times, 90 times, etc. Also, in terms of the minimum number of STs, the number of STs may be set to satisfy the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to big wins ≦ number of STs due to ceiling bonuses < maximum number of STs due to big wins". For example, the number of time reductions is set to satisfy the relationship of "25 times ≦ number of STs due to ceiling bonuses < 100 times".

(Limited probability change grant form 5)
There is no particular restriction on the number of STs for the limited probability change, but it is preferable to determine the number of time-saving times to satisfy the following relationship.
(5) If the number of STs in the finite probability mode is "Y" and the denominator of the jackpot lottery probability (1/N) at high probability is "N", it is preferable to satisfy the relational expression "0.4N≦Y≦3.8N (can be 3.8N to 4.0N)". The value of N may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities of settings 1 to 6. It is preferable to use the jackpot lottery probability of the intermediate setting 3, and more preferably the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6 as the basis.

(Infinite Latency)
(E) "Infinite Potential" is a privilege that grants a potential status until the next big win. In the case of infinite potential, the number of STs is "unlimited (infinite)", but the number of STs until the next big win may be granted in the same manner as the infinite time reduction and infinite probability change.

(Limited Potential)
(F) "Limited potential probability" is different from the infinite potential probability described above, and is a state in which the potential probability state is granted up to a certain number of STs so as to provide an appropriate winning rate. In this embodiment, there is no potential probability jackpot that triggers a transition to the potential probability state, but if some of the potential probability jackpots are potential probability jackpots, the same configuration (configuration regarding the granting of the number of STs) as the limited potential probability granting forms 1 to 4 described in the limited potential probability state can be used. In this respect, since the content is substantially the same as the limited potential probability state (content in which the wording "probability probability state" is appropriately replaced with the wording "potential probability state"), detailed description will be omitted to avoid duplication.

(Forced hit)
(G) "Forced Win" refers to a forced jackpot win, regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Independent of the jackpot lottery" means that the jackpot lottery itself is not executed, or even if the jackpot lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and is not limited to the meaning that the jackpot lottery is completely unrelated. The jackpot may be a sure-win jackpot or a time-limited jackpot.

The ceiling bonus explained above can provide a profit equal to or different from the profit provided by the jackpot lottery result, making it useful as a relief feature for players who are stuck.

After the ceiling bonus is granted, the game state related to the ceiling bonus (game mode related to the ceiling bonus) is controlled until the ceiling bonus is consumed or at least until a jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite bonus" such as a finite time reduction, finite probability change, or finite potential bonus, the bonus state ends when the specified number of time reductions or ST times is completed without at least winning a jackpot, or when at least a jackpot is won, and the ceiling bonus is not granted again until the ceiling activation trigger (ceiling game) arrives. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite bonus" such as an infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite potential bonus, the bonus state continues until the next jackpot, and at least when a jackpot is won, the bonus state ends.

(931. Types of gaming machines with ceiling functions)
Details will be explained later, but gaming machines with a ceiling function (types equipped with a ceiling function) can be broadly categorized into "thoroughbred type (types belonging to Tenki A and Tenki B below)" which have a ceiling function but no support time reduction, and "hybrid type (types belonging to Tenki C and Tenki D below)" which have both a ceiling function and support time reduction.
(Tenki A) A "ceiling activation at the start of the game" type in which the ceiling function is activated when the ceiling game begins (when the display of changing patterns begins) (ceiling activation at the start of the game + no support type).
(Tenki B) A type that activates the ceiling function when the ceiling game ends (when the variable time has elapsed, or the fixed display time has elapsed, or a specified timing during the end of the fixed display time period) (type that activates the ceiling when the game ends + does not have support).
(Tenki C) A type of Tenki A with support time reduction (ceiling activated at the start of the game + support time reduction type).
(Tenki D) A type of Tenki B that has support time reduction (ceiling activated at the end of the game + support time reduction type).
The above-mentioned "Tenki C" and "Tenki D" are of two types: when the support time-saving feature is won in the ceiling game, that is, when the conditions for activating the ceiling function and the conditions for activating the support time-saving state are overlappingly established, there are "a type which prioritizes the ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits) (Tenki C1, Tenki D1: ceiling priority activation type)" and "a type which prioritizes the support time-saving state (granting of the support time-saving state by winning the support time-saving feature) (Tenki C2, Tenki D2: support time-saving priority activation type)."

Therefore, in the ceiling priority activation type, the ceiling time-saving state is controlled regardless of whether the support time-saving is won or not won in the ceiling game. In the support time-saving priority activation type, if the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the support time-saving state is controlled, and if it is not won, the ceiling time-saving state is controlled. In both the ceiling priority activation type and the support time-saving priority activation type, if a jackpot is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling game ends, and the game is controlled to an advantageous state based on the jackpot (in this embodiment, a time-saving state or a special state) via a jackpot game. In the present invention, either type can be adopted, but in this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, it will be described as a "ceiling priority activation type". In addition, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times during the jackpot time-saving state is given up to a maximum of 100 times (time-saving times < ceiling game number), so unless otherwise specified, the ceiling game is not reached during the jackpot time-saving state (the event of reaching the ceiling does not occur during the jackpot time-saving state).

Hereinafter, for ease of explanation, the above-mentioned Tenki A to Tenki D2 may be referred to as follows.
(1) The type of Tenki A is "non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game"
(2) The type of Tenki B is "non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game"
(3) The type of Tenki C is "equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game"
(3α) The type of Tenki C1 is "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game"
(3β) The type of Tenki C2 is "equipped with non-priority activation support at the start of the game"
(4) The type of Tenki D is "equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game"
(4α) The type of Tenki D1 is "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game"
(4β) The type of Tenki D2 has been changed to "end of game non-priority ceiling activation support type"
(5) The above types of "Tenki A, Tenki C, Tenki C1, and Tenki C2" that activate the ceiling function at the start of the ceiling game are collectively referred to as "game start ceiling activation type."
(6) The above types of "Tenki B, Tenki D, Tenki D1, and Tenki D2" that activate the ceiling function when the ceiling game ends are collectively called "end-of-game ceiling activation type."

(Regarding the ceiling number of games)
Next, the ceiling game number (the number of games that trigger the ceiling) will be described. The ceiling game number according to this embodiment is set to at least 1000 games stuck during a game state accompanied by a low probability state. This "1000 games stuck during a game state accompanied by a low probability state" includes, for example, two cases: (1) a case where the ceiling game (1000th game) is reached without winning a jackpot during a normal state (which may be a game mode belonging to the normal mode), and (2) a case where the ceiling game (1000th game) is reached without winning a jackpot throughout the normal state and the time-saving state (which may be a game mode belonging to the normal mode and a game mode belonging to the time-saving mode), but either case may be adopted. In the former case (1), the "number of games executed during the normal state" is the target of the count of the ceiling game number, and in the latter case (2), the normal state and the time-saving state are the targets of the count of the ceiling game number. In this embodiment, in order to make it easier to understand the present invention, an example in which the former case (1) is adopted will be mainly described. The latter (2) will be described later (see the low probability game count form (award form (β)) described later).

The value at which the ceiling number of games is set can be determined as appropriate, but it is preferable to set the number of games so as to satisfy the relationship below.
(Mankoku 8-1) If the ceiling number of games is "H" and the denominator of the jackpot probability (1/M) at low probability is "M," it is preferable to satisfy the following relationship (Equation 10).
"2.5M≦H≦3.0M" ... (Equation 10)
The reason for this is that if the ceiling game number is within the probability denominator of 2.5 to 3 times, the probability of getting addicted is about 8% to 5%, and firstly, many players can win a jackpot before reaching the ceiling game number, and secondly, it is to prevent players from playing games blindly aiming for the ceiling game number (to prevent gambling). The value of M may be based on any of the jackpot lottery probabilities of settings 1 to 6. It is preferably based on the jackpot lottery probability of the intermediate setting 3, and more preferably, the lowest setting 1 or the highest setting 6 (I-45). For example, referring to FIG. 4, if the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, it is preferable to substitute "M = 200 (low probability: 1/200)" into the above (Equation 10) and adopt the ceiling game number that satisfies the relationship of "500 times ≦ H ≦ 600 times". Also, for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot at the low probability of setting 6 is used as the basis, it is preferable to substitute "M = 180 (low probability: 1/180)" into the above (Equation 10) and adopt the ceiling number of games that satisfies the relationship "450 times ≦ H ≦ 540 times".
(Manseki 8-2) In this embodiment, the ceiling game number is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different for all or part of each setting value. For example, the ceiling game number can be different for each of settings 1 to 6 (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the lower the ceiling game number), the ceiling game number can be 1000 games in the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) and 1032 games in the medium and low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) (the ceiling game number is common for some of the setting values), or only a specific setting value (for example, setting 1, the lowest setting, or setting 6, the highest setting) can have a ceiling game number different from the other setting values (for example, "1000 games for setting 1 only, 1032 games for the others" or "1032 games for setting 6 only, 1032 games for the others"). In this way, when the ceiling game number is determined according to the setting value, it becomes possible to give the player a setting guessing element based on the ceiling game number. If a player gets stuck until the ceiling is reached, he/she becomes disheartened and his/her interest in the game decreases, but by providing a setting guessing element in addition to the ceiling bonus as a benefit for reaching the ceiling (double bonus), it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.
(Mankoku 8-3) Even if the ceiling game number is made different depending on the set value as in (Mankoku 8-2) above, the same game value can be awarded for the ceiling bonus regardless of the set value. For example, the ceiling game number differs depending on the set value, but the ceiling time reduction is set to 1000 times regardless of the set value.

(Regarding game mode and variable pattern allocation designation number Tcode (variable pattern selection mode): FIG. 76)
In the case of this embodiment, since a ceiling function is provided, unlike the first embodiment, a game mode and a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be provided as shown in Fig. 76. Note that the types with a ceiling function include the above-mentioned Tenki A, Tenki B, Tenki C (Tenki C1, C2), and Tenki D (Tenki D1, D2), and it is sufficient to provide a game mode and a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) according to each type as appropriate.

The details will be described later with reference to Figures 49A and 49B, but the "normal mode" and "omen mode" are game modes belonging to the normal mode, and the "normal mode" is a game mode equivalent to the "normal mode" in the first embodiment, and the "omen mode" is positioned as a special game mode when the ceiling function is provided. In addition, the special game modes when the ceiling function is provided include the "ceiling mode" and the "heaven mode". The "ceiling mode" is a game mode that occurs in the ceiling game (1000th spin), and includes the ceiling mode α and the ceiling mode β. The ceiling mode α is a game mode that occurs when the ceiling game starts, and the ceiling mode β is a game mode that occurs when the ceiling game starts. The "heaven mode" is a game mode that is mainly related to the ceiling privilege. For the "probability mode 1-3" and the "time-saving mode 1-3", the substantially same game modes as those in the first embodiment can be adopted.

With regard to the variation pattern allocation table for each of the above game modes, FIG. 72 shows the "Win/Support Time-saving Winning Variation Pattern Allocation Table (for General, Premonition)" which is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving win occurs during the general mode or premonition mode, and FIG. 73 shows the "Win/Support Time-saving Winning Variation Pattern Allocation Table (for Ceiling, Heaven)" which is referred to when a jackpot or support time-saving win occurs during the ceiling mode or heaven mode. Also, FIG. 74 shows the "Miss Variation Pattern Allocation Table (for General)" which is referred to when a miss occurs during the general mode. This "Miss Variation Pattern Allocation Table (for General)" shown in FIG. 74 has substantially the same table configuration as the "Miss Variation Pattern Allocation Table during Normal" shown in FIG. 33 of the first embodiment. Also, FIG. 75 shows the "Miss Variation Pattern Allocation Table (for Premonition, Ceiling, Heaven Time-saving)" which is referred to when a miss occurs during the premonition mode, ceiling mode, or heaven mode.

<30. Game mode transition form: Fig. 49A, Fig. 49B>
Next, referring to Figure 49A and Figure 49B, the contents of the "game mode" related to the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) for the gaming machine with the ceiling function, the transition control between each game mode (between each game state), and the presentation mode related to the game mode will be described. Figure 49A and Figure 49B are game flows showing an outline of each game mode and the presentation mode related thereto.

For ease of explanation of the various game modes, Figures 49A and 49B show the game flow for the above-mentioned "hybrid type (type belonging to Tenki C or Tenki D)" game machine as the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. Note that the high probability mode and time-saving mode are the same as those in the first embodiment, so details about these are omitted to avoid duplication.

As shown in the figure, game modes are broadly divided into "normal mode," "ceiling mode," "heaven mode," "time-saving mode," and "chance mode," and the progress of the game is controlled under these game modes. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous hitting method according to the game state, and unless otherwise specified, it is explained that when left-handed hits are advantageous (normal state), "pattern change display game 1 on the special chart 1 side" is executed, and when right-handed hits are advantageous (chance state, time-saving state), "pattern change display game 2 on the special chart 2 side" is executed.

(30-1. About "Normal Mode")
The normal mode is a game mode associated with the internal game state being normal (YJ=00H), and this normal mode is the initial game mode to which the game is transitioned when the RAM within the area is cleared, for example, by a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation.

The normal mode in this embodiment includes a "normal mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "00H" and a "premonition mode" with a variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) of "08H". Basically, a transition from normal mode to another game mode (high probability mode or time-saving mode) can be made when a jackpot or time-saving support win is won, or when a ceiling bonus is awarded upon reaching the ceiling.

(30-1A. About General Mode)
During the "normal mode", the game remains in the "normal performance mode (air combat mode: FIG. 7B (b) (c))" which provides performances related to the normal mode (normal mode). This is the same as in the first embodiment.

(30-1A-1. Special effects during normal mode)
(I-51) During normal mode, especially during general mode, it is possible to execute an information notice regarding the existence of a "ceiling function". This "information notice" is a special effect that does not belong to either the notice effect that notifies the winning expectation rate or the setting suggestion effect, and in short, it is a performance mode that notifies information regarding the specification explanation of the gaming machine. Therefore, the performance content of the information notice is the content that informs the player that the gaming machine is equipped with a ceiling function (rescue function) for beginners and players who have never played before, and for example, the information notice notifies the player that the ceiling function is installed, information on the number of games until the ceiling is reached (ceiling game number), information on the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached (remaining ceiling game number), etc. Note that the information notice can be made to appear as a part of the winning performance related to the big win game, made to appear during the customer waiting waiting period (at least a part of the customer waiting performance and the customer waiting performance), made to appear on the game setting screen, or made to appear as a performance during the pattern change display game. In any case, the information notice may be displayed at any appropriate time, but since it is not a device that indicates the probability of winning or suggests settings, it is preferable to display it during periods other than during game play (such as while waiting for customers, or while the game setting screen is displayed).

(30-1B. Premonition Mode)
The "premonition mode" is a game mode that is switched to when the ceiling game is about to be reached. Specifically, it is provided as a game mode for executing a "premonition effect" that notifies that the ceiling is about to be reached. In this embodiment, the mode is switched to when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached during the general mode without winning at least a jackpot. Specifically, when 989 games are played in the general mode, the mode is switched to the premonition mode from the 990th game (see the block frame of the "normal mode" in FIG. 49A and the block frame (α) of the "premonition mode" in FIG. 49B).

(30-1B-1. About the effects during premonition mode)
During the premonition mode, the mode is switched to a "premonition mode" which performs effects (premonition effects) related to the premonition mode. During the premonition mode, a background image different from that of the normal presentation mode related to the normal mode is displayed (for example, a "daytime background image (background image for normal mode)" with the sun shining in the normal presentation mode is displayed to a "nighttime background image (background image for premonition mode)" with the stars shining), to notify the player that the premonition mode is in progress. In the present embodiment, the normal presentation mode and the premonition mode are different only in the background image color, and basically, the effects related to the "air combat mode" shown in Fig. 7B (b) (c) are displayed.

In addition, during the premonition mode, a "remaining ceiling number notification effect" that can notify the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached (remaining ceiling number of games) can be executed. The remaining ceiling number notification effect can be executed, for example, by "countdown display" or the like to display information about the remaining number of games (see the block frame (δ) of the premonition mode in FIG. 49B). Note that the remaining ceiling number notification effect may be an effect form that can notify information about the imminent reaching of the ceiling, such as "preparing for the ceiling...", instead of displaying the remaining number of games until the ceiling is reached. This remaining ceiling number notification effect can be made to appear during at least a part of the period during the general mode or premonition mode, but it is preferable to start the remaining ceiling number notification effect (starting the countdown display) from the 996th game, which is close to the ceiling, for example. Specifically, taking into account the maximum number of reserved memories being four, a countdown display (for example, suggesting a count of zero at the ceiling game) can be performed between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 and 1000 games including the ceiling game. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a presentation benefit in that if there are active reserved balls, the player can prevent wasting shots until the ceiling is reached. Of course, instead of starting the remaining ceiling number notification presentation when the player is close to the ceiling, it can start, for example, when a new ceiling number of games is counted (for example, after a jackpot game or after the RAM is cleared) or at a specified timing during general mode (for example, when the remaining ceiling number of games reaches 500 or 100).

In addition, during the premonition mode, a reserve display mode (reserve icon) different from that in the normal mode is displayed. For example, during the normal mode, the reserve display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. 5, but during the premonition mode, a dedicated reserve display mode based on a "character icon" is displayed (see the block frame (ε) of the premonition mode in FIG. 49B, and FIG. 50 described below). In addition, during the normal mode, one or more reserve displays that exist immediately before the transition to the premonition mode (the 989th game) may be changed to a dedicated reserve display (character icon) all at once after the transition to the premonition mode (the 990th game), or only the reserve displays to be consumed during the premonition mode may be changed to a dedicated reserve display. To explain the latter configuration in detail, for example, in the case where there are three active reserved balls during the execution of 988 games, the reserved display for the 989th to 991st games can be "'round icon (reserved to be consumed in normal mode: 989th game)', "character icon (reserved to be consumed in premonition mode: 990th game)', and "character icon (reserved to be consumed in premonition mode: 991st game)". In addition, from the start of the premonition performance mode until a predetermined number of games are consumed, the reserved display (round icon) may be the same as that in the normal performance mode, and when the ceiling is about to be reached (for example, between 996 and 999 games, taking into account the maximum number of reserved memories of 4), it may be switched to a reserved display (character icon) dedicated to premonitions. In addition, during the premonition performance mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling count notification display" and/or "reserved display dedicated to premonitions" may be displayed.

(Regarding fluctuation patterns related to precursor modes)
Focusing on the "premonition mode (column "premonition")" of the failure fluctuation pattern allocation table shown in FIG. 75, in this embodiment, the premonition mode is set to be the fastest fluctuation state (the game mode with the fastest average consumption time during the normal mode) in which the fluctuation state is the fastest. This is in consideration of the player's state of mind. It is considered that many players feel strongly that "I want to reach the ceiling as soon as I've come this far" and "I want to get the ceiling privilege quickly" when they are close to the ceiling. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average consumption time during the premonition mode is made faster. Also, in this embodiment, when a big win is won during the premonition mode, as shown in FIG. 72, the common win fluctuation pattern allocation tables FB1 to FB6 are used with the general mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a win fluctuation pattern allocation table dedicated to the premonition mode may be provided. For example, a "premonition win fluctuation" can be provided as a win fluctuation dedicated to the premonition mode (see Note 4 "premonition win fluctuation" in FIG. 72).

The ceiling game number (remaining ceiling game number) is monitored by a "ceiling counter" whose functional part is the main control unit 20. Based on the value of this ceiling counter, it is possible to control the transition to the premonition mode and the corresponding presentation mode.

(Variation: Configuration without Premonition Mode)
(Wish 1) In the present embodiment, the premonition mode and the general mode are described as different game modes with different variation pattern selection modes (Tcode), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the premonition mode may be treated as a game mode belonging to the general mode. In short, the premonition mode may not be provided.

In detail, the variation pattern selection mode is a common variation pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H) for the premonition mode and the general mode, but the presentation mode is a different presentation mode. In the case of a configuration without a premonition mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is common to the general mode (Tcode = 00H), so the premonition variation pattern allocation table cannot be selected, and the above-mentioned "variation pattern dedicated to the premonition mode" cannot be selected. However, the presentation control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining ceiling game number (ceiling counter information) by the "ceiling number command" described later sent from the main control unit 20 side, and therefore it is possible to change the presentation mode or to make different presentations appear depending on the remaining game number. Therefore, even if a premonition mode is not provided, when the number of executed games in the general mode reaches a predetermined number, different background presentations and the above-mentioned remaining ceiling number notification presentation can be executed, and it is considered that there is no particular problem. In addition, in this example, a fluctuation pattern allocation table dedicated to the premonition mode is not required, which has the advantage of reducing the control burden. In particular, in a configuration in which the conditions for changing (updating) the fluctuation pattern selection mode are the end of a jackpot game, the number of games played after a jackpot game, or a transition in the internal game state, the fluctuation pattern selection mode cannot be changed after the RAM is cleared (when the RAM clear process within the area (step S031 in FIG. 8) is executed), unless a jackpot is won. In such a configuration, the "configuration without a premonition mode" of this example is preferable.

(30-2. About Ceiling Mode)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 49B. In this embodiment, as already described, a "ceiling function" is provided as a rescue function in the case of a major losing streak. The ceiling game number in this embodiment is the 1000th losing streak game in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs at the 1000th game (1000th spin), and is a game mode for one game only (one spin only).

The ceiling mode can be a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the ceiling privilege and its activation form (ceiling activation at the start of the game or ceiling activation at the end of the game), but here, the ceiling privilege will be described as a typical time-saving state that grants a predetermined number of time-saving times (finite time-saving of 1000 times). Hereinafter, the ceiling privilege according to this embodiment will also be referred to as the "ceiling time-saving".

(Regarding the timing of the ceiling bonus activation)
"Ceiling activation type at the start of the game" and "Ceiling activation type at the end of the game"
Here, there are two types of ceiling function-equipped machines, which differ in the timing at which the ceiling bonus (ceiling time reduction) is activated when the ceiling game is reached.
The first type is the "start-of-game ceiling activation type (Tenki A, Tenki C, Tenki C1, and Tenki C2 above)" which activates the ceiling function when the ceiling game starts.
The second type is the "end of game ceiling activation type (Tenki B, Tenki D, Tenki D1, Tenki D2 above)" which activates the ceiling function when the ceiling game ends. The type to be adopted can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

When the former "start-of-game ceiling activation type" is adopted, the ceiling time-saving feature is granted at the start of the ceiling game, so the ceiling mode (during the ceiling game) becomes a game mode (ceiling mode α) related to the time-saving state (YJ = 02H). On the other hand, when the latter end-of-game ceiling activation type is adopted, the ceiling time-saving feature is granted at the end of the ceiling game, so the ceiling mode (during the ceiling game) becomes a game mode (ceiling mode β) related to the normal state (YJ = 00H). In either case, when the ceiling game is reached, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "09H" to select a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the ceiling, and the game mode itself is switched to the "ceiling mode" (see Note 3 in Figure 49B and ceiling mode α and ceiling mode β in the Tcode column in Figure 76).

(Special ceiling mode configuration)
However, for the above-mentioned "game end ceiling activation type", taking into consideration that the ceiling time-saving state may occur at the end of the ceiling game and that there are many cases where an operating reserved ball exists at the end of the ceiling game, it is preferable to make the next game (1001st spin) of the ceiling game function like the above-mentioned "ceiling mode". In this case, the ceiling game (ceiling function activation trigger game) itself is the same as the 1000th game, but in the case of the game end ceiling activation type, the ceiling time-saving state has not yet occurred during the ceiling game (1000th game), and the internal state is normal, so the 1000th game's game mode is set to a game mode belonging to the normal mode (general mode or premonition mode), and the next game (1001st game) of the ceiling game functions as the function of the ceiling mode, that is, as a game mode for notifying the ceiling activation and a presentation mode related thereto (functioning as a ceiling mode and ceiling presentation mode for one game only). In other words, the game following the ceiling game (the 1001st game) functions as a "pseudo ceiling mode" (see, for example, Figures 88 to 93 described later). A form having such a ceiling mode is also called a "special ceiling mode form."

In the case of the special ceiling mode form, the game mode of the game following the ceiling game does not necessarily have to be the "ceiling mode". In other words, after the ceiling game in the normal mode ends, the game may be moved directly to the heaven mode without going through the ceiling mode. Then, at the first rotation of the heaven mode, that is, the 1001st rotation, a notification effect (for example, a ceiling entry notification effect) regarding the activation of the ceiling (entering the ceiling) is executed. In this case, it can be said that it is preferable in terms of reducing the control burden and the performance, since the role of the ceiling mode and the ceiling performance mode can be exerted in the heaven mode of the game following the ceiling game (1001st rotation) without providing a ceiling mode. In particular, when the change condition of the variation pattern selection mode is the number of games executed after a jackpot game or the transition of the internal game state, the variation pattern selection mode cannot be changed after the RAM is cleared unless a jackpot is won. In other words, in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, a problem may occur in that it is not possible to move from the general mode to the premonition mode or to the ceiling mode when the ceiling is reached (1000th game) unless a jackpot is won after the RAM is cleared. In such cases, the "special ceiling mode" configuration in this example is suitable.

In addition, the above-mentioned "special ceiling mode form" can be the following game mode transition form (Bird 1) or (Bird 2).
(Bird 1) "Normal mode (normal state) → Premonition mode (normal state) → Reach the ceiling (normal state), activate the ceiling (activate the ceiling time-saving function) → Heaven mode (ceiling time-saving function)" (case where a premonition mode is provided)
(Bird 2) "Normal mode (normal state) → Reaching the ceiling (normal state), activating the ceiling (activating the ceiling time-saving function) → Heaven mode (the ceiling time-saving function)" (case where no premonition mode is provided)

Note that in the "game end ceiling activation type," if the ceiling function is activated not when the fixed display time elapses but when the variable time elapses, the time-saving state occurs before the fixed display time elapses. Therefore, strictly speaking, the time-saving state occurs before the fixed display time elapses and the ceiling game is completed (in the middle of the ceiling game), but in this embodiment, it is treated as belonging to the above-mentioned "game end ceiling activation type."

(I-87) The above-mentioned "game end ceiling activation type" is similar to the "non-operating special electric support time-saving" in that the time-saving state (ceiling time-saving state) occurs at the end of the current game (ceiling game), and the time-saving state occurs at the end of the winning game. On the other hand, the game start ceiling activation type is significantly different from the game end ceiling activation type and the non-operating special electric support time-saving in that the time-saving state occurs at the start of the current game (ceiling game). Therefore, the appropriate execution timing of the time-saving entry notification performance that notifies the player that the time-saving state has been entered is as follows.
(1) The "non-operating special signal support time reduction" is executed at the end of the game (at the time when the pattern stops and is displayed).
(2) The "special electric activation type support time-saving" is executed at the end of the game (at the timing when the symbols stop and are displayed, or at a predetermined timing during the period from the start to the end of the support time-saving opening/closing game. Preferably, it is executed at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game).
(3) The "ceiling activation type at the end of the game" is executed at the end of the game (at the time when the symbols stop display).
(4) The "game start ceiling activation type" is executed at the start of the game.
It becomes.

(I-89) Also, the appropriate timing for executing the right-hit instruction performance is as follows:
(1) The "non-operating special signal support time reduction" is executed at the end of the game (at the time when the pattern stops and is displayed).
(2) The "special electric activation support time-saving" is executed at the timing of the end of the game (at the timing of the stopped display of the pattern, or at a predetermined timing during the period from the start to the end of the support time-saving opening/closing game. Preferably, it is executed at the start of the support time-saving opening/closing game).
(3) The "ceiling activation type at the end of the game" is executed at the end of the game (at the time when the symbols stop display).
(4) The "game start ceiling activation type" is executed at the start of the game.
It becomes.
(I-90-1) In summary, the "end of game ceiling activation type" and the "support time reduction type" can have the same timing for the execution of the right-hit instruction effect. Note that the right-hit instruction effect may be the same effect mode or different effect modes.
(I-90-2) The timing of the right-hit instruction effect can be different for the "game start ceiling activation type" and the "support time reduction type". The right-hit instruction effect may be the same or different.

(Performance information)
(I-46) As described above, the internal game state during the ceiling game differs between the "start-of-game ceiling activation type" and the "end-of-game ceiling activation type." Therefore, with regard to performance information, in the case of the start-of-game ceiling activation type, the normal state is measured until the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game starts. On the other hand, in the case of the end-of-game ceiling activation type, the ceiling time-saving state occurs when the symbol variation display game in the ceiling game ends, so measurement is interrupted when the variation time or fixed display time has elapsed.

(About the lottery for the jackpot in the ceiling game)
The jackpot lottery is also executed as usual in the ceiling game (1000th game). Therefore, particularly in the case of the "hybrid type" of this embodiment, when a jackpot or support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the question is whether to prioritize the ceiling benefit (in this example, the ceiling time-saving) or the winning result. Since a jackpot and a support time-saving cannot be won at the same time, the problem is when a "jackpot win and the activation of the ceiling function (ceiling benefit award) overlap" and when a "support time-saving win and the activation of the ceiling function overlap" in the ceiling game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the ceiling game is defined as follows.
(I-73-1) When a jackpot is won, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited (restricted) (the ceiling activation prohibition condition is met) and priority is given to processing the jackpot (the ceiling bonus is not given, and the jackpot game is executed after the ceiling game ends). Note that the priority given to processing the jackpot is the same even for thoroughbred types.
(I-73-2) Even if the support time-saving is won, the activation of the ceiling function is not prohibited (activation of the ceiling function is allowed), and the ceiling function is activated with priority (the process of granting the ceiling bonus is given priority over the process of the support time-saving). For example, even if the support time-saving is won in a ceiling game, it is treated as invalid, the activation of the ceiling function is allowed, and the ceiling bonus (ceiling time-saving) is granted. In this embodiment, the type that prioritizes the activation of the ceiling function of the above-mentioned "Tenki C1" or "Tenki D1" (ceiling priority activation type) is adopted.
(I73-3) In the case of the hybrid type, there is no particular restriction as to which of the support time reduction and the ceiling privilege should be activated first, but it is preferable to prioritize the one that is more advantageous to the player. For example, if the ceiling privilege is more profitable than the support time reduction, the ceiling privilege is set to be given first. In this embodiment, support time reductions A to C are provided, but if only support time reduction D (50 times of time reduction) is provided, the ceiling time reduction (1000 times of time reduction) is more profitable to the player. In such a case, if the support time reduction win is given first, the meaning of setting the ceiling privilege is lost. Therefore, in order to fully play the role of the rescue function, even if the support time reduction D is won in the ceiling game, the win is treated as invalid, the ceiling function is allowed to be activated, and the ceiling time reduction (1000 times of time reduction) is given first. The degree of profit may be compared based on the number of times the time is reduced, but another comparison factor may also be the normal power opening game mode related to the time-reduction state (as described below (I-74)). For example, if the normal power opening game mode during the support time-reduction state is different from the normal power opening game mode during the ceiling time-reduction state (time-reduction state due to ceiling time-reduction) (for example, if the opening and closing operation patterns of the lower starting port 35 are different), it is preferable to determine whether to prohibit/allow the activation of the ceiling function by taking into consideration the normal power opening game mode as well, rather than comparing only the number of times the time is reduced. Note that if the degree of profit of the support time-reduction and the ceiling bonus are the same or approximately the same, the player is free to choose which benefit to prioritize, since prioritizing either one will not be detrimental to the player.

In the case of a hybrid type, it can be configured as shown in (I74) or (I75) below.
(I-74) When the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited, and the processing of the support time-saving winning is prioritized (the support time-saving state is granted without granting the ceiling privilege). This form is a type that prioritizes the activation of the support time-saving state due to the support time-saving winning of the above (Tenki C2) or (Tenki D2) (support time-saving priority activation type). In this form, the ceiling privilege is granted in the case of a "miss" in which neither a jackpot nor a support time-saving is won. In addition, if the support time-saving that was won is a "special electric activation type support time-saving", the support time-saving opening and closing game is executed after the ceiling game ends, and the support time-saving state is controlled after the support time-saving opening and closing game ends. If the support time-saving that was won is a "special electric non-activation type support time-saving", the support time-saving state is controlled after the ceiling game ends.
(I-75) When the degree of benefit related to the support time reduction is different between the special chart 1 side and the special chart 2 side, the special chart side with a higher degree of benefit for the player can prioritize the processing of the support time reduction winning over the processing of the ceiling benefit grant, while the special chart side with a lower degree of benefit for the player can prioritize the processing of the ceiling benefit grant over the processing of the support time reduction winning. The degree of benefit related to the support time reduction in this embodiment is higher on the special chart 2 side than on the special chart 1 side (see the support time reduction winning type and its pattern selection rate in FIG. 4). Therefore, when the support time reduction (support time reduction B or support time reduction C: see FIG. 4) is won on the special chart 2 side, the activation of the ceiling function is prohibited and the processing of the support time reduction winning is prioritized, while when the support time reduction (support time reduction A to C: see FIG. 4) is won on the special chart 1 side, the activation of the ceiling function can be permitted and the processing of the ceiling time reduction grant can be prioritized. Note that one special chart side may prohibit the activation of the ceiling function, and the other special chart side may permit the activation of the ceiling function. For example, if a support time reduction is provided on the special chart 1 side and a support time reduction is not provided on the special chart 2 side (for example, see the special chart in Figure 26 (B)), the special chart 1 side prohibits the activation of the ceiling function and prioritizes processing of the support time reduction win, and since the special chart 2 side has not won the support time reduction, the ceiling function is activated and a ceiling bonus is awarded.

In addition, if a normal small win is provided, it is preferable not to prohibit the ceiling function and to award a ceiling bonus even if the normal small win is won in a ceiling game. This is because a normal small win does not involve transition control of the internal game state and has a low degree of profit.

(Conditions for ending the ceiling time-saving mode)
(I52) The end condition of the ceiling time-saving state according to this embodiment is that the time-saving count is consumed (when the total number of fluctuations of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 reaches the specified number of time-saving), or when a jackpot is won. In this embodiment, as a support time-saving activation prohibition condition, the activation of the support time-saving state is prohibited even if the support time-saving is won during a game state other than the normal state (see FIG. 14, FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B), so the support time-saving state does not occur during the ceiling time-saving state. However, if the support time-saving activation is not prohibited during the time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state may be terminated when the support time-saving is won.
Other termination conditions may also be used, such as the following (End 1) to (End 5).
(End 1) When the normal pattern change display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times),
(End 2) When the normal opening game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times),
(End 3) When a regular small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (when a regular small win game is played a predetermined number of times),
(End 4) When the variable display of one of the special drawings (either Special Drawing 1 or Special Drawing 2) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times),
(End 5) If you are selected for a specific shortened working hours support option out of multiple options.
(I-55) One or more ending conditions can be set. This allows the conditions for ending the ceiling time-saving state to be varied, broadening the scope of playability and improving the entertainment value of the game.

(Timing for setting the ceiling time-saving end conditions)
(I-53-1) After the end of the jackpot game, the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set (this can be set during the jackpot end process (step S509) in FIG. 21). In this case, the following gameplay can be created. For example, in a case where multiple jackpots 1 to 4 are provided, if jackpot 1 is won, the ceiling time reduction can be set to 100 times, if jackpot 2 is won, the ceiling time reduction can be set to 200 times, if jackpot 3 is won, the ceiling time reduction can be set to 1200 times, if jackpot 4 is won, the ceiling time reduction can be set to 0 times (effectively, no ceiling bonus). The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be changed according to the type of jackpot, and the advantage of the ceiling bonus (the content of the relief when the ceiling is reached) can be changed. This greatly expands the range of gameplay by the ceiling function, and the fun of the game can be improved.
(I-53-2) The end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set when the ceiling time reduction is activated. For example, if the ceiling time reduction is a "game start ceiling activation type", the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set at the start of the ceiling game. If the ceiling time reduction is a "game end ceiling activation type", the end condition of the ceiling time reduction can be set at the end of the ceiling game. In this case, when setting the end condition of the ceiling time reduction, the ceiling time reduction with the end condition set can be determined by the above-mentioned "ceiling bonus lottery". For example, any of the ceiling time reductions with 100 time reductions, 200 time reductions, 1200 time reductions, and 0 time reductions can be determined by lottery. The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time reduction is changed at the time of activation of the ceiling function (in other words, at the time of granting the ceiling bonus), and the degree of advantage of the ceiling bonus can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability through the ceiling function, making the game more entertaining.
(I-53-3) The end condition of the ceiling time-saving can be set when the RAM is cleared. In this case, as in (I-53-2) above, when the RAM is cleared, one of the ceiling time-savings can be selected by lottery from among multiple ceiling time-savings (at least one of which has a different time-saving performance). The feature of this configuration is that the end condition of the ceiling time-saving can be changed when the RAM is cleared, and the degree of advantage of the ceiling bonus can be changed. This greatly expands the range of playability due to the ceiling function, and makes the game more interesting.

(Fluctuation patterns related to ceiling mode: Figures 73 and 75)
When the ceiling mode (1000th spin) is lost, a specific fluctuation pattern (ceiling fluctuation pattern: "ceiling fluctuation" in FIG. 75) with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected in order to secure the performance time width of the "ceiling performance" described later. This ceiling fluctuation pattern is selected to have a fluctuation time longer than at least the N reach, but there is no particular restriction as long as the performance time width of the "ceiling performance" is secured. For example, it may be a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time longer than the SP reach in the normal mode (at least the SP reach without pseudo consecutive).

In addition, in the ceiling mode, in the case of a miss, a common ceiling variation pattern (ceiling variation) is selected regardless of at least the "special symbol type and the number of balls in operation" (see the "ceiling" column in Figure 75). In the case of this embodiment, since there are multiple types of misses, "ceiling variation" is selected regardless of the "special symbol type, the number of balls in operation, and the type of miss". The reason for this is as follows. First, since it is important to notify the ceiling privilege when it is granted, it is preferable to execute a common ceiling performance regardless of the special symbol type and the balls in operation. Second, since it is only for one ceiling game (one spin only), it is not preferable from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden to prepare multiple variation pattern allocation tables according to the special symbol type and the balls in operation and execute various performances based on this, as this unnecessarily increases the control burden. In addition, in the case of a hit, as in the case of the above-mentioned "miss", a common "ceiling winning variation" is selected from the viewpoint of performance and reduction of the control burden (see the "ceiling" column in Figure 73).

(I-103) In addition, when the support time reduction is won, as a variation during the winning variation (a variation that can appear during the game), it is possible to configure it to be possible to execute a "support time reduction winning variation" such as an indication of a miss via a reach (a reach miss) and then an indication of the win of the support time reduction. However, in the variation during the variation related to the ceiling variation when the ceiling benefit is granted, it is preferable not to execute a variation such as granting the ceiling benefit (entering the ceiling time reduction) after a reach miss, or not to execute a reach variation at all. The reason for this is that the ceiling benefit is not a concept of "winning" by a jackpot lottery, but a benefit is granted depending on the number of games. However, when the above-mentioned "ceiling benefit lottery" is executed, since a "lottery" is involved, it is preferable to execute a "ceiling benefit winning variation" such as executing a reach variation as a variation related to the ceiling variation, and then an indication of the win of the ceiling benefit lottery after the reach miss.

(Modification related to the variation pattern selection process: variation pattern forced overwrite process)
(I-42) In addition, even in the ceiling game, the variation pattern may be selected by the normal process by referring to the variation pattern allocation table (FIG. 72, FIG. 74-FIG. 75) related to the normal mode or the premonition mode, and the variation pattern designation command may be forcibly overwritten according to the winning type. For example, if the result of the big win lottery in the ceiling game is a miss, the variation pattern allocation table related to the premonition mode (or the normal mode) shown in FIG. 75 is referred to (since the game immediately before the ceiling game is a game in the premonition mode, the variation pattern allocation table related to the premonition mode is referred to as it is in the ceiling game: refer to one of FH70-FH73 according to the lottery result, the number of balls in operation reserve, etc.), and one variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) is selected, but in the ceiling game, the variation pattern is forcibly updated to a specific variation pattern, for example, the variation pattern designation command "A014H" (ceiling variation), and the corresponding variation time is set. Even in this way, a specific variation pattern can be determined in the ceiling game. In this case, the ceiling variation can be selected and the corresponding performance can be executed without changing the program as much as possible. In the above, it has been described that the fluctuation pattern allocation table related to the premonition mode is referred to in the ceiling game, but in the case of a configuration in which the premonition mode is not provided, for example, the fluctuation pattern allocation table related to the normal mode (a game mode belonging to the normal mode (for example, the general mode)) may be referred to. Also, not limited to the normal mode, the fluctuation pattern allocation table related to a specific game mode such as the time-saving mode or the probability mode may be referred to.
(I-43) Similarly, in the case of a big win or support time reduction (including a normal small win if a normal small win is provided), after the normal fluctuation pattern selection process is performed, a specific winning fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern designation command) may be forcibly overwritten.

(30-2-1. About the effects during ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, the game is shifted to a "ceiling presentation mode" which performs presentation for notifying the player of reaching the ceiling. This ceiling presentation mode is a presentation mode exclusively for the ceiling (1000th game), and in this embodiment, it is a presentation mode for one game only (one spin only). An example of a presentation in the ceiling presentation mode is, for example, the "ceiling entry notification presentation (ceiling activation notification presentation) 781" shown in Note 1 of FIG. 49B. As the ceiling entry notification presentation 781, for example, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern for ceiling) at the time of the ceiling is displayed in a form including at least a decorative pattern different from that in the normal mode (number patterns 1 to 9). The reason for the "decorative pattern different from that in the normal mode at least" is that the ceiling is reached when the player encounters a big losing streak in the normal mode (normal state), and it is appropriate to notify the player of reaching the ceiling by displaying a decorative pattern different from that which has been displayed in the normal mode for a long time.

Specifically, the ceiling decorative pattern is a special pattern (ceiling decorative pattern) that displays a special character, item, or letter, and is preferably a pattern that has a strong impact in terms of presentation, for example, decorative pattern 785 (decorative pattern of "heaven", "☆", and "well") shown in Note 1 of FIG. 49B. A normal decorative pattern row is three patterns, a right pattern, a middle pattern, and a left pattern (see FIG. 49B), but the ceiling decorative pattern row does not necessarily have to be a three-pattern row. For example, it can be a four-pattern row of "heaven", "well", "to", and "attain", or a two-pattern row of "heaven" and "well". In addition, in order to emphasize that the ceiling has been reached, a giant decorative pattern with a larger display area than a normal decorative pattern, or one with a specified effect image attached, may be used. In addition, for the decorative patterns related to the ceiling game, normal decorative patterns (all or part of the same decorative pattern) may be used during the variable display, and only the decorative pattern that is finally stopped (decorative stop pattern) may be used as the ceiling decorative pattern. In addition, a special character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 shows the same character image as the one that wins the support time reduction (see FIG. 6 (A)), but it may also be a special character image (special effect) that appears only in the ceiling game.

In addition, in the figure, the text image 778 saying "You're entering the time-saving mode" is displayed, just as when the support time-saving mode is won. This is because it is preferable to notify during the ceiling game that a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving mode is occurring (the same applies when infinite time-saving mode, limited probability variation, or infinite probability variation is granted as the ceiling bonus). The ceiling entry notification effect 781 can be said to be one form of the above-mentioned "time-saving entry notification effect" in that it notifies that the ceiling time-saving mode will be entered.

On the other hand, if the ceiling time-saving feature is the "ceiling activation type at the start of the game," the time-saving state is triggered by the start of the ceiling game (1000th game), so in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, it is preferable to display a "right-hit instruction effect (fire-guided notification effect)" that encourages right-hitting at the start of the game (immediately notifying the player that right-hitting is advantageous at the start of the game) (the same applies when infinite time-saving, limited probability change, or infinite probability change are granted as ceiling benefits).

When a game state accompanied by an electric support state is granted as a ceiling bonus (particularly when a type that activates the ceiling at the start of the game is adopted), it is preferable to display a "pre-launch induced notification effect" that notifies in advance that a "game state favoring right-hand hits" will soon be entered during at least a portion of the premonition mode (for example, the game immediately prior to the ceiling game (the final game of the premonition mode (999th spin)). In order to display this "pre-launch induced notification effect," a specific variation pattern (final premonition variation) can be selected if the final game in the premonition mode is a "miss" (see Note 1 "Final premonition variation" in Figure 75).

The above-mentioned "pre-launch induction notification effect" is an effect that instructs the "way to hit" in a game before the arrival of the game in which the electric support state occurs. In this respect, it differs in nature from conventional launch induction notification effects that instruct "hit to the right" when the electric support state occurs, or instruct "hit to the left" when the electric support state is no longer present, that is, notification effects that instruct the way to hit when the actual presence or absence of electric support occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch induction notification effect is an effect unique to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function.

The above-mentioned "pre-launch induction notification effect" is a unique effect specific to gaming machines equipped with a ceiling function, but in addition, the following unique effects can also be produced.
(I-35) When the ceiling function is activated (in this example, when the ceiling time reduction is granted), if there are no working reserved balls after the ceiling fluctuation (see the "ceiling" column in FIG. 75) has ended (after the pattern confirmation display), the "ceiling reached standby display" can be made to appear as a performance before waiting for customers. This "ceiling reached standby display" is a display that notifies the player that the ceiling has been reached and that the ceiling privilege is in progress (heaven time reduction state), and is a performance mode that belongs to the performance before waiting for customers. In addition, the ceiling reached standby display can be made to appear overlappingly during the customer waiting display (demo display).
(I-36) In addition, when the ceiling function is activated, after the ceiling fluctuation ends (after the pattern confirmation display), if there are no operation reserved balls, a right hit instruction effect can be made to appear. In this case, the right hit instruction effect can be made to appear at least during the appearance period of the performance before waiting for customers, but it may also be made to appear between the performance before waiting for customers and the performance before waiting for customers. The right hit instruction effect may be a dedicated right hit instruction effect (right hit instruction effect during waiting for customers) that is different from other right hit instruction effects.

In addition, when the ceiling function is activated in the ceiling game (1000th game) pattern change display game, it is preferable not to display a specific preview effect. For example, at least a high expectation preview effect is not displayed, or at least one of the pseudo consecutive, reach, and player participation effects is not displayed. The reason is that when the ceiling function is activated, an ostentatious preview effect that stimulates the expectation of winning a jackpot is not necessary. However, this does not apply when pseudo consecutive, reach, or player participation effects are provided as preview effects exclusive to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to display a preview effect that unnecessarily stimulates the expectation of winning when the ceiling function is activated, and when preview effects such as pseudo consecutive, reach, or player participation effects are displayed, it is preferable to use a ceiling-only presentation mode that is different from the presentation modes that appear in other presentation modes.

Also, as a bonus for reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may be displayed. For example, a setting suggestion effect exclusive to the ceiling may be displayed. This is because providing the player with useful information such as setting prediction elements is useful in increasing the motivation of a player who is stuck in a game. When a setting suggestion effect is displayed at the ceiling, its appearance rate may be 100%, or it may be displayed based on a predetermined lottery probability. Also, the type of setting suggestion effect to be displayed can be determined appropriately, but it is preferable to have an appearance rate at least higher than in normal mode (general mode, premonition mode). Also, it is preferable to display a setting suggestion effect with a high setting prediction element (for example, a setting suggestion effect that confirms setting 4 or higher, confirms setting 6, denies setting 1, etc.).

(I-44) On the other hand, if a jackpot is won by chance in the ceiling game (1000th game), instead of displaying the display related to the ceiling display mode, the same display as that in the normal display mode (normal display mode or premonition display mode), time-saving display mode, or probability change display mode may be displayed as the display related to the jackpot win. For example, when displaying the same display as that in the normal display mode, the "Win/Support Time-saving Winning Variation Pattern Distribution Table (for general and premonition)" shown in FIG. 72 is referred to, and the same win variation pattern as that in the normal mode (normal mode, premonition mode) can be selected (see the note in the remarks column 5 in FIG. 73). If the ceiling display is displayed even when a jackpot is won in the ceiling game, it becomes unclear whether it is a jackpot or a ceiling bonus, which confuses the player.

(I63) In addition, if a jackpot is hit by chance in the ceiling game (1000th game), it is preferable not to display the ceiling entry notification effect 781 (note 1 in FIG. 49B) but to display a winning effect for a jackpot win. This is because a contradiction would occur if a jackpot was hit but a time-saving entry was notified. However, if a so-called "revival effect" type effect is displayed, in which a miss is first pretended and then a win is notified, the same ceiling entry notification effect 781 as when the ceiling is activated may be displayed, followed by a winning effect. In this case, it is preferable to adopt an effect in which the activation of the ceiling function or a jackpot win is kept secret until halfway through the ceiling game, thereby increasing the player's tension.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern dedicated to winning (a win during ceiling variation) can be selected (see the "Ceiling" column in FIG. 73), and a performance dedicated to the win during the ceiling related to the variation pattern can be displayed. If a support time reduction is provided, different variation patterns can be selected when a jackpot is won and when a support time reduction is won (see "Ceiling support time reduction win variation" in Note 5 in FIG. 73). In addition, a common variation pattern (a win during ceiling variation) can be selected when a jackpot is won and when a support time reduction is won in order to reduce the control burden. In this case, if the support time reduction activation priority type is used, it is preferable to display different performance contents to notify the type of win. The type of win can be grasped by the decorative pattern designation command, and different performances can be executed even if a common variation pattern is selected.

(30-3. About Heaven Mode)
The heaven mode is a game mode to which the game is switched after the ceiling game ends (after the 1000th spin) or the game following the ceiling game (the 1001st game), and the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time-saving state or a probability-changing state depending on the ceiling privilege. In this embodiment, an example is described in which "ceiling time-saving (time-saving times 1000 times)" is granted as the ceiling privilege, so the ceiling mode according to this embodiment becomes a game mode related to the time-saving state (YJ=01H). Note that the transition to this heaven mode occurs in the case of a ceiling privilege other than "forced hit" (limited time-saving, infinite time-saving, infinite probability-changing, limited probability-changing, infinite potential probability, or limited potential probability, etc.).

In addition, during Heaven mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "0AH" to select a fluctuation pattern exclusive to Heaven (here, it is updated to the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) exclusive to the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving).

Heaven mode ends when at least a jackpot is won, or, in the case of the finite ceiling bonus, when the set number of time-saving or ST times is reached without winning a jackpot. Here, the ceiling bonus is explained as "finite time-saving (1000 times of time-saving)," so Heaven mode ends when 1000 times of time-saving are reached, or when a jackpot is won during the time-saving times. When Heaven mode ends, it transitions to normal mode (transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state). If the ceiling bonus is finite probability or finite potential probability, it ends when the ST times are reached or if a jackpot is won within the ST times, and if the infinite time-saving, infinite probability, or infinite potential bonus is reached, it ends when a jackpot is won.

(7-5-2. About the effects during Heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, the mode is switched to a "heaven effect mode" which performs effects related to the heaven mode (heaven effects). This heaven effect mode is either switched to after the end of the ceiling game, or is a dedicated effect mode for the next game onwards (1001st game onwards), and is terminated when the heaven mode ends. During the heaven effect mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" that represents outer space), to notify the player that the heaven mode is in progress. In addition, the heaven mode can be configured to be capable of executing an effect to notify the player of the number of remaining time-saving times.

When granting a finite or infinite time-saving bonus as a ceiling bonus, the bonus may be a time-saving performance mode exclusive to Heaven, or a time-saving performance mode (for example, any of time-saving performance modes 1 to 4). In either case, the performance mode should correspond to the game mode.

(Exiting Heaven mode)
(I64) In this embodiment, a time-saving state of 1000 time-saving times is granted as a ceiling privilege. However, if a time-saving state with a relatively small number of time-saving times, such as 100 time-saving times, is granted, there is a high possibility that the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving will be consumed without winning a jackpot (for example, in setting 1, the probability of winning a jackpot within 100 time-saving times is about 39%). On the other hand, even if the number of time-saving times is 1000, it does not necessarily mean that a jackpot will be won within that number of times (the probability of winning a jackpot within 1000 time-saving times is about 99%). In any case, if the ceiling time-saving state is over, the player will feel a strong sense of disappointment that he/she has become addicted and was unable to make use of the ceiling time-saving. Therefore, if the final change related to the ceiling time-saving state is a miss, it is preferable that no flashy notice effects such as reach effects or high expectation effects are displayed. In addition, when the final fluctuation related to the ceiling time-saving state is a miss, it is preferable not to use a long fluctuation pattern unnecessarily. For example, at least the fluctuation pattern related to the SP reach is not selected. Preferably, the reach fluctuation pattern is not selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is selected. In particular, it is preferable to configure it so that the "shortest normal fluctuation (at least the shortest normal fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns related to the time-saving mode)" having the shortest fluctuation time at the time of miss can be selected (the selection rate of the shortest normal fluctuation may be 100%). When the ceiling time-saving state is left, it is preferable to behave as if nothing happened and to leave it quietly without any unnecessary teasing.

(Regarding the control form of support time reduction during time reduction state (lottery processing method))
Here, the question arises as to whether or not to transition to the support time-saving state during the time-saving state (during the ceiling time-saving state and/or the jackpot time-saving state) (whether or not to prohibit the activation of the support time-saving state during the ceiling time-saving state). For example, in the jackpot lottery during the time-saving state, the question arises as to whether or not to include the support time-saving state in the jackpot lottery, and if the support time-saving state is included in the jackpot lottery, whether or not to treat the winning result as valid or invalid. Therefore, the following lottery forms (I-76) to (I-80) can be adopted depending on the game characteristics.
(I-76) At least during the ceiling time-saving state, the support time-saving is excluded from the lottery (for example, see FIG. 19B and FIG. 27). Specifically, as in the lottery form of FIG. 19B, a big win lottery is performed in which the support time-saving is excluded from the lottery, so that the support time-saving state is treated as invalid, and the support time-saving state is not granted during the ceiling time-saving state (not controlled by the support time-saving state). In the case of this configuration, when the support time-saving is in a lower profit state (advantage degree) than the ceiling time-saving, it is suitable for avoiding the falling transition of "transition from the ceiling time-saving state to the support time-saving state" (the same applies to (I-77) described later).
(I77) At least during the ceiling time-saving state, a jackpot lottery is held that includes the support time-saving as a lottery target, but even if the support time-saving is won, the winning is treated as invalid, and the support time-saving state is not granted. For example, the support time-saving flag management process (step S422) of FIG. 12 described in the first embodiment is provided, and the winning of the support time-saving is treated as invalid, and the support time-saving state is not granted. Or, the lottery form of FIG. 19A is adopted, and even if the support time-saving is won, the winning is treated as invalid, and the support time-saving state is not granted.
(I-78) Unlike the above (I-76) and (I-77), at least during the ceiling time-saving state, a lottery is held for a jackpot that includes the support time-saving as a lottery item, and if the support time-saving is selected, it is treated as valid and the support time-saving state is transitioned to. In this case, the support time-saving state can be granted during the ceiling time-saving state. For example, if the support time-saving state is more profitable (advantageous) than the ceiling time-saving state, this is suitable for achieving a promotion transition of "transitioning from the ceiling time-saving state to the support time-saving state."
(I-79) During the ceiling time-saving state, a jackpot lottery is held for a game that includes the support time-saving feature, and if the number of times the game is saved by the support time-saving feature that was won is greater than the number of times saved by the ceiling time-saving feature or the number of times saved by the support time-saving feature remaining in the ceiling time-saving state, the game is transitioned to the support time-saving state. In this case, only when the "number of times saved by the support time-saving feature remaining in the ceiling time-saving state < the number of times saved by the support time-saving feature" is satisfied, the number of times saved by the support time-saving feature that was won is updated (overwritten) to the number of times saved by the support time-saving feature remaining in the current ceiling time-saving state, and the number of times saved that is advantageous to the player can be given.
(I-80) The special chart 1 side has one or more types of support time reductions as the jackpot lottery target, but the special chart 2 side has no type of support time reduction, and the winning of the support time reduction is treated as valid even during the ceiling time reduction state. In a gaming machine in which the left hand is favored (the player is favored to receive the lottery on the special chart 1 side) when there is no electric support, and the right hand is favored (the player is favored to receive the lottery on the special chart 2 side) when there is an electric support state, as in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to win the support time reduction during the ceiling time reduction state where the right hand is favored. During the ceiling time reduction state, the main game is to receive the jackpot lottery on the special chart 2 side, where the support time reduction is not a lottery target, so the support time reduction will not be won unless the special chart 1 activation reserved ball is generated due to an irregular winning, etc. In this case, the special chart 1 side performs a jackpot lottery targeting the support time-saving feature and processes the winning (granting the support time-saving feature), and during the normal state (favorable to left-handed hitters), the support time-saving feature acts as a rescue function for players who get stuck, while during the ceiling time-saving feature (favorable to right-handed hitters), it is suitable for situations where you want to avoid the time-saving feature actually being extended by winning the support time-saving feature, or the ceiling time-saving feature being ended by winning the support time-saving feature.

In addition, in the case where the winning of the support time-saving effect during the ceiling time-saving effect is to be treated as valid, that is, in the case where it is possible to grant the support time-saving effect during the ceiling time-saving effect, the configurations below (I-81) to (I-83) can be used.
(I-81-1) When a support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the number of time-saving times of the support time-saving is added to the "special pattern time-saving number counter (remaining time-saving number counting means)". In this case, the time-saving state can be extended, so the freedom of playability is expanded and a situation advantageous to the player can be generated.
(I-81-2) When a support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the count (subtraction) of the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state is suspended, and the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is consumed preferentially. When the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is consumed (when the support time-saving state ends due to the consumption of the number of time-saving times), the count of the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state that was suspended can be resumed. In this case, a first counting means (a ceiling time-saving remaining number counter) for counting the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state and a second counting means (a support time-saving remaining number counter) for counting the remaining number of time-saving times in the support time-saving state may be provided. As another counting method, the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state is temporarily saved (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving that was won is set in the special pattern time-saving number counter. Then, after the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving is consumed, the number of time-saving times during the ceiling time-saving state that was saved is set in the special pattern time-saving times counter, and counting can be started again (in this case, the special pattern time-saving times counter serves both as the ceiling time-saving remaining times counter and the support time-saving remaining times counter). According to this configuration, the time-saving times of the support time-saving are consumed preferentially, so that the time-saving state can be substantially extended. Also, since the remaining time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state are not updated to the time-saving times due to the support time-saving, both the benefit of the ceiling time-saving and the benefit of winning the support time-saving can be given to the player.
(I-82) When a support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the consumption of the number of time-saving times (execution of the support time-saving state) due to the support time-saving that was won is put into a pending state (stock state), and the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving is consumed first. Then, after the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving is consumed (when the ceiling time-saving state ends due to the consumption of the number of time-saving times), the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving that was in the stock state is consumed (stock release). According to this configuration, even if the ceiling time-saving state ends without winning any jackpot, if a support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the time-saving state due to the support time-saving starts after the ceiling time-saving state ends, so that the time-saving state can be substantially extended. In addition, the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state is not updated to the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving due to the support time-saving win, so that both the benefit of the ceiling time-saving and the benefit of the support time-saving win can be given to the player. In addition, the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state are not executed alternately, i.e., the ceiling time-shortening state being executed is not interrupted, the support time-shortening state is not started, and after the support time-shortening state ends, the interrupted ceiling time-shortening state is not resumed, so that the control process is not complicated and it is easy to determine whether the current time-shortening state has been granted by the ceiling time-shortening state or the support time-shortening state.
(I-83) In the case where there is a ceiling time-saving remaining number counter and a support time-saving remaining number counter, if the support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the support time-saving remaining number counter can be consumed in parallel with the ceiling time-saving remaining number counter. In this case, if the value of the support time-saving remaining number counter is greater than the value of the ceiling time-saving remaining number counter, the time-saving state is substantially extended, and if the value of the support time-saving remaining number counter is less than the value of the ceiling time-saving remaining number counter, the ceiling time-saving state can be ended as usual. According to this configuration, if the support time-saving is won at the right time without compromising the benefit of the ceiling time-saving, the time-saving state is substantially extended, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

(Mankoku 10) Note that in the above (I76)-(I80) and (I81)-(I83), "during the ceiling time-saving state" may be replaced with "during the jackpot time-saving state". Also, "if the support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state" may be replaced with "if the support time-saving is won during the jackpot time-saving state" or "if the support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state". In this case, a means for counting the remaining number of times in the jackpot time-saving state should be provided.

In the above (I-82), when a support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the consumption of the number of time-saving times by the won support time-saving is made into a stock state, and after the number of time-saving times by the ceiling time-saving is consumed preferentially (after the ceiling time-saving state ends), the number of time-saving times by the support time-saving is consumed (starting the support time-saving state: stock release). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following stock release forms (Mankoku 20) to (Mankoku 23) can be used.
(Mankoku 20) If a support time-saving option is won during a jackpot time-saving state, the number of times the time-saving option that was won will be stored, and after the number of times the time-saving option due to the jackpot is used up as a priority (after the jackpot time-saving state ends), the number of times the time-saving option due to the support time-saving option that was stored will be used up.
(Manseki 21) If a support time reduction is won during a support time reduction state, the number of times the time reduction resulting from the won support time reduction will be stored, and after the number of times the time reduction related to the currently active support time reduction state is consumed first (after the currently active support time reduction state ends), the number of times the time reduction resulting from the support time reduction that was stored will be consumed.
(Mankoku 22) If a support time reduction is won during a special chance state, the number of times the time reduction caused by the won support time reduction is consumed will be stored, and after the number of STs caused by that special chance state is consumed first (after the special chance state ends), the number of times the time reduction caused by the support time reduction that was stored will be consumed.
(Manseki 23) If a support time reduction is won during a potential state, the number of times the time reduction caused by the won support time reduction will be stored, and after the number of STs caused by the potential state is consumed preferentially (after the potential state ends), the number of times the time reduction caused by the support time reduction that was stored will be consumed.
According to the above (Manseki 20) to (Manseki 23), when the support time-saving is won during a specific advantageous state (here, time-saving state, probability change state, potential probability state, etc.), the time-saving state due to the support time-saving related to the winning is started after the advantageous state ends, so that both the benefit of the advantageous state and the benefit of winning the support time-saving can be given to the player. Also, the advantageous state and the support time-saving state are not executed alternately, that is, the advantageous state being executed is not interrupted, the support time-saving state is started, and after the support time-saving state ends, the interrupted advantageous state is not resumed, so the control process is not complicated.
(Manseki 24) In the case of a configuration that does not create a stock state, the activation of the support time-saving state may be treated as valid, and the currently active advantageous state may be terminated after the winning game for the support time-saving state has ended, thereby generating the support time-saving state related to the winning, or the activation of the support time-saving state may be treated as invalid, so that the support time-saving state is not generated, and the currently active advantageous state may continue as is.
(Bangoku 25) Also, one or more of the above (I 82), (Bangoku 20) to (Bangoku 23) configurations can be adopted. The type of configuration to be adopted can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. For example, if all of the configurations (I 82), (Bangoku 20) to (Bangoku 23) are adopted, even if the support time-saving is won during any advantageous state of the time-saving state, the probability change state, or the potential state (in this embodiment, the potential state is set), the execution of the support time-saving state is made into a stock state, and the support time-saving state can be generated (stocked and released) after the advantageous state ends. Also, for example, if it is not desired to make the high probability state the stock state, the configurations (I 82), (Bangoku 20) and (Bangoku 21) can be adopted, and if the support time-saving is won during the probability change state or the potential state, the winning is treated as invalid without making it into a stock state, but if the support time-saving is won during the time-saving state, the stock state can be set, and the support time-saving state can be generated after the time-saving state ends.

In the above (I 82) and (Mankoku 20) to (Mankoku 23), configuration examples in which the support time reduction is won during an advantageous state are explained, but if the ceiling game is reached during an advantageous state, the configuration may be as shown below in (Mankoku 40) to (Mankoku 44).
(Mankoku 40) When the ceiling game is reached during the jackpot time-saving state (when the opportunity to activate the ceiling arrives), the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the ceiling time-saving state (execution of the ceiling time-saving state) is stored, and after the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the jackpot is consumed preferentially (after the jackpot time-saving state ends), the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the ceiling time-saving state that was stored is consumed.
(Manseki 41) When the ceiling game is reached during the support time-saving state, the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the ceiling time-saving state is stored, and after the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the support time-saving state is consumed preferentially (after the support time-saving state ends), the number of times the time-saving has been achieved due to the ceiling time-saving state that was stored is consumed.
(Mankoku 42) If a ceiling game is reached during a special probability state, the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction is stored, and after the number of STs due to that special probability state is consumed preferentially (after the special probability state ends), the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction that was in the stock state is consumed. (Mankoku 43) If a ceiling game is reached during a latent probability state, the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction is stored, and after the number of STs due to that latent probability state is consumed preferentially (after the latent probability state ends), the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction that was in the stock state is consumed. (Mankoku 44) If a ceiling game is reached during a ceiling time reduction state (reaching the ceiling for the second or subsequent time), the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction is stored, and after the number of time reductions related to the currently executing ceiling time reduction state is consumed preferentially (after the previously executed ceiling time reduction state ends), the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction that was in the stock state is consumed.
According to the above (Manseki 41) to (Manseki 44), when the ceiling game is reached during a specific advantageous state, the ceiling time-saving state starts after the advantageous state ends, so that both the benefits of the advantageous state and the benefits of winning the support time-saving state can be given to the player. In addition, the advantageous state and the support time-saving state are not executed alternately, that is, the advantageous state being executed is not interrupted, the support time-saving state is started, and after the support time-saving state ends, the interrupted advantageous state is not resumed, so the control process is not complicated.
(Mankoku 45) In the case of a configuration that does not create the above-mentioned stock state, the activation of the ceiling time-saving state may be treated as valid, and the advantageous state in progress may be ended after the ceiling game ends, resulting in the ceiling time-saving state, or the activation of the ceiling time-saving state may be treated as invalid, so that the ceiling time-saving state is not initiated, and the advantageous state in progress may continue as is.
(10,000 Stones 46) Also, one or more of the above (10,000 Stones 41) to (10,000 Stones 44) configurations can be adopted. The type of configuration to be adopted can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. For example, if all of the configurations (10,000 Stones 41) to (10,000 Stones 44) are adopted, even if the ceiling game is reached during any advantageous state of the time-saving state, the probability change state, or the potential probability state (in this embodiment, the potential probability state is provided), the activation of the ceiling time-saving state is made a stock state, and the ceiling time-saving state can be generated (stocked and released) after the advantageous state ends. Also, for example, if it is not desired to make only the high probability state a stock state, the configurations (10,000 Stones 42) and (10,000 Stones 43) can be adopted, and when the ceiling game is reached during the probability change state or the potential probability state, the stock state is not made and the activation of the ceiling time-saving state is invalidated (prohibited), but when the ceiling game is reached during the time-saving state, the stock state is made, and the ceiling time-saving state can be generated after the time-saving state ends.

(About ceiling time-saving normal power open play and big win normal power open play)
The ceiling time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the relationship between the operating mode of the normal power open game related to the ceiling time-saving state (hereinafter abbreviated as ``ceiling time-saving normal power open game'') and the jackpot normal power open game can be configured as follows.
(I-24) At least the ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game are common. The ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game may be common to the support time-saving normal power open game, or they may be different. By making the ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game common, the program related to the normal power open game can be reduced. Also, in the development stage, it becomes easier to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Also, depending on how the performance is presented, it can be difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state is on the ceiling or the jackpot time-saving state.
(I-25) At least the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game and the jackpot normal power open game are different. In this case, the jackpot normal power open game may have a lower or higher degree of advantage (profit state) than the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game. From the viewpoint of the big-stuck relief function, it is preferable that the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game has a higher degree of advantage (higher ball payout rate) than the jackpot normal power open game. In this configuration, even if the time-shortening state is the same, the winning rate can be made different during the ceiling time-shortening state and during the jackpot time-shortening state, improving the playability. In addition, the jackpot normal power open game, the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game, and the support time-shortening normal power open game may be different from each other. In addition, the jackpot normal power open game and either the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game or the support time-shortening normal power open game may be common.

(About ceiling time-saving normal power open play and support time-saving normal power open play)
The ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the relationship between the ceiling time-saving normal power opening game and the support time-saving normal power opening game can be configured as follows.
(I-91) At least the ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the support time-saving normal power open game are common. The ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the support time-saving normal power open game may be common to the jackpot normal power open game, or may be different. By making the ceiling time-saving normal power open game and the support time-saving normal power open game common, the program related to the normal power open game can be reduced. Also, in the development stage, it becomes easier to calculate the payout rate during the electric support state. Also, depending on how the presentation is presented, it can be made difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state is on the ceiling or the support time-saving state.
(I-92) At least the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game and the support time-shortening normal power open game are different. In this case, the support time-shortening normal power open game may have a lower or higher degree of advantage (profit state) than the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game. From the viewpoint of the big-addiction rescue function, it is preferable that the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game has a higher degree of advantage than the support time-shortening normal power open game. In this configuration, even if the time-shortening state is the same, the winning rate can be made different between the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state, improving the playability. In addition, the jackpot normal power open game, the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game, and the support time-shortening normal power open game may be different from each other. In addition, the jackpot normal power open game and either the ceiling time-shortening normal power open game or the support time-shortening normal power open game may be common.

(About the decorative designs during the ceiling time-saving mode)
The display mode of the decorative pattern in the support time reduction state can be configured as follows.
(I-28) At least the decorative pattern during the ceiling time-saving state (e.g., Arabic numerals) is different from the decorative pattern during the normal state (e.g., Chinese numerals) or the decorative pattern during the jackpot time-saving state (e.g., Roman numerals or Chinese numerals). In this case, the decorative pattern is different depending on the game state, so the presentation becomes more diverse. Also, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress. Also, since the decorative pattern can be displayed while waiting for customers (e.g., the presentation before waiting for customers) when the player selects a game machine, the player can easily identify that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress by simply checking the display screen.
(I-29) At least the decorative pattern during the ceiling time-saving state (for example, Arabic numerals) is different from the decorative pattern during the normal state (for example, Chinese numerals). The decorative pattern during the jackpot time-saving state may be the same as either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time-saving state or the decorative pattern during the normal state, or they may be different (for example, the decorative pattern during the jackpot time-saving state is Roman numerals). In this case, the decorative pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the performance becomes more diverse. Also, since the decorative pattern can be displayed during the customer waiting (for example, the customer waiting pre-waiting performance), when the player selects a game machine, he or she can easily identify whether or not the ceiling time-saving state is in progress by simply checking the display screen.
(I-30) At least the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the ceiling time-saving state and the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the normal state are different stop display eyes. When a player or a hall staff member grasps the state of the gaming machine first thing in the morning, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is in the ceiling time-saving state or the normal state. In addition, either one of the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the ceiling time-saving state and the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the normal state may be the same stop display eyes as the stop display eyes after the power interruption is restored during the support time-saving state and/or the stop display eyes after the power interruption is restored during the jackpot time-saving state, or may be different stop display eyes. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is in the ceiling time-saving state or the normal state when a player or a hall staff member grasps the state of the gaming machine first thing in the morning. In addition, either the stopping display eye of the decorative pattern after power interruption is restored during the ceiling time-saving state or the stopping display eye of the decorative pattern after power interruption is restored during the normal state may be the same stopping display eye as the stopping display eye after power interruption is restored during the support time-saving state and/or the stopping display eye after power interruption is restored during the jackpot time-saving state, or it may be a different stopping display eye.

(About the decorative designs during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the display mode of the decorative pattern can be configured as follows.
(I-97) The decorative pattern during the ceiling time-saving state (for example, Arabic numerals) and the decorative pattern during the support time-saving state are common decorative patterns. The decorative pattern during the big win time-saving state may be a common decorative pattern or a different decorative pattern (for example, Roman numerals). In this case, even if the support time-saving state is won during the ceiling time-saving state, there is no need to change the decorative pattern each time, and a common decorative pattern can be used, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling strange or uncomfortable. In addition, it contributes to reducing the control burden.
(I-98) At least the decorative pattern (for example, Arabic numerals) during the ceiling time-saving state is different from the decorative pattern (for example, Chinese numerals) during the support time-saving state. The decorative pattern during the big win time-saving state may be the same as either the decorative pattern during the ceiling time-saving state or the decorative pattern during the support time-saving state, or they may be different (for example, the decorative pattern during the big win time-saving state is Roman numerals). In this case, the decorative pattern is different depending on the game state, so the performance becomes more diverse. Also, since the decorative pattern can be displayed during the customer waiting waiting (for example, the customer waiting pre-waiting performance), when the player selects a game machine, the time-saving state type (at least whether it is during the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state) can be easily identified by simply checking the display screen.
(I-99) At least the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power failure recovery during the ceiling time-saving state and the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power failure recovery during the support time-saving state are the same stop display eyes. In this case, if the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are in the same presentation mode, when a player selects a gaming machine first thing in the morning, he or she needs to actually play the game, since it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is in the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state just by checking the display screen, which contributes to the operating rate of the hall. Note that the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power failure recovery during the ceiling time-saving state may be the same stop display eyes as the stop display eyes in the normal state after the power failure recovery and/or the stop display eyes in the jackpot time-saving state after the power failure recovery, or they may be different stop display eyes.
(I-100) At least the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the ceiling time-saving state and the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the support time-saving state are different stop display eyes. According to this configuration, when a player or a hall staff member grasps the state of the gaming machine first thing in the morning, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is in the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state. In addition, either one of the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the ceiling time-saving state and the stop display eyes of the decorative pattern after the power interruption is restored during the support time-saving state may be the same stop display eyes as the stop display eyes after the power interruption is restored during the normal state and/or the stop display eyes after the power interruption is restored during the jackpot time-saving state, or may be different stop display eyes.
In addition, in this configuration, in the case where the big win time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are the same stop display number and are the same time-saving performance mode, it is at least possible to identify whether or not the support time-saving state is in progress. Also, in the case where the big win time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same stop display number and are the same performance mode, it is at least possible to identify whether or not the ceiling time-saving state is in progress.
In addition, since the normal state is the "normal presentation mode," it is possible to identify that the normal state is in progress even if the stop display numbers are the same by looking at the background image, etc. Of course, if each time-saving state has a different time-saving presentation mode, it is possible to understand which time-saving state it is by looking at the background image, etc. related to the presentation mode.

(Regarding the reserved display mode during the ceiling time-saving state and the reserved display mode during the support time-saving state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the assisted time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the hold display mode (hold icon) can be configured as follows.
(I-101) At least the reserved display mode during the ceiling time-saving state is different from the reserved display mode during the support time-saving state. In this case, the reserved display can be made different depending on the game state during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state, so the variation of the presentation becomes more diverse. Also, since the reserved display changes during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish which time-saving state it is.
(I-102) At least the reserved display mode during the ceiling time-saving state and the reserved display mode during the support time-saving state are common. Even if the support time-saving is won during the ceiling time-saving state and the state transitions to the support state, there is no need to change the reserved display each time, which leads to a reduction in the control burden.

(About the look-ahead notice during the ceiling time-saving state and the look-ahead notice during the support time-saving state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the pre-reading notice can be configured as follows.
(I-66) The pre-reading notice suggesting the expected probability of winning the support time reduction is a different presentation mode from the pre-reading notice presentation that notifies in advance that the ceiling privilege (in this embodiment, the ceiling time reduction) will be granted to the activated reserved ball at the ceiling game number. The reason for the different presentation modes is that the ceiling privilege is known to be granted for a predetermined number of games, whereas the support time reduction is determined to be won through a jackpot lottery, and is not granted for a predetermined number of games. Note that the pre-reading notice suggesting the expected probability of winning the support time reduction and the pre-reading notice suggesting the expected probability of winning the jackpot may be a common presentation mode, or may be different presentation modes.
(I-104) A common pre-reading notice can be executed during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state. Since a common pre-reading notice can be executed during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state, it leads to a reduction in the control burden. When emphasizing diversification and variety of the performance, a different pre-reading notice can be executed during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state. Note that the pre-reading notice during the ceiling time-saving state and/or the support time-saving state and the pre-reading notice during the jackpot time-saving state may be the same or different.
(I-105) The first predetermined number of games (corresponding to the pre-reading notice during a part of the premonition mode) before entering the ceiling mode (before reaching the ceiling game: before 1000 games) and the second predetermined number of games after the occurrence of the winning activation reserved ball of the support time reduction can be set as a pre-reading notice prohibition period in which the execution of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this case, it may be "the first predetermined number of games = the second predetermined number of games" (for example, 4 times, which is the same as the maximum reserved memory number), or it may be a different number of games (for example, the first predetermined number of games is 1 time, and the second predetermined number of games is 4 times, etc.).
(I-106) The execution of the pre-reading prediction is prohibited for the first specified number of games before entering the ceiling mode (corresponding to the pre-reading prediction during a part of the premonition mode) (for example, see Figure 50 described below), and the pre-reading prediction is not prohibited for the activated reserved ball related to the support time-saving winning.
(I-107) The operation reserved ball related to the ceiling fluctuation prohibits the execution of a pre-reading forecast (see Figure 50 described below), but the operation reserved ball related to the support time reduction winning does not prohibit the execution of a pre-reading forecast.

(About the setting suggestion during the ceiling time-saving mode)
(I-26) Multiple setting suggestion effects can be executed, and during the ceiling time-saving state, execution of some or all of the multiple setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). Alternatively, the execution probability can be made different compared to other game states. This includes the following (I-26-1) to (I-26-4).
(I-26-1) During the ceiling time-saving state, the probability of execution of the setting suggestion effect can be made lower than in the normal state. In this case, the probability of execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be made lower.
(I-26-2) During the ceiling time-saving state, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect can be made higher than in the normal state. In this case, the appearance rate of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be made higher.
(I-26-2) During the ceiling time-saving state, the execution of one or more specific setting suggestion effects can be prohibited (restricted). There are no particular restrictions on the specific setting suggestion effects, but for example, when setting suggestion effects such as those shown in (A) to (C) above can be executed, the execution of at least one of those setting suggestion effects can be prohibited. Specifically, during the ceiling time-saving state, it is preferable to prohibit the execution of setting suggestion effects that are less useful as setting guessing elements, such as the even number setting suggestion effect in (K) above and the odd number setting suggestion effect in (Y) above.
(I 26-3) There are one or more setting suggestion effects that appear only during the ceiling time-saving state. For example, only during the ceiling time-saving state, the setting N confirmation effect described above (M), which is highly useful as a setting guessing element, can be made to appear.
According to this configuration, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion notice can be changed according to the game state. Also, a specific setting suggestion effect can be made to appear only in a specific game state (ceiling time-saving state). This makes the effects more diverse and increases the fun of the game.

(Regarding the reserved display area related to the ceiling time reduction state)
(I-31) Upon the end of the ceiling game (here, when the time for changing the patterns related to the ceiling change ends (see Figure 67), or during the time for the fixed display of the patterns, or when the time for the fixed display of the patterns has elapsed (see Figures 68A to 68B)), the reserve display area 77 (the reserve display area on the special pattern 2 side) can be displayed in an emphasized manner (with priority) as described above. When the reserve display area 77 is displayed in an emphasized manner, as already explained, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed with priority, the reserve display area 77 can be displayed larger, the reserve display area 76 side can be hidden, etc.
When the support time reduction is won in the pattern change display game 1 on the special chart 1 side, it is preferable to change the priority of the reserved display from the special chart 1 side to the special chart 2 side at the timing when the winning game ends (because right-handed hits are advantageous during the support time reduction state and the pattern change display game on the special chart 2 side becomes the main). By changing the priority of the reserved display at the timing when the game on the special chart 1 side ends, the reserved display of the special chart 2 can be displayed with priority before the first pattern change display game on the special chart 2 side starts during the support time reduction state.

(About the performance mode during the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the presentation mode can be configured as follows.
(I-108) The presentation mode related to the ceiling time-saving state and the presentation mode related to the support time-saving state can be a common presentation mode. For example, both can be heaven presentation modes, or both can be time-saving presentation modes. When the time-saving presentation mode is used, it can be any of time-saving presentation modes 1 to 4, or it can start from time-saving presentation mode 1 and transition to "time-saving presentation mode 1 ⇒ time-saving presentation mode 2 ⇒ time-saving presentation mode 3" according to the number of games (see FIG. 7B). By using the same presentation mode for the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state, the control burden can be reduced.
(I-109) The presentation mode related to the ceiling time-saving state and the presentation mode related to the support time-saving state can be different presentation modes. For example, as shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49B, the presentation mode related to the ceiling time-saving state can be the "heaven presentation mode", and the presentation mode related to the support time-saving state can be the "time-saving presentation mode". The time-saving presentation mode can be any of the time-saving presentation modes 1 to 4, or can start from the time-saving presentation mode 1 and transition from "time-saving presentation mode 1 ⇒ time-saving presentation mode 2 ⇒ time-saving presentation mode 3" according to the number of games (see FIG. 7B). By using different presentation modes, the presentation can be made more diverse.

(About the presentation mode during the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state)
(I-123-1) In the case where the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are not configured as a common presentation mode but as separate presentation modes (for example, time-saving presentation mode and ceiling presentation mode), in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached, a presentation screen transition presentation, a ceiling entry notification presentation, etc. are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated variation pattern allocation table ("FH90" shown in FIG. 75: see the "ceiling" column in the same figure) is used, and the time-saving variation pattern allocation table (FIGS. 40 and 41) used during the jackpot time-saving state is not used. In the case where the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are configured as a common presentation mode, the presentation mode may be continued. In addition, in the figure, an example is shown in which the presentation mode during the jackpot time-saving state is the "time-saving presentation mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving presentation mode (jackpot time-saving presentation mode) dedicated to the jackpot time-saving state may be provided.
(I-123-2) The game mode for the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state may be a common game mode, but the presentation mode may be different. For example, the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are set to the variation pattern selection mode A, but the presentation mode during the jackpot time-saving state is set to the jackpot time-saving presentation mode, and the presentation mode during the ceiling time-saving state is set to the ceiling time-saving state presentation mode. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table is selected for the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state, and a common presentation such as a notice presentation may be displayed, but the decorative pattern presentation may be different. For example, at least one of the following presentation modes (Performance 1) to (Performance 4) may be configured to be executable.
(Performance 1) The pattern of the decorative pattern is different (for example, Roman numerals during the jackpot time-saving state, Chinese numerals during the ceiling time-saving state, etc.),
(Performance 2) The display area (position) of the decorative pattern is different (for example, during the jackpot time-saving state, the display area is in the approximate center of the LCD screen, and during the ceiling time-saving state, the display area is in the corner of the LCD screen, etc.)
(Performance 3) The direction of the decorative pattern change is different (for example, vertical scrolling during the jackpot time-saving state, horizontal scrolling during the ceiling time-saving state, etc.),
(Performance 4) The stopping operation patterns of the decorative symbols are different (for example, during a jackpot time-saving state, a short stopping operation or a medium stopping operation can be executed, and during a ceiling time-saving state, a short stopping operation or a long stopping operation can be executed (for stopping operation patterns, see Figures 44 to 45).

(Regarding the management of the ceiling time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(I-32) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state can be configured to be managed as one easy-to-win state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress and the flag indicating that the jackpot time-saving state is in progress can be managed as a "common flag (second specific time-saving state flag)". By making the flag common to both, it leads to a reduction in RAM capacity. In addition, the data for the performance control unit 24 and the transmission process thereof can also be easily standardized, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(I-33) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state can be configured to be managed as different winning-prone states. For example, the game state determination number YJ for the ceiling time-shortening state can be set to 04H, and the game state determination number YJ for the jackpot time-shortening state can be set to 07H, and each can be managed as a different internal game state. According to this configuration, the ceiling time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state can be managed by individual flags, so that the main control unit 20 can easily grasp each game state. In addition, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be sent to the performance control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can easily transition to different performance modes during the ceiling time-shortening state and the jackpot time-shortening state, or easily execute different performances.
(I61) The main control unit 20 is configured to be able to manage the ceiling time-saving state as an internal game state that is different from other internal game states. Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 can execute the probability change state, the potential state, the time-saving state, and the normal state (four states) as internal game states other than the ceiling time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state is managed as an internal game state that is different from any of the four states. That is, the ceiling time-saving state is managed as the fifth internal game state. That is, when the gaming machine 1 can execute one or more internal game states other than the ceiling time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state is configured to be able to be managed as an internal game state that is different from any of the four states. In this case, there are the following advantages.
(A) Based on winning a jackpot during the ceiling time-saving state, for example, a jackpot game can be executed in which the start INT and/or end INT during the jackpot game have a time width different from other time-saving states (for example, jackpot time-saving state and support time-saving state). In particular, since a jackpot during the ceiling time-saving state is treated as a "first win" in the same way as when a jackpot is won during the normal state, it is preferable that the ceiling time-saving state can be managed as an internal play state different from other internal play states. The reason for this is that, for example, if the ceiling time-saving state is treated in the same order as other time-saving states (for example, jackpot time-saving state), it will be judged as a jackpot during the time-saving state, and a problem will arise in that it will be treated as a consecutive win even though it is actually a "first win". Also, when counting the number of consecutive wins or when presenting a result performance, it is necessary to distinguish a jackpot in the ceiling time-saving state from a jackpot time-saving state. In addition, there are various time-saving states, such as a jackpot time-saving state due to a time-saving jackpot, a time-saving state after leaving a special mode state due to a special mode time-saving jackpot (a time-saving state after the number of ST rounds has been consumed), and a support time-saving state. This configuration has a great advantage when it is desired to treat the ceiling time-saving state as a time-saving state separate from these other time-saving states.

(Regarding the management form of ceiling time reduction state and support time reduction state)
The ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are the same time-saving state, but the internal game state can be configured as follows.
(I110) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state can be configured to be managed as one easy-to-win state (electric support state). In this case, the flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress and the flag indicating that the support time-saving state is in progress can be managed as a "common flag (third specific time-saving state flag)". By making the flag common to both, it leads to a reduction in RAM capacity. In addition, the data for the performance control unit 24 and the transmission process thereof can also be easily standardized, and the program capacity and data capacity can be reduced.
(I111) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, at least the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state can be configured to be managed as different winning-prone states. For example, the game state determination number YJ for the ceiling time-shortening state can be set to "04H", and the game state determination number YJ for the support time-shortening state can be set to "05H", and each can be managed as a different internal game state. According to this configuration, the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state can be managed by individual flags, so that the main control unit 20 can easily grasp each game state. In addition, it becomes easy to execute processing according to the game state according to the game situation. For example, different information can be sent to the performance control unit 24 regarding the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state. As a result, the performance control unit 24 can easily shift to different performance modes during the ceiling time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state, or easily execute different performances.
(I112) As the internal game state managed by the main control unit 20, either the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state can be configured to be managed as a common winning-prone state with the big win time-saving state. In this case, as in (I111) above, the ceiling time-saving state and the support time-saving state are managed as different winning-prone states (internal game states), and therefore there is the same advantage as in (I111) above.

(Regarding the performance after power is restored)
(Other 1) When the gaming machine is turned off and then restored before reaching the ceiling game (before entering the heaven mode) (the remaining ceiling game number is not cleared by a simple power outage, but is cleared by a RAM clear process), an effect corresponding to the remaining ceiling game number (power outage recovery notification effect) can be executed. For example, even if the same presentation mode is used at the time of power outage and at the time of power outage recovery, a power outage recovery notification effect (for example, an effect with a different background effect) corresponding to the remaining ceiling game number can be configured to be executed. Specifically, a power outage recovery notification effect corresponding to the remaining ceiling game number of 1 to 300 (first remaining ceiling game number section), 301 to 600 (second remaining ceiling game number section), and 601 to 999 (third remaining ceiling game number section) is executed. The remaining ceiling game number section can be appropriately determined. According to this configuration, when a player selects a gaming machine first thing in the morning, a situation advantageous to the player can be provided in which the player can select a machine with a close ceiling game. On the other hand, since the hall can easily identify the machines that are close to the ceiling game, it becomes possible for the hall to adjust its profits by clearing the RAM of the gaming machines that are close to the ceiling (clearing the remaining number of ceiling games) or leaving them as they are.

(Other 2) The power outage recovery notification effect may be executed only for a specified period of time after power is restored (for example, until the customer waiting effect (demo display) is executed, or until a specified time has passed). Also, the above-mentioned "game status notification LED" may be different depending on the remaining ceiling number of games (a game status notification LED dedicated to notifying the remaining ceiling number of games may be provided).

(Other 3) Also, a power outage recovery notification effect according to the remaining ceiling number of games may be executed at least for the first game (first spin) after the power is restored. In this case, the player who starts the first game on that gaming machine can be given an element of guessing the remaining ceiling number of games. Note that since it is not desirable to give an element of guessing the remaining ceiling number of games without reason, it is appropriate to execute the power outage recovery notification effect only for the first game after the power is restored.

(7-5-1. Changes in Heaven Mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation state, medium-speed fluctuation state, low-speed fluctuation state, etc. can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state during the heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that places emphasis on playability such as "enjoying the presentation" as in the time reduction mode. However, when the infinite time reduction is granted, considering that there is no limit to the number of time reductions, it may be a dedicated high-speed fluctuation state (for example, a fluctuation state in which the game is consumed at a faster speed than or equal to the time reduction mode 3 or the probability change mode 1). In addition, in this embodiment, considering that the heaven time reduction is a finite time reduction, it is set so that the same fluctuation pattern as the time reduction mode 2 can be selected and the fluctuation state is approximately the same (see the distribution rate of the fluctuation pattern in the "heaven (time reduction)" column in FIG. 75). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be the fastest fluctuation state among all game modes. It may also be the same as any of the time reduction modes 1 to 4.

On the other hand, when finite probability or infinite probability is given, since the probability of winning a jackpot is high in addition to the electric support state, it is preferable to set the fastest fluctuation state among all game modes, or the same or nearly the same fluctuation state as the high-speed fluctuation state of probability mode 1. On the other hand, when infinite potential probability or finite potential probability is given, the probability of winning a jackpot is high, but since it is controlled under a state without electric support, it is difficult for an activated reserved ball to occur, just like in the normal state. Taking this into consideration, when infinite potential probability or finite potential probability is given, it is preferable to set the fluctuation state to the same or nearly the same as the normal mode, or at least a slower fluctuation state (a fluctuation state with a relatively long average consumption time) than time-saving mode 3 (high-speed fluctuation state during time-saving).

(Heaven mode bonus)
In the heaven mode, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be set to be higher than that of other game modes in order to increase the motivation of a player who is addicted to playing. In other words, the heaven mode may function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone" in which the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is changed to a high probability. For example, the heaven mode changes the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the setting suggestion effect that may appear during the pattern variation display game) to a higher probability than at least the normal mode (the general mode and/or the premonition mode).

(A variation of Heaven mode)
(Other 4) In addition, in the first game of the first rotation in the heaven mode, a specific failure variation pattern (heaven entry variation: see note 2 in FIG. 75) can be configured to be selectable. This heaven entry variation is determined as a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, a variation pattern longer than at least the longest failure variation pattern: here, 36 s), and by using this variation time, at least a right-hit instruction performance or at least a time-saving entry notification performance including a right-hit performance can be executed in the first rotation after entering the heaven mode (preferably, triggered by the start of the first rotation game (start of the pattern variation display)). In addition, since it is considered that many players will start hitting the right after seeing this performance, it becomes possible to save the operation reserved balls on the special chart 2 side by using the long variation time of the heaven entry variation (avoiding the lottery on the special chart 1 side with a low degree of advantage). In addition, this example is suitable when a ceiling time-saving ceiling activation type is adopted at the end of the game.

(Other 5) In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first game during the Heaven mode (including the case where the support time-saving is won when the support time-saving is included as a jackpot lottery target), a specific winning variation pattern (winning variation when entering Heaven: see Note 6 in FIG. 73) can be selected. As an effect related to the winning variation when entering Heaven, for example, an effect common to a part of the time-saving entry notification effect (an effect in which the time-saving entry notification effect and the effect related to the jackpot are partially common) can be executed, and then an effect related to the winning of the jackpot (for example, an effect that notifies the player that it is a jackpot) can be executed. This allows a player to win a jackpot in the first game during the Heaven mode, and a common effect is executed until the middle of the game in the case of a jackpot and a loss, and then a different effect is executed for the jackpot and the loss, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily realizing whether the jackpot is a win or a loss during the game (for example, immediately after the start of the game). In addition, at least when the winning variation at the time of entering heaven is selected, the right-hit instruction effect (fire induction notification effect) may be executed when the game starts. Of course, an effect that immediately indicates whether it is a hit or a miss may be executed. For example, in the case of a jackpot, the time-saving entry notification effect is not executed, and the effect for the jackpot is executed.

<9. About the function to prohibit specific advance notice performances during premonition mode: Figure 50>
Here, in this embodiment, a specific advance notice performance prohibition function (specific advance notice performance prohibition means) operates during the premonition mode. In detail, focusing on the fact that the premonition mode is a game mode related to the notification of approaching the ceiling and the fact that the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the provision of a ceiling bonus, the appearance of a specific advance notice performance is prohibited in the premonition mode (premonition performance mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling performance mode). In this embodiment, as the prohibition function, a "premonition pre-reading notice prohibition means (specific premonition pre-reading notice prohibition means)" that prohibits the execution of a premonition is provided. Hereinafter, the "premonition pre-reading notice prohibition means" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where a pre-reading notice is prohibited by the pre-reading notice prohibition means during a pre-signal. In Figure 50, a form is explained in which a "hold change notice" is treated as an object to be prohibited by the pre-reading notice prohibition means during a pre-signal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prohibited object can be a "hold change notice" and/or a "pre-reading notice during a change."

(A. Configuration without means for prohibiting pre-reading during precursor (normal case): FIG. 50 (A))
With reference to FIG. 50 (A), the "normal case" will be described. This "normal case" refers to a configuration in which no premonition pre-reading notice prohibition means is provided, and is shown as a comparative example with the configuration in which premonition pre-reading notice prohibition means is provided (same figures (Ha-1) (Ha-2)) described later. Note that the illustrated reserved icon 770 is a "normal reserved display (white reserved)", the reserved icon 771 is a "high expectation reserved display" among the special reserved displays (normal reserved change notice), and the reserved icon 772 is a "ceiling reserved display (ceiling reserved change notice)". Also, the reserved icon 771 here indicates a "rainbow reserved (currently secured reserved display)" among the special reserved displays that may appear when a jackpot is won.

For ease of explanation, Figure (A) shows a representative case in which, when there are three activated reserved balls for the 997th to 999th games, an activated reserved ball for the 1000th game (ceiling game) (hereafter referred to as the "ceiling game reserved ball") appears as the fourth activated reserved ball.

In the comparative example shown in Figure (A), since the configuration does not have a "prediction during premonition prohibition means," the 1000th game's reserve display is allowed to be a ceiling reserve display (ceiling reserve change notice) regardless of whether or not there is a special reserve display before reaching the ceiling game (hereinafter referred to as a "normal reserve change notice"). Here, "allowing" the ceiling reserve display means that it can be either the case where it always appears, or the case where it appears when a predetermined lottery is won (the same applies to (B), (Ha-1), and (Ha-2) described below). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a reserve change notice for the third rainbow reserve (currently secured reserve), the reserve display for the fourth ceiling game reserve ball can be changed to Fujimaru-kun's reserve icon 772 (ceiling reserve display).

However, if a jackpot is won before the ceiling is reached, the ceiling function is not activated (the ceiling game count is reset), so there is little need to execute the ceiling reserve display. Also, if the reserve change notice (special reserve display) that predicts the probability of winning and the ceiling reserve change notice (ceiling reserve display) that predicts that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, two notice displays with different characteristics will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a means for prohibiting premonition notice during premonition is provided to solve these problems.

(B. Example of configuration with means for prohibiting advance notice during premonition: FIG. 50 (B), (C-1), (C-2))
The following describes an example of a configuration in which the above-mentioned "premonition read-ahead notice prohibition means" is provided. This includes the "case in which normal read-ahead notice is given priority" shown in Figure (B) and the "case in which ceiling read-ahead notice is given priority" shown in Figures (Ha-1) and (Ha-2).

(Case where normal look-ahead notice is given priority: FIG. 50 (b))
Figure 50 (b) shows a case where "normal pre-reading notice is given priority", specifically, a case where "if there is a current reserved ball before the ceiling game is reached, a pre-reading notice for the ceiling is prohibited (a case where a pre-reading notice for the ceiling game reserved ball is prohibited)". Here, as in the case of Figure (a) above, a case where the third operating reserved ball is a "current reserved ball" is shown.

In this example, if the reserved ball exists before the ceiling game is reached, the reserved ball display for the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to a ceiling reserved ball display (ceiling reserved ball change notice) and the "normal reserved ball display" appears. In other words, the "reserved ball subject to pre-reading prohibition" by the pre-omen pre-reading notice prohibition means is configured as the "ceiling game reserved ball."

The reason why the reserved balls that are prohibited from being read ahead are the "ceiling game reserved balls" is as follows. If the reserved ball exists before the ceiling game, the player will win the jackpot before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling bonus is granted), so there is little need to display the reserved balls for the ceiling. In addition, if the reserved balls for the 1000th game are prohibited from being displayed as reserved balls, if the reserved balls for the 1000th game remain as normal reserved balls, it is possible to provide an element of guesswork that "there is a reserved ball before the ceiling game is reached," and players who know this can prevent wasting balls until the ceiling is reached, which is a presentational advantage. However, rather than completely prohibiting the display of reserved balls for the ceiling when the reserved ball exists, if the reserved ball change notice (rainbow reserved ball) related to the reserved balls for the reserved balls is not displayed, that is, if the pre-read notice lottery for the reserved balls for the reserved ball is a "miss," the reserved balls for the ceiling may be displayed (permitted). If the hold change notice for the current reserved hold is not displayed, the player cannot know that the current reserved hold exists before the ceiling game is reached, but even if the ceiling reserve display is displayed, it will not be of any particular disadvantage to the player if the player wins a jackpot before the ceiling game is reached. Note that, instead of prohibiting the display of the ceiling reserve display when the hold change notice for the current reserved hold (rainbow reserve) is displayed, the display of the ceiling reserve display may be prohibited when a hold change notice with a high expectation level or higher (for example, green reserve or higher) is displayed.

(Case where ceiling pre-reading notice is given priority: Fig. 50 (Ha-1) (Ha-2))
Next, we will explain the case where the ceiling read-ahead notice is executed with priority.

Figure 50 (Ha-1) is an example of "a case where the ceiling pre-reading notice is executed with priority".
(α) A configuration example in which "during the premonition mode, some of the normal premonitions are prohibited, while ceiling hold change notices (ceiling hold display) are permitted";
(β) This shows an example of a configuration in which "during premonition mode, normal pre-reading notices are completely prohibited, while ceiling hold change notices (ceiling hold display) are permitted."
The configuration example shown in Figure (Ha-1) is an example in which, rather than setting the reserved balls that are prohibited from being read ahead as "ceiling game reserved balls" as in Figure (B) above, the reserved balls that are prohibited from being read ahead are set as only "operating reserved balls that are consumed during the premonition game," and the ceiling game reserved balls are excluded from the prohibited targets.

The "prohibition of some of the normal pre-reading notices" in (α) above means, for example, a configuration in which the appearance of low-expectation pre-reading notices is permitted among the normal pre-reading notices (special pre-reading displays), while the appearance of high-expectation pre-reading notices is prohibited. Specifically, this is the following configurations 1 and 2.
(Configuration 1) A configuration in which the appearance of reserve change notices of yellow reserve or lower (blue reserve and yellow reserve) is permitted, but the appearance of reserve change notices of green or higher (green reserve, red reserve and rainbow reserve) which have a higher chance of winning than the yellow reserve are prohibited.
(Configuration 2) A configuration that allows the appearance of hold change notices (hold displays other than rainbow hold) that indicate other than a certain win, but prohibits the appearance of hold change notice holds that indicate a certain win.

The above "Configuration 1" only prohibits high-expectation reserve change notifications such as green, red, and rainbow colors when the ball is guaranteed to be won. On the other hand, the above "Configuration 2" only prohibits the "rainbow reserve" that indicates a guaranteed win among the high-expectation reserve change notifications. Therefore, in the case of Configuration 2, the occurrence of reserve change notifications other than the "rainbow reserve" that indicates a guaranteed win is permitted.

In the above (β), "totally prohibit look-ahead notices" means that normal look-ahead notices (here, hold change notices) are completely prohibited, but the appearance of ceiling hold change notices (ceiling hold display) is permitted. Therefore, in the case of the above (β) configuration, normal look-ahead notices will not appear at all during premonition mode, and only the appearance of ceiling hold change notices (ceiling hold display) will be permitted.

The reason for the arrangement shown in Figure (Ha-1) (above (α) or (β)) is as follows. If the appearance of the normal reserve change notice (special reserve display) is allowed without reason, the normal reserve change notice and the ceiling reserve display will be displayed at the same time, which will confuse players (especially beginners) regarding the reserve display. In particular, if the high expectation reserve change notice and the ceiling reserve change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player will increase. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the pre-reading notice itself, or at least to prohibit the high expectation reserve change notice. Also, if the pre-reading notice is partially or completely prohibited during the premonition mode, the player will not know that the reserved reserve exists or is highly likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached, but even if the high expectation reserve change notice indicating this does not appear, if the player wins a jackpot before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the pre-reading notice itself during the premonition mode is completely prohibited, it will also lead to a reduction in the burden of the performance control.

Diagram (Ha-2) is a configuration example that differs from above Diagram (Ha-1) in that it defines a portion of the premonition mode as a look-ahead prohibited section, thereby prioritizing the execution of the ceiling reserved ball change notice. As a representative example, Diagram (Ha-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved balls before the ceiling game (the section from the 996th to the 999th game) is defined as the look-ahead prohibited section. In this example, look-ahead notices are completely prohibited in the section from the 996th to the 999th game. However, rather than completely prohibiting look-ahead notices in that section, it is also possible to configure it so that "part of the look-ahead notices are prohibited," as in (α) of above Diagram (Ha-1).

In addition, all of (A), (B), (Ha-1) and (Ha-2) in FIG. 50 can be configured to notify the number of remaining games up to the ceiling game number by a specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (remaining ceiling number notification effect)". Here, the countdown display itself does not predict the winning expectation rate, but simply notifies the remaining ceiling games, and does not perform a notification function such as a pre-reading notice. However, the presentation mode of the countdown display may be used to predict the winning expectation rate, that is, to notify the possibility of the existence of the current reserved ball. For example, in the case where the ceiling pre-reading notice of FIG. (Ha-1) or (Ha-2) is executed preferentially, a special countdown display (for example, a different display color or a different display size) different from the normal countdown display (display mode when the current reserved ball does not exist) may be displayed each time the operating reserved ball (1st to 2nd ball) that occurred chronologically earlier than the current reserved ball (3rd ball) is consumed, suggesting the existence of the current reserved ball. For example, if a normal countdown display uses white number images, a special countdown display would change the number images to a color other than white (such as red) or make the number images larger.

(Wish 2) Note that, in the above, the specific pre-notice performance prohibition function (specific pre-notice performance prohibition means) in the pre-notice mode was explained, but in the above "case where the pre-notice mode is not provided (case where the pre-notice mode is treated as a game mode belonging to the general mode)", the specific pre-notice performance prohibition function (specific pre-notice performance prohibition means) may be configured to be activated when the remaining ceiling game number reaches a predetermined number of games during the general mode (the remaining ceiling game number can be grasped by the ceiling counter).

This embodiment may include, for example, the following configuration regarding pre-reading notice.
An acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information based on the establishment of a start condition (triggered by the detection of a game ball by the start means);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) for executing a lottery for a winning game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means;
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) which performs a variable display operation of symbols and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stopped display mode of the symbols;
A reserve storage means (a reserve storage area of the RAM 203, S311 to S314 in FIG. 10) for reserve-storing the game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number of reserved storage items until the game information is used for the variable display operation of the game symbols in the symbol display means;
A pre-reading determination means (S320 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading and determining at least the result of the lottery by the lottery means before the variable display operation of the game symbols based on the reserved memory is executed;
A pre-reading notice performance control means (performance control unit 24, FIG. 24) configured to be capable of controlling the execution of a pre-reading notice that notifies information related to the pre-reading judgment result by the pre-reading judgment means;
A read-ahead notice prohibition control means (FIG. 50) for prohibiting the execution (display) of the read-ahead notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition;
ceiling award control means (FIG. 49B, S420, S421, S412 in FIG. 63, FIGS. 64 to 66, etc.) for awarding a ceiling award more advantageous than in a normal state based on a predetermined awarding condition (executing and controlling the ceiling award);
The above-mentioned ceiling privilege advance notification control means controls the execution of a pre-ceiling notification effect (for example, the ceiling reserve change notice (ceiling reserve display) in FIG. 50) that notifies in advance that the above-mentioned ceiling privilege will be granted (for example, that the ceiling game is near, or that the ceiling privilege will be granted within the existing number of operating reserved balls, or that the ceiling privilege will be granted when the pattern change display game related to the target operating reserved ball is executed, etc.), and can be configured to be capable of controlling a plurality of types of game states (game modes). The above-mentioned pre-reading notice prohibition means prohibits the execution of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice during the entire period or a part of the period during a specific game mode (FIG. 50 (B) (Ha-1) (Ha-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before the ceiling game is reached (before transition to the ceiling mode), and specifically, a precursor mode immediately before the ceiling game is reached (game mode immediately before transition to the ceiling mode) corresponds to this. In addition, the above-mentioned ceiling bonus control means specifically acts as a functional unit that controls the game to a ceiling bonus (bonus game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state when a predetermined start condition is met (for example, when the electric support ends, or when the jackpot game ends, or when there is a transition to a game state involving a low probability state), without a winning game occurring (without winning a jackpot), and the number of pattern changes (number of games) executed during a game state involving a low probability state (at least during the normal state) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (ceiling game number). Note that the "game state involving a low probability state" may be only during the normal state, or either during the normal state or during the time-saving state.

(Game mode related to the potential state)
In addition, when providing a potential probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. 76, it is sufficient to determine a variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) for potential probability and a game state determination number YJ, and to provide a "potential probability mode" as a game mode corresponding to the potential probability state and a "potential probability presentation mode" as a presentation mode related to the potential probability mode.

In FIG. 49A and FIG. 49B, the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment is mainly described as the "hybrid type (Tenki C or Tenki D)" gaming machine, but the game flow for the "thoroughbred type (Tenki A or Tenki B)" is basically the same as that shown in FIG. 49B. In addition, the variation pattern allocation tables shown in FIG. 32 to FIG. 40, excluding the variation pattern allocation table for the support time reduction, are substantially the same as the variation pattern allocation table for the thoroughbred type (equipped with only the ceiling function). In addition, the ceiling function and the support time reduction function basically perform independent functions, so each of the configuration examples (embodiments) described above can also be applied to the "thoroughbred type" unless there are special circumstances (for example, circumstances such as a configuration example that can only be realized in the "hybrid type").

<Processing on the main control unit side (with ceiling function): Fig. 51 to Fig. 70>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment (with ceiling function) will be described with reference to Figures 51 to 70. Note that the same components (processing contents) as those of the first embodiment (with first support time-saving function) or the second embodiment (with second support time-saving function) are given the same reference numerals (step numbers), and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the types equipped with the ceiling function include the above-mentioned Tenki A, B, C1, C2, D1, and D2 types (see "931. Types of gaming machines with ceiling function" above). Below, the above-mentioned Tenki A, B, C1, C2, D1, and D2 types will be explained one by one as an explanation of the gaming operation processing on the main control unit 20 side. Note that in Figures 51 to 70, when the processing contents are substantially the same, the same step numbers are assigned, and the processing contents will be explained while omitting them as appropriate to avoid duplication.

[Configuration Example A]
『Tenki A: Non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the start of the game』
First, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side relating to the type of Tenki A, i.e., the "non-equipped type with ceiling activation support at the start of the game", will be described.

Regarding the game processing on the main control unit 20 side for the Tenki A type, the basic processing contents of the "main control side main processing" in FIG. 8, the "main control side timer interrupt processing" in FIG. 9, the "special symbol management processing" in FIG. 10, the "special symbol 1 start port check processing" in FIG. 11, and the "special electric role management processing" in FIG. 21, etc., which were explained in the first embodiment above, are substantially the same processing contents. Therefore, detailed explanations of these processing contents will be omitted. Here, the differences from the first embodiment above will be mainly explained, specifically, the "special symbol variation start processing (step S306)" and the "special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308)" during the special symbol management processing shown in FIG. 10.

<21A. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki A: Figure 51>
The special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) related to Tenki A will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 51, the CPU 201 first determines whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 operation is zero (step S401), and if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 operation is not zero (step S401: NO), executes processing at the start of fluctuation targeting the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 operation (steps S403 to S416). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 operation is zero (step S401: YES), it then determines whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 operation is zero (step S402), and if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 operation is not zero (step S402: NO), executes processing at the start of fluctuation targeting the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 operation (steps S403 to S416).

If the number of activated balls for both Special Pattern 2 and Special Pattern 1 is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), proceed to step S417 and determine whether the special pattern operation status is "Waiting (00H)" indicating the above-mentioned "no activated balls" state (step S417).

If the special symbol operation status is "Waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO), the special symbol operation status is switched to "Waiting (00H)" (step S418), the above-mentioned "Waiting for customers command (BA04H)" is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited.

If the number of activated reserved balls for Special Chart 1 or the number of activated reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are executed in sequence. Note that, as with the first embodiment above, unless otherwise necessary, the description will be given without distinguishing which activated reserved balls are the target of the processing.

When the process proceeds to step S403, the number of active reserved balls on the special chart side used for this variable display operation is decremented by one (step S403), and the above-mentioned "reserved subtraction command" is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S404).

Next, the special pattern activation confirmation data is stored (step S405).

Next, the reserved data stored in the reserved memory area of RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the reserved 4 memory area is cleared to zero (step S407).

Next, the game status information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game status information transmission process, a "game status designation command" is sent to the performance control unit 24. The game status designation command here includes game status information that can identify the game status at the start of the game. When the performance control unit 24 receives the game status designation command, it grasps the game status based on the information contained therein and manages the performance mode in a manner that maintains consistency with the game status managed by the main control unit 20. In addition, here, if necessary, a "time reduction number command" including information on the special pattern time reduction number counter (time reduction number information) and a "ST number command" including information on the special pattern probability change number counter (ST number information) are sent, and are used when the performance control unit 24 displays the remaining time reduction number notification performance. In addition, when an infinite ceiling bonus is granted, specifically, when an "infinite time saving" with no limit on the number of times the time saving can be performed, an "infinite probability change" or "infinite potential probability" with no limit on the number of STs, or when an infinite time saving, infinite probability change, or infinite potential probability that can be considered to be a virtually infinite number of times is granted, in the game state (heaven mode) related to that bonus, the time saving number command or ST number command can be configured not to be sent in order to reduce the control burden.

The "remaining number of times notification effect" can be configured to appear in any of the play modes, including time-saving mode, special probability mode, and heaven mode. As already explained, it is preferable for the infinite number of times notification effect to be an effect that can notify the player that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, an image display effect may be "infinite times remaining" or "continue until the next big win."

(Regarding the remaining ceiling number notification performance)
In addition, in the game status information transmission process of step S408, a "ceiling number command" including information on the remaining ceiling game number (information on the ceiling counter described later) is also transmitted. The performance control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached based on the information included in the ceiling number command, and controls the appearance of the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number notification performance." In the case of this embodiment, this remaining ceiling number notification performance is presented in the form of a countdown display during the premonition mode (premonition performance mode).

As already explained, the "remaining ceiling number notification effect" can be displayed during all or part of the monitored (counted) period of the ceiling game. In this embodiment, it can be displayed during normal mode ("normal mode" and/or "premonition mode"). Furthermore, when displaying the remaining ceiling number notification effect in normal mode, different presentation patterns can be used between normal mode and premonition mode. For example, during normal mode, the remaining ceiling number of games can be notified in a small display area in the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display can be displayed small), and during premonition mode, the remaining ceiling number of games can be notified in a wide display area in the center of the LCD screen (the countdown display can be displayed large).

(Processing route when the setting value is normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not ON (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is sent to the performance control unit 24, and then the ceiling function management process is executed (step S420).

(13A. Ceiling function management process: FIG. 52)
The above-mentioned ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. Fig. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling function management process. This ceiling function management process is mainly a process for managing the number of games remaining up to the ceiling game number.

In FIG. 52, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the ceiling count prohibition state is in effect (whether or not the ceiling count prohibition condition is being satisfied) (step S900). A "ceiling count prohibition state" refers to a specific game section (in a specific control state) in which counting the ceiling game number (updating the ceiling counter, described below) is suspended (also referred to as stopped or prohibited). For example, this is a specific internal game state, a specific game mode, a specific variation pattern selection mode, etc.

In the present embodiment, as already explained, the ceiling game number is counted based on the number of games executed during a game state accompanied by a low probability state. Therefore, there are two cases where the ceiling count is prohibited: a game state other than the normal state (normal game count form), and a game state other than the normal state and the time-saving state (low probability game count form (see the low probability game count form (granting form (β)) described below). In the present embodiment, the former (normal game count form) is mainly dealt with. In the former case, the "probability game state and time-saving state (if a potential game state is provided, the probability game state, time-saving state, and potential game state)" is the ceiling count prohibited state, and in the latter case (low probability game count form), the "probability game state (if a potential game state is provided, the probability game state and potential game state)" is the ceiling count prohibited state. During jackpot play, game execution is prohibited (no new symbol fluctuations are initiated: see the processing route in FIG. 10 where the result of S304 is "=5AH") and the number of games played is not counted, so this does not fall under the ceiling count prohibition state referred to here.

If the ceiling count is prohibited (step S900; YES), the process exits the ceiling function management process without doing anything, i.e., without executing the process related to updating the ceiling counter (steps S901-S902: count update process). On the other hand, if the ceiling count is not prohibited (step S900; NO), it is then determined whether the "ceiling counter" is zero (step S901). Here, we will explain the above-mentioned "ceiling counter."

(Ceiling counter)
Whether or not the ceiling game has been reached is monitored by a "ceiling counter (specific game number counting means)" which is a functional part of the main control unit 20. This ceiling counter functions as a counter for managing (monitoring) whether or not the ceiling game has been reached. In other words, it functions as a counter for managing the remaining ceiling game number (the number of games that triggers the setting of data related to the ceiling award) (for example, see steps S903 to S904 described below, step S421 in FIG. 51, and FIG. 53 showing details thereof).

(I-40-1) In this embodiment, the ceiling counter is set to the initial value of "1000 games" when the RAM is cleared (step S031), when a big win game ends (step S509 in FIG. 21), when the ceiling is reached (step S923 in FIG. 53 described below), etc. If the RAM clear process is executed, the pachinko hall can choose whether to continue the remaining ceiling number of games at the end of the previous day's business as it is for today, or to clear the ceiling counter and reset it to the initial value (1000 games). A ceiling counter clear switch that clears only the ceiling counter may be provided.

(I-40-2) However, the timing for setting the initial value to the ceiling counter is not limited to the above timing, and can be set to various timings depending on the game period to be counted. For example, if at least the time-saving state is to be excluded from the counting target, the initial value can be set at the end of the time-saving state (step S481 in FIG. 53B). Also, if a specific time-saving state (at least one of the jackpot time-saving state, the support time-saving state, and the ceiling time-saving state) is to be excluded from the counting target, the initial value can be set at the end of the specific time-saving state. Also, if at least the probability variable state is to be excluded from the counting target, the initial value can be set at the end of the probability variable state (step S486 in FIG. 53B). In addition, it can be appropriately set depending on the end of the support time-saving opening and closing game, the transition from one game mode to another game mode (for example, the transition from another game mode to the normal mode), the transition from one internal game state to another internal game state (for example, the transition from another internal game state to the normal state), etc. In this embodiment, the ceiling counter counts the number of remaining ceiling games in a countdown format, so the initial value is set to 1000. However, if the remaining ceiling game number is counted in a countup format, the initial value can be set to "0 (zero)."

(I38) When the RAM is cleared (see step S031 in FIG. 8), it is preferable to set the ceiling counter to an initial value at a stage prior to the start-up process of the "main control unit side timer interrupt process" shown in FIG. 9 (step S036 in FIG. 8: setting of CTC). Specifically, the initial value is set after the in-area RAM clear process (step S031 in FIG. 8) is executed and before the main control unit side interrupt process, including the process related to the game progress, is started (before step S036 in FIG. 8 is executed). If the initial value is set after the main control unit side timer interrupt process is started, there is a risk that the game will start before the initial value is set, making it impossible to count the correct ceiling game number and resulting in a complicated process in terms of control. Therefore, it is preferable to set the initial value before the main control unit side interrupt process is started. There are two processing routes in which the RAM clearing process within the area is performed: a processing route in which the RAM clearing process within the area is performed by a normal RAM clearing operation (a processing route in which step S025 is YES), and a processing route in which the RAM clearing process within the area is performed after the setting change process is performed (a processing route in which step S014 is YES).

The "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, established, or occurs, and acts as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling bonus grant opportunity). The "specific event" referred to here is, for example, the execution of a pattern change display game (execution of pattern change), winning a big win, winning a small win, winning a miss, winning a support time reduction, transitioning to a specific game state (transitioning to a specific game mode, transitioning to a specific change pattern selection mode, transitioning to a specific internal game state, etc.), execution of a big win game, a small win game, execution of a support time reduction opening and closing game, establishment of a specific condition related to the game (for example, the number of times a specific flag is ON, etc.). In addition, the "execution of a pattern change display game" may be the execution of a game of special chart 1 and/or special chart 2, the execution of a win change and/or a miss change of at least one of special chart 1 and special chart 2, etc. to be counted.

In this embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine when the trigger for activating the ceiling function has arrived. Note that multiple ceiling counters can be provided as necessary. This makes it possible to accommodate cases where there are multiple specific events to be monitored. For example, it is possible to accommodate cases where multiple types of events are monitored, such as when the ceiling function is activated when either the number of times the pattern change display game has been played reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of times small wins have been won reaches a predetermined number.

Return to the explanation of step S901. If the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), nothing is done and the ceiling function management process is exited.

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 to represent the number of games played this time (step S902), and the ceiling counter value after the decrement is determined (step S903).

If the ceiling counter after subtraction is not zero (step S903: NO), it is determined that the ceiling game has not been reached and the ceiling function management process is exited.

If the ceiling counter after subtraction is zero (step S903: YES), it is determined that the ceiling game has been reached and the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This "ceiling flag" is a flag for specifying whether the ceiling game has been reached (whether the ceiling activation trigger has occurred or not), and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the ceiling activation trigger has occurred, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that the ceiling activation trigger has not occurred. This exits the ceiling function management process.

(Red 1. Example of configuration including determination process of ceiling activation prohibition state)
In a configuration without step S901, when the ceiling counter after subtraction is zero (step S903: YES), a judgment process is provided to judge whether or not the "ceiling activation prohibition state" in which activation of the ceiling function (granting of ceiling privilege) is prohibited (whether or not the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied), and if the ceiling activation prohibition state is in effect, the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything, and if the ceiling activation prohibition state is not in effect, the process of step S904 is executed. As the ceiling activation prohibition state, for example, a specific game state or a specific game period can be set as an appropriate prohibition condition. In this case, even if the ceiling is reached, the ceiling flag can be set not to the ON state. That is, the granting of the ceiling privilege can be prohibited (see step S920 in FIG. 53). In this case, for example, if a certain advantageous state is set as the ceiling activation prohibition state, the advantageous state continues with the value of the ceiling counter remaining at zero.

In addition, when the ceiling activation prohibition state is set, the ceiling counter may be set to an initial value (1000 games) and the ceiling flag may not be set to ON. In this case, the following gameplay characteristics can be created. For example, if we take the example of a jackpot time-saving state (here, assuming that the number of time-saving times is 1100) as a representative example in which the ceiling activation prohibition state is set, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the jackpot time-saving state is 101 times and the ceiling game is reached, the ceiling time-saving state is not activated in the ceiling game, but the ceiling counter is set to the initial value of "1000 games". After that, when the remaining number of time-saving times is consumed and the ceiling game is reached without winning a jackpot (when the ceiling counter becomes zero), the ceiling game at this time will be when "100 games in the time-saving state + 900 games in the normal state" have been consumed. In other words, the player can aim for the ceiling game after receiving the benefit of the time-saving state for 100 games.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51, once the ceiling function management process of step S420 is completed, the random number determination process for determining whether or not a special electric feature is activated is then executed (step S410). The contents of this random number determination process for determining whether or not a special electric feature is activated are as explained in FIG. 13.

Next, the game start ceiling activation management process is executed (step S421). This ceiling activation management process monitors whether or not the ceiling function is activated, and when the ceiling function is activated, processes related to the granting of ceiling benefits are performed.

(14A. Ceiling activation management process at the start of the game: FIG. 53)
The above-mentioned ceiling activation management process at the start of the game (step S421) will now be described. Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game.

In FIG. 53, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the ceiling flag (step S920). If the ceiling flag is OFF (00H) (step S921: ≠ 5AH), it determines that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and exits the ceiling activation management process without taking any action.

On the other hand, if the ceiling flag is ON (step S921:=5AH), then the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 71 is obtained (step S921). FIG. 71 shows examples of ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling awards, such as JTTBL-10 to JTTBL-15 (tables for granting finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, finite probability change, infinite probability change, finite potential probability, and infinite potential probability). In reality, it is sufficient to prepare the necessary ceiling game state transition table depending on the type of ceiling award. Note that the notations "* (times)" and "* (H)" in FIG. 71 are arbitrary data values, meaning that appropriate values can be set depending on the gameplay and design values.

(I-39-1) In addition, the "infinite (times)" in the infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, and infinite potential probability may be set to a number that can be treated as an infinite number of times (for example, 65,535 times, 5,000 times), and may be used as an infinite-type bonus.
(I39-2) In addition, in the control process of this embodiment shown in Fig. 204A to Fig. 204B described later, "0 (times)" can be set, and the privilege state (time-saving state, probability change state, potential state) can be set as an infinite privilege that does not end until the next big hit is won. To explain in detail about the point that "infinite (times)" is obtained when "0 (times)" is set, with reference to Fig. 204A to Fig. 204B, for example, in the case of infinite time-saving, if "0 (times)" is set in the special time-saving count counter, when the judgment process of step S478 in Fig. 204A is executed, the judgment result is always "YES", and the setting process (step S481) at the time of the time-saving end in Fig. 204B is skipped, so the time-saving state will not end unless a big hit is won (see S474 to step S475A in Fig. 204A). In other words, the control of infinite time-saving in which the time-saving state does not end until the next big hit is realized. Also, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) may not be changed (0 is set in the special pattern variation counter 1-3 buffer, and the judgment result of step S488 is made to follow the processing route of YES). Infinite probability variation and infinite potential probability are also the same event, and if the special pattern time-saving probability variation counter is set to "0 (times)", when the judgment process of step S483 in FIG. 204B is executed, the judgment result will always be "YES", and the setting process at the end of the probability variation in FIG. 204B (step S486) will be skipped, so the probability variation state or potential probability state will not end unless a jackpot is won (see S474 to step S475A in FIG. 204A). In other words, the control of infinite probability variation in which the probability variation state or potential probability state will not end until the next jackpot is achieved. Similarly, with regard to the setting of the special probability state due to a jackpot and the number of times time-saving is performed due to the support time-saving (Figure 42), when realizing infinite special probability state or infinite time-saving, simply set "0 (times)" to the special pattern special probability state count counter buffer of JTTBL1 shown in Figure 42 and the special pattern time-saving count counter buffers of JTTBL4 to 6 (see steps S478 to S490 in Figures 17A to 17B, etc.).

In this embodiment, the ceiling time reduction (finite time reduction: 1000 times of time reduction) is used as a representative example of the ceiling benefit, so in the processing of step S921, "JTTBL-10 (for finite time reduction)" is obtained, which contains data for achieving the ceiling time reduction (1000 times of time reduction).

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table (here, JTTBL-10) is set to each state flag and counter (step S922). This creates a game state related to the ceiling bonus at the start of the game. In this embodiment, the "ceiling time-saving state (1000 times of time-saving)" is created as the ceiling bonus.

Next, various setting processes are performed when the ceiling is activated (step S923). Here, the ceiling flag is set to OFF (00H), the ceiling activation flag is set to ON (5AH), the ceiling counter is set to "1000 games" which is the next ceiling game number, and the game status notification LED number is set to the LED output number which indicates the ceiling time-saving state. The "ceiling activation flag" is a flag which specifies whether or not the ceiling bonus is in progress (in this embodiment, the ceiling time-saving state), and when the flag is ON (5AH), it indicates that the ceiling bonus is in progress, and when the flag is OFF (00H), it indicates that the ceiling bonus is not in progress.

Next, a game status information transmission process is executed (step S924). In this game status information transmission process, a game status designation command that specifies that the ceiling time-saving state will begin is sent to the performance control unit 24. When the performance control unit 24 receives this game status designation command, it transitions the performance mode to the ceiling mode. As a result, the game is controlled to the ceiling time-saving state upon the start of the current game (ceiling game), and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413), and a performance in the ceiling performance mode is produced. This ends the game start ceiling activation management process.

(Red 2. Example of configuration including determination process of ceiling activation prohibition state)
In addition, a determination process for determining whether or not the ceiling activation is prohibited (whether or not the ceiling activation prohibition condition is satisfied) is executed before the determination process of step S920 during the ceiling activation management process at the start of the game, and if the ceiling activation is prohibited, the process exits the ceiling activation management process without doing anything, and if the ceiling activation is not prohibited, the process proceeds to the determination process of step S920. The "ceiling activation prohibition state" here refers to the case where the result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role in step S410 is a jackpot win (jackpot determination flag = 5AH). In this configuration example, if a jackpot win is won, it is determined that the ceiling activation is prohibited, and the ceiling time reduction state (ceiling benefit) is not granted. However, in this case, since the ceiling time reduction state does not occur at the start of the game, there is a risk that it will be revealed (previously revealed) that the current game is a jackpot win. Therefore, in the case of a ceiling activation type at the start of the game, it is preferable to cause the ceiling time reduction state even if a jackpot win is won, as shown in FIG. 53. However, in the case of a jackpot win, the jackpot game starts after the ceiling game ends, so the ceiling time-saving state is limited to this game (one game only). However, even if the ceiling time-saving state is limited to one game, the player can benefit from the electric support until the current pattern change display game ends. Specifically, it has the advantage that it becomes easier to win the lower starting hole 35, and the operation reserved ball on the special chart 2 side is more likely to occur, giving the player a chance to win the lottery right on the special chart 2 side, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, when a game state accompanied by an electric support state such as a time-saving state or a probability change state is granted as a ceiling privilege, it is preferable to make a right-hit instruction effect appear during the ceiling game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51, once the ceiling activation management process of step S421 is completed, the special stop pattern creation process is executed (step S411), and then the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412C).

(15A. Game state transition preparation process related to Tenki A: FIG. 54)
The game state transition preparation process (step S412C) will now be described. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing the game state transition preparation process in detail.

As shown in the figure, the game state transition preparation process of step S412C is a process (steps S915 to S916) for storing data for specifying the destination game state (see FIG. 4) after a jackpot has been won in a specified buffer (state buffer) when a jackpot has been won, and the process content is the same as steps S915 to S916 in FIG. 14 above. In the case of the "non-equipped type with ceiling activation support at game start" discussed here, which is a configuration that does not have support time reduction, steps S912 and S914 related to support time reduction have been removed from the process content shown in FIG. 14 above.

After the game state transition preparation process in step S412 is completed, the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). Here, the target fluctuation pattern distribution table (see Figures 72 to 75) is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the jackpot lottery result, the special symbol type, the number of balls in operation, etc., and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the obtained fluctuation pattern distribution table and the fluctuation pattern random number.

Next, the fluctuating flag corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414).

Next, a decorative pattern designation command capable of identifying the pattern lottery result information obtained in the special stop pattern creation process of step S411 is created, and this is sent to the performance control unit 24 (step S415).

Then, as a process for setting the start of fluctuation, the special pattern operation status is switched to "Fluctuating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special pattern operation status), and 00H is stored in the judgment random number storage area (zero clear) (step S416).

As a result of the above, when this special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbols is started. This exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric role management process (step S095) in FIG. 9.

<26A. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki A (processing when fluctuation stops): Figures 55A and 55B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 55A and FIG. 55B are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time process related to Tenki A.

In Figures 55A and 55B, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special symbol role operation timer (determined display time) is zero (step S471). Until the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero (step S471: NO), the CPU 201 does nothing and exits the special symbol confirmation time process.

When the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero (the confirmed display time has elapsed) (step S471: YES), the special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) (step S472), and the current game status information is stored in the game status determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is obtained and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big win determination flag is ON)
In the judgment of step S474, if the jackpot judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S474:=5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot pattern stops (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot judgment flag is set to OFF (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to ON (5AH), and the "low probability + no electric support state" is set (the normal electric device opening extension flag, the normal pattern time-saving state flag, the normal pattern probability change state flag, the special pattern time-saving state flag, the special pattern probability change state flag, the special pattern time-saving count counter, the special pattern probability change count counter, and the special pattern change count counter are set to OFF (00H)), and a predetermined value (00H) is set to the game state notification LED output number that specifies the lighting/extinction of the game state notification LED (not shown). In addition, the ceiling counter, the ceiling flag, and the ceiling activation flag related to the ceiling function are each set to OFF (00H). This will exit the special pattern confirmation time processing.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF)
In the judgment of step S474, if the jackpot judgment flag is OFF (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), the processing of steps S478 to S492 is executed according to the processing state. As shown in the figure, the processing contents of steps S478 to S492 shown in FIG. 55B are substantially the same as the processing contents of steps S478 to S492 of FIG. 17B, so the explanation is omitted. However, in the setting processing at the time of the time reduction end (step S481A) of this example, when the ceiling time reduction state ends, the ceiling activation flag is set to the OFF state (00H).

(Specific mode transition management process: step S494)
In addition, in this example, a "specific mode transition management process" in step S494, which is not provided in Fig. 17B, is provided.

In the specific mode transition management process, the transition control of "premonition mode ⇒ ceiling mode" is performed based on the value of the ceiling counter. Here, first, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter N is the number of games that triggers the transition to the premonition mode. In the case of this embodiment, in order to enter the premonition mode from the 990th game in the general mode (see Figures 49A and 49B), if the ceiling counter N of the current game is a value indicating the 989th game (the number of games just before the premonition mode) (ceiling counter N = 11), the current Tcode is updated to "08H" that specifies the premonition mode (premonition mode transition setting process). This causes a transition to the premonition mode. To be precise, the transition to the premonition mode is triggered by the end of the current game (the 989th game), and the fluctuation pattern under the premonition mode is selected from the next game (the 990th game). In addition, since the transition to premonition mode has already been completed at the end of the 989th game, even if the next game, the 990th game, is not executed, the presentation may first be changed to premonition presentation mode, and the background image may be changed to the premonition mode background image (air combat mode night background image).

When the ceiling game number is counted for games executed in the normal state (normal mode) and the time-saving state (time-saving mode), the game mode for the value of the ceiling counter N indicating the 989th game (the number of games that triggers the transition to the premonition mode) may be the time-saving mode. For example, if a time-saving jackpot is set with 999 time-saving times (when the time-saving number of times in the jackpot time-saving state is 999), the 989th game during the jackpot time-saving state will be the time-saving mode. In this case, there may be a transition from the time-saving mode to the premonition mode.

Here, regarding the transition to premonition mode, if the configuration allows transition to premonition mode only from general mode, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of games that triggers a transition to premonition mode, and whether the current game mode is general mode. Specifically, transition to premonition mode is allowed only when the value of the ceiling counter N is a value indicating the 989th game (the number of games that triggers a transition to premonition mode) and the current game mode is general mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 50 (H-2), if the 996th to 999th games are set as the pre-reading prohibited section, if the ceiling counter value is a value indicating the 996th to 999th games, it can be determined that the current game is in the pre-reading section. In this case, the result of the determination process in step S316 (determination process of whether or not special chart 1 pre-reading is prohibited) shown in FIG. 11 will be "YES", and a winning command with pre-reading prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created, and pre-reading notice will be prohibited.

In addition, in the specific mode transition management process, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling counter N is the ceiling mode transition trigger game number (in this example, the ceiling counter value is 1), and if the ceiling counter is a value indicating the ceiling mode transition trigger game number, it is updated to "09H" which specifies the ceiling mode (ceiling mode transition setting process). This transition to the ceiling mode is performed. To be precise, the transition to the ceiling mode is triggered by the end of the current game (the 999th game), and the fluctuation pattern under the ceiling mode is selected for the next game (the 1000th game). Since the transition to the ceiling mode has already been completed at the end of the 999th game, even if the ceiling game of the next game (the 1000th game) is not executed, the performance may first be set to the ceiling performance mode and the background image may be switched to the background image for the ceiling mode. However, since the ceiling function is actually activated in the 1000th game of the next game, it is not preferable to display a performance that may mislead the player. Therefore, it is preferable to wait in the premonition performance mode at the end of the 999th game, and transition to the ceiling performance mode at the start of the next game.

The specific mode transition management process also includes a game state information transmission process, which transmits a game state designation command to the presentation control unit 24 in conjunction with the transition of the game mode. In this game state information transmission process, if there is a transition to the premonition mode, a game state designation command including information designating the transition to the premonition mode is transmitted, and if there is a transition to the ceiling mode, a game state designation command designating the transition to the ceiling mode is transmitted. Upon receiving these game state designation commands, the presentation control unit 24 determines that there has been a transition to the premonition mode or the ceiling mode, and transitions to the presentation mode corresponding to the game mode.

When the specific mode transition management process in step S494 is completed, the special pattern confirmation time process is exited, and the special pattern display data update process (step S309) in FIG. 10 is performed, and the special pattern management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric role management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 is proceeded to.

In this example, a "ceiling time-saving state" occurs at the start of the ceiling game, but the game mode during the ceiling game is set to the ceiling mode (Tcode = 09H) rather than the time-saving mode (Tcode = 04H to 07H). After the ceiling game ends, the game mode is switched to the heaven mode (Tcode = 0AH) and the heaven performance mode. As data for the ceiling game state transition table "JTTBL-10 (see FIG. 71)" acquired in step S921 of FIG. 53, for example, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 1 may be set to "09H (ceiling mode designation)", the special symbol fluctuation count counter 1 may be set to "1 time (ceiling mode designation for one game only)", the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 2 may be set to "0AH (heaven mode designation)", the special symbol fluctuation count counter 2 may be set to "1000 times (heaven mode designation until the time-saving count ends)", the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number 3 may be set to "00H", and the special symbol fluctuation count counter 3 may be set to "0 times". In addition, if the heaven mode is not selected until 1000 time-saving cycles have been completed and a transition to another game mode is selected, appropriate desired values may be set in the special pattern change count counters 2 to 3 and the change pattern allocation designation numbers 2 to 3, respectively.
[Configuration Example B]
『Tenki B: Non-equipped with ceiling activation support at the end of the game: Figure 56 to Figure 58』
Next, with reference to Figures 56 to 58, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side for the type of Tenki B, i.e., the "non-equipped type with ceiling activation support at the end of the game", will be described.

In the above Tenki A type, the ceiling function is activated when the ceiling game begins. In contrast, the Tenki B type is a type in which the ceiling function is activated when the ceiling game ends. Therefore, the major difference between Tenki B and the above Tenki A is the processing contents of the "special symbol management processing" and "special symbol confirmation time processing" shown in Figure 10. Therefore, the explanation will focus on these different processing contents, and explanations of other processing will be omitted to avoid duplication.

<21B. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki B: Figure 56>
First, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) related to the Tenki B will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process related to the Tenki B.

As shown in FIG. 56, Tenki B is a type that activates the ceiling function at the end of the game, so there is no "game start ceiling activation management process (step S421)" for activating the ceiling function at the start of the game during the special symbol variation start process, and the processing of steps S401 to S420 is the same as that of FIG. 51. In Tenki B, during the special symbol confirmation time processing, there is a "game end ceiling activation management process (see step S496 in FIG. 57A described below)" for activating the ceiling function at the end of the game.

<26B. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki B (processing when fluctuation stops): Figures 57A and 57B>
Next, with reference to Fig. 57A and Fig. 57B, a description will be given of the special symbol confirmation time processing related to Tenki B. Fig. 57A and Fig. 57B are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10.

As shown in Figs. 57A and 57B, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time for Tenki B is the same as the processing during the special symbol confirmation time for Tenki A in Figs. 55A and 55B, except that a judgment process in step S495 and a ceiling activation management process at the end of the game in step S496 are provided.

Specifically, in step S474, if the jackpot determination flag is OFF (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the ceiling flag is determined (step S495). If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S495: ≠ 5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the processing from step S478 onwards is executed. However, if the ceiling flag is ON (5AH) (step S495: = 5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has arrived, and the ceiling activation management processing at the end of the game is executed (step S496), and the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

(13B. Ceiling activation management process at the end of the game: FIG. 58)
The above-mentioned end-of-game ceiling activation management process (step S496) will now be described. Fig. 58 is a flow chart showing the details of the end-of-game ceiling activation management process.

Steps S921 to S924 shown in Figure 58 are the same as steps S921 to S924 in Figure 53. However, in this example, after steps S921 to S924 of the game end ceiling activation management process are executed during the special symbol confirmation time process, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited. As a result, when the current game (ceiling game) ends, control is placed into the ceiling time-saving state, the game mode transitions to heaven mode (Tcode = 0AH), and the presentation mode transitions to heaven presentation mode. As data for the ceiling game state transition table "JTTBL-10 (see FIG. 71)" acquired in step S922 of FIG. 58, for example, "0AH (heaven mode designated)" may be set for the variation pattern allocation designation number 1, "1000 times (heaven mode designated until 1000 time-saving times are completed)" for the special pattern variation count counter 1, "0 (times)" for the special pattern variation count counters 2-3, and "00H" for the variation pattern allocation designation numbers 2-3. If you do not designate heaven mode until 1000 time-saving times are completed and designate a transition to another game mode, you can set the desired appropriate values for the special pattern variation count counters 2-3 and the variation pattern allocation designation numbers 2-3.

[Configuration Example C1]
『Tenki C1: Equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game: Figure 59 to Figure 63B』
Next, with reference to Figures 59 to 63B, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side for the type of Tenki C1, that is, the "type equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game" will be described.

As already explained, this type of Tenki C1 is a "hybrid type" with both a ceiling function and support time reduction, and is a type that prioritizes activation of the "ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits)" even if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, and the ceiling function is "activated at the start of the ceiling game". Therefore, it is basically a combination of the above-mentioned "first support time reduction type (see Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" with the support time reduction function and the above-mentioned Tenki A's "non-support type with ceiling activation at the start of the game (see Figs. 51 to 55B)" with the ceiling function. Correspondingly, the processing contents of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10 are mainly different from those of the above-mentioned Tenki A and the above-mentioned first support time reduction type. This will be described in detail below.

<21C. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki C1: Figure 59>
First, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) related to the Tenki C1 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process related to the Tenki C1.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 59, steps S401 to S410, S420 (ceiling function management process), S411 (special stop symbol creation process), S413 (special symbol change pattern creation process) to S415 (decorative symbol designation command transmission process), and S416 (change start time setting process) are substantially the same as those in FIG. 51.
However, since this configuration example (Tenki C1) has a support time reduction, the contents of the "game start ceiling activation management process" in step S421A and the "game state transition preparation process" in step S412D are slightly different from the "game start ceiling activation management process" in step S421 shown in FIG. 51 and the "game state transition preparation process" in step S412C.
In addition, in that this configuration example (Tenki C1) has a ceiling function, the “support time-saving flag management process” of step S422A shown in FIG. 59 is slightly different from the “support time-saving flag management process” of step S422 described using FIG. 12 in the first embodiment (first support time-saving type).
In order to avoid repetition, the following explanation will focus on the points in which Figure 59 differs from the content of the special pattern change start processing shown in Figures 51 and 12, namely, the "game start ceiling activation management processing" of step S421A, the "game state transition preparation processing" of step S412C, and the "support time reduction flag management processing" of step S422A.

(14C1. Ceiling activation management process at the start of the game: FIG. 60)
The game start ceiling activation management process (step S421A in FIG. 59) of the top machine C1 will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing the details of the game start ceiling activation management process of the top machine C1.

As shown in FIG. 60, steps S920 to S922 and S924 are substantially the same as those in FIG. 53 already described, and only the processing contents of "various setting processing when ceiling is activated" in step S923A shown in FIG. 60 are different. Specifically, when the ceiling function is activated, a new process is added to set the support time-saving flag to the OFF state (00H). In this configuration example, if the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling time-saving state is activated with priority, and if the ceiling game is reached during the support time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state is activated with priority. For this reason, in the "various setting processing when ceiling is activated" in step S923A, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) and the support time-saving flag is set to the OFF state (00H), and when the ceiling game is reached during the support time-saving state, it is specified that the currently occurring time-saving state is not the support time-saving state but the ceiling time-saving state.

(15C1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 61)
Next, the game state transition preparation process (step S412D in FIG. 59) related to the winning machine C1 will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state transition preparation process related to the winning machine C1.

In this configuration example, if the support time-saving feature is selected in the ceiling game, the ceiling function is activated as a priority; in other words, since the ceiling time-saving feature is given priority, the activation of the support time-saving feature is prohibited if the support time-saving feature is selected in the ceiling game. Therefore, in the game state transition preparation process for Tenki C1, as shown in FIG. 61, the determination process of step S913 shown in the figure is added to the game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 14 described in the first embodiment (first support time-saving feature type).

In detail, as shown in FIG. 61, if the jackpot judgment flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH) and the support time-saving judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), i.e., if the support time-saving is won, and the ceiling activation flag is ON (step S913: = 5AH), the processing of steps S915 to S916 for bringing about the support time-saving state is skipped (the preparation processing for the support time-saving state itself is prohibited). This prohibits the activation of the support time-saving state in the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling activation flag is set to ON in the "various settings processing at the time of ceiling activation (step S923A)" in the above-mentioned ceiling activation management processing at the start of the game (step S421A) (see FIG. 59, FIG. 60).

By the way, in a configuration in which a ceiling time-saving state occurs at the start of a game, such as this configuration example (Tenki C1), the above-mentioned ceiling activation management process at the start of the game (step S421A) executes the transition process of the ceiling time-saving state (steps S915 to S916). Therefore, before the start of the special pattern fluctuation, that is, before the special pattern fluctuation start process is completed, the question arises as to whether the game state should be treated as "in the time-saving state" or as "in the normal state" since the fluctuation has not started. If the above-mentioned judgment process of step S913 does not exist in a configuration in which the normal state is treated as being in, when the support time-saving is won, the judgment process results of steps S912 and S914 will be "YES", and the transition preparation process of the support time-saving state of steps S915 to S916 will be executed, which may cause a malfunction. However, in this configuration example, the determination process of step S913 is provided, and if it is determined that the ceiling is activated (step S913:=5AH), regardless of whether it is treated as "in time-saving state" or "in normal state" before the special symbol variation start process is completed, the transition process of steps S915 to S916 is skipped, so no particular problems arise. Note that the reason for providing the determination process of step S961 in the support time-saving flag management process (step S422A) shown in FIG. 62 described below is the same as the reason for providing the determination process of step S913 described above.

(15C1. Support time reduction flag management process related to Tenki C1: FIG. 62)
Next, the support time-saving flag management process (step S422A) for the top machine C1 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the support time-saving flag management process.

In this configuration example, as in the first embodiment (first support-equipped type) described above, even if the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited, the support time-saving winning information (support time-saving judgment flag) is maintained without being cleared until the special pattern change pattern creation process (step S413) is completed (see FIG. 59), so the support time-saving winning information is cleared in the "support time-saving flag management process (step S422A)" executed at the subsequent stage.

In this configuration example, even if the support time-saving is won in a ceiling game, the ceiling time-saving state is given priority, so when it is a ceiling game, in other words, when the ceiling time-saving state is given, the support time-saving winning information needs to be cleared (support time-saving judgment flag ← 00H). Therefore, in this configuration example, as shown in FIG. 62, the judgment process of step S961 is added to the processing contents of FIG. 15 (A) and (B) (support time-saving flag management process of step S422 in FIG. 12). Specifically, when the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S961: = 5AH), the support time-saving judgment flag is set to the OFF state (00H).

<26C1. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki C1 (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 63A and Fig. 63B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing related to the Tenki C1 will be described with reference to Fig. 63A and Fig. 63B. Fig. 63A and Fig. 63B are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10.

As shown in Figures 63A and 63B, the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for Tenki C1 is different from Figures 17A and 17B described in the first embodiment (first support installed type) above in the processing content of "various setting processing when the jackpot pattern stops" in step S475B and the processing content of "setting processing at the end of the time-saving feature" in step S481B, but the other processing content is substantially the same.
In this configuration example, since it has a ceiling function, in the "various setting process when the big win symbol stops (step S475B)", a process for clearing the ceiling counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling activation flag related to the ceiling function is added to the process content of step S475 in Fig. 17A. Also, in the "setting process when the time reduction ends (step S481B)", a process for clearing the ceiling activation flag is added to the process content of step S481 in Fig. 17B.

[Modification of configuration example C1: FIG. 64]
The above-mentioned Tenki C1 has been described as a combination of the above-mentioned Tenki A having a ceiling function and the above-mentioned "first support time-saving type (FIGS. 8 to 17B, especially FIG. 12 to 17B)" having a support time-saving function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned "first support time-saving type" may be replaced with the above-mentioned "second support time-saving type (see FIG. 18, FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B)" (Tenki C1 modified example). This modified example and the above-mentioned Tenki C1 differ in the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10), but the other processes are substantially the same.

Figure 64 shows details of the special symbol variation start process of this modified example (Tenki C1 modified example). As shown in Figure 64, the special symbol variation start process of this modified example differs in that the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role (step S410) during the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 59 above (step S410A) is replaced with the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role (step S410A) shown in Figure 19A or 19B (same process content as S410A in Figure 18), the game state transition preparation process (step S412D, see Figure 61) is replaced with the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in Figure 20 above, and the "support time reduction flag management process" of step S422A shown in Figure 59 above has been removed.

In addition, with regard to the random number determination process (step S410A) for determining whether or not special electric devices are activated in this modified example, the "support time-saving activation prohibited state" in the determination process of step S945 shown in FIG. 19A and the determination process of step S951 shown in FIG. 19B refers to a game state other than the normal state and a state in which the ceiling activation flag is ON (5AH). In this modified example, as in the events already described in the second embodiment, during the pre-processing random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric device (step S410A, see Figs. 19A and 19B), if the support time-saving activation prohibited state is won, the support time-saving determination flag is always in the OFF state (00H), so the processing of steps S915 to S916 (processing for specifying the destination game state in the case of a jackpot win or support time-saving win) in the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in Fig. 20 is skipped (step S912: ≠ 5AH), and the game state transition preparation process is exited. As a result, even if the support time-saving is won when the support time-saving activation prohibited state is in effect, the occurrence of the time-saving state is prohibited (the preparation process for the support time-saving state itself is prohibited).

[Configuration Example C2]
"Tenki C2: Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the start of the game (not shown)"
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side relating to the type of Tenki C2, i.e., the "game start ceiling non-priority activation support installed type" will be described.

As already explained, this Tenki C2 type is a "hybrid type" that has both a ceiling function and a support time reduction, and if the support time reduction is won in the ceiling game, the support time reduction is activated first rather than the "ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits)". If the support time reduction is not won, the ceiling function is "activated at the start of the ceiling game".

The processing flow for Tenki C2 is not shown in the figure, but the processing is essentially the same as that for Tenki C1 described above, except that if the support time-saving feature is won in the ceiling game, the support time-saving feature is activated first. Note that for the random number determination process for determining whether or not a special electric device is activated (step S410), the processing shown in FIG. 13 (first embodiment) may be adopted, or the processing shown in FIG. 19A or FIG. 19B (second embodiment) may be adopted.

(Problems with Tenki C2)
Here, the following problem may occur in Tenki C2. If the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state at the start of the game is completely prohibited when the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the ceiling time-saving state does not occur at the start of the game, so there is a risk that it will be revealed early (the player will be found out in advance) that the current game is a support time-saving win (the same problem as when winning a jackpot described in the above "Red 1. Example of a configuration including a process for determining whether the ceiling is activated" may occur). Therefore, even if the support time-saving is won, it is preferable to control the state to the ceiling time-saving state during the ceiling game (allowing the occurrence (activation) of the ceiling time-saving state) and control the state to the support time-saving state after the ceiling game ends (terminating the ceiling time-saving state and causing (activating) the support time-saving state). In this case, the ceiling time-saving state will function as a "time-saving state for only one ceiling game".

[Configuration Example D1]
『Tenki D1: Equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game: Figure 65 to Figure 69』
Next, with reference to Figures 65 to 69, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side for the type of Tenki D1, i.e., "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of the game" will be described.

As already explained, this Tenki D1 type is a "hybrid type" that has both a ceiling function and support time-saving, and is a type that prioritizes activation of the "ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits)" even if the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, and the ceiling function is "activated at the end of the ceiling game." In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-mentioned Tenki C1, which is "equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of the game."

Therefore, basically, it is a combination of the above-mentioned "first support time-saving type (see Figs. 8 to 17B, especially Figs. 12 to 17B)" which has a support time-saving function, and the above-mentioned Tenki B's "game end ceiling activation support non-equipped type (see Figs. 56 to 58)" which has a ceiling function. In response to this, the processing contents of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10 are mainly different from the processing contents of the above-mentioned Tenki B and the above-mentioned first support time-saving type. These will be explained in detail below.

<21D. Special symbol variation start process related to Tenki D1: Figure 65>
First, the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10) related to the Tenki D1 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process related to the Tenki D1.

Here, among the processes shown in FIG. 65, steps S401 to S410, S420 (ceiling function management process), S411 (special stop symbol creation process), S413 (special symbol change pattern creation process) to S415 (decorative symbol designation command transmission process), and S416 (change start time setting process) have substantially the same process contents as those in FIG. 56.
However, since this configuration example (Tenki D1) has a support time reduction function, the content of the "game state transition preparation process" in step S412F is slightly different from the "game state transition preparation process" in step S412C shown in FIG.
In addition, in that this configuration example (Tenki D1) has a ceiling function, the “support time-saving flag management process” in step S422B shown in FIG. 65 is slightly different from the “support time-saving flag management process” in step S422 described using FIG. 12 in the first embodiment (first support time-saving equipped type).
In order to avoid duplication, the following explanation will focus on the "game state transition preparation processing" of step S412F and the "support time reduction flag management processing" of step S422B, which are the points in which Figure 65 differs from the contents of the special pattern change start processing shown in Figures 56 and 12.

(15D1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 66)
Next, the game state transition preparation process (step S412D in FIG. 59) related to the top machine D1 will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the details of the game state transition preparation process related to the top machine D1.

In this configuration example (Tenki D1), like Tenki C1 above, if the support time-saving feature is won in a ceiling game, the ceiling function is activated as a priority, so if the support time-saving feature is won in a ceiling game, the activation of the support time-saving state is prohibited. Therefore, in the game state transition preparation process for Tenki D1, as shown in FIG. 66, the determination process of step S917 shown in the figure is added to the game state transition preparation process shown in FIG. 14 described in the first embodiment (first support time-saving equipped type).

In detail, as shown in FIG. 66, if the big win judgment flag is not ON (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH) and the support time reduction judgment flag is ON (5AH) (step S912: = 5AH), that is, if the support time reduction is won and the ceiling flag is ON (step S913: = 5AH), the processing of steps S915 to S916 for generating the support time reduction state is skipped. This prohibits the activation of the support time reduction state in the ceiling game. Note that the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) during the ceiling function management process (step S420) when the ceiling game is reached (step S420 in FIG. 65, see FIG. 52 for details). In the case of this configuration example (Tenki D1), the ceiling activation flag is OFF at this stage, so the state of the ceiling flag is determined, unlike the case of Tenki C1 (where the ceiling activation flag is determined).

(15D1. Support time reduction flag management process related to Tenki D1: FIG. 67)
Next, the support time-saving flag management process (step S422B) for the top machine D1 will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the details of the support time-saving flag management process.

In this configuration example, as in the first embodiment (first support-equipped type) described above, even if the occurrence of the support time-saving state is prohibited, the support time-saving winning information (support time-saving judgment flag) is maintained without being cleared until the special pattern change pattern creation process (step S413) is completed (step S410 in Figure 65, see Figure 13 for details), so the support time-saving winning information is cleared in the "support time-saving flag management process (step S422B)" executed at the subsequent stage.

In this configuration example, even if the support time-saving is won in a ceiling game, the ceiling time-saving state is given priority, so if it is a ceiling game, in other words, if the ceiling time-saving state is given, the support time-saving winning information must be cleared (support time-saving judgment flag ← 00H). Therefore, in this configuration example, as shown in FIG. 67, the judgment process of step S961A is added to the processing contents shown in FIG. 15 (A) and (B). Specifically, if the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S961A: = 5AH), the support time-saving judgment flag is set to the OFF state (00H).

<26D1. Processing during special symbol confirmation time related to Tenki D1 (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 68A and Fig. 68B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing related to the TENKI D1 will be described with reference to Fig. 68A and Fig. 68B. Fig. 68A and Fig. 68B are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10.

As shown in Fig. 68A and Fig. 68B, the processing during the special pattern confirmation time for Tenki D1 is different from Fig. 57A and Fig. 57B described above for Tenki B of the same type (ceiling activation type at the end of the game) in the processing contents of "various setting processing when the jackpot pattern stops" in step S475B, "setting processing at the end of the time-saving feature" in step S481B, and "ceiling activation management processing at the end of the game" in step S496A, and also in the presence of steps S476, S477A to S477C related to the support time-saving feature. The other processing contents are substantially the same.

In this configuration example (Tenki D1), since it has a support time-saving function, in the "various setting processes when a jackpot pattern stops (step S475B)", a process for clearing the support time-saving flag is added to the process content of step S475A in FIG. 57A. Also, in the "setting process when time-saving ends (step S481B)", a process for clearing the support time-saving flag is added to the process content of step S481A in FIG. 57A.

As for the "game end ceiling activation management process" in step S496A, as shown in FIG. 69, the process for clearing the support time reduction flag is added to the "various setting processes when the ceiling is activated" in step S923 in FIG. 58 described above for Tenki B. The other process contents (steps S921 to S922, S924) are substantially the same as those in FIG. 58.

The processing contents of steps S476 and S477A to S477C relating to the support time reduction are the same as steps S476 and S477A to S477C in FIG. 17A described in the first embodiment (first support-equipped type) above.

In the special symbol confirmation time processing related to this configuration example (Tenki D1), if the ceiling flag is OFF in step S495 (step S495: ≠ 5AH), it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and it is then determined whether the support time reduction judgment flag is ON (5AH), that is, whether the support time reduction has been won (step S476). If the support time reduction judgment flag is ON (step S476: = 5AH), the processing of S477A to S477C is executed, and the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited. If the support time reduction judgment flag is OFF (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the processing from step S478 onwards is executed, and after executing the specific mode transition management processing of step S949, the special symbol confirmation time processing is exited.

[Modification of configuration example D1: FIG. 70]
The above-mentioned Tenki D1 has been described as a combination of the Tenki B having the ceiling function and the "first support time-saving type (FIGS. 8 to 17B, especially FIG. 12 to 17B)" having the support time-saving function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned "first support time-saving type" may be replaced with the "second support time-saving type (see FIG. 18, FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B)" (Tenki D1 modified example). This modified example and the above-mentioned Tenki D1 differ in the special symbol variation start process (step S306 in FIG. 10), but the other processes are substantially the same.

Figure 70 shows details of the special symbol variation start process of this modified example (Tenki D1 modified example). As shown in Figure 70, the special symbol variation start process of this modified example differs in that the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role (step S410) during the special symbol variation start process shown in Figure 65 above (step S410A) is replaced with the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role (step S410A) shown in Figure 19A or Figure 19B above (processing content similar to S410A in Figure 18), the game state transition preparation process (step S412F, see Figure 66) is replaced with the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in Figure 20 above, and the "support time reduction flag management process" of step S422B shown in Figure 65 above has been removed.

In the random number determination process (step S410A) for determining whether or not a special electric device is activated in this modified example, the "support time-saving activation prohibited state" in the determination process of step S945 shown in FIG. 19A and the determination process of step S951 shown in FIG. 19B refers to a game state other than the normal state and the ceiling flag is ON (5AH). In this modified example, as in the events already described in the second embodiment, if the support time-saving activation prohibited state is selected during the random number determination process for determining whether or not a special electric device is activated in the preprocessing (step S410A, see FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B), the support time-saving determination flag is always OFF (00H), so that the processes of steps S915 to S916 in the game state transition preparation process (step S412A) shown in FIG. 20 are skipped (step S912: ≠ 5AH), and the game state transition preparation process is exited. This means that even if you win the support time-saving option while in a state where the support time-saving activation is prohibited, the time-saving state will be prohibited from occurring (the preparation process for the support time-saving state itself will be prohibited).

[Configuration Example D2]
"Tenki D2: Equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the end of the game (not shown)"
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side relating to the type of Tenki D2, i.e., the "game end ceiling non-priority activation support equipped type" will be described.

As already explained, this type of Tenki D2 is a "hybrid type" that has both a ceiling function and a support time reduction function, and if the support time reduction function is won in the ceiling game, the support time reduction function is activated first rather than the "ceiling function (granting of ceiling benefits)." If the support time reduction function is not won, the ceiling function is "activated at the end of the ceiling game."

The processing flow for Tenki D2 is not shown, but it is essentially the same as Tenki D1 described above, except that if the support time-saving feature is won in the ceiling game, the support time-saving feature is activated first. Note that for the random number determination process for determining whether or not the special electric device is activated (step S410), the process contents shown in FIG. 13 (first embodiment) may be adopted, or the process contents shown in FIG. 19A or FIG. 19B (second embodiment) may be adopted.

(Counting method for the ceiling number of games)
The ceiling counter according to the present embodiment may function as follows (I71) or (I72) according to the game state. Which counting mode to adopt can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.
(I-71) At least during the support time-saving state, the value of the ceiling counter is not updated (counted) (the value of the ceiling counter is maintained). In this case, since the value of the ceiling counter is not updated during the support time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling function from being activated during the support time-saving state. This configuration example is suitable for the following case, for example. If the number of time-saving times of the support time-saving is greater than the number of time-saving times of the ceiling time-saving (for example, the number of support time-saving times = 200 times, the number of ceiling time-saving times = 100 times, etc.), there may be a case where the remaining number of time-saving times of the support time-saving is greater than the number of time-saving times of the ceiling time-saving when the ceiling time-saving is granted. In this case, if the ceiling time-saving is granted, the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the case of a game in which such a case may occur, the value of the ceiling counter during the support time-saving state is not updated, and the update of the ceiling counter is resumed after the support time-saving ends. This allows the ceiling privilege to fully play its role as a rescue function.
(I-72-1) However, the value of the ceiling counter may be updated at least during the support time-saving state. In this case, the number of games executed during the support time-saving state is counted as the ceiling game number. That is, the player can aim to reach the ceiling while taking advantage of the electric support state during the support time-saving state. However, there is a possibility that the ceiling function will be activated during the support time-saving state, and when the ceiling game number is reached during the support time-saving state, a control process is required according to whether to prioritize the current support time-saving state or to end the support time-saving state and activate the ceiling function. For example, when the ceiling is reached during the support time-saving state, it is necessary to determine whether to prioritize the ceiling time-saving (update (set) the current remaining number of support time-saving times to the ceiling time-saving times of 1000 times) or to prohibit the activation of the ceiling function (prohibit the granting of the ceiling privilege during the support time-saving state). In addition, when the granting of the ceiling bonus is allowed during the assisted time-saving state, it can be appropriately determined whether the current remaining number of time-saving times is updated to 1,000 time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving state, or whether the current number of time-saving times is added (+1,000 times).

(Modification of Confirmed Display Time)
Here, the fixed display time according to the present embodiment is described as being set to 500 ms (normal fixed display time: see FIG. 16), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different fixed display times can be set according to the variation pattern. Specifically, fixed display times that satisfy the following relationships (I84-1) to (I86) can be set.
(I-84-1) In the case of a failure fluctuation related to at least the normal mode (particularly, the general mode), the normal 500 ms is set as the fixed display time, but in the case of a failure fluctuation related to other game modes, a fixed display time different from the normal fixed display time can be set. The other game modes can be one or more specific game modes. For example, for one or more fluctuation patterns among the ceiling fluctuation (see the ceiling column in FIG. 75: in particular, the ceiling fluctuation related to the ceiling activation type at the end of the game (similar to (I-84-2) to (I-86) described later), the support time reduction winning fluctuation (for example, see Note 3 in FIG. 72), the premonition final fluctuation, and the fluctuation at the time of entering the ceiling (first spin of the heaven mode), a fixed display time different from the normal fixed display time (for example, a fixed display time longer than 500 ms) can be set.

Incidentally, the ceiling time-saving and support time-saving provide the same time-saving state, but they are significantly different in that the ceiling time-saving is a profit state that is activated when the ceiling number of games is reached, while the support time-saving is a profit state that is activated after a jackpot lottery. Therefore, the effects related to the ceiling fluctuation and the support time-saving winning fluctuation are also different. In addition, the support time-saving state occurs when the game ends, but the ceiling time-saving state may occur at the start or end of the game, so it is desirable to display an appropriate effect according to the timing of the time-saving state. Therefore, there are cases where it is appropriate to effectively use the fixed display time as the execution period of the effect.
Focusing on this point, the relationship between the determined display time relating to the ceiling fluctuation and the determined display time relating to the support time reduction winning fluctuation can be determined as shown below in (I-84-2) to (I-86).
(I84-2) At least the confirmed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation and the confirmed display time W of the support time reduction winning fluctuation are different (confirmed display time V ≠ confirmed display time W).
(I-85) The confirmed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation is at least longer than the confirmed display time W of the support time reduction winning fluctuation (confirmed display time W < confirmed display time V).
(I-86) It is at least longer than the confirmed display time V of the ceiling fluctuation and the confirmed display time W of the support time reduction winning fluctuation (confirmed display time V < confirmed display time W).
According to the above (I-84) to (I-86), an appropriate time-saving entry notification effect can be produced by utilizing each pattern stop period (determined display time), that is, an appropriate time-saving entry notification effect can be executed depending on the type of time-saving state.

(Example of control of ceiling time-saving mode)
In this embodiment, the time-saving state is controlled every time the ceiling is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the following control forms (wing 1) to (wing 3) can be adopted. (wing 1) After controlling to the time-saving state (first time ceiling time-saving state) at the first time of reaching the ceiling, if the next time the ceiling is reached (second time of reaching the ceiling) without winning at least a jackpot, the time-saving state is not controlled to the second time ceiling time-saving state. In other words, if the ceiling game (1000th game) is reached and the time-saving state is entered, and the ceiling game (2000th game) is reached again without winning a jackpot, the first time ceiling time-saving state is ended. Also, when the first time ceiling time-saving ends, the state transitions to the normal state.
(Feather 2) In the case of (Feather 1) above, the ceiling counter is set to 1000 times when the ceiling is reached for the second or subsequent times, and the ceiling counter continues to count, but even if the ceiling counter reaches zero without winning at least one big win, the ceiling time-saving state is not controlled. Also, when the first ceiling time-saving state ends, the state transitions to the normal state.
(Feather 3) In the above (Feather 1) and (Feather 2), "at least without winning a jackpot" may also be interpreted as "without winning either a jackpot or the support time reduction."

(Control example 1 of support time reduction state)
(Feather 4) Regarding the control of the support time-shortening state, if the support time-shortening is won when the probability of winning a jackpot is high (latent state and/or probability change state), the state can be controlled not to the support time-shortening state, but if the support time-shortening is won when the probability of winning a jackpot is low (time-shortening state and/or normal state), the state can be controlled to the support time-shortening state.

(Control example 2 of the support time reduction state)
In this embodiment, a potential state is not provided, but if a potential state (high probability + no electric support state) is provided, it may be configured as shown in (wing 5) and (wing 6) below.
(Feather 5) When the support time-saving is selected during the potential state, the state is controlled to the support time-saving state. In other words, the potential state is transitioned to the time-saving state by the support time-saving selection.
(Feather 6) When the support time-saving is won during the potential probability state, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. In other words, the game state is promoted from the "high probability + no electric support state" to the "high probability + electric support state" by winning the support time-saving.

(Conditions for ending the time-saving mode)
For the jackpot time-saving state, ceiling time-saving state, and support time-saving state, the following (Feather 7) to (Feather 9) time-saving end conditions can be set.
(Feather 7) The conditions for ending the jackpot time-saving state can be set as follows: when the number of time-saving times due to a jackpot has ended, when a jackpot has been won, or when the ceiling game has been reached (when the ceiling time-saving state has been activated: however, this is only applicable when the player has a ceiling function).
(Feather 8) The conditions for ending the ceiling time-saving state can be set to be when the number of times the time-saving function has been activated has ended or when a jackpot has been won.
(Feather 9) The support time-saving state can be set as the time-saving end condition when the number of time-saving times due to the support time-saving ends, when a jackpot is won, when the ceiling game is reached, when the ceiling time-saving state is activated (only when the ceiling function is provided). In addition, for the support time-saving state, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) per support is won in the normal pattern variation display game, it is possible to add as a time-saving end condition. In this case, the advantage of the support time-saving state and the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, or the jackpot time-saving state can be made different.

(Regarding the time-saving function)
In the above-mentioned embodiments, the "time-saving state" is an example of a game state in which the special symbol time-saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each time-saving state of the big win time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, and the support time-saving state can be the time-saving state as shown in (wing 10) to (wing 12) below.
(Feather 10) In the jackpot time-saving state, the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern probability change function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated, but in the ceiling time-saving state or the support time-saving state, only the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated. The advantage of the time-saving state focusing on the operation state of each function is "ceiling time-saving state or support time-saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time-saving state (high advantage)".
(Feather 11) In the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state, the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern probability change function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated, but in the ceiling time-saving state, only the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated. The advantage of the time-saving state focusing on the operation state of each function is in the relationship of "ceiling time-saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time-saving state (high advantage), support time-saving state (high advantage)".
(Feather 12) In the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state, the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern probability change function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated, but in the support time-saving state, only the special pattern time-saving function, the normal pattern time-saving function, and the open extension function are activated. The advantage of the time-saving state focusing on the operation state of each function is in the relationship of "support time-saving state (low advantage) < jackpot time-saving state (high advantage), ceiling time-saving state (high advantage)".

[Variation 1 of the privilege provision form: FIG. 84]
Regarding activation of the ceiling function (granting of ceiling privilege), the following grant forms (α) to (ζ) can be used.

<Applied form (α): FIG. 84 (a)>
(α) Regardless of the game mode or internal game state, the number of games played is counted, and a ceiling bonus is awarded when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning at least a jackpot (see FIG. 84 (a)). In this example, the ceiling bonus can be awarded purely depending on how many games have been played since the current jackpot. In this example, the ceiling counter is set to an initial value when the RAM is cleared or a jackpot is won (specifically, it may be set at the end of the jackpot game (during the jackpot end process (step S509) in FIG. 21).

<Applying form (β): FIG. 84 (B)>
(β) A mode in which the number of games played during a "game state with a low probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a "low probability game state")" is counted as the ceiling game number is also referred to as a "low probability game count mode." Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or the "time-saving state" when focusing on the internal game state, and corresponds to the "normal mode" or the "time-saving mode" when focusing on the game mode.

Therefore, the "low probability game count form" includes at least one of the following count forms: a count form in which "a ceiling bonus can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the ceiling time-saving state", a count form in which "a ceiling bonus can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the jackpot time-saving state", and a count form in which "a ceiling bonus can be granted based on the ceiling counter reaching a predetermined value during the support time-saving state". Therefore, in this example (low probability game count form), the number of games played during a game state accompanied by a high probability state (high probability game state) is excluded from the counting target. In other words, during a high probability game state, for example, even if a value other than zero is set in the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter is not updated (the ceiling counter update process is not executed). Specifically, in step S900 of FIG. 52, at least the high probability game state is determined to be a ceiling count prohibited state (step S900: NO), and the ceiling counter update process (steps S901 to S902) is not executed. However, after the high probability game state ends and the game transitions to a low probability game state, the ceiling counter update process is executed each time a game is played during the low probability game state.

Figure 84 (B) shows a representative case where this example (grant type (β)) is applied to jackpots with different ST counts, such as a 4R time-saving jackpot (which may have a support time-saving) (time-saving state with 100 time-saving times: hereafter referred to as "time-saving A"), a special jackpot 1 with 100 ST times (not shown), a special jackpot 2 with "ST times 25 times + time-saving times 75 times" (not shown), and a special jackpot 3 with "ST times 25 times + time-saving times 75 times" (not shown). In the figure, all three are shown as "jackpots that grant 100 electric support times" to make it easier to compare. For each jackpot, the number of games required from the end of electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) is as follows.

84(B), in the case of a jackpot that grants time-saving A, the game is shifted to a time-saving state with 100 time-saving times after the jackpot game ends, and these 100 time-saving times are counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time-saving A" in FIG. 84(B)).
On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving special jackpot, the number of games from the end of the electric support to reaching the ceiling varies depending on the number of STs.

"ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in Figure 84 (b) respectively indicate the cases where the above-mentioned special time-saving jackpot 3, special time-saving jackpot 2, and special time-saving jackpot 1 are won.
(A) In the case of ST25 (25 STs + 75 time-saving times), the 75 time-saving times after the end of ST 25 are counted, so the required number of games X is “925 games.”
(B) In the case of ST75 (75 STs + 25 time-saving times), the 25 time-saving times after the end of ST75 are counted, so the required number of games X is “975 games.”
(C) In the case of ST100 (ST count 100 times), the 100 games until the end of the electric support are in the high probability state, so these 100 games are excluded from the count. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In other words, the relatively lower the profitability of the time-saving high probability jackpot, the fewer the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the ceiling number of games.

To summarize the relationships shown in the figure, the relationship for the above "required number of games X" is "Time-saving A (time-saving times 100 times) < ST25 < ST75 < ST100". In other words, the more the game mode (internal game mode) with a relatively low degree of profit is transitioned to, the more the number of games required to reach the ceiling after the end of the electric support (the number of games required in normal mode (normal state)) decreases, creating a unique relationship. This "reduced number of games required to be played in normal mode (normal state)" can be said to be a rescue function of a different nature to the ceiling bonus.

(When the RAM is cleared)
(I-48) In this example (grant form (β)), the number of games during a game state (normal state and time-saving state) with a low probability state is counted as the ceiling game number, but here, a case where a RAM clear is executed will be described. When a RAM clear is executed, the current ceiling counter value (current remaining ceiling game number) is cleared, and the ceiling counter is reset to the initial value of the ceiling game number (1000 games). In addition, after the RAM clear, the internal game state is set to the initial state of "normal state", and the game mode is set to "normal mode (general mode)". Therefore, after the RAM clear, the ceiling is reached when 1000 games are played in the normal state. On the other hand, when a time-saving jackpot (for example, a 4R time-saving jackpot with 100 time-saving times) is used, the ceiling game number is set to 1000 games in the jackpot game, but in this case, the ceiling is reached when "100 time-saving games + 900 games in the normal state" are played.

In other words, the number of games until the ceiling is reached in normal mode will differ between when the RAM is cleared and when a 4R time-saving jackpot is used (the number of games to be played in normal mode is shortened by the number of time-saving times, and the effective number of ceiling games will fluctuate). In this case, the following problem arises. When the RAM is cleared, the ceiling number of games is set to the initial value, so if you play first thing in the morning, you will always be playing under unfavorable conditions for reaching the ceiling, which may affect the rate of customers attracting people in the morning. Of course, since the RAM may be cleared due to a setting change, the expectation of a high setting due to the setting change increases, but in the case of gaming machines that do not have a setting function, the above problem still remains. Therefore, it is preferable to count the number of games played in normal mode as the ceiling number of games.

As a means for solving the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which an advantageous ceiling game number can be set when the RAM is cleared. For example, when the RAM is cleared, 800 games is set as the first initial value, and when the initial value is set under other conditions, in this embodiment, after the time-saving state ends, after the probability change state ends, after the jackpot game ends, after the support time-saving end, etc., and when the ceiling game is set due to these setting triggers, 1000 games is set as the second initial value. In other words, the ceiling game number is set to satisfy the relationship of "first initial value (set when the RAM is cleared) < second initial value (when set at a timing other than when the RAM is cleared)". In this way, even when playing for the first time after the RAM is cleared, the game is not played under unfavorable ceiling reaching conditions, and it is thought that the rate of attracting customers in the morning can be improved. Note that, as mentioned above (I-53-3), when the RAM is cleared, one of the multiple ceiling time-savings can be determined by lottery.

(I-54) The following configuration can be used when the ceiling is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the ceiling is reached after a jackpot.
(I-54-1) The fluctuation pattern allocation table to be referenced is common (the selectable fluctuation patterns are common).
(I-54-2) The confirmed display time is the same.
(I-54-3) The time-saving entry announcement presentation that occurs on the first spin of a ceiling game (ceiling mode) or heaven mode is the same.

(Modification of ceiling count in grant form (β))
(I113) In this example (low probability game count form), the number of games during a game state with a low probability state is counted as the ceiling game number, but if the ceiling counter becomes zero during the time-saving state, the "ceiling function management process (FIG. 52)" does not execute the process of setting the ceiling flag to the ON state (5AH) (step S904), but keeps the ceiling flag in the OFF state and leaves the ceiling counter at zero, and controls not to execute the process related to the activation of the ceiling function (in this example, the process related to granting the ceiling time-saving state: for example, FIG. 53 (S921-S923), FIG. 58, FIG. 60 (S921-S923A), FIG. 69). In this case, even if the ceiling is reached during a time-saving state such as a jackpot time-saving state, a support time-saving state, or a ceiling time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the ceiling function from being activated (granting the ceiling bonus).
(I-114) In the above-mentioned low-probability game count form (which may include the above-mentioned (I-113) configuration), after the ceiling counter reaches zero during the time-saving state, the initial value is reset at least when the state transitions to the normal state.
(I115) In a low-probability game count form (which may include the above-mentioned (I113) or (I114) configuration), even if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time-saving state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as a pre-reading prohibited section. In this embodiment, the 996th game to the 999th game of the game mode (premonition mode) belonging to the normal mode is set as a pre-reading prohibited section, and this prohibited section is determined by checking the value of the ceiling counter, as already explained. However, in the case of a low-probability game count form, since the ceiling counter is updated even during the time-saving state, if no measures are taken, it will be determined as a pre-reading prohibited section when the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time-saving state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches a predetermined value during the time-saving state, it is not determined as a pre-reading prohibited section, and thus pre-reading notice is not prohibited during the time-saving state.
(I117) In a low-probability game count form (which may include the above-mentioned (I113), (I114) or (I115) configuration), even if the ceiling counter becomes zero during the time-saving state, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is not updated (the variation pattern allocation table is not changed). For example, in the case of a support time-saving priority activation type, even if the ceiling counter becomes a predetermined value (zero) during the support time-saving state, the ceiling-only variation pattern (ceiling variation) is not selected, so that the ceiling variation is not selected or the game is not switched to the ceiling performance mode, and it is possible to prevent a performance that seems to activate the ceiling time-saving state from appearing despite the support time-saving state being prioritized.
(I65) In the low-probability game count form (which may include the above-mentioned (I113), (I114), (I115), and (I117) configurations), the ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time-saving state, but the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state, or the ceiling counter is not reset to the initial value when the ceiling time-saving state is entered. In this case, even if the ceiling game number is played without a jackpot after entering the ceiling time-saving state, the next ceiling function will not be activated. In particular, when the relationship of "ceiling game number ≦ time-saving number due to ceiling time-saving" is satisfied, the timing when the ceiling counter becomes zero during the ceiling time-saving state (reaching the ceiling during the ceiling time-saving state) arrives, and a loop state of the ceiling time-saving state occurs. In other words, even though the ceiling time-saving is a finite time-saving, a ceiling time-saving (permanent time-saving) that is substantially the same as an infinite time-saving occurs. In this example, it is possible to prevent such a loop state from occurring.
(I118) In a low-probability game count form (which may include the configurations of (I113), (I114), (I115), (I65) or (I117) described above), the ceiling counter is updated during the support time-saving state, but the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state, or the ceiling counter is not reset to its initial value when the ceiling time-saving state is entered. In this case, as in the above-mentioned (I117), it is possible to prevent an infinite loop state of the ceiling time-saving state from occurring.

(Beat 1) After the ceiling time-saving state ends without winning a jackpot during the first ceiling time-saving state (when the ceiling time-saving state has been broken), the ceiling time-saving state cannot be re-created unless a jackpot is won. In other words, after the ceiling function has been activated once, the ceiling function cannot be activated for the second or subsequent times unless a jackpot is won. In addition, when the ceiling time-saving state has been broken, the fact may be notified. For example, the fact that the ceiling function has already been activated, or that the ceiling bonus cannot be obtained even if the ceiling game number is reached, may be notified using a performance means. The timing of the notification and the notification period may be determined as appropriate. For example, when the ceiling time-saving state ends, a specific icon image may be displayed for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined display area of the liquid crystal display device 36, a part of the decorative lamp may be lit in a predetermined color for a predetermined period of time, or a notification may be made at a predetermined timing during the pattern change display game (a predetermined timing during the pattern change or the pattern is stopped). In this case, the information is significant to the player. In addition, the notification may be given at a specific timing (for example, after backup is restored or while checking settings) after power is restored (excluding when RAM is cleared (including when settings are changed)). In this case, the information will be meaningful to hall personnel. For example, if it is confirmed that the ceiling time-saving feature has been exceeded, the RAM can be cleared or settings can be changed, and business can be resumed with the ceiling function allowed to be activated.

(Hit 2. About the preferred activation form of the jackpot time-saving state, ceiling time-saving state, and support time-saving state)
A preferred activation form of the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, and the support time-saving state will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the activation conditions of the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, and the support time-saving state in each game state.

(About the jackpot time-saving state)
First, the big win time-saving state will be described. The big win time-saving state is activated via a big win game, and can be activated during any game state.

(About the ceiling time-saving state)
Next, the ceiling time-saving state will be described. Whether or not the ceiling time-saving state is activated is determined according to the game state when the ceiling game is reached.

If the ceiling game is reached during the potential or high probability state, the ceiling time-saving state is set to "unactivatable ("x" in the figure)". "Unactivatable" here means that the ceiling counter is not updated (counted) so that the ceiling time-saving state activation condition itself is not established (the count update process is executed and the ceiling counter is prohibited from becoming zero), not that the ceiling counter is updated and the ceiling counter becomes zero, that is, after the ceiling time-saving state activation condition is established, the ceiling time-saving state is not activated (the count update process is executed and the activation prohibition process is executed after the ceiling counter becomes zero). In detail, in the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 52, for example, when the ceiling counter is set to an initial value at the end of a jackpot game, if the game is during the potential or high probability state, it is determined that the game is in the "ceiling count prohibition state", and the judgment result of step S900 always follows the processing route of "YES" (in this example, the count update process (step S902) and the ceiling reach judgment process (step S903) are not executed). Alternatively, if a sure jackpot or potential jackpot is won, the ceiling counter is not set to the initial value (1000 games) when the jackpot game ends (the ceiling counter is cleared when the jackpot is won: see, for example, step S475A in FIG. 55A, step S475A in FIG. 57A, step S475B in FIG. 63A, step S475B in FIG. 63A, etc.), but is configured to set the ceiling counter to the initial value when the potential state or the sure jackpot state ends (for example, the ceiling counter is set to the initial value in step S486 in FIG. 55B, step S486 in FIG. 57B, step S486 in FIG. 63B, step S486 in FIG. 68B). In this case, even if the judgment process of step S900 in FIG. 52 is not provided, the judgment result of step S901 will always follow the processing route of "YES".

If the ceiling game is reached during the ceiling time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state is set to "unactivatable". In other words, the occurrence of the above-mentioned "loop state of the ceiling time-saving state" is prohibited. "Unactivatable" here means that the activation condition of the ceiling time-saving state itself is not established (the count update process is executed and the ceiling counter is prohibited from becoming zero), as in the above-mentioned events of the probability change state and the potential state. In detail, in the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 52, the ceiling time-saving state is considered to be in the ceiling count prohibition state, and the processing route of the judgment result of step S900 is always followed as "YES". Or, even if the ceiling game is reached, the initial value (1000 games) is not set to the ceiling counter (for example, in step S923 of FIG. 53, step S923 of FIG. 58, step S923A of FIG. 69, etc., the ceiling counter is not set to 1000 games). In this case, if a jackpot is won, the ceiling counter is set to its initial value after the jackpot is played, or, as described above, after the ceiling counter is set to its initial value when the potential or probability state ends, if the ceiling counter becomes zero, a new ceiling time-saving state is allowed to occur.

If the ceiling game is reached during the normal state, the ceiling time-saving state is activated. In other words, during the normal state, the ceiling counter is updated (the count update process is executed), and when the ceiling game is reached, the conditions for activating the ceiling time-saving state are met and the state is controlled to the ceiling time-saving state.

If the ceiling game is reached during the jackpot time-saving state (if the jackpot type includes a time-saving jackpot that satisfies the relationship "ceiling game number ≦ time-saving number of times"), the ceiling time-saving state may be activated (ceiling priority activation type) or may not be activated (either activation possible or inactivation impossible). Unlike the above-mentioned probability change state and potential state, "inactivation impossible" is not limited to the meaning that the ceiling counter is not updated (count update process is not executed) and the activation condition of the ceiling time-saving state itself is not established. In other words, "activation impossible" here does not necessarily mean that the establishment of the activation condition of the ceiling time-saving state itself is prohibited, but also means that it is "inactivation impossible" by performing activation prohibition process after the activation condition of the ceiling time-saving state is established (the same applies to the case of the support time-saving state described below). For example, if the ceiling time-saving state is set to "unactivatable" when the ceiling game is reached during the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling counter counts normally during the jackpot time-saving state, and when the value of the ceiling counter becomes zero, it is determined whether or not the jackpot time-saving state is in progress, and then it may be determined whether or not the ceiling time-saving state is activated. In addition, when the ceiling time-saving state is generated during the jackpot time-saving state, it is preferable that the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state have the same time-saving performance. In addition, when the ceiling time-saving state is generated during the jackpot time-saving state, the number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state may be "the remaining number of time-saving times during the jackpot time-saving state + the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving state", or the remaining number of time-saving times during the jackpot time-saving state may be treated as invalid and may be the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving state. In addition, if the occurrence of the ceiling time-saving state is not allowed when the ceiling game is reached during the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state may be set to the above-mentioned stock state, and the ceiling time-saving state may be generated after the jackpot time-saving state ends.

In addition, when a ceiling game is reached during the support time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state may be generated (ceiling priority activation type) or may not be generated (either generation possible or not possible). The term "not possible to generate" here is not limited to the meaning that the ceiling counter is not counted (count update processing is not executed) during the support time-saving state. In other words, it means the above-mentioned "low-probability game count form" as with the above-mentioned jackpot time-saving state. In addition, when a ceiling time-saving state is generated during the support time-saving state, it is preferable that the support time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state have the same time-saving performance. In addition, when a ceiling time-saving state is generated during the support time-saving state, the number of time-saving times in the ceiling time-saving state may be "the remaining number of time-saving times during the support time-saving state + the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving state", or the remaining number of time-saving times during the support time-saving state may be treated as invalid and may be the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving state. In addition, when it is not possible to generate a ceiling time-saving state when a ceiling game is reached during the support time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state may be the above-mentioned stock state, and the ceiling time-saving state may be generated after the support time-saving state ends.

To summarize the above-described ceiling time-saving state, the present invention can adopt the following counting forms. Note that an appropriate counting form may be adopted depending on whether the horse is a thoroughbred type or a hybrid type.
(Ten C1) The ceiling counter is updated during the time-saving state, but is not updated during a game state accompanied by a high probability state. A game state accompanied by a high probability state can be a probability state and/or a potential probability state (the same applies to (Ten C2) to (Ten C4), (Ten C8) to (Ten C10) described later).
(Heaven C2) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the jackpot time-saving state, but is not updated during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Heaven C3) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the support time-saving state, while the ceiling counter is not updated during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Heaven C4) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state, but the ceiling counter is not updated during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Ten C5) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the jackpot time-saving state, but is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state.
(Heaven C6) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the support time-saving state, but the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state.
(Ten C7) The ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state, but is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state.
(Heaven C8) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the jackpot time-saving state, while the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state or during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Heaven C9) The ceiling counter is updated at least during the support time-saving state, while the ceiling counter is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state or during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Heaven C10) The ceiling counter is updated during the jackpot time-saving state and the support time-saving state, but is not updated during the ceiling time-saving state and during a game state accompanied by a high probability state.
(Ten C11) Regarding the above (Ten C1) to (Ten C10), the time-saving state of any of the jackpot time-saving state, support time-saving state, and ceiling time-saving state can be set so that "number of times time-saving is less than number of ceiling games (number of times the ceiling is reached)".

(Regarding the status of reduced support hours)
Next, the support time-saving state will be described. Whether or not the support time-saving state is activated is determined according to the game state at the time when the support time-saving state is won.

If the support time-saving is won during a potential or high probability state, that is, during a game state accompanied by a high probability state, the support time-saving state is "unactivatable". "Unactivatable" during a potential or high probability state means that the support time-saving state is not activated by not drawing a lottery for the support time-saving, or by forcibly making it a loss even if it is won. In short, it is a form in which the activation condition for the support time-saving is not established, that is, the support time-saving is always "unwinning" at the lottery stage, and is different from a form in which the winning information (winning flag) is cleared after the activation condition for the support time-saving is established, that is, after the support time-saving is won, and the support time-saving state is not activated. Specifically, it corresponds to a non-lottery form in which the lottery for the support time-saving is not held (including a lottery in which the winning area of the support time-saving is zero), as in the lottery form described in FIG. 19B. If the selection of the support time-saving feature is not performed during the potential probability state or the probability variable state, the state in which the support time-saving feature is prohibited can be set to the potential probability state or the probability variable state.

On the other hand, the activation of the support time-saving state during the jackpot time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, or the support time-saving state may be either inactivation-prohibited or activation-enabled, and can be determined appropriately according to the game characteristics. Unlike the "inactivation-prohibited" during the potential or probability state, "activation-prohibited" during the time-saving state is not necessarily limited to the meaning that the activation condition of the support time-saving itself is not established, but also includes a form in which the winning information is cleared after the activation condition of the support time-saving is established (after the support time-saving is won), and the support time-saving state is not activated. Therefore, during the time-saving state, a lottery for the support time-saving is performed, but the support time-saving can be prevented from being activated. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, a lottery for the support time-saving is performed, and if the support time-saving is won, the winning information can be cleared in a post-processing without being considered as a non-win at the lottery stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, a support time-saving flag management process is provided in step S422, and the random number determination process for determining the special electric role in S410 employs the lottery format shown in FIG. 19B. In this case, the time-saving state is excluded from the support time-saving activation prohibition state in S951 in FIG. 19B, and a normal lottery is executed in step S952 (if the support time-saving is won, the winning information can be cleared in the support time-saving flag management process (for example, see FIG. 15)). In a preferred form, the lottery for the support time-saving is not executed during the high probability state, and the support time-saving is not activated, and the lottery for the support time-saving is executed during the time-saving state, and in the case of a win, the winning information is changed to a non-win and the support time-saving is not activated.

<Applied form (δ)>
Also, instead of counting the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed (the number of times the special symbol varies), (δ) the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is executed (the number of times the normal symbol varies) may be counted. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of times the normal symbol varies during a game state accompanied by a low probability state (normal state and/or time-saving state). For example, when the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is executed during a normal mode (normal state) is counted and a predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, a ceiling bonus can be awarded.

<Form of application (ε)>
(ε) Also, the number of times that a "small win" in which the condition device does not operate can be counted, and if the number of times that a large win is not won reaches a predetermined number, a ceiling privilege can be awarded. For example, if the probability of winning a small win is set to 1/100 and the number of times that a small win is won reaches 10, a ceiling privilege can be awarded. Note that instead of the number of times that a "small win" is won, the number of times that a special electric device operates when a small win is won (the number of times that a small win game is executed) can be counted. Note that this example can also be applied to a small win type support time reduction.
Also, a plurality of types of the number of winnings may be provided (for example, 7, 8, 9, 10), and one of the numbers may be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of winnings to reach the ceiling). In this case, if the lottery probability for each number of winnings is determined according to the set value, such that the higher the set value, the more likely it is that a relatively small number of winnings (for example, 7) will be selected, and the lower the set value, the more likely it is that a relatively large number of winnings (for example, 10) will be selected, the higher the setting, the more likely it is that the ceiling bonus will be awarded, or conversely, the lower the setting, the more likely it is that the ceiling bonus will be awarded. Also, a setting guessing element can be given to the player depending on the number of games to reach the ceiling (the same applies to the "awarding form ζ" described next).

<Form of application (ζ)>
(ζ) Also, the number of times the "support hit" is won can be counted, and when a predetermined number of times is reached, a ceiling bonus can be awarded. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of times the "support hit" is won in a game state (normal state and/or potential state) in which the probability of winning the support hit is at least low (normal symbol probability change function not activated). Note that instead of the number of times the "support hit" is won, the number of times the normal power open game is played can be counted.

The above-mentioned award types (ε) and (ζ) are characterized in that the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus do not depend on the number of times the symbol-changing display game is played (the number of times the symbol changes).

<Special Grant Form 1>
(I-50) If the number of times the time is reduced by the ceiling time reduction is N and the ceiling game number (initial value of the ceiling counter) is M, the configuration can be such that the relationship "M<N" is satisfied.
In the case where the games in the ceiling time-saving state are counted as the ceiling game number (the case where the ceiling counter is updated during the ceiling time-saving state), if the above-mentioned relationship of "M <N" is satisfied, it is possible to generate a ceiling time-saving (permanent time-saving) that is essentially the same as an infinite time-saving, even if the time-saving is finite. In more detail, if the ceiling game number is 1000 times (M = 1000) and the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving is 1200 times (N = 1200), the ceiling time-saving of 1200 times will be granted when the ceiling is reached for the first time. Then, the ceiling game number is counted again from the first ceiling game number (1000th game), so that the ceiling is reached again (a second ceiling reach) before the 1200th game arrives, which is the end of the ceiling time-saving state, and the second ceiling time-saving of 1200 times will be granted, and so on, as long as the end condition of the ceiling time-saving is not met, the time-saving state is repeatedly granted. According to this configuration, even if a ceiling time-saving limit is granted, the time-saving state continues forever, so the ceiling time-saving state will not end without winning a jackpot. According to this configuration, if the ceiling time-saving limit is granted even once, the time-saving state can be maintained until a jackpot is won, so the player can enjoy playing the game with peace of mind.

<Special Grant Form 2>
(I58) In this embodiment, the description has been given of a case in which there is one ceiling game, but a plurality of ceiling games may be defined.
In detail, when the first ceiling game number is reached without winning a jackpot, the first ceiling time reduction is granted (activation of the first ceiling function), and when the first ceiling time reduction state ends without winning a jackpot and the second ceiling game number is reached without winning a jackpot, the second ceiling time reduction is granted (activation of the second ceiling function). According to this configuration, since there are multiple ceiling games that trigger the ceiling activation, a major feature is that the ceiling privilege can be granted in stages.
The first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number may be the same or different. The first time-saving number related to the first ceiling time-saving and the second time-saving number related to the second ceiling time-saving may be the same or different. The performance of the first ceiling time-saving and the performance of the second ceiling time-saving may be the same or different. Here, "performance of the ceiling time-saving" means the degree of profit (ball-out performance) according to the operation mode of the normal power open game (opening and closing operation pattern of the movable wing piece 47).

In this configuration, from the viewpoint of gradually granting the ceiling bonus to rescue the player from a losing streak, it is preferable that the "second ceiling game number < first ceiling game number". When a player is stuck, the ceiling bonus is granted earlier than the previous time, so that the player's motivation to play is not significantly reduced. In addition, it is preferable that the degree of advantage of the ceiling time reduction is "first ceiling time reduction < second ceiling time reduction". This is to prevent a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play by granting a ceiling bonus that is more profitable than the previous time when a player is stuck.

(Examples of ceiling games: Figures 77 to 83)
Next, examples of effects in the ceiling game will be described with reference to Figures 79 to 83.

Figures 77 to 78 show examples of in-fluctuating effects during ceiling games. Figure 77 shows effect example A (effect example A related to the support time reduction priority activation type) for a gaming machine type belonging to Tenki C2 (equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the start of a game) or Tenki D2 (equipped with ceiling non-priority activation support at the end of a game), and Figure 78 shows effect example B (effect example B related to the ceiling priority activation type) for a gaming machine type belonging to Tenki C1 (equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the start of a game) or Tenki D1 (equipped with ceiling priority activation support at the end of a game).

(Example A of the ceiling game related to the support time-saving priority activation type: Figure 77)
First, referring to Fig. 77, a description will be given of a performance example A relating to the support time-saving priority activation type. Note that (A) to (F1), (F2), and (F3) shown in the figure in the performance example A show the progress of the performance in chronological order. Below, referring to Fig. 77, this performance example will be described in chronological order.

Figure 77 (A) shows the state when the variable display of the patterns has begun. Then, as the performance scenario progresses and the reach timing arrives, a specific reach performance (for example, a reach performance for a ceiling game) begins, and the decorative pattern 801 is displayed small (evacuated display) as decorative pattern 801a in the evacuated area in the left corner of the screen (Figures 77 (B) and (C)). The reach performance here is an example of a reach performance that includes a player-participation type performance with a narrative nature.

This player participation type presentation is a so-called "command type presentation" in which a mission (strategy) is presented to the player, and the result of this presentation is a result presentation that announces the outcome of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery).

When the reach effect starts, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a title effect presenting a predetermined mission (strategy) is displayed. Here, a text image 912 saying "Shoot down the disk!" is displayed to the player, and an image of the super-magnetic induction gun 913 (player's character) facing off against the disk (enemy character) 911 that is to be attacked is displayed. After that, although not shown, an "attack preparation effect" is displayed that shows the super-magnetic induction gun 913 and the disk 911 facing each other while preparing to attack, and a button operation effect (pre-operation effect) that encourages the pressing of the effect button 13 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 13 in response to the button operation effect, or the button valid period has elapsed, an attack effect (post-operation effect) appears in which electromagnetic induction waves 915 are fired at the enemy character's disk 911, as shown in FIG. 77 (D).

In the attack effect, the emitted electromagnetic induction wave 915 approaches the disk 911 as the effect time passes, and ends just before it hits the disk. Therefore, during this effect, it is still unknown whether the result of the current game will be a big win, a ceiling activation (a ceiling time-saving state activation (a miss win)), or a support time-saving win (a support time-saving state activation). In other words, the attack effect works as a pre-result effect before the result of the current game is derived, and as a provocative effect to heighten the player's tension. In other words, some of the effects during the fluctuation can be common effects, and in the case of this effect example, common effects can be displayed from the start of the fluctuation to the attack effect (see Figures 77 (A) to (D)).

When the attack effect ends, the "success or failure effect" shown in Figures 77 (E1) to (E3) may appear as a result effect (first result effect) after the electromagnetic induction wave 915 is released, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. The branching of the effects after Figure 77 (D) indicates that there are multiple types of scenarios for this reach effect scenario. Which scenario is executed is determined by a predetermined effect lottery based on the fluctuation pattern information (information of the fluctuation pattern designation command) and decoration stop symbol information (information of the decoration symbol designation command).

In the above-mentioned success/failure presentation, if the "destruction presentation (success presentation)" shown in FIG. 77 (E1), which depicts the electromagnetic induction wave 915 hitting and destroying the disk 911, occurs, then the subsequent result presentation (second result presentation) will be a congratulatory presentation 751 which definitely notifies the player that the result of this game is a "jackpot" (FIG. 77 (F1)). In this congratulatory presentation 751, as shown in FIG. 77 (F1), a text information image 173 saying "Mission Complete" is displayed, and along with this, a decorative stop pattern 801d (for example, "777") corresponding to a jackpot win is displayed in a stopped state. This notifies the player that the result of this game is a "jackpot".

However, if the "avoidance effect (failure effect)" shown in FIG. 77 (E2) or (E3), which shows the disk 911 avoiding the electromagnetic induction wave 158, occurs in the success/failure effect, the result effect (second result effect) is to notify the player that the result of this game is either "ceiling activation" or "support time-saving win". In this example, the avoidance effects are "avoidance A effect (FIG. 77 (E2))" and "avoidance B effect (FIG. 77 (E3))" which have different evasive movement patterns of the disk 911. In the case of "avoidance A effect", the time-saving entry notification effect 780 appears as the result effect to notify the player that the support time-saving win has been made (FIG. 77 (F2)). In the case of "avoidance B effect", the ceiling entry notification effect 781 appears as the result effect to notify the player that the ceiling has been activated (FIG. (F3)). In addition, when the support time-saving win is won, as shown in FIG. 77 (F2), the first decorative stop pattern 801e and the second decorative stop pattern 802a corresponding to the support time-saving win are displayed in a stopped state, and when the ceiling is activated, as shown in FIG. (F3), the first decorative stop pattern 801f and the second decorative stop pattern 802b corresponding to the ceiling activation are displayed in a stopped state. Note that the first decorative stop pattern 801e and the first decorative stop pattern 801f are a combination of number-based decorative patterns (main decorative patterns) used in normal times, and the second decorative stop pattern 802a and the second decorative stop pattern 802b are a combination of special decorative patterns (sub-decorative patterns) that are used as sub-decorative stop patterns and are not used as normal decorative patterns. In this example, the sub-decorative patterns are used to display the support time-saving win or the ceiling activation in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Note that until the above-mentioned evasion effect is completed, it is not necessarily confirmed that the ceiling has been activated or that the support time-saving win has been won. In the case of a "jackpot", a so-called "revival effect" as shown in FIG. 79(H) appears at a predetermined appearance rate. In this revival effect, after the evasion effect (FIG. 79(X)) appears once, the "pursuit effect" shown in FIG. 79(Y) appears, which shows the pursuit of the disk 911, and finally, the "defeat effect (FIG. 79(Z))" similar to FIG. 79(E1) appears, thus confirming that a jackpot has been won.

(Scenario type for example A: FIG. 81)
Fig. 81 shows the type of performance scenario for performance example A. Fig. 81(A) shows the performance scenarios that are selected by performance scenario lottery in the case of a "jackpot", Fig. 81(B) shows the performance scenarios in the case of a "support time-saving win", and Fig. 81(C) shows the performance scenarios in the case of a "ceiling activation". Note that the period from the start of fluctuation in Fig. 77(A) to the title performance in Fig. 77(C) is omitted here because the performances are the same or nearly the same for a "jackpot", "support time-saving win", and "ceiling activation".

As shown in Figure 81, for attack effects, a common effect (common effect scenario) can be selected regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is "jackpot," "support time-saving win," or "ceiling activation." Note that the effects of "weak attack," "medium attack," and "strong attack" shown in the attack effect column each have different presentation styles. For example, as shown in Figures 79 (D1) to (D3), the thickness of the emitted beam of the electromagnetic induction wave 915 is different. Which attack effect will appear can be determined by a predetermined presentation lottery (see the notes column in Figure 81).

In addition, the types of effects can also include unique effects (effect scenarios that are not selected for other game results) corresponding to each of the "jackpot," "support time-saving winning," and "ceiling activation." Specifically, the illustrated common effects A when a jackpot is won, common effects A when support time-saving winning, and common effects A when the ceiling is activated. Each of these attack effects has a different performance style. For example, referring to FIG. 79 (D4) to (D6), the attack effect shown in FIG. 79 (D4) is a "jackpot guaranteed attack effect" that is selected only when a jackpot is won, the attack effect shown in FIG. 79 (D5) is a "support time-saving guaranteed attack effect" that is selected only when the support time-saving winning is won, and the attack effect shown in FIG. 79 (D6) is a "ceiling activation guaranteed attack effect" that is selected only when the ceiling is activated.

The "jackpot common effects C, D, F, G, I, J" that can be selected when a jackpot is won are performance scenarios that include the above-mentioned "revival effect." Specifically, "Evade A -> Pursuit defeat" and "Evade B -> Pursuit defeat" in the success/failure effect column in FIG. 81 (A) correspond to the "revival effect" shown in FIG. 80 (H).

You are free to choose which of the various types of effects shown in Figures 81(A) to (C) you want to select. For example, if you select the type of effect shown in Figure 81(D) as the type you want to select, an effect similar to the effect example A shown in Figure 77 will be produced.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 77, when the result presentation ends, the variable presentation for the current game ends. After that, if the result of this game is a jackpot, a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won will start, and if the support time-saving feature is won, a support time-saving state corresponding to the type of support time-saving feature will occur. In the case of ceiling activation, if Tenki C2 is a "game start ceiling non-priority activation support equipped type," the current game will end with the ceiling time-saving state activated at the start of the game, and if Tenki D2 is a "game end ceiling non-priority activation support equipped type," the end of the current game will trigger the ceiling time-saving state to occur.

In the above, an example of a performance in which at least some of the performances during the fluctuation related to "when a jackpot is won", "when the support time reduction is won", and "when the ceiling is activated" in the ceiling game are common performances has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 80 (a) to (b), a completely different performance during the fluctuation (dedicated performance during the fluctuation) may be configured to be able to appear at each of "when a jackpot is won", "when the support time reduction is won", and "when the ceiling is activated" (the same applies to performance example B described later). In addition, it may be configured to be able to appear only these dedicated performances without using the performance scenario type of FIG. 81, or it may be configured to be able to select these dedicated performance scenarios together with the performance scenario type of FIG. In addition, since "jackpot" and "support time reduction" are determined through a jackpot lottery, it is preferable that the illustrated "dedicated performance when a jackpot is won" and/or "dedicated performance when the support time reduction is won" includes a reach performance (it does not necessarily have to be a reach performance). On the other hand, since the ceiling bonus is awarded based on the number of games played (number of times the symbols change), it is preferable that the "exclusive effects when the ceiling is activated" do not include reach effects (see (B) and (C) in Figure 80 (C)).

(Example of the performance during the ceiling game related to the ceiling priority activation type B: Figure 78)
Next, referring to Fig. 78, a description will be given of a performance example B relating to the ceiling priority activation type. The same elements as those in the performance example A relating to the support time reduction priority activation type shown in Fig. 77 above will be given the same reference numerals. In addition, in order to avoid duplication, the description of the contents that are substantially the same as those described using Figs. 79 to 81 above will be omitted as appropriate, and the description will focus on the differences.

Presentation example B shown in Figure 78 is a ceiling priority activation type presentation example, and differs from presentation example A (Figure 77) of the support time reduction priority activation type described above in the following ways.
In the ceiling priority activation type, even if the support time-saving is won in the ceiling game, the support time-saving state is not activated, so there is no need to produce an effect to inform the player that the support time-saving has been won. Therefore, in the performance example B, there is no effect to inform the player that the support time-saving has been won. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, the performance example B does not have an effect scenario that includes the result effect (F2) in FIG. 77. Note that the other effects are substantially the same.

Here, in the ceiling priority activation type, the performance during the change during the ceiling game can be different depending on whether the type is Tenki C1 or Tenki D1, in which even if the support time reduction is won, the winning information is not cleared until the special symbol change pattern creation process (step S413) is completed (see, for example, Figures 59 and 61), or whether the type is Tenki C1 variant (see Figure 64) or Tenki D1 variant (see Figure 70), in which the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric role (step S410A, Figures 19A and 19B) does not generate the winning information for the support time reduction.

As already explained, in the former type, the support time-saving winning information is not cleared until the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is completed, so even if the support time-saving state is not activated, the variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning can be selected, and the performance related to the variation pattern can be displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 82 which illustrates the performance scenario type related to the performance example B, as shown in FIG. (B), the performance I and H which are selected only when the support time-saving winning is selected can also be selected. However, as in FIG. 77 (F3), since the support time-saving state is not activated, the result performance is notified that the "ceiling is activated" by the ceiling entry notification performance 781, as in FIG. 77 (F3) (see the performance route of the dashed line part in FIG. 78 (D) (E2) and (F3), and the performance route of the solid line part in FIG. 78 (D) (E3) (F3)). It is free to determine which of the various performance types shown in FIG. 82 (A) to (C) is the selection target. For example, if the type of effect shown in FIG. 82 (D) is selected, an effect similar to effect example A shown in FIG. 78 will be produced.

On the other hand, in the latter type of modified example, the support time-saving winning information is cleared before the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) is executed, so the variation pattern related to the support time-saving winning cannot be selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, only the performance corresponding to the big win or the ceiling activation can be selected, and the number of types of performance is less than that in FIG. 82, but there is an advantage that the control burden can be reduced accordingly. In FIG. 83, the avoidance A performance for the support time-saving winning shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 is not a selection target, but in this case, there is little need to make the avoidance A performance selectable, and only the avoidance B performance dedicated to the ceiling activation is a selection target. It is free to determine which of the various performance types shown in FIG. 83 (A) (B) is the selection target. For example, if the type of effect shown in Figure 83 (D) is set as the selection target, an effect similar to effect example B (the solid line effect route) shown in Figure 77 will be produced (see Figures 78 (D) (E1) (F1) and the solid line effect route in Figure 78 (D) (E3) (F3)).

The above-described embodiment can be configured as the following configurations (1) to (6). Note that the parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to these.
(1) a launching means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of launching game balls into a game area (game area 3a in FIG. 2);
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 66) for holding a lottery for a plurality of types of winnings when the starting means (starting holes 34, 35) detects a game ball;
A winning game execution control means (FIG. 21) for controlling the execution of a winning game when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning game;
A game machine including a symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that displays a variable symbol and displays a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol,
A game state control means (FIGS. 4, 7A, 7B, etc.) capable of controlling a low probability game state accompanied by a low probability state in which the lottery probability of the winning is a predetermined normal probability and a high probability game state accompanied by a high probability state in which the lottery probability of the winning is higher than the normal probability;
and a bonus game state control means (FIG. 61B (ceiling mode, heaven mode column)) for controlling the state to a bonus game state (ceiling bonus) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when the number of symbol changes executed in the low probability game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) without the bonus game being generated by the bonus game execution control means after a predetermined start condition is established.
A gaming machine characterized by:
(2) Further provided with an advantageous game state control means ( FIG. 6 (time-saving mode column)) for controlling the ball entry state into the starting means to an advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) accompanied by a ball entry advantageous state (e.g., an electric support state) that is more advantageous than a normal game state,
The advantageous game state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous game state after the winning game.
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
(3) The above-mentioned special game state and the above-mentioned advantageous game state have different degrees of advantage to the player (for example, the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving is different from the number of time-saving times due to the jackpot or support time-saving),
The gaming machine described in (2) above.
(4) The advantageous game state control means
The game machine is configured to be capable of controlling at least a first advantageous game state (e.g., 100 times of time reduction) and a second advantageous game state (e.g., 200 times of time reduction) having a higher advantageous degree than the first advantageous game state, according to the type of winning selected by the lottery means.
The gaming machine described in (2) above.
(5) The bonus game state control means
The bonus game state is controlled to the first advantageous game state (for example, when the heaven time reduction is set to 100 times),
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(6) The bonus game state control means
The bonus game state is controlled to the second advantageous game state (for example, when the national time reduction is 200 times),
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(7) Further comprising a presentation control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of presentation modes related to the game state (presentation control unit 24), the presentation mode related to the bonus game state and the presentation mode related to the advantageous game state are different presentation modes (for example, a time-saving presentation mode (FIG. 61A), a heaven presentation mode (FIG. 63B)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.

(Modifications regarding model types)
The gaming machine according to the present invention may be a model in which the transition form of the gaming state is defined as follows, for example, a model of the simultaneous change type described below.

(Machine 1) "Simultaneous fluctuation type"
The so-called "simultaneous variation type" may be configured to be able to execute the variation display of special chart 1 and the variation display of special chart 2 in parallel. For example, it is a so-called "simultaneous variation machine" disclosed in JP 2015-171527 A. In the simultaneous variation machine, when the target of monitoring the ceiling game number is the total variation number (total execution game number) of the variation display number (execution game number) of special chart 1 and the variation display number (execution game number) of special chart 2, when a normal small win is won with one special chart and the other special chart is forced to stop due to a miss, the special chart that is forced to stop due to a miss is also counted as having been subjected to one variation display.

<About outer end signals>
Next, the outer end signals output from the frame external terminal board 21 will be described. The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connectors corresponding to each channel are connected to the connectors on the data counter DT or hall computer HC side by cables. Each connector (information terminal) is adapted to output one signal to the outside.

The outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminals of the frame external terminal board 21 in this embodiment include, for example, the following signals (1) to (10) as disclosed in JP 2019-058433 A.

(1) "Special symbol confirmation signal (information terminal 1)" output when the variable display of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 stops. Output for 100 ms after the variable display stops.
(2) "Start gate signal (information terminal 2)" output when the start gate sensors 34a, 35a detect the passage of a game ball. Output for 100 ms from the time the passage of the game ball is detected.
(3) "Big win/variable shortening signal (information terminal 3)" output when the special symbol time-saving function (special symbol time-saving state flag) is in operation (in electric support state) and during a big win game. In this embodiment, when the special symbol time-saving function is in operation, it is synonymous with an electric support state, so a normal electric role open extension state flag or a special symbol time-saving state flag that specify the presence or absence of electric support, or other flags that can specify the electric support state, may be provided, and whether or not the electric support state is in progress may be determined based on the ON/OFF state of the flag. In addition, whether or not a big win game is in progress can be determined based on the ON/OFF state of the condition device operation flag or the role continuous operation device operation flag.
(4) "Big win signal (information terminal 4)" output while the reel continuous operation device is in operation. This signal is output when the reel continuous operation device operation flag is in the ON state.
(5) "Special symbol 1 start gate signal (information terminal 5)" output when the upper start gate sensor 34a detects a gaming ball. Output for 100 ms from the upper start gate sensor 34a detecting the gaming ball.
(6) "Special symbol 2 start gate signal (information terminal 6)" output when the lower start gate sensor 35a detects a gaming ball. Output for 100 ms from the time the lower start gate sensor 35a detects a gaming ball.
(7) "Special symbol 1 determination signal (information terminal 7)" output when the variable display of special symbol 1 stops. Output for 100 ms after the variable display of special symbol 1 stops.
(8) "Normal symbol start hole signal (information terminal 8)" output when the normal symbol start hole sensor 37a detects a gaming ball. Output for 100 ms from the detection of the gaming ball by the normal symbol start hole sensor 37a.
(9) A "main prize ball signal (information terminal 9)" that adds up the number of winning balls when a prize is won at a winning slot, subtracts 10 from the total value each time the total value reaches 10 or more, and outputs the signal.
(10) "Security signal (information terminal 10)" output when an event related to fraud occurs, such as when the RAM is cleared (output for 30,000 ms from the time the RAM is cleared), when an illegal entry is detected for the large entry port 50 or the lower start port 35 (output for 30,000 ms from the time of illegal entry detection and release), when an illegal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor (output for 30,000 ms from the time of magnetic detection and release), when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave sensor (output for 30,000 ms from the time of radio wave detection and release), when an illegal entry is detected for the normal pattern start port sensor 37a (output for 30,000 ms from the time of illegal entry detection (200 ms continuous ON detection) and release), when an illegal vibration is detected by the vibration sensor (output for 30,000 ms from the time of illegal vibration detection and release).

When the main control unit 20 receives a trigger to output each signal, it outputs the corresponding outer end signal from information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms, 30,000 ms), but outputs the corresponding outer end signal after a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 ms) so that the output signals are not continuous. The outer end signals of information terminals 1 to 8 are output from external terminal port 1 (8-bit output port (not shown)) (information terminals 1 to 8 correspond to bits 0 to 7 of external terminal port 1, respectively), and the outer end signals of information terminals 9 to 10 are output from external terminal port 2 (8-bit output port (not shown)) (bit 0 of external terminal port 2 corresponds to information terminal 9, bit 1 corresponds to information terminal 10, and bits 2 to 7 correspond to unused).

The data counter DT described above is currently installed on each gaming machine in most pachinko parlors, and the hall computer HC is an essential computer in the parlor that manages the operating status of the gaming machines in the pachinko parlor. For example, when the data counter DT receives the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot in progress signal (information terminal 4)" output during a jackpot, it notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred and updates the number of jackpots. This not only notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred, but also notifies surrounding players and parlor staff that a jackpot is occurring on that machine, making it easy to identify when a jackpot has occurred. Based on various outer end signals, the hall computer HC monitors the ball output status of each gaming machine (calculating the base according to the difference in ball information and game status, the base during a jackpot (number of special prizes), etc.) and the operating status (managing the execution of the pattern change display game and the number of times it has been played, the number of jackpots, etc.) in real time, and monitors whether the gaming machine is operating normally (monitoring cheating and errors), and displays the necessary information on a dedicated monitor. The data counter DT and the hall computer HC are generally configured to monitor the signal input state of the outer end signal, such as from not receiving (no input) to receiving (input) or from receiving (input) to not receiving (no input) (monitoring the ON/OFF edges of the signal) to grasp the gaming status and report the necessary information.

(How to determine the first win and consecutive wins during the ceiling time-saving state: Figure 94)
Here, when the above-mentioned "ceiling time reduction" is provided, if the outer end signal is output in the same manner as in the past, a problem may occur in which the external device (data counter DT, hall computer HC) cannot determine the "first win". For example, when the data counter DT reports the number of consecutive wins, it cannot determine whether the current jackpot is in a consecutive win state. The "first win" in FIG. 94 refers to a jackpot win during a normal state or a jackpot win during a ceiling time reduction state. The above problem will be explained using FIG. 94.

<Previous case: A jackpot occurred during normal operation>
Referring to Figure 94 (A), in the conventional case, the way in which an external device determines whether it is a "first hit" or a "consecutive hit (a big hit during the electric support state)" is as follows.

(Wave 1-1) When the normal state transitions to a jackpot (during jackpot play), the two signals "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" are output. Therefore, on the external device side, when the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" transition from a non-received state (no input) to a received state (input), it is determined that a jackpot has been won during the normal state, that is, a "first win".
(Wave 1-2) Also, when the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received, and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" are received, the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot won during the electric support state, that is, the current jackpot is a jackpot during a "consecutive win". The "time-saving out" notation in the figure means that the number of time-saving times due to the jackpot time-saving state has been consumed and the state has transitioned to normal.

<Previous case: A jackpot occurred during the ceiling time-saving mode>
(Wave 2) However, in the conventional judgment method, problems may occur when a jackpot occurs during the ceiling time-saving state. During the ceiling time-saving state, the special time-saving state (during the electric support state) is in effect, so as shown in the figure, the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is output, and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not output (the same signal output state as during the jackpot time-saving state). In this state, when a jackpot is won, as in the above (Wave 1-2), the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" is not received, and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received, and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" are received, transitioning to a state in which both are received, so that even though this jackpot is a "first hit," it is judged to be a jackpot during a "consecutive win." If this happens, for example, the data counter DT may not function correctly (for example, it may not be possible to correctly notify that a jackpot is in a consecutive win or the number of consecutive wins).

<Case of this embodiment: Case where a jackpot occurs during the ceiling time-saving state>
(Wave 3) Therefore, in this embodiment, a new information terminal X is provided (for example, unused bit 3 of external terminal port 2 is assigned to information terminal X (information terminal 11)) and a signal (ceiling signal) that can identify that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress is output. This makes it possible to identify whether the ceiling time-saving state is in progress and to determine whether a jackpot has been hit during the ceiling time-saving state.

Specifically, when a state transition occurs from "at least the 'Ceiling Signal (Information Terminal X)' is received" to "the 'Big Hit/Fluctuation Reduction Signal (Information Terminal 3)' and the 'Big Hit Signal (Information Terminal 4)' are received," it can be determined that the 'Big Hit Signal (Information Terminal 4)' is due to a 'First Hit (a big hit during the ceiling time-saving state)'. This can solve the above problem (the problem of determining a first hit as a big hit during a streak). To determine whether or not to output a ceiling signal, the ON/OFF state of the above-mentioned 'Ceiling Activation Flag' is checked, and if the flag is ON, the ceiling signal is output.

(I-21, I-22) Furthermore, if the external device does not particularly require information regarding the ceiling time-saving state (for example, whether or not the current game state is in the ceiling time-saving state, the base during the ceiling time-saving state, the number of games executed during the ceiling time-saving state, the number of times the ceiling time-saving state is executed (the number of times the ceiling function is activated), etc.), the outer end signal may be configured not to be output even if the ceiling time-saving state occurs (even if the ceiling activation flag is ON). Also, as described above (Wave 2), the outer end signal may be common to the signal related to the time-saving state after a jackpot (jackpot/variable reduction signal (information terminal 3)).
(I-57) In addition, in Fig. 94(C), the ceiling signal is output during the ceiling time-saving state, but when the information required for the ceiling time-saving state is limited on the external device side (for example, when only notifying the data counter DT of the activation of the ceiling function, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state), the ceiling signal may be output for a predetermined time only when the ceiling time-saving state occurs. For example, when the ceiling activation flag is turned ON, the signal is output for 100 ms.

(How to determine the first win and consecutive wins during the support time-saving state: Figure 95)
When the above-mentioned "support time reduction" is provided, even if the outer end signal is output in the same manner as in the conventional output, there is a problem that the external device (data counter DT, hall computer HC) cannot determine whether the jackpot during the support time reduction state is a "first hit" or not, as in the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction state. The "first hit" in Figure 95 refers to a jackpot win during the normal state or a jackpot win during the support time reduction state.

The above problem will be explained using Figure 95. Figures 95(A)-(C) are the same as Figures 94(A)-(C) above, but with the notation of ceiling time reduction (ceiling time reduction state) replaced with support time reduction (support time reduction state). Therefore, in Figures 95(A)-(C), content that is essentially the same as Figure 94 will be omitted to avoid duplication. Here, the explanation of Figure 95(A) will be omitted, and Figures 95(B) and (C) will be explained focusing on the differences from Figures 94(B) and (C).

<Previous case: A case where a jackpot was hit during the support time reduction state>
(Similar 1) When a jackpot occurs during the support time-saving state, problems may occur with the conventional judgment method (Fig. 95 (B)). In detail, during the support time-saving state, the special chart time-saving state (electric support state) is in progress, and as shown in Fig. (B), the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is output, and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is not output. In this state, when a jackpot is won, the state transitions from the state where the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received to the state where the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" are received, so that, as with the ceiling time-saving state described in Fig. 94, even though this jackpot is the "first jackpot", it is judged to be a jackpot during a "consecutive" jackpot.

<Case of this embodiment: Case where a jackpot occurs during support time reduction state>
(Similar 2) Therefore, in this embodiment, similar to the ceiling time-saving state described in Fig. 94, a new information terminal Y is provided (for example, the unused bit 3 of the external terminal port 2 is assigned to the information terminal Y (information terminal 11)), and a signal that can identify that the support time-saving state is in progress (support time-saving signal) can be output. This makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot has been hit during the support time-saving state.

Specifically, when the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" transition from a state in which "at least the 'support time-shortening signal (information terminal Y)' has been received" to a state in which both the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" have been received, it can be determined that the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is due to a "first hit (a jackpot win during the support time-shortening state)". This can solve the above problem (the problem of determining a first hit as a jackpot during a streak). In addition, whether or not to output the support time-shortening signal can be determined by checking the ON/OFF state of the "support time-shortening flag" mentioned above, and if the flag is ON, the support time-shortening signal can be output.

(I-1, I-2) Furthermore, if the external device does not particularly require information regarding the support time-shortening state (for example, whether or not the current game state is in the support time-shortening state, the base during the support time-shortening state, the number of games executed during the support time-shortening state, the number of times the support time-shortening has been executed (the number of times the support time-shortening has been won)), the outer end signal may be configured not to be output even if the support time-shortening state occurs (even if the support time-shortening flag is ON). Also, as in (Similar 1) above, the outer end signal may be common to the signal related to the time-shortening state after a jackpot (jackpot/variable shortening signal (information terminal 3)).
(I16) In addition, in Fig. 95(C), a support time-shortening signal is output during the support time-shortening state, but when the necessary information regarding the support time-shortening state is limited on the external device side (for example, when only notifying the data counter DT of the support time-shortening win, or when there is no need to distinguish between the jackpot time-shortening state and the support time-shortening state), the support time-shortening signal may be output for a predetermined time when the support time-shortening state occurs or when the support time-shortening winning game ends (when the variable time has elapsed). For example, when the support time-shortening flag is turned ON, or when the variable time of the support time-shortening winning game has elapsed (see S454 in Fig. 16), the signal is output for 100 ms.

(How to determine whether or not a first win or consecutive win occurs when the ceiling time-saving mode is activated during the support time-saving mode: Figure 96)
Next, using Fig. 96, when at least "jackpot" and "support time reduction" are set as the winning type and "ceiling time reduction" is set as the ceiling privilege, the method of determining the first win and consecutive wins when the ceiling time reduction occurs during the support time reduction state will be explained. The "first win" in Fig. 96 refers to the winning of a jackpot during the normal state, the winning of a jackpot during the support time reduction state, or the winning of a jackpot during the ceiling time reduction state.

When support time reduction and ceiling time reduction are provided, at least three internal game states that belong to the time reduction state can occur: support time reduction state, ceiling time reduction state, and jackpot time reduction state. In order to distinguish between these three states, it is preferable to configure the device to be able to output at least a support time reduction signal (first time reduction compatible signal) and a ceiling signal (second time reduction compatible signal). In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which a support time reduction signal (information terminal Y; first time reduction compatible signal), a ceiling signal (information terminal X: second time reduction compatible signal), and an outer end signal that can identify the jackpot time reduction state (information terminal 3: third time reduction compatible signal) can be output as outer end signals that can distinguish multiple internal game states that belong to the time reduction state.

For the information terminal in this example, for example, unused bits 3 and 4 of external terminal port 2 may be assigned to information terminal X (information terminal 11) and information terminal Y (information terminal 12), respectively. In this case, by applying the technical matters described in Figures 94 and 95, it becomes possible to determine whether the current game state is in the support time-saving state, the ceiling time-saving state, or the jackpot time-saving state, based on the "support time-saving signal," the "ceiling signal," and the "jackpot/variable time-saving signal." For example, when a ceiling time-saving state occurs during a support time-saving state, and a jackpot during that ceiling time-saving state is determined to be a "first hit," referring to Figure 96 (A), if there is a transition from a state in which "at least the 'ceiling signal (information terminal X)' is received (in the figure, a state in which the 'ceiling signal (information terminal X)' and the 'jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)' are output)" to a state in which "the 'jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)' and the 'jackpot signal (information terminal 4)' are received," this can be determined to be a win during the ceiling time-saving state and processed as a "first hit." Also, although not shown in the figure, when a support time-saving occurs during the ceiling time-saving state, the way to determine that a jackpot during that support time-saving state is a "first hit" is as follows: if there is a transition from a state in which "at least the 'Support time-saving signal (information terminal Y)' is received (a state in which the 'Support time-saving signal (information terminal X)' and the 'jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)' are output)" to a state in which "the 'jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)' and the 'jackpot signal (information terminal 4)' are received," this can be determined to be a win during the support time-saving state and treated as a "first hit."

(I-67, I-68) In addition, if the external device does not particularly require information regarding the ceiling time-saving state, the "ceiling signal" may be configured not to be output, and if the external device does not particularly require information regarding the support time-saving state, the "support time-saving signal" may be configured not to be output. In other words, depending on the performance of the external device (what information the external device requires), at least one of the outer end signals of the "ceiling signal" and the "support time-saving signal" may be configured to be output. In addition, at least one of the "ceiling signal" and the "support time-saving signal" may be an outer end signal common to the "jackpot/variation shortening signal".

(Modification of outer end signal output form: FIG. 96(B))
Next, a modification of FIG. 96(A) will be described with reference to FIG. 96(B).

The characteristic feature of the modified example shown in Figure 96 (B), as can be seen from Figure (B), is that the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the "support time-shortening state" or the "ceiling time-shortening state", but is output during the "jackpot and jackpot time-shortening state" (see information terminal 3 (jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal α) in Figure (B)).

In the case of this modified example, with regard to signals related to the time-saving state, only a dedicated "Support Time-Saving Signal (Information Terminal Y)" is output during the support time-saving state, a dedicated "Ceiling Signal (Information Terminal X)" is output during the ceiling time-saving state, and a dedicated "Jackpot/Fluctuation Reduction Signal (Information Terminal 3)" is output during the jackpot and jackpot time-saving state. Therefore, when the external device determines a "first hit", if the "Jackpot/Fluctuation Reduction Signal (Information Terminal 3)" and the "Jackpot Signal (Information Terminal 4)" transition from a state where they are not received to a state where they are received, it can be determined that the "Jackpot Signal (Information Terminal 4)" is due to a "first hit". In addition, when the state transitions from not receiving the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)" and receiving the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)," to receiving both the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot signal (information terminal 4)," the current jackpot can be easily treated as a jackpot during a "consecutive jackpot."

The above modified example (Fig. 96(B)) can be applied to both the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in Fig. 94(C) and the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" shown in Fig. 95(C). In more detail, in the case of Fig. 94(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time-shortening state, but is output during a jackpot and during the jackpot time-shortening state. Also, in the case of Fig. 95(C), the "jackpot/fluctuation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the support time-shortening state, but is output during a jackpot and during the jackpot time-shortening state.

(Stone 1) When this modified example (Fig. 96 (B)) is applied to the case of Fig. 94 (C), the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the ceiling time shortening state, so it can be determined as a "first hit" or a "jackpot during consecutive wins" using the same method as Fig. 94 (A). Specifically, when the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" transition from a state where they are not received to a state where they are received, it can be determined that the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is due to a "first hit (a jackpot win during the ceiling time shortening state)". Also, when the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" transitions from a state where the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received to a state where the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" are received, it can be determined that the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is due to a "jackpot during consecutive wins".

(Stone 2) In addition, when this modified example is applied to the case of FIG. 94 (C), since the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is not output during the support time shortening state, it can be determined that it is a "first hit" or a "jackpot during consecutive wins" using the same method as FIG. 95 (A). Specifically, when the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" transition from a state where they are not received to a state where they are received, it can be determined that the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is due to a "first hit (a jackpot win during the support time shortening state)". In addition, when the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is not received and the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" transitions from a state where the above-mentioned "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" is received to a state where the "jackpot/variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" and the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" are received, it can be determined that the "jackpot during signal (information terminal 4)" is due to a "jackpot during consecutive wins".

The configuration of FIG. 96(B) described above makes it possible to distinguish between time-saving states without increasing the control burden on the external device, even when there are multiple time-saving states. As a result, even when there are multiple time-saving states, the process of distinguishing between first hits and jackpots during consecutive wins, the process of counting the number of jackpots during consecutive wins including first hits, and other processes of calculating the base for each time-saving state are not complicated, which contributes to reducing the control burden on the external device.

[Examples of effects when entering the ceiling time-saving state from a certain game state: Figures 85 to 90]
Next, referring to Figures 85 to 90, a description will be given of examples of effects when the ceiling function is activated by reaching the ceiling from a certain game state, and the game enters a ceiling bonus state. Here, the following cases will be described: a type with a ceiling function that activates at the start of a game (Figures 85 to 87) and a type with a ceiling function that activates at the end of a game (Figures 88 to 90).

To simplify the explanation, the count format is the "low probability game count format" described above, the ceiling number of games is set to "1000 games", and the ceiling bonus is set to "ceiling time reduction (1000 times of time reduction)" (This will be explained as a representative example (same as Figures 86 to 90 described later).

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the start of the game)>
(I-119-120) Figure 85 shows an example of the presentation when the ceiling is reached repeatedly in a game where the ceiling is activated at the start of the game.

Referring to Figure 85, the first time (1st time) is shown as a case where the ceiling is reached from the normal state, and the second time is shown as a case where the ceiling is reached from the ceiling time-saving state. When the ceiling is reached consecutively, it is preferable to use the presentation content described below.

(When the ceiling is reached for the first time)
In the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the start of the pattern variation (start of the game) of the ceiling game (1000th spin), and the ceiling time-saving state occurs (for example, see Figs. 51 to 55 (Tenki A), Figs. 59 to 63B (Tenki C1), and Fig. 64 (variation of Tenki C1)). Therefore, the start of the 1000th spin game is triggered to execute a "performance screen transition performance". This performance screen transition performance is a performance that can be executed at the time of game mode transition or performance mode transition, and has performance content that can notify the game mode transition or performance mode transition. Representative examples include, for example, a "blackout performance" and a so-called "shutter performance" that changes the background image before and after the shutter display. In addition, with the activation of the ceiling function, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S923 in Fig. 53, step S923A in Fig. 60). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state, it outputs a ceiling-in-state signal as an outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). This sends a message to an external device (such as the hall computer HC or the data counter DT) that the ceiling time-shortening state is in effect.

Then, when the transitional effect is completed, the effect screen for the ceiling effect mode is displayed, and the reaching of the ceiling is notified (the ceiling entry notification shown in the figure). At this time, along with a predetermined variation effect (for example, an effect including the ceiling entry notification effect 781 of Note 1 in FIG. 49B), as the first right hit instruction effect, a large effect image or text image of "⇒ Hit right!" or "It's too much!" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen (the right hit notification (large) shown in the figure), and as the second right hit instruction effect, a small "⇒" image is displayed in the right corner of the liquid crystal screen (the right hit notification (small) shown in the figure), and the right hit notification LED (right hit display device 39b) is lit. This allows the player to understand that he has entered a "right hit advantageous" state, and he starts hitting right. Note that the first right hit instruction effect (right hit notification (large)) does not need to be displayed on a large scale forever, so it is ended in the middle of the game, and the second right hit instruction effect (right hit notification (small)) is continuously notified. In addition, the right-hit notification LED (right-hit display device 39b) will remain lit until the electric support state ends.

When the ceiling game ends, the game mode is switched to "heaven mode" and the effects in the heaven effect mode are displayed. Note that the "remaining ceiling number notification effect (remaining ceiling number of games notification as shown)" which notifies the remaining number of ceiling games until the next ceiling game number in a dramatic way and/or the "remaining time-saving number notification effect (not shown)" which notifies the remaining number of time-saving times in a dramatic way may or may not be executed (the same applies to Figures 86 to 90 described below). Also, in this example, the series of effects that appear in the ceiling game are, for example, effects based on "ceiling fluctuation (see the "ceiling" column in Figure 75)" (the same applies to Figures 86 to 90 described below).

(Beat 5) In addition, even if a normal symbol variation display game (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol game") is started before the start of the ceiling game and the ceiling game is started during that game, the ceiling entry notification effect is executed. In this example, an effect including a transition to the display screen before the ceiling entry notification effect is executed is also executed. Here, in the case where the normal symbol game starts before the ceiling game starts, the normal symbol time-saving function is not activated because the normal symbol game starts during the normal state, and a normal symbol game with a relatively long variation time is executed (there is also a case where it does not end during the ceiling game: see the dashed line in the figure), and after the ceiling game starts, that is, after the ceiling time-saving state is entered, the normal symbol game ends, but since the normal symbol game was started during the normal state, the opening extension function is not given, and the electric support state does not occur even though it is during the ceiling time-saving state. For this reason, when the gaming machine is viewed as a whole, the time-saving state is not complete at the start of the ceiling game, but in the present invention, regardless of whether the normal game is being executed or not, the effects related to the special game side are made to appear independently of the effects related to the normal game, and the effects are controlled so that the notification of the ceiling game entry event is given priority (the same applies to Figures 87 to 93 described later). In this regard, a similar event may occur in a case where a normal game is executed during a winning game of the support time-saving, and the normal game ends after entering the support time-saving state (a case where a normal game is executed from before entering the support time-saving state to after entering). For this reason, even if the normal game is being executed when the support time-saving state is entered (independently regardless of whether the normal game is being executed or not), a ceiling entry notification effect (for example, the time-saving entry notification effect 780 shown in Figure 6 (A), or the time-saving entry notification effect 871 shown in Figure 47, etc.) is displayed. In addition, if a normal power release game is executed based on the game status at the start of the normal game when a supplementary hit is made, in this case, as described above, the electric support state will not occur, which will cause a disadvantage to the player, so for normal games, it is preferable to execute the normal power release game based on the game status at the end of the normal game.

(When the ceiling is reached for the second time)
As the game progresses, the 2000th spin, that is, the second ceiling game, is reached without winning the jackpot, and the ceiling function is activated again to grant the ceiling time reduction. In this second ceiling game, the effects related to the ceiling time reduction entry, such as the "effect screen transition effect" that appeared in the first ceiling game and the first right hit instruction effect that displays a large "right hit →" image, have already been performed, so they are not displayed again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification effect (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" that notifies that the ceiling time reduction state is continuing may be displayed. In addition, the newly updated number of time reductions may be notified by the remaining ceiling number notification effect (remaining ceiling number of games notification shown in the figure). Note that neither the ceiling continuation notification effect nor the remaining ceiling number notification effect may be executed, or at least one of them may be executed.

Thus, the presentation during the second and subsequent ceiling games is different from the presentation during the first ceiling game, but this configuration is characterized in that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort by providing presentation that corresponds to the game progress. Note that the number of consecutive wins before the ceiling function is activated (reaching the ceiling) can be managed by the main control unit 20, and this information can be sent to the presentation control unit 24, allowing the presentation control unit 24 to manage the number of consecutive wins as well (the same applies to the presentation example shown in Figure 88 described below).

(Variation: I-121)
In the above, it has been explained that the effects during the second and subsequent ceiling games are different from those during the first ceiling game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects executed during the first ceiling game (when the ceiling is reached from the normal state) and the effects executed during the second and subsequent consecutive ceiling games (when the ceiling is reached from the ceiling time-saving state) may be common (same) effects. According to this configuration, it is to make it easier for the player to understand that the ceiling count has been reset again, that is, that the ceiling function has been activated again and the ceiling privilege has been granted. The same ceiling fluctuation is selected for the first and second games and after, and the effects based on this are also common, which leads to a reduction in the control burden. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ceiling is reached for the second and subsequent games in a very rare case in terms of the probability of winning a jackpot. In such a case, it is considered that there is no particular problem in executing the same effects every time the ceiling is reached in succession. The example of (I-121) is also the same for FIG. 88 described later.

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the start of the game)>
(I-122) The example of the performance in Figure 86 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time-saving state, and the ceiling time-saving state that activates the ceiling at the start of the game is activated as a ceiling bonus. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figure 85 are omitted to avoid duplication.

Referring to FIG. 86, when the 1000th spin ceiling game is started, the above-mentioned "effect screen transition effect (shutter effect)" appears as a trigger for the start of the game. In addition, as the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state. When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag has been set to the ON state, it outputs a ceiling activation signal as an outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). This is the same as the case in FIG. 85.

However, in this example, before the ceiling time reduction occurs, the jackpot time reduction state is in progress, so the "easy to win flag" that specifies that the electric support state is in progress is in the ON state, and based on this flag, the "jackpot time reduction signal" indicating the jackpot time reduction state is output as an outer end signal (ON state = output, OFF state = output stopped). This easy to win flag may use the normal electric device open extension state flag or the special pattern time reduction state flag that specifies whether the electric support state is in progress or not, or it may be a flag that is separately provided to specify whether the electric support state is in progress or not. This sends the fact that the jackpot time reduction state is in progress to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). Note that, although the jackpot time reduction signal and easy to win flag are in the OFF state at the timing of activation of the ceiling function (for example, the timing when the ceiling activation flag is ON), the easy to win flag may be configured to maintain the ON state and not output only the jackpot time reduction signal. Also, even if the easy-to-win flag remains ON, the jackpot time-saving signal may not be output if the ceiling activation flag is ON.

If the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state occurs, the "right-hit favorable" electric support state has already occurred before the ceiling was reached, so the "right-hit notification (small) + right-hit LED" continues and there is no need to loudly notify the "right-hit favorable" situation again (see the illustrated "right-hit notification (small) + right-hit LED"). Therefore, in this example, the above-mentioned "first right-hit instruction performance (right-hit notification (large))" is not executed.

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during support time-saving mode (when the ceiling is activated at the start of the game)>
(I-124) The example of the performance in Figure 87 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the support time-saving state, and the ceiling time-saving state that activates the ceiling at the start of the game is activated as a ceiling privilege. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figures 85 and 86 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

Referring to FIG. 87, as can be seen from the contents of the figure, the presentation during the ceiling game on the 1000th spin is essentially the same as that described in FIG. 86, except that the jackpot time-saving state shown in FIG. 86 is replaced with the support time-saving state, and even if the ceiling is reached from the support time-saving state, the presentation is essentially the same as that described in FIG. 86. Similarly, for the 999th spin just before the ceiling, the presentation is essentially the same as that described in FIG. 86, except that the jackpot time-saving state shown in FIG. 86 is replaced with the support time-saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid repetition, the explanation will focus on the outer end signal shown in the figure.

In this example, before the ceiling time-saving state occurs, the support time-saving flag is ON, and based on this flag, a "support time-saving signal" indicating the support time-saving state is output as an outer end signal. This causes an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT) to be notified that the support time-saving state is in progress. Note that, although the support time-saving signal and the support time-saving flag are turned OFF at the timing of activation of the ceiling function, the support time-saving flag may be kept ON and only the support time-saving signal may not be output. Also, even if the support time-saving flag is left ON, the support time-saving signal may not be output on the condition that the ceiling activation flag is ON.

(I-124) In addition, when the support time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are not configured in a common presentation mode but in separate presentation modes (for example, the time-saving presentation mode and the ceiling presentation mode), in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached, a presentation screen transition presentation, a ceiling entry notification presentation, etc. are performed. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern distribution table ("FH90" shown in FIG. 75: see the "ceiling" column in the same figure) is used, and the fluctuation pattern distribution table for time-saving used during the support time-saving state (FIGS. 40 and 41) is not used. In the case where the support time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are in a common presentation mode, the presentation mode may be continued. In the figure, an example is shown in which the presentation mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving presentation mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving presentation mode (support time-saving presentation mode) dedicated to the support time-saving state may be provided. This (I-124) is also the same as FIG. 90 described later.

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during the ceiling time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game)>
Figure 88 shows an example of the presentation in the case where the ceiling is reached consecutively in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, similar to the above-mentioned Figure 86. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figures 85 to 87 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

(When the ceiling is reached for the first time)
In the case of the game end ceiling activation type, as already explained, the ceiling function is activated at the end of the fixed display time (game end) of the ceiling game (1000th spin), and the ceiling time-saving state occurs (for example, see Figures 56 to 58 (Tenki B), Figures 65 to 69 (Tenki D1), and Figure 70 (variation of Tenki D1)). Therefore, regardless of whether the next game is started or not, the ceiling time-saving state is entered after the ceiling game ends (after a predetermined pattern fixed display time has elapsed) (see after the illustrated pattern stop period has elapsed). Therefore, in this example, a unique performance system that is not present in the game start ceiling activation type is executed. Note that this performance example deals with a case in which the game end ceiling activation type is adopted, so here is an example in which the above-mentioned "special ceiling mode form" is adopted. In the special ceiling mode form, as already explained, the next game after the ceiling game number (in this example, the 1001st spin) is made to function as a game mode for ceiling activation notification and a performance mode related thereto. In this regard, the 1001st rotation is shown as "ceiling (heaven)" in the figures in order to function as a pseudo ceiling mode (the same applies to Figures 89 to 93 described later).

In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, focusing on the fact that the ceiling time-saving state is entered at the end of the ceiling game, when the symbol change time of the ceiling game (1000th spin) has elapsed (for example, a specified timing between the time when the symbol change time has elapsed and before the fixed display time has elapsed), a "ceiling activation effect" is executed that can notify that the ceiling function will be activated (that the ceiling function will be activated in the future (advance notification of ceiling activation)) or that the ceiling function is being activated (that the player is in the ceiling time-saving state). This ceiling activation effect may be a ceiling entry notification effect.

As shown in the figure, the above ceiling activation effect can be executed until the next game starts. This allows notification that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress even if there are no active reserved balls at the end of the ceiling game and the game enters a waiting period for customers. The ceiling activation effect is also suitable for the ceiling activation type at the end of a game, in that it can notify that a right-hit situation is essentially favorable even if the right-hit instruction effect has not appeared. In this example, because a special ceiling mode form is used, the game enters a waiting period for customers while keeping the effect screen under normal mode until the next game starts, and the execution of the effect for notifying the ceiling activation (such as an effect that would normally be executed in the ceiling game) is left to the next game (1001st spin).

The right hit instruction effect can also be started when the ceiling game ends (it may be executed simultaneously (overlapping) with the above-mentioned ceiling activation effect). In this example, as shown in the figure, after the symbol stop period of the ceiling game has elapsed, that is, after the fixed display time has elapsed, the above-mentioned "first right hit instruction effect (right hit notification (large))" is displayed to notify the player that a right hit is in an advantageous situation. It is preferable that the first right hit instruction effect can also be displayed during the customer waiting effect (demo display). Furthermore, when the first right hit instruction effect is executed, the above-mentioned ceiling activation effect does not have to be executed.

In addition, when the ceiling game ends, the ceiling function is activated and the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S923 in FIG. 58, step S923A in FIG. 69). When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag has been set to the ON state, it outputs a ceiling signal as an outer end signal (step S099 in FIG. 9). This causes an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT) to be informed that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress.

When an activated reserved ball occurs, the 1001st game spin begins. As can be seen from the illustration, the effects during the 1001st game spin are essentially the same as those during the 1000th spin spin shown in FIG. 86 (e.g., transition to the effect screen, notification of reaching the ceiling, etc.). Therefore, to avoid duplication, we will omit the explanation here.

(When the ceiling is reached for the second time)
As the game progresses, the 2000th spin, that is, the second ceiling game, is reached without winning the jackpot, and the ceiling function is activated again, and the ceiling time reduction is granted. In this second ceiling game, as in the performance content described in FIG. 86, the "performance screen transition performance" that appeared in the first ceiling game and the first right hit instruction performance that displays a large "right hit →" image do not appear again. Instead, a "ceiling continuation notification performance (ceiling continuation notification shown in the figure)" that notifies the player that the ceiling time reduction state will continue may be displayed.

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during the jackpot time-saving state (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game)>
The example of the performance in Figure 89 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the jackpot time-saving state, and the ceiling time-saving type that activates at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling bonus. Unlike the example of the performance in Figure 88, this shows a case where there is an operating reserved ball in the 1000th spin ceiling game. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figures 86 to 88 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

With reference to FIG. 89, the ceiling function is activated at the end of the symbol stop display period (fixed display time) in the 1000th spin ceiling game, and the ceiling time-saving state occurs. In this example, since the case is handled where there is an activated reserved ball at the end of the 1000th spin, the ceiling time-saving state is already in place at the start of the next game. It should not be confused here that in the case of a game end ceiling activation type, just because there is an activated reserved ball during the ceiling game does not mean that the ceiling time-saving state occurs in the next game (the ceiling function is activated). The ceiling time-saving state occurs only at the end of the ceiling game. In terms of processing, after the fixed display time in the ceiling game has elapsed, for example, during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 68A to FIG. 68B, the game end ceiling activation management processing in FIG. 69 is executed, and the ceiling function is activated. Therefore, if there is an operating reserved ball at the end of the ceiling game, to be precise, after the ceiling time-saving state occurs at the end of the ceiling game, the special pattern management process (S092 in FIG. 9) targeting the oldest operating reserved ball in chronological order is executed in the interrupt process 4 ms later, and the pattern change display starts, that is, the next game starts. Therefore, the ceiling time-saving state does not occur at the start of the next game, and for example, if there is no operating reserved ball at the end of the current game and no operating reserved ball is generated for a while, the ceiling time-saving state will remain in effect and enter a waiting state for customers (pre-waiting performance), or if a time-saving entry notification performance can be executed, the ceiling time-saving state will remain in effect and the performance progression will be similar to that described in the time-saving entry notification performance of FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 in the special non-operating type support time-saving.

The presentation during the 1001st spin of the game is substantially the same as the presentation example in FIG. 86. The outer end signal is also substantially the same as in FIG. 86. Therefore, to avoid duplication, we will omit the explanation here.

(Regarding the form in which different effects are executed when the ceiling is reached depending on the type of jackpot time-saving state)
Here, if the ceiling game is reached during the jackpot time-saving state of FIG. 89, the configuration can be as follows.

In a configuration having at least a first time-saving jackpot that awards a first number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 time-saving times) and a second time-saving jackpot that awards a second number of time-saving times different from the first number of time-saving times (e.g., 999 time-saving times), the predetermined notification effect that notifies information regarding reaching the ceiling can be different in the case where the ceiling game is reached after the jackpot time-saving state after the first time-saving jackpot (time-saving state with 100 time-saving times) ends (hereinafter referred to as "when the ceiling is reached after the first time-saving jackpot") and the case where the ceiling game is reached after the jackpot time-saving state after the second time-saving jackpot (time-saving state with 999 time-saving times) ends (hereinafter referred to as "when the ceiling is reached after the second time-saving jackpot").

For example, when the ceiling is reached after the first time-saving, a "ceiling entry notification effect" is displayed to notify the player of the entry into the ceiling time-saving state, and when the ceiling is reached after the second time-saving, a specific notification effect with a different presentation type from the ceiling entry notification effect is displayed. Here, if the second time-saving number is "X (times)" and the ceiling game number is "Y (times)", and if the "ceiling game number Y - second time-saving number X" is configured to be "a value less than the maximum reserved memory number (in this example, the maximum reserved memory number is 4)", it is considered that there are many cases where the maximum reserved memory number of four operating balls exists at the end of the jackpot time-saving state after the second time-saving jackpot (here, since the time-saving state is assumed, the case in question is a case where there are four operating reserved balls on the special chart 2 side). In other words, if the relationship of "ceiling game number Y - second time-saving number X ≦ maximum reserved memory number Z" is satisfied, the ceiling time-saving state will be entered within a short period of time. In particular, if the number of second time-saving times is 999, the ceiling game will be reached in the first game after the second time-saving times have ended (ceiling game count 1000 times - second time-saving times 999 times = 1 time (ceiling reached after 1 game)), and with some creative presentation, it is possible to make it look as if the time-saving state is continuing.

Therefore, when the relationship "ceiling game number Y - second time-saving count X ≦ maximum reserved memory number Z" is satisfied, it is preferable to display a "time-saving continuation notification effect" as the specific notification effect. This "time-saving continuation notification effect" is an effect that notifies that the time-saving state can continue, and here it may be an effect mode that notifies that the jackpot time-saving state will continue, or an effect mode that notifies that the time-saving state will transition from the jackpot time-saving state to the ceiling time-saving state. In either case, it is preferable that the effect content notifies that the time-saving state can continue. Furthermore, if a common presentation mode is used for the jackpot time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state, it can be made to look even more like the time-saving state is continuing.

On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached after the first time-saving period, the case does not satisfy "ceiling game number Y - second time-saving number X ≦ maximum reserved memory number Z". In particular, when the first time-saving number is a number that is significantly different from the ceiling game number, for example, by more than several dozen games, it is no longer a situation in which the time-saving state continues, so if a time-saving continuation notification effect is displayed, it will confuse the player. Therefore, when the ceiling is reached after the first time-saving period, a ceiling entry notification effect is displayed instead of a time-saving continuation notification effect.

<Cases where the ceiling function is activated during support time-saving mode (when the ceiling is activated at the end of the game)>
The example of the performance in Figure 90 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the support time-saving state, and the ceiling time-saving type that activates the ceiling at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling bonus. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figures 86 to 89 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

Referring to FIG. 90, as can be seen from the illustration, the presentation on the 1001st spin is essentially the same as that shown in FIG. 89, except that the jackpot time-saving state shown in FIG. 89 has been replaced with a support time-saving state, and even if the ceiling is reached from the support time-saving state, the presentation is essentially the same as that shown in FIG. 89. Similarly, for the 1000th spin just before the ceiling, the presentation is essentially the same as that shown in FIG. 89, except that the jackpot time-saving state shown in FIG. 89 has been replaced with a support time-saving state. Therefore, in order to avoid repetition, the explanation will focus on the outer end signal shown in the illustration.

In this example, before the ceiling time-saving state occurs, the support time-saving flag is ON, and based on this flag, a "support time-saving signal" indicating the support time-saving state is output as an outer end signal. This causes the fact that the support time-saving state is in progress to be sent to an external device (hall computer HC or data counter DT). What should not be confused here is that in the case of the ceiling activation type at the start of the game in FIG. 87, the activation timing of the ceiling function is the "start" of the 1000th game, and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also the "start" of the 1000th game, whereas in the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game in this example, the activation timing of the ceiling function is the "end" of the 1000th game, and the ON timing of the ceiling activation flag is also the "end" of the 1000th game. In this example, like the game start ceiling activation type in FIG. 87, the support time-saving signal and support time-saving flag are set to OFF when the ceiling function is activated, but the support time-saving flag may be kept ON and only the support time-saving signal may not be output. Also, even if the support time-saving flag is left ON, the support time-saving signal may not be output on the condition that the ceiling activation flag is ON.

In addition, in this example, as in the game start ceiling activation type of FIG. 87, when the support time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are configured as separate presentation modes rather than a common presentation mode (for example, time-saving presentation mode and ceiling presentation mode), a presentation screen transition presentation, a ceiling entry notification presentation, etc. are performed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the ceiling has been reached. In addition, when the ceiling is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern allocation table ("FH90" shown in FIG. 75: see the "ceiling" column in the same figure) is used, and the fluctuation pattern allocation table for time-saving used during the support time-saving state (FIGS. 40 and 41) is not used. When the support time-saving state and the ceiling time-saving state are in a common presentation mode, the presentation mode can be continued. Note that, in the figure, an example is shown in which the presentation mode during the support time-saving state is the "time-saving presentation mode", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving presentation mode dedicated to the support time-saving state (support time-saving presentation mode) may be provided.

(Variation 1: FIG. 91)
The example of the performance in Figure 91 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the normal state, and the ceiling time reduction that is activated at the end of the game is activated as a ceiling bonus. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those explained in Figures 88 to 90 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

The example of the effect in FIG. 91 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during the normal state, as in the first reaching of the ceiling in FIG. 88, but shows a case where there is an operating reserved ball in the ceiling game at the 1000th spin. However, the major feature of this example is that when the ceiling time-saving is activated during the normal state (normal mode), the game is transferred directly to the heaven mode related to the ceiling time-saving state without going through the ceiling mode, and the above-mentioned ceiling activation effect or ceiling entry notification effect is executed under the heaven effect mode without using a dedicated fluctuation pattern for the ceiling or a dedicated fluctuation pattern allocation table. Specifically. This is the game mode transition of the above (bird 2) in the special ceiling mode form already explained. In detail, up to the 1000th spin, it is the normal mode, and the fluctuation pattern allocation table related to the normal mode (for example, FIG. 72, FIG. 74) is referenced. However, since the 1001st spin is already in the ceiling time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern allocation table related to the heaven mode (for example, FIG. 73, FIG. 75) is referenced here.

As mentioned above, this example does not go through the ceiling mode, so it has the following features (Feature 1) to (Feature 4).

(Special feature 1) The duration of the ceiling activation effect is set to the shortest duration of all the fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation pattern allocation table for the heaven mode. In this example, it is set to 3 seconds or less, which is the normal fluctuation 3s, as shown in Figures 73 and 75.
The reason for this determination is as follows. First, the variation pattern selected at the 1001st spin differs depending on the number of operation reserved balls at that time. Second, if there is a special pattern 2 operation reserved ball at the start of the 1001st spin, the pattern variation display game on the special pattern 2 side will be started with priority, and the pattern variation display game on the special pattern 1 side will not necessarily be started. In consideration of these circumstances, the ceiling activation performance is to end at least by the end of this game, so that the player can be clearly informed that the ceiling time reduction has been activated, and even if the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns defined in the referenced variation pattern allocation table (here, the heaven mode) is selected, the ceiling activation performance is to end within that variation time. Note that, since there is a high possibility that the pattern variation display game on the special pattern 1 side will start at the start of the 1001st spin, the one with the shortest variation time among all the variation patterns related to the special pattern 1 may be set as the standard, or the one with the shortest variation time among all the variation patterns related to the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 may be set as the standard. In addition, it is preferable that the standard fluctuation pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern. If the 1001st spin happens to be a big win, there is little need to execute the ceiling activation performance, and it is sufficient to execute the fluctuation performance related to the big win as usual.
(Special feature 2) When the ceiling game ends (when the fixed display time has elapsed), the main control unit 20 transmits a dedicated performance control command (hereinafter also referred to as the "ceiling activation performance execution trigger command") to the performance control unit 24, which specifies the start of the execution of the ceiling activation performance. As already explained, since the fluctuation pattern of the 1001st spin is indefinite, the ceiling activation performance that depends on the content of the fluctuation pattern is not displayed, but a ceiling activation performance execution trigger command is transmitted separately, and when the performance control unit 24 receives the ceiling activation performance execution trigger command, the ceiling activation performance is executed. This allows the same ceiling activation performance to be displayed at the same timing (ceiling activation timing (ceiling time-saving state occurrence timing)) every time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern designation command type). In addition, in the case of a winning fluctuation pattern, the ceiling activation performance does not need to be displayed.
(Special feature 3) During the ceiling activation performance, the decorative pattern is displayed as a retreat (for example, see FIG. 77 (F2) (see the display positions of 801e and 801f in F3), and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the retreat display area, thereby making the ceiling activation performance stand out (highlighted display) (decorative pattern retreat display (mini pattern variation) as shown). It is preferable to always keep the decorative pattern in a retreat display during the ceiling activation performance. Then, after the ceiling activation performance ends, the retreat display of the decorative pattern is released and the normal variable display is performed (for example, see FIG. 7B, FIG. 77 (A) (B), etc.), and a predetermined variation performance is started (normal decorative pattern variation as shown). At this time, a predetermined background performance or decorative pattern performance (which may be for the ceiling performance mode or for the heaven mode) related to the ceiling time-saving state is displayed (ceiling mode performance screen as shown).
(Special feature 4) During the ceiling activation effect, the remaining ceiling number notification effect is not executed, but is executed after the ceiling activation effect ends (the remaining ceiling number notification shown in the figure). However, the remaining ceiling number notification effect does not have to be executed at least in the current game.

During the ceiling time-saving state, "right hit notification (small) + right hit LED" is executed as shown in the figure. Also, in the above, the duration of the ceiling activation effect is set to within the shortest fluctuation time, but this is not limited to this, and it may be a performance mode that is executed across multiple games. In this case, it is preferable to use a narrative-like performance scenario, etc., rather than a fluctuation performance that is completed within one fluctuation, and to have performance content that has some kind of relationship between each of the multiple games. Here, "having a relationship" means a narrative relationship, or a relationship that evokes, associates, or gives rise to an idea of a certain thing or event when seen.

In this example, when the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag is ON, it outputs a "ceiling activation signal" as an outer end signal. When the ceiling activation flag is ON, the special game flag is set to ON. The "ceiling activation signal" is a signal that is output for a short period of time (100 ms) and indicates that the ceiling function has been activated. This ceiling activation signal allows an external device to know that the ceiling has been activated. The "special game flag" is a flag that monitors the game period from the start of the ceiling time-saving state to when a jackpot is won (or until the jackpot game starts). When the CPU 201 confirms that a jackpot has been won, it sets the special game flag to OFF. The "jackpot win" can be understood, for example, by monitoring the ON/OFF state of the condition device operation flag. The ceiling activation signal can be output when either the ceiling activation flag or the special game flag is ON.

(Modification 2: FIG. 92)
The example of the performance in Fig. 92 shows a case where the ceiling is reached during normal state, as in Fig. 91, but shows a case where there is no operation reserved ball in the ceiling game. The example of the performance in Fig. 92 has the same characteristic points as Fig. 91 described above, but here it is a case where there is no operation reserved ball.

In the case of the ceiling activation type at the end of the game, the system focuses on the fact that the system enters a ceiling time-saving state when the ceiling game ends, and as shown in the figure, when the fixed display time for the ceiling game (1000th spin) has elapsed and the system is in the waiting state for customers, the ceiling activation effect is executed.

As in the case of FIG. 91, the ceiling activation effect is executed when the effect control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned "ceiling activation effect execution trigger command." The duration of the ceiling activation effect is the same as that described in FIG. 91. In other words, regardless of whether or not there are any activated reserved balls at the end of the ceiling game, a ceiling activation effect with the same duration is executed.

During the ceiling activation performance, the decorative symbols are displayed in a evacuated state, as in the case in FIG. 91. However, since this performance example deals with a case where there are no activated reserved balls, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the activation of the ceiling (for example, "931" shown in FIG. 77 (F3)) is displayed in a stopped state in the evacuated display area. This combination of decorative symbols may be the one that was confirmed and displayed when the ceiling game ended, or it may be a different one, but in either case, it is a decorative stop image corresponding to the activation of the ceiling. The evacuated display of the decorative symbols continues at least until the end of the ceiling activation performance. After the end of the ceiling activation performance, the evacuated display of the decorative symbols may be released and the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the activation of the ceiling may be displayed in a stopped state in the normal display area, or it may remain evacuated.

After the ceiling activation effect ends, the display switches to a predetermined background effect (ceiling mode effect screen shown in the figure) related to the ceiling time-saving state. After that, if a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed without an activated reserved ball being generated, a menu display possible notification effect 811 (for example, see FIG. 47 (δ)) is displayed, and a notification is given that the gaming environment can be set, such as volume adjustment (the menu display possible notification effect 811 may be executed at the same or approximately the same timing as the switching display timing of the background effect without waiting for the predetermined time (5 seconds)). Note that the display screen after the ceiling activation effect ends will be, for example, a display state as shown in FIG. 47 (δ), including the display of the right-hit notification (small). Note that the effect display after the ceiling activation effect ends may be, for example, a normal customer waiting pre-effect (for time-saving mode) 890, as in FIG. 47 (δ). After that, if a predetermined time has passed while in the standby state, a customer waiting effect (for example, see FIG. 47 (ε)) is executed, and a demo movie is displayed. According to this example, even if the number of active reserved balls becomes zero when the ceiling game ends and the waiting period for customers begins, the ceiling activation effect is executed and the player is notified that the ceiling time-saving state is in progress. Also, during the ceiling activation effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a retreated state, and the menu display possible notification effect 811 is not displayed, so the visibility of the ceiling activation effect is not hindered, and it is possible to clearly notify the player that the ceiling is activated.

In addition, when the ceiling game ends, the ceiling function is activated, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (step S923 in FIG. 58, step S923A in FIG. 69), and the special game flag is set to the ON state. When the CPU 201 confirms that the ceiling activation flag or the special game flag has been set to the ON state, it outputs the above-mentioned ceiling activation signal as an outer end signal.

When an activated reserved ball occurs, the 1001th spin of the game begins, but unlike the case in Figure 91, the ceiling activation effect is not executed during the 1001st spin of the game. This is because the ceiling activation effect is executed based on the ceiling activation effect execution trigger command, and the ceiling activation effect execution trigger command is not sent again until the ceiling activation trigger arrives. Therefore, in this case, the ceiling activation effect is not executed, and the effects during the 1001st spin of the game will be executed as usual, based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command and decorative pattern designation command.

(Modification 3: FIG. 93)
The example of the performance in FIG. 93 shows an example of the performance in the case where the ceiling is reached consecutively in the ceiling activation type at the end of the game. However, in this example, the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving is 997 times, and the ceiling game number is 1000 games. In other words, even if the ceiling time-saving state is left, the ceiling game number is not reached. In other words, the specification is such that there is no "ceiling consecutive activation" in which the ceiling time-saving state is reached again during the ceiling time-saving state. Note that the contents that are substantially the same as those described in FIG. 91 to FIG. 92 are omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication. The major feature of this example is the output form of the outer end signal. The following will be described using FIG. 93.

In this example, the number of time-saving cycles is 997, so from the 1998th to 2000th spins, the ceiling time-saving state is over, and as shown in the figure, the ceiling activation flag is OFF. However, unlike Figures 91 and 92, in this example, the ceiling activation signal remains ON. The ceiling activation signal in this example continues to be output as long as the special game flag remains ON. The reason why the ceiling activation signal continues to be output in this way, even after the ceiling time-saving state has been over and the normal state has been reached, is as follows.

If the ceiling is reached again within a relatively short play period after the ceiling time-saving state is exited, it is better not to turn off the ceiling activation signal each time, but to turn it off when the next jackpot is won, because this will not increase the control burden. In particular, in this example, after the ceiling time-saving state is exited on the 1997th spin, the ceiling game (2000th spin) is reached again on the third spin, which is less than the maximum number of reserved balls. During the ceiling time-saving state, it is easy to win, and unless an irregular event occurs, such as the player intentionally not winning, there will be approximately 3 to 4 activated reserved balls (maximum number of activated reserved balls) on the special chart 2 side at the time the ceiling time-saving state is exited. Therefore, if you wait for the existing activated reserved balls to be consumed after the ceiling time-saving state is exited, the ceiling will be reached.

In more detail, if the "number of times X for time-saving due to ceiling time-saving + maximum reserved memory number Z" is equal to or greater than the "number of games on the ceiling Y", specifically, if the relationship "number of games on the ceiling Y ≦ number of times X for time-saving due to ceiling time-saving + maximum reserved memory number Z" is satisfied, the ceiling will be reached in a short time. In such a case, it is preferable to continue outputting the ceiling activation signal without dropping it after the ceiling time-saving state ends, unless a jackpot is won along the way (as long as the special game flag is ON). In addition, the maximum reserved memory number Z in the above "number of games on the ceiling Y ≦ number of times X for time-saving due to ceiling time-saving + maximum reserved memory number Z" is preferably the maximum reserved memory number of one special chart (4 in this example) if it is a type in which one special chart is preferentially changed, and is preferably the sum of the maximum reserved memory numbers of special chart 1 and special chart 2 (8 in this example) if it is a non-priority change type in which the activated reserved balls are consumed in the order of winning.

The above-mentioned remaining ceiling count notification effect may be executed from the 1998th spin to the 2000th spin just before the ceiling is reached. Also, when the ceiling is reached for the second time or later, the ceiling activation effect execution trigger command does not need to be sent. In this case, the ceiling activation effect is not executed, so the effect during the 2001st spin of the game is executed as usual, based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command.

(Notifications to prevent cards from getting stuck and to inform you when you forget to remove the card)
In this embodiment, as a warning effect to alert the player to a certain behavior, at least one of a warning effect to warn about preventing addiction (hereinafter referred to as an ``addiction prevention warning'') and a warning effect to warn about not forgetting to remove a prepaid card (hereinafter referred to as a ``card removal warning'') can be configured to be executable.

When entering the ceiling time-saving mode or the support time-saving mode, a "warning to prevent addiction" and/or a "warning for forgetting to remove a card" can be executed. Examples of when it is executed "when entering the ceiling time-saving mode" include when it is executed at a specific timing during the fluctuating performance related to the ceiling game, when it is executed at a specific timing during the ceiling entry notification performance, when it is executed at a specific timing during the ceiling activation performance, when it is executed at the end of the ceiling game (during the period from the end of the fluctuating time to the end of the fixed display time), when it is executed at the end of the fixed display time of the ceiling game (especially when it is executed during the waiting time for customers when there are no activated reserved balls), when it is executed at a specific timing during the game following the ceiling game (especially when it is executed at the start of the next game), when it is executed after the ceiling entry notification performance ends, and when it is executed after the ceiling activation performance.

Examples of cases where it is executed "when the support time-saving feature is activated" include when it is executed at a specific timing during the fluctuation presentation during the support time-saving winning game, when it is executed at a specific timing during the time-saving entry notification presentation, when it is executed at the end of the support time-saving winning game (the period from the end of the fluctuation time to the end of the confirmed display time), when it is executed at the end of the confirmed display time of the support time-saving winning game (especially when it is executed while waiting for customers when there are no activated reserved balls), and when it is executed after the time-saving entry notification presentation ends.

In any case, the warning can be issued at an appropriate timing when it is confirmed that the ceiling will be activated or when it is confirmed that the game will be controlled to the support time-saving state. If it is to be issued when entering the jackpot time-saving state, it can be issued during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT (during the ending performance)).

In addition, at the end of the jackpot time-saving mode (when the jackpot time-saving mode ends), at the end of the ceiling time-saving mode (when the ceiling time-saving mode ends), or at the end of the support time-saving mode (when the support time-saving mode ends), a "warning to prevent addiction" and/or a "warning for forgetting to remove a card" can be executed. Examples of the cases where it is executed at the end of each time-saving mode include when it is executed during the variable performance related to the last time of the time-saving mode (final game of the time-saving mode), and when it is executed at the end of the final game of the time-saving mode (executed during the period from the end of the variable time to the end of the fixed display time). In addition, the jackpot time-saving mode can be a jackpot time-saving mode related to one or more specific jackpots. For example, it may be a jackpot with a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, a 10R sure-change jackpot), or it may be a jackpot with a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, a 4R time-saving jackpot).

When the above-mentioned "warning for preventing addiction" or "warning for forgetting to remove the card" is executed, the following configurations (Koku 50) to (Koku 71) can be adopted.
(Mankoku 50) When entering the ceiling time-saving mode, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to prevent forgetting to take a card are issued, and when entering the support time-saving mode, the warning to prevent getting addicted and the warning to prevent forgetting to take a card are not issued.
(Manseki 51) When entering the ceiling time-saving mode, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to not forget to take a card are issued, and when entering the support time-saving mode, at least one of a warning to prevent getting addicted and a warning to not forget to take a card is issued.
(Manseki 53) When entering the support time-saving mode, a warning to prevent getting addicted and/or a warning to prevent forgetting to take out a card are issued, and when entering the ceiling time-saving mode, the warning to prevent getting addicted and the warning to prevent forgetting to take out a card are not issued.
(Manseki 54) When entering support time-saving mode, a warning to prevent addiction and/or a warning to prevent forgetting to remove a card are issued, and when entering ceiling time-saving mode, at least one of a warning to prevent addiction and a warning to prevent forgetting to remove a card is issued.
(Mankoku 55) In the case of a type in which the ceiling is activated at the end of a game, it is preferable to execute a warning to prevent addiction and/or a warning to prevent forgetting to remove a card when the variable time has elapsed in the ceiling game.
(Manseki 56) The duration (alert duration) of the “warning to prevent addiction” or “warning for forgetting to remove card” can be determined appropriately.
For example, when there are no active reserved balls at the end of the ceiling game or the end of the support time reduction winning game, and the game starts during the customer waiting waiting period, the game can be ended at a predetermined timing during the customer waiting waiting period. Specifically, the game can be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting performance, when the customer waiting performance (demo display) starts, or when the next game starts.
If there is an active reserved ball at the end of the ceiling game or the end of the support time reduction winning game, it can be executed for a predetermined time after the start of the next game. In this case, it is preferable that the performance display by the attention call is displayed at a display position that does not interfere with the performance during the next game (including the right hit notification (right hit instruction performance)), for example, at a position that does not overlap at least with the decorative pattern, at a position that does not overlap at least with the decorative pattern and the reserved display, or at a position that does not overlap at least with the decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the right hit notification. However, if it is difficult to display it at a position that does not overlap due to the performance display, it is preferable to display it with a lower display priority of the attention call. For example, it is preferable to make the transparency of the attention call higher than that of the decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the right hit notification, so that the performance displayed during the next game stands out.
(Manseki 57) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to prevent forgetting to remove a card are executed when entering the ceiling time-saving state, if a jackpot is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the already-executed warning will not be executed during the jackpot game.
(Manseki 58) When either or both of the warnings to prevent addiction and warning against forgetting to remove cards are executed when entering the support time-saving state, if a jackpot is won during the support time-saving state, the already-executed warnings will not be executed during the jackpot gameplay.
(Manseki 59) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction and a warning to avoid forgetting to remove a card are executed when the ceiling time-saving mode is entered, if a jackpot is won after the ceiling time-saving mode ends and transitions to the normal mode are made, the warning can be executed again during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT) regardless of whether the warning was executed when the ceiling time-saving mode was entered.
(Manseki 60) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to avoid forgetting to remove a card are executed when the support time-saving mode is entered, if a jackpot is won after the support time-saving mode ends and transitions to the normal mode, the warning can be executed again during the jackpot game (for example, during the end INT) regardless of whether the warning was executed when the support time-saving mode was entered.
(Manseki 61) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to avoid forgetting to remove a card are executed when entering the ceiling time-saving state, if a jackpot is won during the ceiling time-saving state, the executed warning can be executed during the jackpot game (for example, during the final INT).
(Manseki 62) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to avoid forgetting to remove a card are executed when entering the support time-saving state, if a jackpot is won during the support time-saving state, the executed warning can be executed during the jackpot game (for example, during the final INT).
(Mankoku 63) In the case of the above configuration example (Mankoku 61), it is preferable that the content of the warning (presentation mode, notification time, etc.) be different between the warning when entering the ceiling time-saving mode and the warning during jackpot play.
(Mankoku 64) In the case of the above configuration example (Mankoku 62), it is preferable that the content of the warning (presentation mode, notification time, etc.) be different between the warning given when the support time reduction mode is entered and the warning given during a jackpot game.
(Manseki 65) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to avoid forgetting to remove a card are executed when the ceiling time-saving feature is entered, if the warning is executed simultaneously during another specific effect, for example, when it is executed simultaneously during the variable effect related to the ceiling game, when it is executed simultaneously during the ceiling entry notification effect, or when it is executed simultaneously during the ceiling activation effect, the presentation time of the effect executed when the ceiling time-saving feature is entered can be shortened.
(Manseki 66) When either or both of a warning to prevent addiction and a warning about forgetting to remove a card are executed when entering the support time-saving feature, if the warning is executed simultaneously during other specific effects, for example, when it is executed simultaneously during a variable effect in a game in which the support time-saving feature is won, or when it is executed simultaneously during a time-saving entry notification effect, the presentation time of the effect executed when entering the support time-saving feature can be shortened.
(Manseki 67) When a ceiling time-saving state is activated during a support time-saving state, either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to prevent forgetting to remove a card can be configured to be executable when entering the ceiling time-saving state. In this case, regardless of whether or not either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to prevent forgetting to remove a card are executed when entering the support time-saving state, either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to prevent forgetting to remove a card can be executed when entering the ceiling time-saving state.
(Manseki 68) When a support time-saving state is activated during a ceiling time-saving state, either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to forget to take a card can be configured to be executable when the support time-saving state is entered. In this case, regardless of whether or not either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to forget to take a card are executed when the ceiling time-saving state is entered, either or both of a caution to prevent addiction or a caution to forget to take a card can be executed when the support time-saving state is entered.
(Manseki 69) In the event that a ceiling time-saving state is activated during a support time-saving state, if either or both of a warning to prevent addiction and a warning about forgetting to remove cards are executed at the time of entering the ceiling time-saving state, the warning that has already been executed at the time of entering the support time-saving state will not be executed.
(Mankoku 70) If a support time-saving state is activated during a ceiling time-saving state, and if either or both of a warning to prevent addiction and a warning about forgetting to remove a card are executed when the support time-saving state is entered, warnings that have already been executed at the time the ceiling time-saving state is entered will not be executed.
(Manseki 71) After the ceiling time-saving state ends, if the ceiling game is reached again without winning the jackpot, the second or subsequent ceiling time-saving state may not require the player to issue a warning to prevent addiction or a warning to prevent forgetting to remove cards, or both. Depending on the game characteristics (game specifications), the ceiling game number may be set to a small number of games (for example, less than the denominator of the probability of winning the jackpot, half, or about one-third of the number of games). In such cases, frequent warnings may be annoying to the player.

[Fourth embodiment]
<Restrictions on ball output performance>
In recent years, in order to moderately suppress the incitement of gambling, regulations have been established for the ball-dispensing performance of gaming machines due to legal requirements. For example, the ball-dispensing rate (safe balls/out balls) in the short-term test (1 hour) related to the above-mentioned type test is limited from the upper limit of 300% (old standard) to 220% (new standard) (Regulations on the Certification and Inspection of Gaming Machines, Appendix 4, Technical Standards for Pachinko Machines (Article 6) (1) Performance Standards B (C), etc.). This regulation has a significant effect on the ball-dispensing performance, especially the ball-dispensing performance during consecutive wins, and if it is observed, the ball-dispensing "speed" may drop to about 2/3 of the previous ball-dispensing performance. In detail, if the firing time is one hour, the number of out balls is 6,000 (firing performance of the firing device 32: 100 shots/min x 60 min = 6,000 shots), and under the old standard, the upper limit ball output rate is "300%," so the number of safe balls is allowed to be up to 18,000 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 300% = 18,000 shots/h). However, under the new standard, the upper limit ball output rate is limited to "220%," so the upper limit of safe balls is reduced to 13,200 shots per hour (6,000 shots x 220% = 13,200 shots/h). In particular, during the time-saving state or the probability of winning, the high base state (electric support state) is created, so if the jackpot is hit excessively in succession, the upper limit ball output rate of 220% (13,200 shots) can easily be exceeded, resulting in non-compliance in the type test. For example, if the base value under the electric support state is 70 (BA70), the safe balls in normal electric open play will be 4200 balls in one hour (BA70 x 100 balls/min x 60 min = 4200 balls). Therefore, under the old standard, it is possible to pay out "13800 balls" (18000 balls - 4200 balls) by jackpot play, but under the new standard, it will only be possible to pay out "9000 balls" (13200 balls - 4200 balls). However, one of the attractions of gaming machines is the excitement of winning a large number of balls in a short time, and it is difficult to completely abandon this attraction. Therefore, under the above regulations, it is necessary to devise a way to control the ball output performance related to the jackpot so that it is easier to pass (conform to) the type test without impairing the ball output feeling as much as possible.

The number of balls that are released increases significantly in a short period of time during a jackpot. Therefore, in order to pass the type test, the number of wasted balls during a jackpot must be increased to reduce the ball release speed. Specifically, if the jackpot closing period (at least one of the start INT, the round INT, and the end INT) is made longer than before, the base value will not increase beyond the legal limit even if the jackpot continues, and the conformity rate of the type test will increase. However, if the INT period is made longer without consideration, for example, the interval time such as the start INT is made several times longer than before, the player may feel a sense of drag (for example, boredom, fatigue, or discomfort) despite the jackpot, feel stressed, or develop distrust for the game itself. Therefore, the following points (1) and (2) must be considered.
(1) Rather than making the jackpot game period unnecessarily long, the length of the interval time (start INT, inter-round INT, end INT) during the jackpot game is adjusted taking into consideration the effect on ball output performance and the effect of ball output speed on the feeling of ball output.
(2) Furthermore, when the jackpot game period is extended from the conventional period, it is important to devise creative presentations during the jackpot game so that the player does not feel a sense of sluggishness.

In view of these issues, the present embodiment aims, first, to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier to comply with type testing, and second, to prevent the jackpot play period from becoming monotonous. Specifically, the first aim is to provide a gaming machine that can extend the jackpot play period based on predetermined extension conditions in order to increase the compliance rate with type testing. The second aim is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the compliance rate with type testing, that is, prevent the player from feeling bored or sluggish even when the jackpot play period is extended.

In this embodiment, the length of the jackpot play period and the number of games between consecutive jackpots are important factors that greatly affect ball output performance. In particular, the interval time (start INT, inter-round INT, end INT) set during the jackpot play is carefully considered. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, for example, if a jackpot is won (in the case of consecutive jackpots) during the time-saving state or the probability change state after the jackpot play, the interval time for that jackpot play is extended, thereby generating a jackpot play that is relatively longer than the first win (for example, a jackpot won during a normal state (a play state that does not allow consecutive jackpots to be won, as described later)). This reduces the ball output speed during consecutive jackpots, making it easier to comply with the above-mentioned type test (particularly the short-term test).

For ease of explanation, the "game state with a high probability of winning" and/or the "game state with an electric support state" controlled after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the operation of the continuous operation device of the role) will be referred to as the "easy consecutive win state". In addition, a jackpot won during this easy consecutive win state will be referred to as a "consecutive win during consecutive wins", and the jackpot game due to the jackpot will be referred to as a "consecutive win during consecutive wins game". Therefore, a jackpot won during a time-saving state that does not involve a jackpot game, specifically a jackpot won during a support time-saving state or a ceiling time-saving state, is excluded from the "consecutive win during consecutive wins" in this embodiment. The above-mentioned "easy consecutive win state" is at least one of the game states of the probability change state, the time-saving state, and the potential state, but which game state is defined as the "easy consecutive win state" can be determined appropriately. However, as mentioned above, the consecutive win easy state is a game state that is controlled upon the end of a jackpot game (after the operation of the continuous operation device of the role device ends), so among the time-saving states, the support time-saving state or the ceiling time-saving state that does not involve a jackpot game is excluded from the "consecutive win easy state" of this embodiment.

In addition, gameplay states other than the easy-to-win consecutive states are referred to as "non-easy-to-win consecutive states." A jackpot won during this non-easy-to-win consecutive state is referred to as a "normal jackpot," and jackpot play resulting from such a jackpot is referred to as a "normal jackpot play."

In this embodiment, when a predetermined extension condition is met, a longer interval time (hereinafter referred to as "extended INT") is set in consecutive jackpot play than the interval time in normal jackpot play (hereinafter referred to as "normal INT"). This creates a jackpot play in which the consecutive jackpot play is relatively longer than the normal jackpot play.

In more detail, when a jackpot is won during a streak-prone state after a jackpot play ends, either a normal INT or an extended INT is set for at least one of the interval times of the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT, depending on the number of games (number of winning games) required until the win. When an extended INT is set, the streak jackpot play period is longer than the normal jackpot play period. When an extended INT is set, the jackpot play period is extended by that amount, so the jackpot play performance during the streak jackpot play is designed to be at least partially different from the jackpot play performance during the normal jackpot play. The above-mentioned "extended INT" includes "extended start INT" when the start INT is extended, "extended inter-round INT" when the inter-round INT is extended, and "extended end INT" when the end INT is extended. The above-mentioned "normal INT" also includes "normal start INT", "normal inter-round INT", and "normal end INT" when no extension is performed.

(Specific example 1: FIG. 104 (a))
An example (specific example 1) of this embodiment is shown in FIG. 104 (A). In this specific example 1, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), when the number of winning games is within 50 games (when the first extension condition is met), an extension INT (extension start INT, end extension INT) is set for the start INT and end INT, and when the number of winning games is within 51 to 60 games (when the second extension condition is met), an extension INT (extension end INT) is set for only the end INT. In short, when a jackpot is won within 50 games, two interval times are extended for the start INT and end INT, and when a jackpot is won within 51 to 60 games, only the end INT is extended. Note that when the number of winning games is 61 games or more, neither interval time is extended (non-extension target section). Therefore, when a jackpot is won after 61 games, even if it is a consecutive jackpot, the jackpot game will be played for the same period as the normal jackpot game period. In this case, the effects during a jackpot in normal jackpot play and the effects during a jackpot in consecutive jackpot play may be common (identical) effects, or at least some of them may be different effects.

In this example (specific example 1), the extension targets are the start INT and the end INT, but this is not limited thereto, and the extension targets may be "start INT and between-round INT" or "end INT and between-round INT" (the same applies to specific examples 1 to 5 and 7 shown in Figures 104 (b) to (c), Figure 105 (d) to (e), and Figure 106 (g) described below). In this example, the extension targets are multiple INTs, the start INT and the end INT, but the extension target may be any one of the start INT, between-round INT, and end INT (the same applies to each of the specific examples shown in Figures 104 (b) to (c), Figure 105 (d) to (e), and Figure 106 (g) described below. For example, see the dashed line in Figure 106 (f)).

<Processing on the main control unit side: Figs. 98 to 103>
Next, referring to Figs. 98 to 103, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of this embodiment will be described. As described above, this embodiment is configured to be able to extend the interval time related to the jackpot game depending on the number of winning games during the easy consecutive win state. Here, as the processing required for the extension control processing, the jackpot game control (special electric role management processing (S093) in Fig. 9, Fig. 21) and the processing when the jackpot pattern stops (special pattern confirmation time processing (step S308) in Fig. 10) will be mainly described. Note that the processing contents that are substantially the same as those described in the first to third embodiments will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplication.

In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the case shown in FIG. 104(A) above (specific example 1) will be used as a representative example for explanation. In FIG. 104(A), a "high probability state" is used as the state where consecutive wins are likely to occur, and the number of STs in this high probability state is set to "100 times" (the number of STs due to a high probability jackpot is set to 100 times). In other words, this is a case where INT may be extended only during the high probability state, and INT may not be extended in other consecutive wins likely states (in this embodiment, the time-saving state).

The special electric gadget management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 103. The jackpot game control process described below corresponds to the processes in steps S505 to S509 shown in FIG. 21.

<Jackpot Game Control Processing (Steps S505 to S509)>
(98. Big hit start process: Figure 98)
The "big win start process" of step S505 according to this embodiment will be described. Fig. 98 is a flowchart showing the details of the big win start process according to this embodiment.

When a "jackpot" occurs (condition device activation flag: = 5AH), the "jackpot start process (step S505)" shown in FIG. 98 is executed first (see step S502 in FIG. 21, the processing route for "start process in progress (00H)" in the special electric device status branching process).

In FIG. 98, the CPU 201 first updates the special electric device operation status to "operation start processing in progress (01H)" as a setting process at the start of the jackpot, and sets the "consecutive number counter" that counts the number of rounds to 01H, which designates the first round (step S511).

Next, the address of the "Special call start time offset table" shown in FIG. 103(A), the address of the "Special call start time table" shown in FIG. 103(B), and the extension judgment value for the start INT are sequentially obtained (steps S513 to S514), and then the interval time setting process is executed (step S515).

(99. Interval Time Setting Process (At the Start of a Big Hit): FIG. 99)
Fig. 99 shows details of the interval time setting process (step S515). Here, it is determined whether or not to extend the start INT, and if it is extended, a start INT for extension (extension start INT) is set as the start INT, and if it is not extended, a process of setting a start INT for normal use (normal start INT) is performed.

In FIG. 99, the CPU 201 first judges whether the start INT extension judgment value acquired in step S514 is greater than the value of the special symbol probability change count counter (remaining ST count) (step S521). The start INT extension judgment value is a judgment value for judging whether the start INT is extended or not. In this example, in order to make an extension judgment in the probability change state, the start INT extension judgment value is set to a judgment value related to the special symbol probability change count counter (remaining ST count), and if the judgment value is greater than the special symbol probability change count counter (remaining ST count), the "normal start INT" is selected (obtained), and if it is less, the "extended start INT" is selected (obtained).

In this example, the number of STs due to a special jackpot is set to 100, and the start INT is extended if the number of winning games during the special jackpot is within 50 (first extension condition), so the extension judgment value for the start INT is set to "50". In more detail, the extension judgment value for the start INT can be set to a value calculated from "ST number of times X - branching game number Y for whether or not to extend". In this example, the start INT is extended if the number of winning games is within 50, so the branching game number is 50. Therefore, the extension judgment value for the start INT is set to "50", which is "ST number of times 100 - branching game number 50".

When the "time-saving state" is adopted as the state where consecutive wins are easy, it is sufficient to set an extension judgment value related to the special pattern time-saving count counter, specifically a value calculated from "time-saving count X times - branching game count Y for whether or not an extension is possible". Also, when the "variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)" is adopted, it is sufficient to set an extension judgment value related to the special pattern variation count counter, specifically a value calculated from "number of games updated for Tcode X times (number of times that triggers an update related to the special pattern variation count counter) - branching game count Y for whether or not an extension is possible".

(When no extension is required: Processing route of steps S522 to S524)
If the extension judgment value for the start INT is greater than the special pattern probability change counter (remaining ST number of times) (step S521: YES), in other words, if the start INT is not extended, the "special power start time offset table (Figure 103 (A))" obtained in step S513 is referred to to obtain an offset value corresponding to the game state at the time of the jackpot win (hereinafter also referred to as the "special pattern stop game state") and the type of jackpot won this time (special pattern judgment data) (step S522), and then the "special power start time table (Figure 103 (B))" obtained in step S514 is referred to to obtain the start INT corresponding to the offset value (step S523).

As shown in FIG. 103(A), the "Special Start Time Offset Table" defines offset values (see the columns in the illustration) according to the type of jackpot (see the columns in the illustration) and the game state (special chart stop game state) at the time of winning the jackpot (in this embodiment, since there is no potential jackpot, the corresponding data is not defined). Also, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the "Special Start Time Table" defines start INT (start interval time data) corresponding to the offset value obtained by the Special Start Time Offset Table. Specifically, start INT data "FAN0 to FAN4" are defined corresponding to offset values 00H to 04H, and the INT data (data at the top address) corresponding to the offset value "00H" is the timer value of the extended INT (extended start INT), and the INT data corresponding to offset values "01H" to "03" is the timer value of the normal INT (normal start INT).

For example, if the jackpot won this time is a "10R special jackpot" and the special symbol stop game state is a "special symbol state," then "02H" is selected as the offset value, and the INT data corresponding to "FAN2" in the special symbol start time table (normal INT of 80 seconds (80,000 ms/4 ms (4 ms = interrupt interval))) is obtained. Then, the obtained INT data (80 seconds) is set to the special symbol role operation timer (step S524).

In this example, since the "high probability state" is used as the state where consecutive wins are likely to occur, data from the special symbol high probability state counter is required in the process of determining whether or not to extend in step S521. Therefore, the special symbol high probability state counter is not cleared in the various setting processes (for example, S475 in FIG. 17A, S475A in FIG. 55A, S475B in FIG. 63A, S475B in FIG. 68A, etc.) when the jackpot symbol stops during the special symbol confirmation time process, as shown in FIG. 101.

When the "time-saving state" is adopted as the state where consecutive wins are easy, the data of the special pattern time-saving count counter is not cleared, and when the "time-saving state" and "probable win state" are adopted, the special pattern probable win count counter and the special pattern time-saving count counter are not cleared. Also, when the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is adopted as the above-mentioned consecutive wins easy state (when the consecutive wins easy state can be specified by the variable pattern selection mode), the special pattern variable count counter is not cleared. In this way, depending on the type of game state to be adopted as the consecutive wins easy state, a predetermined counter is not cleared, and the counter is compared with the extension determination value to determine whether or not to extend the consecutive wins.

In addition, when the "time-saving state" and "probable win state" are adopted as states that make consecutive wins easier, and the special symbol variation count counter is used (for example, when the game state at the time of winning can be specified by the variation pattern selection mode), it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the time using only the special symbol variation count counter, without using the special symbol probability win count counter and the special symbol time-saving count counter. In other words, the special symbol variation count counter can be used as a common counter.

In addition, when the "time-saving state" and "high probability state" are adopted as states that facilitate consecutive wins, the INT extension judgment value (in this example, the start INT extension judgment value or the end INT extension judgment value described below) may be a common value in the high probability state and the time-saving state (the range of game numbers that constitute the extension target section is the same), but it is preferable that the INT extension judgment value referenced in the time-saving state is a larger value than the INT extension judgment value referenced in the high probability state (length of the extension target section in the time-saving state < length of the extension target section in the high probability state). This is because the high probability state has a higher degree of consecutive wins than the time-saving state, that is, it has a higher ball output speed performance (for example, see Figure 105 (E) described below).

Regarding the above-mentioned special chart stop game state (game state when a jackpot is won), in the special command transmission process (step S516 in FIG. 98, step S583 in FIG. 102) described later, when creating the "jackpot start command (when a jackpot starts)" or "jackpot end command (when a jackpot ends)" to be sent in response to an extension or normal time, data on the special chart stop game state is required (because the data is processed and used), so data for the special chart stop game state is stored in a specified RAM area in addition to the game state determination number YJ (step S498 in FIG. 101). Specifically, when a win is made in the normal state, "00H" is set as the winning data in the normal state, when a win is made in the time-saving state, "01H" is set as the winning data in the time-saving state, when a win is made in the potential state, "02H" is set as the winning data in the potential state, and when a win is made in the probability state, "03H" is set as the winning data in the probability state.

(In case of extension: processing route of steps S525 to S526)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 99, if the start INT extension judgment value is smaller than the special symbol probability change counter (remaining ST number of times) (step S521: NO), that is, if the start INT is extended, the second bit of the game state when the special symbol stops is turned ON (step S525). Specifically, as shown in Note 1 of FIG. 99, the second bit of the game state when the special symbol stops (00H to 03H of winning data in normal state to winning data in probability change state) when the symbol stops is turned ON, and converted to the data shown in Note (β) (04H to 07H). This converted data is used in the special command transmission process (step S516) described later.

Next, by referring to the "Special Power Start Time Table (FIG. 103 (B))" acquired in step S514, the INT data (240 seconds for the extension INT) corresponding to "FAN0" is acquired, and the INT data is set to the special symbol role operation timer (step S524). Here, in the case of extension, as in the case of normal time (non-extension), the special power start time offset table is not referenced, and the extension INT (extension start INT) is directly acquired from the special power start time table. In other words, data of the offset value "00H" is acquired. As shown in the figure, the INT data corresponding to the offset value "00H" is written in the top address (address (reference address) of the special power start time table) in the special power start time table, and in the case of extension, the INT data of the offset value "00H" is acquired, so that the data of the extension INT can be acquired without referring to the special power start time offset table (without acquiring the offset value each time). In this way, there is an advantage that the program capacity can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

Thus, once step S524 is completed, the interval time setting process is exited.

In this embodiment, when the INT is not extended, an interval time (normal INT) is selected according to the game state at the time of winning (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) and the type of winning (jackpot type), whereas when the INT is extended, an interval time (extended INT) can be selected regardless of the game state at the time of winning and the type of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the INT is not extended, an interval time (normal INT) is selected according to the game state at the time of winning and/or the type of winning, whereas when the INT is extended, an interval time (extended INT) can be selected regardless of the game state at the time of winning and/or the type of winning.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 98, once the interval time setting process (step S515) described above is completed, the special command transmission process is then executed (step S516).

(100. Special command transmission process: FIG. 100)
FIG. 100 shows the details of the special command transmission process (step S516). Here, the creation and transmission process of the jackpot start command to be transmitted in response to the extension or normal time is performed. The details will be described later, but at the end of the jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is consumed (see FIG. 102)), the command transmission process is executed, and the jackpot end command is created and transmitted.

In FIG. 100, the CPU 201 first creates a "jackpot state designation command" based on the special chart stop game state (step S527), and then transmits the created command to the performance control unit 24 (step S528). The jackpot state designation command here means a performance control command belonging to the "jackpot start command". The creation of the jackpot state designation command, as shown in the remarks 1 column of FIG. 100, obtains the special chart stop game state (see step S498 of FIG. 101, step S525 of FIG. 99, and remarks 1 column of FIG. 99), and creates a command corresponding to the special chart stop game state. Specifically, commands F400H to F407H corresponding to the special chart stop game state are created. The command created here includes information that can identify at least the game state at the time of winning and the presence or absence of an extension of the start INT (which may include information regarding the time of the start INT), but may also include information that can identify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) at the time of winning and/or information that can identify the type of jackpot won. That is, at least a command including information necessary to realize the winning performance during the current jackpot game can be configured to be sent to the performance control unit 24. Information such as game status information at the time of winning, whether or not there is an extension, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) at the time of winning, and the type of jackpot won this time may be included in one or more commands and sent to the performance control unit 24.

When the performance control unit 24 receives the jackpot start command, it determines the series of winning performances (opening performance, during-round performance, between-round interval performance, round end performance, ending performance, etc.) that will be deployed during this jackpot play (during the start INT, between round play (during between-round INT), during round play, during end INT, etc.), and starts the opening performance.

Next, the second bit of the special chart stop game state is cleared (step S529). As a result, as shown in the note 2 column in the figure, the special chart stop game state during extension (the special chart stop game state created in step S525 of FIG. 99 (the special chart stop game state with the second bit turned ON) is converted into data for the special chart stop game state during normal times (non-extension). By converting into data for the special chart stop game state during normal times, it becomes possible to easily create "commands related to no extension" when creating commands related to intervals that are not subject to extension in the first place (for example, an inter-round interval command related to an inter-round INT) or commands related to intervals that are not subject to extension because the extension condition is not met.

When the processing of step S529 above is completed, the special command transmission process is exited.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 98, when the special command transmission process (step S516) described above is completed, the reel continuous operation device operation flag is then set to the ON state (step S517). This allows continuous operation of the special electric reel (round play).

Next, the "gimmick activation start table (not shown)" is obtained (step S518). This gimmick activation start table specifies the maximum number of rounds and the round display LED according to the type of jackpot.

Next, the device operation start table is referenced to set the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been won this time (special symbol determination data) and data (round display LED number) for displaying the maximum number of rounds information on the round display LED (step S519).

When the above jackpot start processing is completed, the jackpot game and jackpot in-game performance will start, and when the start INT ends, depending on the processing state, the "special electric device operation start processing" of step S506, the "special electric device operation in progress processing" of step S507, the "special electric device operation continuation determination processing" of step S508, and the "jackpot end processing" of step S509 will be executed. Note that in this embodiment, the contents of the "special electric device operation start processing" of step S506, the "special electric device operation in progress processing" of step S507, and the "jackpot end processing" of step S509 are substantially the same as those described in the first embodiment. Therefore, the following explanation will focus on the "special electric device operation continuation determination processing" of step S508 in this embodiment.

(102. Special electric device operation continuation determination process: FIG. 102)
Next, the special electric role object operation continuation determination process (step S508) according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric role object operation continuation determination process in step S508.

In FIG. 102, the CPU 201 first judges whether the special symbol role operation timer is at zero (step S571). As already explained, the special symbol role operation timer is set to the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big prize opening is closed (see step S507 in the first embodiment). Until the special symbol role operation timer reaches zero (step S571: NO), the CPU 201 does nothing and exits the special electric role operation continuation judgment process.

When the special symbol device operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S571: YES), the value of the consecutive number counter is obtained to determine whether the current number of rounds is the maximum number of rounds (step S572).

(Processing during round continuation: steps S573 to S577)
If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the consecutive number counter is incremented by 1 (consecutive number counter+1) (step S573).

Next, the inter-round interval setting table is obtained (step S574), and the pre-opening interval time is obtained (step S575). In this "inter-round interval setting table", a "pre-opening interval time" associated with the special symbol determination data and the consecutive number counter is defined. Specifically, the pre-opening interval time is obtained according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the consecutive number counter (the consecutive number counter value after the addition process in step S573). In this embodiment, the pre-opening interval times set after each round of play are all set to the same time width (20 ms).

Next, the pre-opening interval time obtained from the round interval setting table is set in the special symbol device operation timer (step S576).

As already explained, the "inter-round interval time (inter-round INT)" between rounds consists of the above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms)" and the "pre-open interval time (20 ms)" from the time the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed until the next round starts. During the pre-open interval time, the special electric device operation flag is set to the OFF state (00H) in the processing of step S577 described below, and the above-mentioned large prize winning port is invalid. There is no particular limit to the pre-open interval time, but since it is set as the interval time between rounds including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment), if the time is extended to an extremely long time, for example, if the pre-open interval time is set to about several seconds, the waiting time between rounds will increase, giving the impression that the number of wasted balls will only increase, causing the player to feel distrustful. In particular, in a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 10R, the total waiting time between each round takes several tens of seconds to nearly one minute, which is not desirable. Therefore, in this embodiment, the INT between rounds is not extended, but the start INT and end INT are extended.

However, in the inter-round INT performance related to a specific round (for example, during the inter-round INT between the 6th and 7th rounds), for example, when a so-called "promotion performance (jackpot promotion performance)" is displayed, such as an announcement that the currently won jackpot is a sure-win jackpot while appearing as a time-limited jackpot, the promotion performance attracts the player's interest, so there are cases where extending the inter-round INT does not cause any problems. Also, in the case of a machine (for example, a so-called "type 1/type 2 mixed machine" or "V sure-win type") that has a large prize opening shape (internal structure, etc.) that allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball by moving the game ball that enters the large prize opening, the player's interest is attracted to the movement of the game ball, so there are cases where extending the inter-round INT does not cause any problems.

In this way, in cases where extending the INT between rounds does not cause players to feel distrustful, at least one of the "remaining ball discharge time" and "pre-open interval time" that make up the INT between rounds can be extended. For example, by using the same processing method as when extending the start INT described above, the pre-open interval time can be extended from 20 ms to 100 ms, or the remaining ball discharge time can be extended from 1980 ms to 5000 ms, and so on, making it possible to set an extended INT between rounds (extended INT between rounds) that is longer than the normal INT between rounds (normal INT between rounds) of 2000 ms (1980 ms + 20 ms).

In addition, when extending, the relationship between the remaining ball discharge time and the interval time before opening may be such that "remaining ball discharge time ≦ interval time before opening" or "remaining ball discharge time ≧ interval time before opening". For example, the remaining ball discharge time may be 2000 ms, the interval time before opening may be 500 ms, or the remaining ball discharge time may be 500 ms, the interval time before opening may be 1700 ms. In addition, the INT between rounds is not limited to a specific round (for example, the interval between the 6th round and the 7th round in the case of a 10R special jackpot), but may be extended between one or more rounds (for example, the interval between the 6th round and the 7th round, and the interval between the 9th round and the 10th round (final round)), or over all rounds. In addition, when extending multiple INTs between rounds, each INT between rounds may be a common extended INT between rounds (the same or approximately the same time), or may be a different extended INT between rounds. In addition, at least one of the multiple INTs between rounds may be a different extended INT between rounds.

Next, as a process for continuing the round of play, the special electric device operation flag is set to the OFF state (00H) and the special electric device operation status is switched to "operation start processing in progress (01H)" (step S577). This ends the special electric device operation continuation determination process.

(Processing at the end of a round: steps S579 to S584)
On the other hand, if the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the address of the "Special call end time offset table" shown in Figure 103 (C), the address of the "Special call start time table" shown in Figure 103 (D), and the extension judgment value for the end INT are sequentially obtained (steps S579 to S581), and then the interval time setting process is executed (step S582).

The interval time setting process in step 582 differs only in the tables (FIGS. 103(C) and 103(D)) used to set the end INT, and the basic content is the same as the "interval time setting process (step S515)" described in the jackpot start process in FIG. 98. In other words, the interval time setting process (step S515) in FIG. 98 and the interval time setting process (step S582) in FIG. 102 are configured as a common processing module.

In the interval time setting process in step S582, a determination is made as to whether or not to extend the end INT. If it is extended, the end INT for extension (extended end INT) is set as the end INT. If it is not extended, the end INT for normal use (normal end INT) is set.

(99. Interval Time Setting Process (At the End of a Big Win (At the End of the Maximum Number of Rounds)): FIG. 99)
Referring to FIG. 99, the CPU 201 first judges whether the extension judgment value for the end INT acquired in step S581 is greater than the value of the special symbol probability change counter (remaining ST number) (step S521). The extension judgment value for the end INT is a judgment value for judging whether the end INT is extended or not, and in this embodiment, if the judgment value is greater than the special symbol probability change counter (remaining ST number), "normal INT for the end INT" is selected, and if it is smaller, "extended INT for the end INT" is selected. Here, since the case where the end INT is extended when the number of winning games during the probability change state (ST number 100 times) is within 60 games (second extension condition) is handled, "40 times" is set as the extension judgment value for the end INT. In detail, the extension judgment value for the end INT may be set to a value calculated from "ST number X times - branching game number Y of whether or not extension is possible" in the same manner as the calculation method of the extension judgment value for the start INT. In this example, since we are dealing with a case where the end INT is extended when the number of winning games is within 60 games, the extension judgment value for the end INT is set to "40 times", which is "ST number of 100 times - branching game number of 60 times".

[Modifications]
Here, as a condition for determining whether or not to extend the INT (in this example, the start INT or end INT), it has been explained that the determination of whether or not to extend is based on the value of the counter related to the special symbol (in this example, the special symbol count probability change counter), that is, the number of games executed for the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 under the easy consecutive win condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configurations (Extend 1) to (Extend 1) can be adopted. The INT to be extended can be one or more INTs.

(Variation 1: Case in which the number of games of the special symbol variation display game is considered as an extension condition (a condition for determining whether or not to extend))
(Extension 1) In the present embodiment, the total number of times the special symbol change display games 1 and 2 are executed (the total number of symbol changes in the special symbols 1 and 2) is counted based on the information, but the present invention is not limited to this. The possibility of extension may be determined based on the number of games executed in either the special symbol change display games 1 and 2. For example, in consideration of the fact that a game situation favors right-handed players under a state where consecutive wins are easy, the possibility of extension may be determined based on the number of games executed in the special symbol change display game 2 (the number of games executed on the special symbol 2 side). Specifically, if the number of games executed in the special symbol change display game 2 is within a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of games executed on the special symbol 2 side is within 30 games), the INT can be extended.

(Modification 2: Case in which an event other than the number of executed games of the special symbol variation display game is considered as an extension condition)
(Extension 2) The number of times the normal symbol variation display game is executed may be considered as an extension condition. That is, the configuration may be such that whether or not the extension is possible is determined based on the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is executed during the consecutive win easy state, among the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game. For example, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the extension is possible if the number of times the normal symbol variation display game is executed during the consecutive win easy state is within 1 to 50 games.
(Comparison 3) Unlike the above (Comparison 2), the number of times the special symbol change display game and the normal symbol change display game are executed may be considered as an extension condition. That is, the configuration can be made such that the possibility of extension can be determined based on the number of times the special symbol change display game and the normal symbol change display game are executed during the easy consecutive win state. For example, the configuration can be made such that it is determined that extension is possible if the total number of times the special symbol change display game and the normal symbol change display game are executed during the easy consecutive win state is within 1 to 50 games and a jackpot is won. The special symbol change display game can be at least one of the special symbol change display games 1 and 2.

(The case where the number of games that trigger a transition to a gaming state is the condition for determining whether or not to extend the game (extension condition))
(Extension 4) After a jackpot game, if the first easy consecutive win state is entered, and the number of games played during the first easy consecutive win state reaches a specific number of games without winning a jackpot, the second easy consecutive win state is entered. In this case, the specific game number, which is the number of games that triggers the transition from the first easy consecutive win state to the second easy consecutive win state, may be determined as the extension condition target section (in this case, the extension target section for only one game). For example, if the game is entered into a probability variable state with 100 ST times after a jackpot game, and the ST times are consumed, the next game and thereafter (after the 101st spin) are entered into a potential probability state, the 100th game (the final game at which the electric support state ends) at which the probability variable state is entered into the potential probability state can be determined as the extension target section. Note that the transition from the probability variable state to the potential probability state is not limited to the transition from the probability variable state to the potential probability state, and the probability variable state may be entered into a time-saving state. In this case, the final game at which the high probability state ends is the extension target section. In addition, one or more extension target sections may be provided within a specific number of games (within 100 ST spins).

(Falling lottery type)
(Extension 5) After a jackpot is played, the player is transferred to a first state where consecutive wins are easy (for example, a sure-win state), and a predetermined drop-out lottery is held each time the game is played. If the drop-out lottery is won, the player is transferred to a second state where consecutive wins are easy (for example, a potential win state or a time-saving state). The period until the drop-out lottery is won may be the extension target section.

(When no extension is required: Processing route of steps S522 to S524)
If the extension judgment value for the end INT is greater than the special pattern probability change count counter (remaining ST count) (step S521: YES), in other words, if the end INT is not extended, the "special power end time offset table (Figure 103 (C))" obtained in step S513 is referred to to obtain an offset value corresponding to the type of jackpot won this time (special pattern judgment data type) and the game state at the time of that win (special pattern stop game state) (step S522), and then the "special power end time table (Figure 103 (D))" obtained in step S514 is referred to to obtain the end INT corresponding to the offset value (step S523).

For example, if the jackpot won this time is a "10R special jackpot" and the special symbol stop game state is a "special symbol state," then "02H" is selected as the offset value, and the INT data (normal INT of 60 seconds (60,000 ms/4 ms)) corresponding to "END2" in the special symbol start time table is obtained. The obtained INT data (60 seconds) is then set in the special symbol role operation timer (step S524). Note that the method for obtaining the end INT is essentially the same as the method for obtaining the start INT, and the details will be omitted to avoid duplication.

(In case of extension: processing route of steps S525 to S526)
On the other hand, if the extension judgment value for the end INT is smaller than the special symbol probability change counter (remaining ST number of times) (step S521: NO), that is, if the end INT is extended, the second bit of the game state when the special symbol is stopped is turned ON (step S525). This conversion data is used in the subsequent special command transmission process (step S583).

Next, by referring to the "Special Call End Time Table (Figure 103 (D))" acquired in step S580, the INT data corresponding to "END0" (extension INT of 180 seconds) is acquired, and the INT data is set in the special symbol role operation timer (step S524). When the processing of step S524 is completed, the interval time setting processing related to the end INT is exited.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102, after the above-mentioned interval time setting process (step S582) is completed, the special command transmission process is then executed (step S583). Here, a "jackpot end command" to be sent in response to an extension or normal time is created and transmitted. Note that the content of the special command transmission process of step S583 is substantially the same as the "special command transmission process (step S516)" described in the jackpot start process of FIG. 98. In other words, the special command transmission process (step S516) of FIG. 98 and the special command transmission process (step S583) of FIG. 102 are configured as a common processing module.

Referring to FIG. 100, a "jackpot end command" is created as a "jackpot state designation command" here. For example, commands F500H to F507H (not shown) are created in response to the special chart stop game state. The jackpot end command created here includes information that can identify at least the game state at the time of winning and whether or not the end INT is extended (may include information regarding the time of the end INT), just like the jackpot start command, but may also include information that can identify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) at the time of winning and/or information that can identify the type of jackpot that was won. In addition, information such as the game state information at the time of winning, whether or not the game is extended, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) at the time of winning, and the type of jackpot that was won may be included in one or more commands and sent to the performance control unit 24.

Next, the second bit of the special chart stop game status is cleared (step S529), and the special command transmission process is exited.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102, when the above-mentioned special command transmission process (step S583) is completed, the special electric device operation flag is set to the OFF state (00H) as the process at the end of the round continuation, and the special electric device operation status is switched to "End processing in progress (04H)" (step S584). This ends the special electric device operation continuation determination process.

(Modifications of the special call start time table and the special call end time table)
In the above embodiment, the special call start time table (FIG. 103(B)) and the special call end time table (FIG. 103(D)) are described as an example in which time data for extension (time data for extended INT (data for extended INT)) and time data for non-extension (time data for normal INT (data for normal INT)) are defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the table configurations shown in (T1) to (T6) below may be used.

(T1) An extension time table that defines time data for extension and a non-extension time table that defines time data for non-extension may be provided separately, and the INT time data may be obtained from these tables and set in the special symbol device operation timer.
(T2) In addition, the above-mentioned extension time table may be configured so that a plurality of extension time data are set, and different extension time data can be selected (obtained) according to the type of winning jackpot (special symbol determination data type). For example, the above-mentioned extension time table may be configured so that the extension time data is set to 240 seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds, and 240 seconds is selected for a 10R variable jackpot, 180 seconds for a 4R variable jackpot, and 120 seconds for a 4R time-saving jackpot. It should be noted that, instead of selecting different extension time data for each jackpot, it may be configured so that common extension time data can be selected for at least some jackpots. For example, 240 seconds is selected for a 0R variable jackpot, and 120 seconds is selected for a 4R variable jackpot and a 4R time-saving jackpot. In addition, different time data for extension may be selected (obtained) according to the game state at the time of winning, not the type of the big win (special symbol determination data type), or different time data for extension may be selected (obtained) according to the game state to which the game is transferred after the big win. In addition, the game state at the time of winning may be the internal game state (YJ) or the game mode (at least the game state determined by the type of the variable pattern selection mode).
(T3) The above-mentioned extension time table may be configured to have a plurality of extension time data, and may be configured to be able to select different extension time data according to the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of the win. For example, the above-mentioned extension time table may have the extension time data of 240 seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds, and in the case of a 10R probability jackpot and the game state at the time of the win is a probability jackpot, 240 seconds is selected, and in the case of a 10R probability jackpot and the game state at the time of the win is a time-saving state, 180 seconds is selected. The game state at the time of the win may be an internal game state (YJ), a game mode (a game state determined by at least the type of the variation pattern selection mode), or a game state to which the game is transferred after the jackpot game.
(T4) The extension time table may be configured so that a plurality of extension time data are set, and different extension time data can be selected at least according to the number of winning games (the number of variations at the time of winning). For example, the extension time table may be configured so that 240 seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds are set for the extension time data, and 240 seconds is selected when the first game is won, 180 seconds is selected when the game is won within 2 to 10 games, and 120 seconds is selected when the game is won within 11 to 50 games. In addition, the range of winning games that is the extension target section may be a specific one game, or may be a number of games. In addition, different extension data may be selected according to the type of jackpot and the number of winning games. In this case, even if the number of winning games is the same, different extension time data can be selected for a 10R probability jackpot and a 4R probability jackpot. In addition, even if the same jackpot is won, different extension time data can be selected according to the number of winning games.
(T5) When there are multiple INTs to be extended, it is possible to provide an extension time table corresponding to each INT.
(T6) When there are multiple INTs to be extended, a common extension time table for each INT can be provided. Also, a common non-extension time table for each INT can be provided.

The above describes specific example 1 shown in Figure 104 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be configured as in specific examples 2 to 7 below. Note that the non-easy consecutive win state is at least the normal state (in the case of this embodiment, in addition to the normal state, it includes the support time-saving state or the ceiling time-saving state), and details are omitted here.

(Specific example 2: FIG. 104 (b))
FIG. 104(b) shows a second specific example of this embodiment.

Like Specific Example 1 above, Specific Example 2 illustrates a case where there is a game interval in which multiple INTs are extended (a case where there is an overlapping extended interval in which at least both the first INT and the second INT are extended), but Specific Example 2 differs from Specific Example 1 in that there is an interval in which only the start INT (first INT) is extended, in that such an interval does not exist. As can be seen from Figures (B) and (A), in the case of this example (Figure (B)), an extended interval of 1 to 10 games (first extension condition) is set as the interval in which only the start INT (first INT) is extended, but in Specific Example 1 shown in Figure (A), such an extended interval does not exist. In this example, if the number of winning games is between 1 and 10 games (first extension condition), only the "start INT (first INT)" is extended, if the number of winning games is between 11 and 50 games (second extension condition), the "start INT and end INT (first INT and second INT)" are extended, and if the number of winning games is between 50 and 60 games (third extension condition), only the "end INT (second INT)" is extended.

(Specific example 3: FIG. 104 (c))
FIG. 104(c) shows a third specific example of this embodiment.

This specific example 3 illustrates a case where there is only one overlapping extension period in which multiple INTs are extended. In this example, if the number of winning games is within 1 to 50 games (first extension condition), only the start INT (first INT) is extended, if the number of winning games is 50 games (second extension condition), the start INT and end INT (first INT and second INT) are extended, and if the number of winning games is within 51 to 60 games (third extension condition), only the end INT (second INT) is extended. In other words, if a win is won at a specific game number (here, the 50th game, which is half the number of STs), the start INT and end INT are extended. Note that, considering the need to suppress the ball output speed during consecutive wins, the specific game number is preferably a relatively early game number, for example, any of the 1st to 9th games (a range of single-digit game numbers), and more preferably, the 1st game.

(Example 4: FIG. 105 (D))
FIG. 105(d) shows a fourth specific example of this embodiment.

This specific example 4 illustrates a case where there is no overlapping extension interval in which multiple INTs are extended. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above specific examples 1 to 3 in which there are overlapping extension intervals. In this example, as shown in the figure, when the number of winning games is within 1 to 30 games (first extension condition), only the "start INT (first INT)" is extended, and when the number of winning games is within 31 to 60 games (second extension condition), only the "end INT (second INT)" is extended. In this example, the extension interval of the start INT (first INT) and the extension interval of the end INT (second INT) are independent game intervals, and it is clearly distinguished which INT is extended depending on the number of games executed during the easy consecutive win state. In addition, when the extension interval of the start INT and the extension interval of the end INT are viewed as a whole, the overall extension interval is a continuous interval of 1 to 60 games. However, this is not limited to the above, and there may be intermittent extension periods, specifically, an extension period, a non-extension period, and another extension period, with a non-extension period intervening between one extension period and another. For example, games 1 to 20 are an extension period with a start INT, games 21 to 24 are a non-extension period, and games 25 to 40 are an extension period with an end INT.

(Specific example 5: FIG. 105 (E))
FIG. 105 (E) shows a specific example 5 of this embodiment. This specific example 5 illustrates a case where there are multiple consecutive wins. Here, a representative case is shown in which there are multiple consecutive wins (for example, a probability change state and a time-saving state) in the case of specific example 4 (FIG. 105 (D)), and an extension target section is provided for each of them.

Referring to FIG. 105 (E), in the case of the high probability state, as in the above specific example 4, if the number of winning games is within 1 to 30 games (first extension condition), only the "start INT (first INT)" is extended, and if the number of winning games is within 31 to 60 games (second extension condition), only the "end INT (second INT)" is extended. On the other hand, in the case of the time-saving state, the extension period is shorter than in the high probability state, and in the illustrated example, if the number of winning games is within 1 to 20 games (third extension condition), only the "start INT (first INT)" is extended, and if the number of winning games is within 21 to 30 games (fourth extension condition), only the "end INT (second INT)" is extended.

In addition, in this example (specific example 5), as can be seen from the illustration, the extension target period for the time-saving state (1 to 30 games) is shorter than the extension target period for the special state (1 to 60 games). The reason for this is as follows.

Both the time-saving state and the special probability state are "game states with electric support states", but in terms of the probability of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is a low probability state, while the special probability state is a high probability state. Therefore, consecutive wins are less likely to occur during the time-saving state than during the special probability state, meaning that the ball output speed performance is relatively lower than in the special probability state. For this reason, in the special probability state, where the ball output speed performance is high, there are relatively more opportunities for extension, and in the time-saving state, where the ball output speed performance is lower than in the special probability state, there are relatively fewer opportunities for extension. In other words, the consecutive win play period during the special probability state (or the average jackpot play period) is made longer than the consecutive win play period during the time-saving state, suppressing extreme upward fluctuations in the ball output speed performance during the special probability state, making it easier to comply with the model test.

Also, from the perspective of suppressing the ball dispense speed, it is preferable to set the extended INT (in this example, the extended start INT and/or extended end INT) so that the time-saving state is shorter than the special probability state. For example, if the extended start INT for the time-saving state is "X1 (seconds)" and the extended start INT for the special probability state is "X2 (seconds)", it is preferable to satisfy the relationship "X1 < X2" (the same applies to the extended end INT). This is particularly suitable when a common extended period (a common range of game numbers to be extended) is set for the special probability state and the time-saving state.

In addition, the total time of the extended INT in the special bonus state (in this example, "start extended INT + end extended INT") may be relatively shorter than the total time of the extended INT in the time-saving state. This is also suitable when a common extended period (a common range of game numbers to be extended) is set for the special bonus state and the time-saving state.

The average extended INT per game in the high probability state may be shorter than the average extended INT per game in the time-saving state. This is particularly suitable when different extended periods (extended game number ranges) are set for the high probability state and the time-saving state.

In this example, the same INT is subject to extension regardless of the state in which consecutive wins are likely, but this is not limited to the above, and all or part of the INT to be extended can be different depending on the state in which consecutive wins are likely. For example, in the high probability state, only the start INT is subject to extension, and in the time-saving state, only the end INT is subject to extension (a case in which all the extension targets are different), or in the high probability state, the start INT and end INT are subject to extension, and in the time-saving state, only the end INT is subject to extension (a case in which some of the extension targets are different), etc.

(Preferred embodiment of specific example 5)
This example (specific example 5) can be configured as shown in (Arrow 1) to (Arrow 4) below.
(Arrow 1) The extension target section is common during the high probability state (first easy consecutive win state) and the time-saving state (second easy consecutive win state). For example, the extension target section of the start INT (first INT) in the high probability state is 1 to 30G, and the extension target section of the start INT (first INT) in the time-saving state is 1 to 30G, etc. If there are multiple INTs to be extended, the extension target section of each INT is common during the high probability state and the time-saving state. For example, the extension target section of the start INT in the high probability state is 1 to 30G, and the extension target section of the end INT (second INT) is 31 to 60G, and the extension target section of the start INT in the time-saving state is 1 to 30G, and the extension target section of the end INT (second INT) is 31 to 60G, etc.
(Arrow 2) The extension target interval is different during the probability change state and the time-saving state. For example, the extension target interval of the start INT in the probability change state is 1 to 30G, and the extension target interval of the start INT in the time-saving state is 1 to 20G, etc. (see FIG. 105 (E)). If there are multiple INTs to be extended, the extension target interval of each INT is different during the probability change state and the time-saving state. For example, the extension target interval of the start INT in the probability change state is 1 to 30G, and the extension target interval of the end INT is 31 to 60G, and the extension target interval of the start INT in the time-saving state is 1 to 20G, and the extension target interval of the end INT is 21 to 30G, etc. (see FIG. 105 (E)).
(Arrow 3) In the special state and/or the time-saving state, there are multiple sections that are eligible for extension (see Figure 105 (E)).
(Arrow 4) In the above (Arrow 1) to (Arrow 3), the number of games in the extension target section is less than the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state. For example, the number of ST times in the probability change state is 100 times, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state is 70 times, and the extension target section is 1 to 60G, etc. (the relationship satisfies "extension target section X < time-saving times Y").

The case where there are multiple states where consecutive wins are possible, as described in this example (specific example 5), can also be applied to specific examples 1 to 4 and specific examples 6 and 7 (Figure 106) described below.

(Specific examples 6-7: Figure 106)
Also, as shown in Fig. 106(f) and (g), the extension target section may be divided into a plurality of sections, for example, a first half section and a second half section, and a different extension INT may be set for each section. Hereinafter, Fig. 106(f) is referred to as "Specific Example 7", and Fig. 106(g) is referred to as "Specific Example 6". In order to facilitate understanding of the illustrated examples, Specific Example 7 will be described first. Note that the dashed line portion in the figure shows, as a comparative example, a case where the number of winning games is within 1 to 50, that is, the extension target section is not divided into a plurality of sections, and a common (same) extension INT (for example, extension start INT) is set throughout the entire extension target section.

(Example 7: Figure 100 (F))
Referring to FIG. 106(f), this example (specific example 7) shows a case where only a certain INT can be extended. Here, as a representative, a case where the extension target section of the start INT is divided into a plurality of sections is shown with respect to specific example 1 of FIG. 104(a). That is, the start INT extension sections A1 and A2 shown in the figure are both extension target sections of the start INT. In this example, when the "start INT extension section A1 (first half section)" is won within 1 to 10 games, the extension start INT is set to 180 seconds, and when the "start INT extension section A2 (second half section)" is won within 11 to 50 games, the extension start INT is set to 120 seconds, which is shorter than the first half section. The reason for making the extension INT different between the first half section and the second half section is as follows.

Considering that the smaller the number of winning games (especially single-digit games less than 10 games), the faster the ball output speed during consecutive wins, it is preferable to set the extended INT for a section with a shorter number of games. For example, in the case of this example (specific example 6 or specific example 7), the extended INT is set to be longer in the first section than in the second section. Specifically, if the extended INT for the first section is "X seconds" and the extended INT for the second section is "Y seconds", the relationship "Y < X" is satisfied. Note that, as in specific example 6 shown in the same figure (G) described later, when there are multiple INTs to be extended, this example can be applied to at least one INT. For example, the extended section of the start INT can be divided into multiple sections, and each section can have a different extended INT (for example, the first section = extended start INT of 180 seconds, the second section = extended start INT of 120 seconds), while the extended INT can be not divided into multiple sections, but can have a common extended INT (all sections = extended end INT of 60 seconds).

In addition, the first half section (start INT extension section A1) and the second half section (start INT extension section A2) may have the same number of games (for example, 1-30G and 31-60G) (first half section = second half section), or may have different numbers of games as shown (first half section ≠ second half section. In the illustrated example, the relationship is "first half section < second half section"). If the above-mentioned extension INT "X seconds" of the first half section and the extension INT "Y seconds" of the second half section satisfy the relationship "Y < X", it is preferable to set the number of games in the extension section to "first half section < second half section". If the number of games with a relatively long extension INT is set to a long period, the ball output speed performance during consecutive wins can be suppressed, but on the other hand, if the number of games is increased unnecessarily, it may give the player a feeling of sluggishness. Therefore, from the viewpoint of suppressing the ball output speed and suppressing the decline in the player's interest in the game, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned "first half section < second half section".

(Specific example 6: Fig. 100 (G))
104(g), in a configuration in which multiple INTs can be extended, the extension target section of each INT is divided into multiple sections, as in the above-mentioned specific example 7. Here, a representative case is shown in which the extension target section is divided into multiple sections, in contrast to specific example 1 in FIG. 104(a). In other words, the start INT extension sections A1 and A2 shown in the figure are both extension target sections of the start INT, and the end INT extension sections B1 and B2 are both extension target sections of the end INT. The relationship between the end INT extension section B1 and the end INT extension section B2 in this specific example 6 is the same phenomenon as the relationship between the start INT extension section A1 and the start INT extension section A2 in the above-mentioned specific example 7.

The sixth embodiment includes the following configuration.
(A) There are multiple sections that are eligible for extension.
(B) The extended time is different when a jackpot is won in the first extension target section (first extension condition) and when a jackpot is won in the second extension target section (second extension condition) (the extended INT under the first extension condition is different from the extended INT under the second extension condition).
(C) The INT to be extended is different when a jackpot is won in the first extension target section (first extension condition) and when a jackpot is won in the second extension target section (second extension condition).

The start INT extension period A1 and the end INT extension period B1 may be a common extension target period (the range of the number of games to be extended is the same) as shown in the figure, or may be different extension target periods (the range of the number of games to be extended is different) (see Note 3 in the figure). Also, the start INT extension period A2 and the end INT extension period B2 may be a common extension target period or may be different extension target periods (see Note 4 in the figure).

(Various configuration examples: Figs. 107 to 109)
In the above-mentioned Figures 104 to 106, matters related to the extension of the start INT and the end INT have been described. Here, as shown in Figures 107 to 109, if the extension section of the start INT (the extension section of the first INT) and the extension section of the end INT (the extension section of the second INT) in Figures 104 to 106 are respectively designated as INT extension section A and INT extension section B, each of the above-mentioned concrete examples 1 to 7 can be configured as follows. Note that, in the concrete examples 6 and 7 shown in Figures 106(f) and (g), due to the configuration, the extension sections belonging to the INT extension section A are represented as "INT extension section A1, INT extension section A2", and the extension sections belonging to the INT extension section B are represented as "INT extension section B1, INT extension section B2".

<Extended INT types: (Kichi 1-1) ~ (Kichi 1-2)>
(Yoshi 1-1) At least one of the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT can be adopted as the INT to be extended in the INT extension period section A or the INT extension period section B.
(Yoshi 1-2) The INT to be extended in the INT extension period section A and the INT to be extended in the INT extension period section B are different INTs.
(1-3) It is possible to provide either the INT extension period section A or the INT extension period section B. In this case, it is the same as the specific example 7 explained in FIG. 106(F), that is, the case where there is one INT extension period.

<About the time span of the extended INT: (Kichi 2-1) ~ (Kichi 2-7)>
(Yoshi 2-1) Regarding the time width of the extended INT, it can be set as "extended INT of INT extended section A = extended INT of INT extended section B".
(Yoshi 2-2) It can also be set as "extension INT of INT extension section A < extension INT of INT extension section B".
(Yoshi 2-3) It is also possible to make it so that "the extension INT of INT extension section A > the extension INT of INT extension section B".
(Good luck 2-4) The overtime INTs of (Good luck 2-1) to (Good luck 2-3) above may be considered as the "average overtime INT per game."
(Yoshi 2-5) When extending at least one of the start INT, the round INT, and the end INT, you can set the extended INT to the normal INT plus a specified extension time. For example, if you set the start INT to be extended, and the normal start INT is set to "X (seconds)" and the extension time to "A (seconds)",
(α)) Extension start INT = "X + A"
That is, when the INT is extended, the normal INT is added with a predetermined extension time to calculate the extended INT, and the calculated INT is set.
(Yoshi 2-6) When extending at least two INTs, the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT, each extension amount can be set to a common extension time (the same or approximately the same extension time). For example, when the start INT and the end INT are the extension targets, if the normal start INT is "X (seconds), the end start INT is "Y (seconds)", and the extension time for the normal INT is "A (seconds)",
(α) Extension start INT = "X + A"
(β) Extension end INT = "Y + A"
That is, when each INT is extended, the extended INT is calculated by adding a common extension time to each normal INT, and the extended INT is set.
(Yoshi 2-7) When extending at least two INTs, the start INT, the inter-round INT, and the end INT, the extension width for each can be set to a different extension time. For example, when the start INT and the end INT are extended, if the normal start INT is set to "X (seconds)" and the end start INT is set to "Y (seconds),
(α) Extension start INT = "X + A1"
(β) Extension end INT = "Y + A2"
That is, when each INT is extended, a different extension time is added to each normal INT to calculate the extended INT, and this is set. In this example, when the start INT is extended, the extended start INT is calculated by adding a first extension time A1 to the normal start INT, and when the end INT is extended, the extended end INT is calculated by adding a second extension time A2 different from the first extension time A1 to the normal end INT.

<Length of the extension target section: (Kichi 3-1) ~ (Kichi 3-3)>
(Yoshi 3-1) Regarding the length of the section to be extended, it can be set as "INT extension section A = INT extension section B".
(Yoshi 3-2) Also, it can be set to "INT extension section A < INT extension section B".
(Yoshi 3-3) Also, it is possible to make it so that "INT extension section A>INT extension section B".

<About the extension target section: (Kichi 4-1) ~ (Kichi 4-2)>
(Yoshi 4-1) Regarding the number of games in the extension subject section, the INT extension section (A, B, A1, A2, B1, B2: Figures 107 to 100P) can be set to one or more games.
(Kichi 4-2) The number of games in the extension target section can be set to the same number as the maximum reserved memory number of special chart 1 and special chart 2 (8 in this example), or the same number as the maximum reserved memory number of either special chart 1 or special chart 2 (4 in this example) (reserved memory number target extension section). In this case, when a so-called "reserved consecutive win" occurs, the ball output speed performance during consecutive wins can be reduced. In addition, when determining multiple extension target sections including at least the reserved memory number target extension section of this example, if the extension INT of the reserved memory number target extension section is "H (seconds)" and the extension INT of the other extended target sections is "J (seconds)", it is preferable to have a relationship of "J <H". In this way, a relatively long extension INT can be set at the timing of the reserved consecutive win, which is the timing when the ball output speed can be increased the most. This can contribute to a significant decrease in the ball output speed performance.

<About the relationship between the jackpot type and the extended INT: (Kichi 5-1) ~ (Kichi 5-3)>
[Set the same extended INT regardless of the type of jackpot]
(Kichi 5-1) The same time span of the extended INT may be set regardless of the type of the jackpot. For example, when setting the extended start INT, it is configured to be set to 240 seconds (for example, the extended INT for FAN0 in FIG. 103(B)) regardless of whether the jackpot is a 10R variable jackpot, a 4R variable jackpot, or a 4R time-limited jackpot.

[Extended INT is set according to the type of jackpot]
(Kichi 5-2) Unlike the above (Kichi 5-1), it may be configured to set an extended INT of a different time width at least depending on the type of jackpot (configuration that allows selection from multiple types of extended INT depending on the type of jackpot: see (Te2) above). In this case, it may be configured to set a different extended INT for each jackpot, or to set a common extended INT for some jackpots. In the case of setting a different extended INT for each jackpot, for example, when setting the extended start INT, if the jackpot won is a 10R variable jackpot, it is configured to be set to 240 seconds, if it is a 4R variable jackpot, it is configured to be set to 180 seconds, and if it is a 4R time-saving jackpot, it is configured to be set to 120 seconds. In the case where a different extended INT is set for a part of each jackpot, in other words, in the case where at least one of the multiple types of jackpots is set to an extended INT different from the other jackpots, if the jackpot won is a 10R variable jackpot or a 4R variable jackpot, it can be configured to be set to 240 seconds, and if it is a 4R time-saving jackpot, it can be configured to be set to 120 seconds. In addition, in the case where a different extended INT can be set according to the type of jackpot, it is preferable to set the extended INT to be longer for the jackpot type with a relatively higher profit state (advantage degree). For example, if there is a 10R variable jackpot and a 4R variable jackpot, the former, which has a larger maximum number of rounds, has a higher profit state, so that a relatively longer extended INT is set when the 10R variable jackpot is won than when the 4R variable jackpot is won. In addition, detailed explanations are omitted to avoid duplication, but the above configurations (te3) to (te6) may be used to select (obtain) the desired extended INT.

[About non-extension jackpots]
(Good 5-3) At least one of the multiple types of jackpots does not have an extension target section (hereinafter, a jackpot without an extension target section is referred to as a "non-extension jackpot"). In other words, one or more jackpots that do not extend the INT at all can be provided. Since the jackpot game period is not extended, this non-extension jackpot is preferably one of the following (None 1) to (None 6).
(None 1) Of the multiple types of jackpots, a non-extended jackpot is a jackpot other than the jackpot with the greatest number of rounds.
(No 2) Of the multiple types of jackpots, a no-extension jackpot is the jackpot with the smallest maximum number of rounds.
(No 3) Among the multiple types of jackpots, a non-extended jackpot is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds that is less than half the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot with the most.
(No 4) Of the multiple types of jackpots, a non-extended jackpot is a jackpot other than the jackpot with the maximum profit state.
(No. 5) Of the multiple types of jackpots, a no-extension jackpot is the jackpot with the least profitable state.
(No. 6) In addition, the "profit state" in (No. 4) or (No. 5) above can include the profit obtained during the jackpot game, as well as the profit state of the game state to which the game is transferred after the jackpot game. The "game state to which the game is transferred after the jackpot game" includes the four states of the probability variable state, the time-saving state, the potential probability state, and the normal state, as well as the number of ST times if the probability variable state or the potential probability state, and the number of time-saving times if the time-saving state. For example, even if it is the same time-saving jackpot, the magnitude relationship of the profit state between the time-saving jackpot A that grants 100 time-saving times and the time-saving jackpot B that grants 50 time-saving times is "time-saving jackpot B < time-saving jackpot A". In addition, the magnitude relationship of the time-saving state, the potential probability state, and the probability variable state is "time-saving state < potential probability state < probability variable state" (for example, if there is a probability variable jackpot and a time-saving jackpot, the non-extension jackpot is on the time-saving jackpot side). In addition, for game states involving electric support states, the profit state of normal electric open play can be taken into consideration. For example, if there are time-saving jackpots A and B that provide the same number of time-saving times, there are cases where time-saving jackpots A will create a more profitable electric support state for normal electric open play than time-saving jackpots B. In such cases, the magnitude relationship of the profit state will be "time-saving jackpot B < time-saving jackpot A". In this case, the target of the non-extension jackpot will be the time-saving jackpot B side.

"Specific examples of the above (No. 6): (No. 6-1) to (No. 6-2)"
(No 6-1) Of the multiple types of jackpots that include at least a time-saving jackpot and a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state (a "probable jackpot" and/or a "latent jackpot"), the non-extension jackpot is a time-saving jackpot. In addition, if there are multiple types of time-saving jackpots, the above-mentioned (No 1) to (No 5) "jackpots (excluding the wording "non-extension jackpot")" can be read as "time-saving jackpots". For example, when adopting the configuration of (No 1), among the multiple types of "time-saving jackpots", the non-extension jackpot can be a "time-saving jackpot" other than the "time-saving jackpot" with the greatest number of maximum rounds.
(No 6-2) Among the multiple types of jackpots including at least a normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to the normal state) and a jackpot that triggers a transition to a game state with an electric support state (a sure-win jackpot and/or a time-limited jackpot), the non-extension jackpot is a normal jackpot. Or, among the multiple types of jackpots including at least a normal jackpot (a jackpot that triggers a transition to the normal state) and a jackpot that triggers a transition to a game state with a high probability state, the non-extension jackpot is a normal jackpot. In addition, if there are multiple types of normal jackpots, the above-mentioned (No 1) to (No 5) "jackpots (excluding the wording "non-extension jackpot")" can be read as "normal jackpots". For example, when the configuration of (No 1) is adopted, among the multiple types of "normal jackpots", the non-extension jackpot can be a "normal jackpot" other than the "normal jackpot" with the greatest number of rounds.

<About the relationship between the easy consecutive win state type, easy consecutive win state and extended INT: (Kichi 6-1) to (Kichi 6-9)>
[About the types of consecutive wins: (Good luck 6-1)]
(Kichi 6-1) As the easy consecutive win state, at least one of the game states of the probability change state, the time-saving state, and the potential probability state can be adopted. As the easy consecutive win state, the normal state may be adopted exceptionally. For example, when the easy consecutive win state is changed to the normal state, the extension target section can be within a predetermined number of games in the normal state (for example, four times the maximum reserved memory number).

[Extended INT according to the type of consecutive wins: (Kichi 6-2) to (Kichi 6-9)]
(Kichi 6-2) When there are multiple types of consecutive winning conditions, the extended INT can be made a common (same) time regardless of the type of consecutive winning conditions.
(Kichi 6-3) When there are multiple types of consecutive wins, the extended INT can be set to different times depending on the type of consecutive wins. For example, as explained in FIG. 105 (E), if the extended INT of the time-saving state is set to "X (seconds)" and the extended INT of the probability change state is set to "X (seconds)", it can be configured to satisfy the relationship of "X <X".
(Kichi 6-4) The extended INT may be the same length when winning during the INT extension period A during the first easy consecutive win state (for example, a special state) and when winning during the INT extension period A during the second easy consecutive win state (for example, a time-saving state).
(Kichi 6-5) Unlike the above-mentioned (Kichi 6-4), the extended INT may be set to a different time when winning in the INT extension period A during the first easy consecutive win state (e.g., a special win state) and when winning in the INT extension period A during the second easy consecutive win state (e.g., a time-saving state).
(Good luck 6-6) The extended INT may be a common (same) time when winning in the INT extension period B during the first easy consecutive win state (for example, a special state) and when winning in the INT extension period B during the second easy consecutive win state (for example, a time-saving state).
(Kichi 6-7) Unlike the above-mentioned (Kichi 6-6), the extended INT may be set to a different time when winning in the INT extension period B during the first easy consecutive win state (e.g., a special win state) and when winning in the INT extension period B during the second easy consecutive win state (e.g., a time-saving state).
(Good luck 6-8) The extended INT may be the same (common) time when winning in the INT extension period B during the first easy consecutive win state (for example, a special state) and when winning in the INT extension period A during the second easy consecutive win state (for example, a time-saving state).
(Kichi 6-9) Unlike the above-mentioned (Kichi 6-8), the extended INT may be set to a different time when winning in the INT extension period B during the first easy consecutive win state (e.g., a special state) and when winning in the INT extension period A during the second easy consecutive win state (e.g., a time-saving state).

<Regarding the fluctuation pattern selection mode for the extension target section>
Next, the variation pattern selection mode related to the extension target section and the non-extension target section of each of the concrete examples 1 to 7 will be described with reference to Figs. 107 to 109. In this embodiment, since a special game section called the INT extension target period is provided, for example, a different configuration can be formed from the form in which a different variation pattern selection mode is selected according to the number of consecutive wins described in the first embodiment, or the form in which a different variation pattern selection mode is selected according to the number of time-saving times. Hereinafter, the configuration of the variation pattern selection mode related to this embodiment (fourth embodiment) will be described. As already described, the INT is extended on the condition that a jackpot is won during the easy consecutive win state, so the variation pattern selection mode related to the extension target section is a variation pattern selection mode related to the internal game state being a time-saving state, a probability change state, or a potential state, or a variation pattern selection mode related to the game mode related to these game states (time-saving mode, probability change mode, potential mode).

[Example 1: FIG. 107(a)]
Concrete example 1 of FIG. 107(A) can be configured as follows (Kichi 7-1) to (Kichi 7-3). In FIG. 107(A), the section of the third variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section.

(Yoshi 7-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the overlapping extension target section (1-50G) where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, and the section (51-60G) where only the INT extension section B exists. Note that the meaning of "different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected" not only includes the meaning of "different variation patterns can be selected" and/or "different effects can be produced", but also includes the meaning of being able to transition from the current game mode to a different game mode (same below).
(Yoshi 7-2) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the second fluctuation pattern selection mode are common (identical) fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G). Also, different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G) and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G). Of course, the meaning of "being able to select a common fluctuation pattern distribution table" can include the meaning of "being able to select the same fluctuation pattern" and/or "being able to produce the same performance" (the same applies below).
(Yoshi 7-3) The overlapping extension target section (1 to 50G) is set as a common fluctuation pattern selection mode (the first fluctuation pattern selection mode shown in the figure). In this case, different fluctuation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the overlapping extension target section and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G).

[Example 2: FIG. 107(b)]
Concrete example 2 of FIG. 107(B) can be configured as follows (Kichi 8-1) to (Kichi 8-6). In FIG. 107(B), the section of the fourth variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section.

(Yoshi 8-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode, the second variation pattern selection mode, and the third variation pattern selection mode are each different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the overlapping extension target section (11-50G) where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, the section (1-10G) only for the INT extension section A, and the section (for example, 51-60G) only for the INT extension section B.
(Yoshi 8-2) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode, the second fluctuation pattern selection mode, and the third fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G). Also, different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected for the extension target section (1 to 60G) and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G).
(Yoshi 8-3) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected for the overlapping extension target section (11-50G) where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, and the section (1-10G) where only the INT extension section A exists.
(Yoshi 8-4) At least the second variation pattern selection mode and the third variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected for the overlapping extension target section (11-50G) where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, and the section (51-60G) where only the INT extension section B exists.
(Yoshi 8-5) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the third variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the overlapping extension target section (11-50G) and the extension target section excluding the overlapping extension target section (1-10G and 51-60G).
(Yoshi 8-6) The overlapping extension target section (11 to 50G) is set to a common fluctuation pattern selection mode (the second fluctuation pattern selection mode shown in the figure). In this case, different fluctuation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the overlapping extension target section and other periods.

[Example 3: FIG. 107(C)]
Concrete example 3 of FIG. 107(H) can be configured as follows (Kichi 9-1) to (Kichi 9-3). In FIG. 107(H), the section of the third variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section.

(Yoshi 9-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this example, the overlapping extension target section where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, which is a section limited to one game of 50G in this example, is the first variation pattern selection mode. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the section (1 to 49G) only of the INT extension section A and the overlapping extension target section (limited to one game of 50G in this example) where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, and the section (51 to 60G) only of the INT extension section B.
(Yoshi 9-2) In the overlapping extension target section where at least the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap, in this example, only one game of 50G, a variation pattern selection mode different from other sections is performed. In this case, in a specific game of overlapping extension target, a variation pattern allocation table different from other sections can be selected. For example, a special performance can be performed only for one game.
(Yoshi 9-3) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the second fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G). Also, different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected for the extension target section (1 to 60G) and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G).

[Example 4: FIG. 108(d)]
Concrete example 4 of FIG. 108 (iv) can be configured as follows (Yoshi 10-1) to (Yoshi 10-2). In FIG. 108 (iv), the section of the third variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section. Also, as already explained, this example is a form in which there is no overlapping extension target section where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap.

(Kichi 10-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the INT extension section A (1 to 30G) and the INT extension section B (31 to 60G).
(Yoshi 10-2) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the second fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G). Also, different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected for the extension target section (1 to 60G) and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G).

[Example 5: FIG. 108(E)]
Concrete example 5 of Fig. 108 (E) can be configured as follows (Kichi 11-1) to (Kichi 11-8). In Fig. 108 (E), the sections of the third variation pattern selection mode and the sixth variation pattern selection mode are non-extension target sections. As already explained, this example is a form in which there is no overlapping extension target section where the INT extension section A and the INT extension section B overlap.

(Kichi 11-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the INT extension section A (1-30G) of the first consecutive win easy state and the INT extension section B (31-60G) of the same consecutive win easy state.
(Kichi 11-2) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the second fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of the "first common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern allocation table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G) of the first consecutive win easy state. Also, in the first consecutive win easy state, different fluctuation pattern allocation tables can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 60G) and the non-extension target period (61 to 100G).
(Kichi 11-3) At least the fourth variation pattern selection mode and the fifth variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the INT extension section A (1-20G) of the second consecutive win easy state and the INT extension section B (21-30G) of the same consecutive win easy state.
(Kichi 11-4) At least the fourth variation pattern selection mode and the fifth variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes (see the description of the "second common variation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 30G) in the second consecutive win easy state. Also, in the second consecutive win easy state, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected in the extension target section (1 to 30G) and the non-extension target period (31 to 100G).
(Kichi 11-5) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the fourth variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected for the INT extension section A (1-30G) of the first consecutive win easy state and the INT extension section A (1-20G) of the second consecutive win easy state. For example, the background image is different between the extension section of the start INT in the probability variable state and the extension section of the start INT in the time-saving state, but a common variation pattern can be selected for the variation pattern.
(Kichi 11-6) At least the second variation pattern selection mode and the fifth variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected for the INT extension section B (31-60G) of the first consecutive win easy state and the INT extension section B (21-30G) of the second consecutive win easy state. For example, the background image is different between the extension section of the end INT in the probability change state and the extension section of the end INT in the time-saving state, but a common variation pattern can be selected for the variation pattern.
(Kichi 11-7) At least the first common variation pattern selection mode and the second common variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the extension target section (1 to 60G) of the first consecutive win easy state and the extension target section (1 to 30G) of the second consecutive win easy state.
(Kichi 11-8) At least the first common variation pattern selection mode and the second common variation pattern selection mode are common variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected in the extension target section (1-60G) of the first easy consecutive win state and the extension target section (1-30G) of the second easy consecutive win state.

[Example 7: FIG. 109(F)]
Concrete example 7 of FIG. 109(F) can be configured as follows (Kichi 12-1) to (Kichi 12-2). In FIG. 109(F), the section of the fourth variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section.

(Kichi 12-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the INT extension section A1 (1-10G) and the INT extension section A2 (11-50G).
(Yoshi 12-2) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the second fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table can be selected in the extension target sections A1 and A2 (1-50G). Also, different fluctuation pattern distribution tables can be selected in the extension target sections A1 and A2 (1-50G) and the non-extension target period (51-100G).

[Example 6: FIG. 109 (G)]
Concrete example 6 of FIG. 109 (G) can be configured as follows (Kichi 13-1) to (Kichi 13-4). In FIG. 109 (G), the section of the fourth variation pattern selection mode is a non-extension target section.

(Kichi 13-1) At least the first variation pattern selection mode, the second variation pattern selection mode, and the third variation pattern selection mode are each different variation pattern selection modes. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the first overlapping extension target section (1-10G) where the INT extension section A1 and the INT extension section B1 overlap, the second overlapping extension target section (11-50G) where the INT extension section A2 and the INT extension section B2 overlap, and the section (51-60G) where only the INT extension section B2 exists.
(Kichi 13-2) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are common (identical) variation pattern selection modes. In this case, a common variation pattern allocation table can be selected for the first overlapping extension target section (1-10G) and the second overlapping extension target section (11-50G).
(Kichi 13-3) At least the first variation pattern selection mode and the second variation pattern selection mode are common (identical) variation pattern selection modes, and the third variation pattern selection mode is a different variation pattern selection mode. In this case, different variation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the first overlapping extension target section and the second overlapping extension target section (1-50G) and the section (51-60G) of only the INT extension section B2.
(Yoshi 13-4) At least the first fluctuation pattern selection mode and the fifth fluctuation pattern selection mode are common fluctuation pattern selection modes (see the description of "common fluctuation pattern selection mode" in the figure). In this case, a common fluctuation pattern allocation table can be selected for the first overlapping extension target section (1-10G), the second overlapping extension target section (11-50G), and the section (51-60G) that is the INT extension target section B2 only, that is, the extension target section. Also, different fluctuation pattern allocation tables can be selected for the extension target section (1-60G) and the non-extension target period (61-100G).

[Other embodiments related to the variation pattern selection mode]
(Good luck 14) When the consecutive wins are in a time-saving state, the extension target section can be set to the special time-saving mode, and the non-extension target section can be shifted to time-saving mode 1 (see FIG. 7B). In this embodiment, since the maximum time-saving number of times granted by the time-saving big hit is 100 times, if the extension target section is within 100G, the section other than the extension target section can be shifted to time-saving mode 1. In this case, the special time-saving mode and the time-saving mode 1 may be a common variation pattern selection mode, or different variation pattern selection modes.
(Good luck 15) When the consecutive win easy state is a probability variable state, the extension target section can be shifted to the special probability variable mode, and the non-extension target section can be shifted to probability variable modes 1 to 3 (see FIG. 7A) according to the number of consecutive wins. In this embodiment, since the number of STs granted by the probability variable jackpot is 100 times, if the extension target section exists within 100G, the section other than the extension target section can be shifted to one of probability variable modes 1 to 3 according to the number of consecutive wins. In this case, the special probability variable mode may be a variation pattern selection mode common to any of probability variable modes 1 to 3, or may be a variation pattern selection mode different from any of probability variable modes 1 to 3.

(Good luck 16) If the average fluctuation time of the winning fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern distribution table in the extension target section is "T (seconds)" and the average fluctuation time (average fluctuation time per game) of the winning fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern distribution table in the non-extension target section is "M (seconds)", "T=M" or "T>M" may be used, but "T<M" is preferable. In the extension target section, a big win game in which INT is extended is executed, and if the execution time of the pattern fluctuation display game is unnecessarily long, it may give the player a strong feeling of sluggishness. On the other hand, in the non-extension target section, a big win game in which INT is not extended is executed, so even if the execution time of the pattern fluctuation display game is relatively long, the above-mentioned problem is unlikely to occur.
(Kichi 17) If the average fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern allocation table in the extension target section is "F (seconds)" and the average fluctuation time of the miss fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern allocation table in the non-extension target section is "G (seconds)", it may be "F <G","F>G", or "F = G". From the viewpoint of suppressing the ball output speed by utilizing the miss time, it is preferable to set it to "F >G".

<About the possibility of playing jackpot games during consecutive wins>
(Kichi 18) After the first jackpot game, the game is shifted to a state where consecutive wins are easy, and if a jackpot is won in the extension target section during the easy jackpot game (if the first consecutive win occurs), the INT is not extended for the first jackpot game, and after the first consecutive win game, the game is shifted to a state where consecutive wins are easy again (a state where consecutive wins are easy for the second time) and if a jackpot is won in the extension target section during the easy jackpot game (if the second consecutive win occurs), the INT to be extended is extended for the second jackpot game. In other words, the first consecutive win game is prohibited from extending the INT (a normal jackpot game is executed), and from the second time onwards, the extension of the INT is permitted (a jackpot game with an extended INT is executed). This is because the more consecutive wins occur, the faster the ball output speed increases.

<About the performance during consecutive big wins>
The jackpot mid-effects related to consecutive jackpot play (jackpot mid-effects related to jackpot play in the case of an extended jackpot play) can be configured as follows (Wind 1) to (Wind 8).

(Wind 1) The effects that occur during an INT when it is not extended (normal INT effects) are different from the effects that occur during that INT when it is extended (extended INT effects). For example, taking the opening effect for the start INT as an example, the opening effect A for the extended start INT and the opening effect B for the normal start INT can be at least partially different effects. As already explained, the effects that occur during an INT are "opening effects (start INT effects)", "end INT effects" and "inter-round INT effects" for the start INT, end INT effects, and inter-round INT effects, respectively.
(Wind 2) The extended INT performance can be configured to execute a performance for the extended portion (additional performance) after executing the normal INT performance. Specifically, "normal INT performance + additional performance = extended INT performance". For example, when executing an opening performance A related to the extended start INT, the additional performance is executed after executing an opening performance B related to the normal start INT. In this case, it is possible to make some common performances appear between the extended INT performance and the normal INT performance.
(Wind 3-1) It is preferable that the additional effects described above include at least a movable body effect, because humans are more likely to be attracted to three-dimensional objects than two-dimensional objects.
(Wind 3-2) It is preferable that the additional effects described above are effects that include at least a player-participation type effect. This is because a player-participation effect is suitable for preventing the player from feeling that the game is tedious.
(Wind 4-1) The performance during a jackpot when an extended INT is set and the performance during a jackpot when an extended INT is not set can have a common performance pattern, at least for the ``right hit instruction performance'' executed during the start INT.
(Wind 4-2) In the jackpot performance when the extended INT is set and in the jackpot performance when the extended INT is not set, at least the notification performance that notifies the degree of advantage of the jackpot game or the notification performance that notifies information related to the jackpot type (hereinafter, these notification performances are abbreviated as "jackpot type information notification performances"). For example, in the case of a 10R sure-variable jackpot, "Big Bonus!", and in the case of a 4R time-limited jackpot, "Regular Bonus!", the notification performance is a performance that notifies information related to the jackpot type that was won.
(Wind 4-3) In the start INT performance (opening performance), if a predetermined pre-start performance can be executed before the right-hit instruction performance (here, the performance instructing the player to aim for the big prize opening) and the start INT is extended, an extended pre-start performance in which the performance time of the pre-start performance is extended may be configured to be executable. The content of the extended pre-start performance may be a performance that can give the player a sense of tension or elation. For example, if the current jackpot is a 10R sure-win jackpot, a certain time after the start of the pre-start performance is displayed as "Regular Bonus (4R time-shortened jackpot)!", but after the certain time has elapsed, a special performance is executed in which the content of the jackpot is stepped up (ranked up), such as "Big Bonus (10R sure-win jackpot)! Congratulations!", to entertain the player. In addition, it is preferable that the special performance is a player-participation type performance. In addition, if a special performance can be executed even when the extension is not performed, the performance time of the special performance may be extended during the extension. Even if the duration of such a special effect is extended, it is unlikely that the player will feel dragged out because the content of the effect can give the player a sense of tension and excitement. Also, the special effect may not be executed if the effect is not extended, and may be executed only if the effect is extended.
(Wind 4-4) Also, if the presentation executed during extension is substantially the same as that executed when there is no extension (meaning that the presentation style is substantially the same, not that the presentation time is substantially the same), the presentation content will be the same, but the execution time of some of the animation displays (for example, the display time of the announcement of the degree of advantage of the jackpot game or the announcement of the type of jackpot game, and the display time of various effects) will show an extended presentation, which will appear to be the same at first glance, but by lengthening the execution time, an extended jackpot game will be executed.
(Wind 5) A plurality of easy-to-win consecutive states including at least a first easy-to-win consecutive state (for example, a sure-win state) and a second easy-to-win consecutive state (for example, a time-saving state) are controllable, and an extension target section is provided in which a predetermined INT (one or more INTs) is extended in the first easy-to-win consecutive state and the second easy-to-win consecutive state (for example, see FIG. 105 (E) and FIG. 108 (E)). The first jackpot performance when the jackpot A is won during the first easy-to-win consecutive state and the extended INT is set, and the second jackpot performance when the jackpot A is won during the second easy-to-win consecutive state and the extended INT are set, are at least partially different performances. Note that, when the first jackpot performance is executed, an additional performance A is used, and when the second jackpot performance is executed, an additional performance B different from the additional performance A is used, so that at least the jackpot performance mode other than the additional performance is common.
(Wind 6) Display of pattern variation during a state where consecutive wins are easy During a game, a specific presentation that notifies information about the conditions for extending INT (extension conditions) can be made executable. For example, "If you win a jackpot within the next XX games (extension condition information), a premium character will appear!", "If you win within the next XX number of games (extension condition information), you will see a different jackpot presentation than usual!", etc.
(Wind 7) When the consecutive win easy state is in the time-saving state, for example, the extension target section can be shifted to the special time-saving mode, and the non-extension target section can be shifted to the time-saving mode 1 (see FIG. 7B). In this embodiment, since the maximum number of time-saving times granted by the time-saving jackpot is 100, if the extension target section is within 100G, the section other than the extension target section can be shifted to the time-saving mode 1. In this case, the special time-saving mode and the time-saving mode 1 may be common fluctuation pattern selection modes, or different fluctuation pattern selection modes.
(Wind 8) The performance executed in response to the winning fluctuation pattern related to the extension target section (hereinafter referred to as "extension target section winning performance") can be a performance form that is related to the content of the jackpot performance. Here, "related" means a story-like relationship, or a relationship that reminds, associates, or gives rise to an idea of a certain thing or event when the winning performance is seen during a specific period. In addition, the related performance can be made to appear during a specified period during the reach performance in the extension target section winning performance, during the winning/losing notification after the reach performance ends, during the performance related to the period from the end of the reach performance to the start of the jackpot game, etc.

A configuration may be made by combining one or more of all of the embodiments described above (including all of the various configurations and variations described in each embodiment), and the contents described in each embodiment are not limited to only the individual embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, a pinball game machine that uses game balls as the game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to pinball games. For example, it may be an arrange ball game machine or a mahjong ball game machine, or it may be a game machine that uses game medals as another game medium (a reel game machine) or a managed game machine that uses an electromagnetic recording means to manage the game medium.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a Game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24. Performance control unit (performance control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 Dispensing control board,
34, 34a Upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a normal pattern start port, normal pattern start port sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary pattern display device,
50, 52a Large prize opening, large prize opening sensor 41, 41c Normal variable prize device, normal electric role solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable prize device, large prize port solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display devices, decorative lamps, speakers,
49 Outlet,
94 Setting key switch,
95 Setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 performance control CPU, performance control ROM, performance control RAM.

Claims (1)

A symbol display means configured to be capable of displaying symbols in a stopped manner in accordance with a game result;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance;
A special electric device configured to open and close the big prize opening,
A gaming machine capable of controlling a winning state of opening and closing the big prize opening,
A first specific state to which the player can transition via the hit state;
A second specific state to which the vehicle can transition without passing through the hit state,
When the winning state is controlled, the symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a first specific display mode,
When controlled to the second specific state, the symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a second specific display mode different from the first specific display mode,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice,
When the second specific state occurs , the read-ahead notice may be restricted so as not to be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images